MSC Nastran 2012 Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User's Guide

MSC Nastran 2012
Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600)

Users Guide
MD R2 Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) Users Guide
Main Index
Worldwide Web
www.mscsoftware.com
Disclaimer
MSC.Software Corporation reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document
without prior notice.
The concepts, methods, and examples presented in this text are for illustrative and educational purposes only, and are not intended to
be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or design. MSC.Software Corporation assumes no liability or
responsibility to any person or company for direct or indirect damages resulting from the use of any information contained herein.
User Documentation: Copyright
2011 MSC.Software Corporation. Printed in U.S.A. All Rights Reserved.
This notice shall be marked on any reproduction of this documentation, in whole or in part. Any reproduction or distribution of this
document, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of MSC.Software Corporation is prohibited.
This software may contain certain third-party software that is protected by copyright and licensed from MSC.Software suppliers.
MSC, MD, Dytran, Marc, MSC Nastran, MSC Nastran, MSC Patran, MD Patran, OpenFSI, the MSC.Software corporate logo, and
Simulating Reality are trademarks or registered trademarks of the MSC.Software Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
NASTRAN is a registered trademark of NASA. PAMCRASH is a trademark or registered trademark of ESI Group. SAMCEF is a
trademark or registered trademark of Samtech SA. LS-DYNA is a trademark or registered trademark of Livermore Software Technology
Corporation. ANSYS is a registered trademark of SAS IP, Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of ANSYS Inc. ABAQUS is a registered
trademark of ABAQUS Inc. All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective owners. PCGLSS 6.0,
Copyright 1992-2005, Computational Applications and System Integration Inc. All rights reserved. PCGLSS 6.0 is licensed from
Computational Applications and System Integration Inc. METIS is copyrighted by the regents of the University of Minnesota. A copy of
the METIS product documentation is included with this installation. Please see "A Fast and High Quality Multilevel Scheme for
Partitioning Irregular Graphs". George Karypis and Vipin Kumar. SIAM Journal on Scientific Computing, Vol. 20, No. 1, pp. 359-392,
1999.
Revision 0. March 28, 2011
NA*2012*Z*INON*Z*DC-USR
Corporate Europe Asia Pacific
MSC.Software Corporation
2 MacArthur Place
Santa Ana, CA 92707
Telephone: (800) 345-2078
FAX: (714) 784-4056
MSC.Software GmbH
Am Moosfeld 13
81829 Munich
GERMANY
Telephone: (49) (89) 43 19 87 0
Fax: (49) (89) 43 61 71 6
Asia Pacific
MSC.Software Japan Ltd.
Shinjuku First West 8F
23-7 Nishi Shinjuku
1-Chome, Shinjuku-Ku
Tokyo 160-0023, JAPAN
Telephone: 0120-924-832 (toll
free, Japan only)
Mobile phone: 03-6911-1222
Fax: (81) (3)-6911-1201
Main Index
Cont ent s
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) Users Guide
1 Introduction
MSC.Software Products 2
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) 3
Defining the Model 3
Nonlinear Analysis 4
Results 5
Feature List 7
How SOL 600 Solves Nonlinear Problems 10
This Users Guide 12
Other MSC Nastran Documentation for SOL 600 12
Marc Documentation 12
Patran Documentation 13
2 MSC Nastran Bulk Data File and Results Files
The MSC Nastran Bulk Data File 16
Input Conventions 17
Defaults 18
Section Descriptions 18
Example 19
Running Existing Nonlinear Models 20
SOL 600 Executive Control Statement: 20
Restart from SOL 600 into SOL 103 or into Another Linear Solution Sequence
24
Generating and Editing the Bulk Data File in Patran 25
Output Requests 26
Deformations 26
Grid Point Force Balance and Element Strain Energy 35
Results Files 40
Files Generated During the Analysis 40
Analysis Results Files 40
Postprocessing with Patran 41
Main Index

iv
3 Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
Introduction 44
Linear Static Analysis Procedure 45
Differences Between Linear and Nonlinear Analysis 46
Applying Constraints 48
Single Degrees of Freedom 48
Multiple Degrees of Freedom 48
Adding Nonlinear Effects 53
Sources of Nonlinearity 53
Subcases, Load Increments, and Iterations 54
Nonlinear Equation Solution 55
SOL 600 Analysis Procedure 57
Numerical Methods in Solving Equations 58
Direct Methods 58
Iterative Methods 59
Preconditioners 59
Storage Methods 60
Nonsymmetric Systems 61
Specifying the Solution Procedure 61
Other Factors Affecting Performance 61
Iteration Methods 63
Full Newton-Raphson Algorithm 63
Modified Newton-Raphson Algorithm 64
Strain Correction Method 65
The Secant Method 66
Specifying the Iteration Method 67
Load Increment Size 68
Fixed Load Incrementation 68
Adaptive Load (AUTO) Incrementation 68
Specifying the Load Incrementation Method 77
Convergence Controls 78
Specifying Convergence Criteria 80
Singularity Ratio 81
Guidelines for Analysis Methods 83
Analysis Methods 83
General Tips 83
Main Index
v CONTENTS
Choosing a Solution Method 84
Time Steps or Load Increments 84
Nonlinear Dynamics 85
Efficiency 85
4 Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
Linear and Nonlinear Analysis 88
Linear Analysis 88
Nonlinear Analysis 88
Nonlinear Effects and Formulations 90
Geometric Nonlinearities 93
Material Nonlinearities 102
Nonlinear Boundary Conditions 111
Overview of Analysis Types 112
Static Analysis 114
Post-Buckling 115
Creep, Viscoplastic, and Viscoelastic Behavior 115
Body Approach 116
Buckling Analysis 117
Eigenvalue Buckling Prediction 117
Bifurcation Approach 118
Eigenvalue Extraction Methods 119
Normal Modes 120
Eigenvalue Analysis 122
Free Vibration Analysis 125
Support of Complex Eigenvalue Analysis 126
Transient Dynamic Analysis 128
Direct Transient Response 128
Technical Background 130
Time Step Definition 134
Initial Conditions 134
Damping 135
Creep 136
Main Index

vi
5 Analysis Techniques
Domain Decomposition 140
Specifying Domain Decomposition 140
Single Input File Parallel Processing for SOL 600 142
DDM Results in Patran 142
DDM Configuration 142
RESTARTS 144
Specifying Restarts and Parameters 144
Inertia Relief with Auto-Support 145
Review 145
General Formulation 146
SUPORT6 Entry 147
Superelements and Modal Neutral Files 149
BRKSQL 150
User Subroutine Support 154
6 Modeling
Coordinate Systems 156
Nodal Coordinate Systems 156
Element Coordinate Systems 156
Nodes 158
Elements 159
Modeling in Patran 161
Creating Geometry in Patran 161
Creating Finite Element Meshes in Patran 163
7 Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
Solution Type 166
Specifying the Solution Type 166
SOL 600 Executive Control Statement 166
Defining the Solution Type in Patran 166
Analysis Procedures 168
Analysis Types 168
Specifying the Analysis Type for a Subcase 169
Main Index
vii CONTENTS
Translation Parameters 172
Specifying the Translation Parameters 172
Solution Parameters 175
Specifying Solution Parameters 175
Subcases 178
Specifying Subcases 178
Subcase Parameters 181
Specifying Static Subcase Parameters 181
Specifying Normal Modes Subcase Parameters 183
Specifying Buckling Subcase Parameters 185
Specifying Transient Dynamic Subcase Parameters 186
Specifying Creep Subcase Parameters 188
Specifying Body Approach Subcase Parameters 190
Execution Procedure for MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear from the
Command Line 192
Using Patran to Execute MSC Nastran 193
How to Tell When the Analysis is Done 193
How to Tell if the Analysis Ran Successfully 194
Monitoring the Analysis 195
Editing a MSC Nastran Input File 196
Debugging the Analysis 197
Resolving Convergence Problems 197
Standard Exit Messages 203
Using Patran to Debug an Analysis 206
8 Output from the Analysis
Overview 210
Input 210
.OP2 Data 210
Output Requests 212
Specifying Output Requests 212
SOL 600 Results Quantities 220
Using Patran to Postprocess Results Quantities 223
MSC Nastran Results Quantities 225
Using Patran to Postprocess MSC Nastran Results Quantities 225
Main Index

viii
9 Assigned Conditions
Constraints 230
Multi-Point Constraints 230
Support Conditions 240
Loads and Boundary Conditions 242
Using Patran to Apply Loads and Boundary Conditions 244
Displacement LBCs 247
Force LBCs 248
Pressure LBCs 249
Temperature LBCs 251
Inertial Loads LBCs 254
Velocity LBCs 255
Acceleration LBCs 255
Distributed Load LBCs 256
Total Load LBCs 258
Contact LBCs 259
Initial Displacement LBCs 260
Initial Velocity LBCs 260
10 Materials
Overview 264
Constitutive Models 265
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear Material Entries 266
Linear Elastic 268
Isotropic Materials 269
Orthotropic Materials 270
Anisotropic Materials 272
Nonlinear Elastic 273
Hypoelastic - Isotropic 273
Hyperelastic - Isotropic 273
Viscoelastic 300
Narayanaswamy Model 309
Inelastic 312
Yield Conditions 313
Work Hardening Rules 318
Flow Rules 322
Rate Dependent Yield 325
Main Index
ix CONTENTS
Experimental Stress-Strain Curves 327
Temperature-Dependent Behavior 336
Temperature-Dependent Stress Strain Curves 337
Specifying Elastoplastic Material Entries 339
Failure and Damage Models 344
Isotropic/Orthotropic/Anisotropic Failure Models 344
Damage Models 354
Creep 363
Oak Ridge National Laboratory Laws 366
Viscoplasticity (Explicit Formulation) 367
Creep (Implicit Formulation) 367
Specifying Creep Material Entries 368
Composite 370
Specifying Composite Material Entries 371
Gasket 373
Specifying Gasket Material Entries 377
Material Damping 379
Specifying Material Damping Entries 379
Experimental Data Fitting 381
11 Element Library
Overview 402
Element Types 402
Element Selection 404
Element Interpolation 404
Element Integration 404
Incompressible Elements 405
Overriding MSC Nastran Element Selections 405
Global Element Controls 406
Assumed Strain 406
Constant Dilatation 406
Setting Global Element Parameters in Patran 406
Mass Elements, Springs, Dampers, and Connector Elements 407
Patran FE Application Input Data 407
Gap Elements 409
Main Index

x
Line Elements 410
Membranes, Panels, and Shells 411
Solid Elements 413
Axisymmetric Elements 414
Plane Strain Elements 414
3-D Solid Elements 415
Beam/Bar and Shell Offsets 417
12 Contact
Overview 420
Contact Methodology 421
Contact Bodies 421
Numerical Procedures 430
Implementation of Constraints 434
Separation 436
Higher Order Elements 437
3-D Beam and Shell Contact 437
Friction Modeling 438
Defining Contact Bodies 447
Deformable and Rigid Surfaces 447
Motion of Surfaces 447
Cautions 448
Control Variables and Option Flags 448
Time Step Control 449
Dynamic Contact - Impact 449
Two-dimensional Rigid Surfaces 449
Specifying Contact Body Entries 462
Selecting and Controlling Contact Behavior 467
Contact Parameters 467
Contact Table 472
Movement of Contact Bodies 476
Heat Transfer and Thermal Contact 479
Heat Transfer Examples 481
Main Index
xi CONTENTS
References 482
13 SOL 600 Example Problems
Introduction 484
Engine Gasket Under Bolt Preload 485
Problem Statement 485
Model Description 486
Solving the Problem 488
Inspecting the Results 492
Elastic-Plastic Collapse of a Cylindrical Pipe under External Rigid Body
Loading 494
Rubber Door Seal - Performance Door Closing 503
Brake Forming 509
Panel Buckling 514
Index 519
Main Index

xii
Main Index
Chapter 1: Introduction
1
Introduction
MSC.Software Products
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600)
Feature List
How SOL 600 Solves Nonlinear Problems
This Users Guide

Main Index
2
MSC.Software Corporation provides an extensive array of software products that make it possible to
simulate almost any engineered component with any level of detail you require. MSC is recognized as a
leader in finite element analysis software with a product list that includes MSC Nastran, Patran, Marc,
Dytran and many others. Each of these codes within themselves are powerful general-purpose analysis
codes that can be used to solve structural, heat transfer, and coupled thermal-structural finite element
problems. When paired together and supplemented with special purpose application modules and
interfaces these software products can be tailor made to suit specific industries and engineering problems
unique to those industries.
To keep this users guide to a reasonable size, complete descriptions of all the MSC Nastran Bulk Data
entries and Case Control commands have not been included. A brief description of the input format is
given for entries and commands when it is helpful to understand the material., also in many cases the
Patran interface is used to describe the input. You should consult the MSC Nastran Quick Reference
Guide for detailed descriptions of MSC Nastran input formats, many have direct links.
This guide contains many highlighted links (in blue) to other MSC Nastran documents and all the
documents were delivered together as a collection. If you keep the collection together the links between
documents will work. Two suggestions when working with links are 1) alt returns you back in the
window your mouse is in and 2) you can open the other linked to document in a new window from an
Adobe Reader by unselecting the checkbox Edit Preferences Documents Open cross-document
links in the same window and select OK.
Main Index
3
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) is an application module in the MSC Nastran system that
pairs the full features of MSC Nastran with the Marc solver to analyze a wide variety of structural
problems subjected to geometric and material nonlinearities, and contact. An extensive finite element
library for building your simulation model, and a set of solution procedures for the nonlinear analysis,
which can handle very large matrix equations, are available in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
(SOL 600).
Defining the Model
A finite element model consists of a geometric description, which is given by the elements and their
nodes and a set of properties associated with the elements, describing their attributes. These properties
include material definitions, cross-section definitions in the case of structural elements like beams and
shells, and other parameters for contact bodies, springs, dashpots, etc. There may also be constraints that
must be included in the model - RBE elements, or multi-point constraints'' or equations'' (linear or
nonlinear equations involving several of the fundamental solution variables in the model), or simple
boundary conditions'' that are to be imposed throughout the analysis. Nonzero initial conditions, such
as initial temperatures, displacements, velocities, and even initial stresses and/or plastic strains may also
be specified.
The model is described and communicated to MSC Nastran in the form of a text file, called a MSC
Nastran Input file. You can generate this file using any text editor, but it must adhere to MSC Nastran
conventions for the ordering and format of the model information.
Using Patran with SOL 600
The amount of information that needs to be conveyed in the MSC Nastran Input file is extensive for even
a modest size model. The amount of information and the complexity of most models makes it virtually
impossible to generate the MSC Nastran Input file with a text editor alone. Typically you benefit from
using a preprocessor such as, Patran. Patran is another MSC Software simulation code that provides a
graphical user interface and an extensive line of model building tools that you can use to construct and
view your model, and generate a MSC Nastran Input file.
If you are using Patran as a preprocessor, you are required to specify an analysis code. Selecting MSC
Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) as the analysis code under the Analysis Preference menu,
customizes Patran in five main areas:
Material Library
Element Library
Loads and Boundary Conditions
MPCs
Analysis forms
Main Index
4
The analysis preference also specifies that the model information be output in the MSC Nastran Input
File format.
Throughout this Users Guide, actual examples are described in the context of using Patran. Actual Patran
forms and instructions are provided.
Nonlinear Analysis
Linear analysis assumes a linear relationship between the load applied to a structure and the response of
the structure. The stiffness of a structure in a linear analysis does not change depending on its previous
state. Linear static problems are solved in one step, by a single decomposition of the stiffness matrix. A
number of important assumptions and limitations are inherent in linear static analysis. Materials behavior
is such that the stress is directly proportional to strain (linear) and to loads that do not take the material
beyond its permanent yield point (the material remains elastic). Linear analysis is restricted to small
displacements, otherwise the stiffness of the structures changes and must be accounted for by
regenerating the stiffness matrix. Lastly, loads are assumed to be applied slowly as to keep the structure
in equilibrium.
It becomes necessary to consider nonlinear effects in structures when modeling materials with nonlinear
behavior and where large deformations (rotations and/or strains) occur. In addition, contact problems
exhibit nonlinear effects due to changes in boundary conditions.
In a nonlinear problem the stiffness of the structure depends on the displacement and the response is no
longer a linear function of the load applied. As the structure displaces due to loading, the stiffness
changes, and as the stiffness changes the structures response changes. As a result, nonlinear problems
require incremental solution schemes that divide the problem up into steps calculating the displacement,
then updating the stiffness. Each step uses the results from the previous step as a starting point. As a result
the stiffness matrix must be generated and decomposed many times during the analysis adding time and
costs to the analysis.
Nonlinear problems present many challenges. A nonlinear problem does not always have a unique
solution. Sometimes a nonlinear problem does not have any solution, although the problem can seem to
be defined correctly.
Nonlinear analysis requires choosing a solution strategy which includes dividing the loading into logical
steps, controlling the numerical processing, and planning for the possibility of changing the solution
strategy during the analysis using restarts. Which solution method to use depends on the structure itself,
the nature of the loading, and the anticipated nonlinear behavior. In some cases, one method can be
advantageous over another; in other cases, the converse might be true.
If a solution is obtainable, there is also the issue of efficiency. Each solution procedure, has pros and cons
in terms of matrix operations and storage requirements. In addition, a very important variable regarding
overall efficiency is the size of the problem. The time required to assemble a stiffness matrix, as well as
the time required to recover stresses after a solution, vary roughly linearly with the number of degrees of
freedom of the problem. On the other hand, when using a direct solver the time required to go through
the solver varies roughly quadratically with the bandwidth, as well as linearly with the number of degrees
of freedom.
Main Index
5
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
Applications for Nonlinear Analysis
Early development of nonlinear finite element technology was mostly influenced by the nuclear and
aerospace industries. In the nuclear industry, nonlinearities are mainly due to high-temperature behavior
of materials. Nonlinearities in the aerospace industry are mainly geometric in nature and range from
simple linear buckling to complicated post-bifurcation behavior. Nonlinear finite element techniques
have become popular in metal forming manufacturing processes, fluid-solid interaction, and fluid flow.
In recent years, the areas of biomechanics and electromagnetics have seen an increasing use of finite
elements.
Results
Like the enormous amount of data needed to define the simulation model to an analysis code, there is a
large volume of data returned from the simulation analysis. And just as it is virtually impossible to
construct a model with a text editor alone, it is equally as difficult to read and interpret the results by
hand. Using a postprocessor with a graphical user interface such as Patran is highly recommended.
Postprocessing Features of Patran
The Patran Results application gives you control of powerful graphical capabilities to display results
quantities in a variety of ways:
Deformed structural plots
Color banded fringe plots
Marker plots (vectors, tensors)
Freebody diagrams
Graph (XY) plots
Animations of most of these plot types.
The Results application treats all results quantities in a very flexible and general manner. In addition, for
maximum flexibility results can be:
Sorted
Reported
Filtered
Derived
Deleted
All of these features help give meaningful insight into results interpretation of engineering problems that
would otherwise be difficult at best.
The Results application is object oriented, providing postprocessing plots which are created, displayed,
and manipulated to obtain rapid insight into the nature of results data. The imaging is intended to provide
graphics performance sufficient for real time manipulation. Performance will vary depending on
Main Index
6
hardware, but consistency of functionality is maintained as much as possible across all supported display
devices.
Capabilities for interactive results postprocessing also exist. Advanced visualization capabilities allow
creation of many plot types which can be saved, simultaneously plotted, and interactively manipulated
with results quantities reported at the click of the mouse button to better understand mechanical behavior.
Once defined, the visualization plots remain in the database for immediate access and provide the means
for results manipulation and review in a consistent and easy to use manner.
Main Index
7
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
Feature List
The most important features of MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) are presented in the
following list.
1. MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) solves linear and nonlinear (material, contact and/or
geometric) static, heat transfer, modal (vibration), buckling, and transient dynamic structural
finite element problems.
2. Eigenvalue solutions are available in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) for solving
linear or nonlinear modal or buckling analyses using either Lanczos or Inverse Power Sweep
methods of iteration. Through the use of parameters you can control the convergence of the
eigenvalues, and the modes to retain. Modal and buckling eigenvalues must be solved in different
runs.
3. MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) has a variety of solution procedures and bandwidth
optimizers for serial, parallel and/or multi-threaded approaches.
4. MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) supports the following elements/bodies:
3 and 6 noded triangular shell/membrane/plane stress/(generalized) plain strain/axisymmetric
elements
4 and 8 noded quadrilateral shell/membrane/plane stress/(generalized) plain
strain/axisymmetric elements
6 and 8 noded solid shell elements
conversion of penta and hexa to solid shell elements
4 and 10 noded solid tetrahedral elements
6 and 15 noded solid penta (wedge) elements
8 and 20 noded solid hexahedral elements
2 and 3 noded beam element
2 and 3 noded bar element
2 and 3 noded axisymmetric shell element
2 noded gap element
1 and 2 noded spring elements
1 and 2 noded damper elements
Rigid and deformable contact bodies
Point Mass element
Connector elements CBUSH, CWELD, CFAST, and RSSCON
RSPLINE element
Main Index
Feature List
8
RBE elements and multi-point constraint equations are supported in MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear (SOL 600) to tie specific nodes or degrees-of-freedom to each other. Special MPC
entities are supported, (e.g. rigid links) which can be used to tie two nodes together or equate the
motion of two DOFs. Both small and large rotations are supported.
5. MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) supports the following loads and boundary
conditions:
Constrained nodal displacements (zero displacements at specified
degrees-of-freedom).Enforced nodal displacements (non-zero displacements at specified
degrees-of-freedom in the nodal coordinate system).
Forces applied to nodes in any coordinate system.
Pressures applied to element edges or faces, including strain-rate controlled application for
super-plastic forming simulations.
Temperature applied to nodes. Temperature can be applied as a load in a structural analysis.
The reference temperature is user definable.
Inertial body forces, acceleration and velocity can be applied in the global coordinate system.
Contact between two bodies can be defined by selecting the contacting bodies and defining
the contact interaction properties. Gluing and ungluing are provided. Enforced motion or
velocity of rigid contacts surfaces is available.
6. MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) supports isotropic, orthotropic and anisotropic
material properties. Temperature dependent isotropic and orthotropic material properties can be
defined for elastic, elastic-plastic, hyper-elastic, visco-elastic, and creep constitutive models.
Nonlinear elastic-plastic materials can be defined by specifying piecewise linear stress-strain
curves, which may be temperature dependent.
7. Physical properties can be associated with MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) elements
such as the cross-sectional properties of the beam element, the area of the beam and rod elements,
the thickness of shell, plane stress, and membrane elements, spring parameters, masses, gap
element parameters, the alternate material coordinate frame for solid elements and material IDs.
8. Fracture Mechanics capabilities include crack propagation and closure, delamination, birth and
death of elements, and a large number of failure index criterion.
9. Laminated composite solid and shell elements are supported in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
(SOL 600) through the PCOMP or PCOMPG cards of the materials capability. Each layer has its
own material, thickness, and orientation and may represent linear or nonlinear material behavior.
Failure index calculations are also supported. Fast integration techniques are available with the
PCOMPF entry. Equivalent material models may be incorporated using PSHELL.
10. Analysis jobs consisting of (possibly) complex loading histories (such as would occur in a multi-
step manufacturing process) for MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) are defined using
subcases. A single subcase may represent the entire analysis, or may be one step in a multi-step
simulation. The loads and constraints in each subcase represent the total load at that point in the
analysis, making it easy to determine the state of loading at any point in the analysis. The starting
point of the current subcase is the ending point of the previous subcase.
Main Index
9
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
11. MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) jobs are submitted using text-based input decks that
may be generated manually with a text editor, or by a variety of pre/post processing programs
such as Patran. The input file is read in and a number of text files, such as the .f06, .log, .f04 files
are generated.
12. Results can be requested in several output formats such as .f06, .t16, .t19, .xdb, .op2, or punch
files. These files are typically read back into the pre/post processing programs for the purpose of
evaluating the results with plots such as deformed shape plots, contour stress/strain plots, or X-Y
history plots.
13. Nodal displacements, velocities and accelerations, mode shapes, element and nodal stresses,
element and nodal strains, element and nodal plastic strains, element and nodal creep strains,
nodal reaction forces and contact interface stress/force values, shell element stress resultants,
element strain energy, strain energy density, and phase angle values can all be requested as output
and visualized with the aforementioned results visualization tools such as Patran. Stress
functions, for example von Mises, beam stresses, strains, and internal forces, can also be
requested as output. Composite element results are returned for each layer of the composite.
14. A restart capability is available in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600). Any analysis can
be saved from any point for a possible restart. A new static load case or a buckling analysis can
be solved by restarting from the original static analysis.
Main Index
10
The primary steps in running a MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) analysis are as follows:
1. Read MSC Nastran Input File in IFP (input file processor) as in other MSC Nastran solution
sequences.
2. Convert MSC Nastran input to Marc input and write out a Marc input deck (jid.marc.dat in IFP).
3. If there are no input errors, execute Marc.
4. If you request, do any of the following:
5. Translate Marcs t16 file to obtain MSC Nastran op2 or xdb output (this is done by code in MSC
Nastran that creates output op2 data blocks on a file, which we call the f11 file, then generating
DMAP on the fly to use inputt2 to placed the f11 datablocks into the MSC Nastran database, and
finally use OUTPUT2 to produce an OP2 file which has the geometry datablocks and the f11
output datablocks all in one file (or similar DMAP to generate an xdb file with geometry and
output datablocks.
6. As in Step 5, DMAP can be extended to produce printed output in the.f06 file or punched output
in the .pch file having the exact formats MSC Nastran uses for all other solution sequences (this
is done by generating OFP DMAP on the fly).
7. Copy Marcs output file (known as the .out file) to the .f06 file with or without changing any text
strings. This output will have the Marc formats, but names such as Marc can be changed to any
desired user name (for example MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear). It is strongly suggested that
Steps 6 and 7are not both done in the same run, or the f06 file output could become confusing.
8. Retain or delete the Marc input and output files (which normally consist of jid.marc.dat,
jid.marc.out, jid.marc.sts, jid.marc.log, jid.marc.t16 and possibly others which have the name
jid.marc.*).
The process of reading input data from a MSC Nastran Input File, translating the model data to a
MSC.Marc input file, running a Marc solution, and translating back the results files is shown in the
flowchart that follows.
Main Index
11
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
Figure 1-1 MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) Solution Process
MSC Nastran Input Deck
Use std Nast output req -
deck echo and
Write jobname.marc.dat
IFP Processes Input Deck
Stop
Successful
Translation?
Submit Marc
Analysis?
Marc writes.out,.t16,.t19
Is marccpy
= 1or 2?
Submit Marc job -see note
Append runtime error
.t16/19 results to Nast db
Nastran.f06,
.f04, .log files
error messages
Yes
Yes
Yes
generate std xdb,op2,f06
.sts, etc (these will be
deleted later by Nastran
if marccpy = 1 or 3) -.sts
messages to .f06 and .log
and .log may be used by
Patran to monitor
the progress of the job
while it is running
Note - every attempt will be
made to have the MSC Nastran Input
File Processor (IFP) catch all
input format errors. However,
this may not be possible
in all cases and sometimes it is
necessary for you
to examine the Marc .dat files
No
No
No
for errors.
Main Index
This Users Guide
12
This Users Guide
This manual provides a complete background to SOL 600 and fully describes using SOL 600 within the
MSC Nastran environment. The theoretical aspects of nonlinear analysis methods, types, and techniques
are included as well as thorough descriptions for nonlinear material models.
Where appropriate, actual Patran forms and menus are shown so you can easily use SOL 600 from the
Patran environment. They have not been updated for this edition, but should be very similar as most of
the inputs have not changed.
Other MSC Nastran Documentation for SOL 600
MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide (QRG)
The QRG contains a complete description of all the input entries for MSC Nastran. Within each section,
entries are organized alphabetically so they are easy to find. Each entry provides a description, formats,
examples, details on options, and general remarks.
You will find the full descriptions for all SOL 600 input entries in the QRG.
MSC Nastran Linear Static Analysis Users Guide
The Linear Static Analysis Users Guide provides support information on the basic use of MSC Nastran
which can be applied to using SOL 600.
MSC Nastran Reference Manual
The MSC Nastran Reference Manual provides supporting information that relates to the theory of MSC
Nastran inputs, element libraries, and loads and boundary conditions.
Marc Documentation
MSC provides extensive documentation covering all aspects of the Marc code. In particular the following
manuals are recommended to use in conjunction with SOL 600:
Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information - explains the capabilities of Marc and gives
pertinent background information.
Marc Volume B: Theory and Information on the extensive Marc element library
Marc Volume C: Program Input - describes the file format of the Marc input file.\
Marc Volume D: User subroutines and special routines - describes format for user subroutines.
Main Index
13
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
Patran Documentation
Three key books from the Patran library may be of assistance in running SOL 600:
Patran Users Guide - this introductory guide gives you the essential information you need to
immediately begin using Patran for SOL 600 projects. Understanding and using the information
in this guide requires no prior experience with CAE or finite element analysis.
Patran Reference Manual -a counterpart to the MSC Nastran Reference Manual, this manual
provides complete descriptions of basic functions in Patran, geometry modeling, finite element
modeling, material models, element properties, loads and boundary conditions, analysis, and
results.
MSC Nastran Preference Guide - gives specific information that relates to using Patran with
MSC Nastran as the intended analysis code. All application forms and required input are tailored
to MSC Nastran.
Main Index
This Users Guide
14
Main Index
Chapter 2: MSC Nastran Bulk Data File and Results Files
2
MSC Nastran Bulk Data File and
Results Files
The MSC Nastran Bulk Data File
Output Requests
Results Files
Main Index
16
The MSC Nastran Input File, referred to here as the Bulk Data File (BDF), (or .dat in the MSC Nastran
manuals), is made up of three distinct sections:
1. Executive Control - describes the problem or solution type and optional file management.
2. Case Control - defines the load history and output requests.
3. Bulk Data - defines a detailed model, load and constraint description.
Input data is organized in (optional) blocks. Key words identify the data for each optional block. This
form of input enables you to specify only the data for the optional blocks that you need to define your
problem. The various blocks of input are optional in the sense that many have built-in default values
which can be used in the absence of any explicit input from you.
A typical input file setup for the MSC Nastran program is shown below.
Executive Control Statements
Terminated by an CEND parameter
Case Control Commands
Terminated by the BEGIN BULK option
Bulk Data Entries
Model data starting with the BEGIN BULK option and terminated by the ENDDATA option
IFP (Input File Processing) Checking
Checking of MSC Nastran Bulk Data entries are done during IFP. When one of these entries has
erroneous data entered it is more likely that IFP will flag the entry and issue a FATAL ERROR.
In most cases, IFP error checking has been enhanced to point to the field and continuation line
where the erroneous data occurs.
Checking of most SOL 600 only Bulk Data entries is done in Marc and any erroneous data
entries will be listed later in the output.
Main Index
17
CHAPTER 2
MSC Nastran Bulk Data File and Results Files
Input Conventions
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear performs all data conversion internally so that the system does not abort
because of data errors made by you. The program reads all input data options alphanumerically and
converts them to integer, floating point, or keywords, as necessary. MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
issues error messages and displays the illegal option image if it cannot interpret the option data field
according to the specifications given in the manual. When such errors occur, the program attempts to
scan the remainder of the data file and ends the run with a FATAL ERROR or SEVERE WARNING
message.
Two input format conventions can be used: fixed and free format. You can mix fixed and free format
options within a file.
The syntax rules for fixed fields are as follows:
Give floating point numbers with or without an exponent. If you give an exponent, it must be
preceded by the character E or D and must be right-justified. If data is double precision, a D
must be used.
Bulk Data
Case Control
Executive Control
Element and
Material
Properties,
Fixed Displ,
Load Incrementation,
Applied Loads,
Applied Displacements
Etc.
Title, Job Control,
Solution Sequence,
Etc.
p
C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e

I
n
p
u
t

D
e
c
k
C
o
n
t
r
o
l

I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
M
o
d
e
l

D
a
t
a

-

g
r
i
d
s
,
e
l
e
m
e
n
t
s
,

e
t
c
.
Etc.
Main Index
18
The syntax rules for free fields are as follows. See the Format of Bulk Data Entries (p. 1047) in the MSC
Nastran Quick Reference Guide for more details.
Check that each option contains the same number of data items that it would contain under
standard fixed-format control. This syntax rule allows you to mix fixed-field and free-field
options in the data file because the number of options you need to input any data list are the same
in both cases.
Separate data items on a option with a comma. The comma can be surrounded by any number of
blanks. Within the data item itself, no embedded blanks can appear.
Give floating point numbers with or without an exponent. If you use an exponent, it must
be preceded by the character E or D and must immediately follow the mantissa (no embedded
blanks).
Give keywords exactly as they are written in the manual.
All data can be entered as uppercase or lowercase text.
Small field format is limited to 8 columns per field. Large field is 16 columns.
Defaults
For most bulk data entries, SOL 600 does not make the distinction between zero and blank. Thus, if a
zero is entered and the default is some other value, the default will normally be used. If you wish to use
zero, enter a small number such as 1.0E-12 instead.
Section Descriptions
Executive Control
This group of entries provides overall job control for the problem and sets up initial switches to control
the flow of the program through the desired analysis. This set of input must be terminated with an CEND
parameter. See Executive Control Statements (Ch. 3) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide for
additional descriptions on input formats.
Case Control
This group of options provides the loads and constraints and load incrementation method and controls
the program after the initial elastic analysis. Case Control options also include blocks which allow
changes in the initial model specifications. Case Control options can also specify print-out and
postprocessing options. Each set of load sets must be begin with a SUBCASE command and be
terminated by another SUBCASE or a BEGIN BULK command. If there is only one load case, the
SUBCASE entry is not required. The SUBCASE option requests that the program perform another
increment or series of increments. See Case Control Command Descriptions (Ch. 4) in the MSC Nastran
Quick Reference Guide for additional descriptions on input formats.
Main Index
19
CHAPTER 2
Bulk Data Entries
This set of data options enters the initial loading, geometry, and material data of the model and provides
nodal point data, such as boundary conditions. Bulk data options are also used to govern the error control
and restart capability.This group of options must be terminated with the ENDDATA option. See Bulk
Data Entries (Ch. 8) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide for additional descriptions on input
formats. Multiple BEGIN entries and superelements are not allowed in SOL 600.
Example
The following text illustrates a simple example of an MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear input file. It
includes the required Executive Control, Case Control, and Bulk Data Sections that are required for any
MSC Nastran analysis.
See
Install.dir/Doc/pdf_nastran/user/implicit_nonlinear_examples/example_input_files/impnonsam.dat.
Listing 2-1 Sample Implicit Nonlinear Solutions 600 Input
$ Advanced Nonlinear Analysis
SOL 600,106 OUTR=F06
CEND
TITLE = MSC.Nastran job
$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data
SUBCASE 1
$ Subcase name : Default
SUBTITLE=Default
NLPARM = 1
SPC = 2
LOAD = 2
DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL
SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL
STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL
$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase
BEGIN BULK
PARAM PRTMAXIM YES
NLPARM 1 10 AUTO 1 25 P YES
$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data
$ Elements and Element Properties for region : shell_props
PSHELL 1 1 .253 1 1
$ Pset: "shell_props" will be imported as: "pshell.1"
CQUAD4 1 1 1 2 5 4
CQUAD4 2 1 2 3 6 5
CQUAD4 3 1 4 5 8 7
CQUAD4 4 1 5 6 9 8
$ Referenced Material Records
$ Material Record : steel
$ Description of Material
MAT1 1 3.+7 .3 .0075
$ Nodes of the Entire Model
GRID 1 0. 0. 0.
GRID 2 5. 0. 0.
GRID 3 10. 0. 0.
GRID 4 0. 5. 0.
GRID 5 5. 5. 0.
Main Index
20
GRID 6 10. 5. 0.
GRID 7 0. 10. 0.
GRID 8 5. 10. 0.
GRID 9 10. 10. 0.
$ Loads for Load Case : Default
SPCADD 2 1
$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fix_edge
SPC1 1 123456 1 4 7
$ Contact Table for Load Case: Default
$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : point_load
FORCE 2 9 0 100. 0. 0. -1.
$ Referenced Coordinate Frames
ENDDATA
Running Existing Nonlinear Models
Some users may have existing models that have been developed and analyzed using MSC Nastran
Nonlinear Solution Sequences 106 or 129. These models may be run through MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear (SOL 600) by changing the SOLUTION procedure input to MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
(SOL 600) input.
The following is an example of the change required to run existing models through SOL 600. The first
line shows an existing MSC Nastran SOL 106 Executive Control Statement and the second shows its
revision for MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600).
SOL 106
SOL 600,106
SOL 600 Executive Control Statement:
The executive control statement is as follows:
SOL 600, ID PATH= COPYR= NOERROR MARCEXE=SOLVE NOEXIT
OUTR=op2,xdb,pch,f06,eig,dmap,beam, sdrc,pst,cdb=(0, 1, 2, or 3) STOP=
CONTINUE= S67OPT= MSGMESH= SCRATCH= TSOLVE= SMEAR PREMGLUE MRENUELE=
MRENUGRD= MRENUMBR= SYSabc= S6NEWS=
Some items such as dmap, beam, CONTINUE and S67OPT are explained here. See the SOL 600,ID
(p. 142) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide for a complete discussion. An explanation of these
items follows:
dmap The user will enter his own DMAP to create whatever type of output that is desired, such as
op2, xdb, punch, f06. For all other options, DMAP as needed is generated internally by MSC
Nastran.
beam The beam option must be specified if op2,xdb,pch. or f06 options are specified and beam
internal loads are to be placed in any of these files. The beam and eig options are mutually
exclusive (you cannot specify both).
Main Index
21
CHAPTER 2
CONTINUE=
CONTINUE= An option that specifies how MSC Nastran will continue its analysis after Marc finishes.
To continue the analysis, do not enter any STOP or OUTR options. It is possible to perform more than
one of these operations if necessary.
0 Nastran will continue the current solution sequence as normal. For example if
SOL 600,106 is entered, SOL 106 will continue as normal after Marc finishes. Of
course, no 3D contact or materials not supported by SOL 106 may be used.
1 Nastran will switch to SOL 107 to compute complex eigenvalues. Marc will
generate DMIG matrices for friction stiffness (and possibly damping) on a file
specified by pram,marcfil1,name and time specified by param,marcstif,time. This
is accomplished by making a complete copy of the original Nastran input file and
spawning off a new job with the SOL entry changed and an include entry for the
DMIG file. The user must put CMETHOD and CEIG in the original Nastran input
file.
6 Same as option 1 except SOL 110 is run. For this option, the original Nastran input
file must contain METHOD=ID1 and CMETHOD=ID2 in the Case Control as well
as matching EIGRL (or EIGR) and EIGC entries in the Bulk Data.
7 Same as option 1 except SOL 103 is run for real eigenvalues/eigenvectors. The
database can be saved to restart into SOL 110 if desired. This should be done on the
command line or in a rc file with scratch=no. For this situation, the original Nastran
input file must include METHOD=id in the Case Control command and a matching
EIGRL or EIGR entry in the Bulk Data. (CMETHOD and EIGC can also be
included.) The actual restart from SOL 103 to 110 must be performed manually at
the present time.
101+ Continue options 101 to 400 are used to convert Marcs initial contact tying
constraints to MPCs and then continue in SOL 101 to 112 as a standard Nastran
execution. For example, if CONTINUE=101, a SOL 101 run with all the geometry
load cases, etc. from the original run would be conducted with the addition of the
initial contact MPC determined from Marc. The continue=101+ options are
frequency used to model dissimilar meshes as well as glued contact which does not
change throughout the analysis. This option can be used for any standard Nastran
sequence where the initial contact condition does not change. In order for initial
contact to work, the surfaces must be initially touching. If they are separated by a
gap, the MPCs will be zero until the gap closes and thus the initial MPCs are zero.
This option automatically sets BCPARA INITCON=1.
Main Index
22
An example of input using the continue=1 option is as follows:
SOL 600,106 path=1 stop=1 continue=1
TIME 10000
CEND
ECHO = sort
DISP(print,plot) = ALL
STRESS(CORNER,plot) = ALL
STRAIN(plot) = ALL
SPC = 1
LOAD = 1
NLPARM = 1
cmethod=101
BEGIN BULK
param,marcfil1,dmig002
param,mrmtxnam,kaax
param,mrspawn2,Nastran
param,mrrcfile,nast2.rc
PARAM,AUTOSPC,YES
PARAM,GRDPNT,0
EIGC, 101, HESS, , , , ,50
NLPARM 1 10 AUTO 1 P YES
PLOAD4 1 121 -800.
PLOAD4 1 122 -800.
(rest of deck)
CQUAD4 239 2 271 272 293 292
CQUAD4 240 2 272 273 294 293
ENDDATA
See Install_dir/doc/pdf_nastran/implicit_nonlinear_examples/example_input_files/continu2.dat for the
complete input file.
Main Index
23
CHAPTER 2
Critical items are Case Control command, CMETHOD=101, the four parameters after BEGIN BULK and
Bulk Data entry, EIGC. An explanation of the parameters follows:
The flow of the run is as follows:
Create a primary MSC Nastran SOL 600 input file (we will name it jid.dat for this example)
Submit MSC Nastran in the standard fashion. For this example, the following command is used:
nastran jid rc=nast1.rc
The nast1.rc file contains items such as scratch=yes, memory=16mw, etc.
The primary MSC Nastran run creates an Marc input file named jid.marc.dat
The primary MSC Nastran run spawns Marc to perform nonlinear analysis.
The nonlinear Marc analyses completes and generates standard files.
Control of the process returns to MSC Nastran. A new MSC Nastran input file named
jid.nast.dat will be created from the original input file. This file will contain the CMETHOD
Case Control and CEIG commands, all of the original geometry and additional entries to read
the dmig002 file.
A second MSC Nastran job will be spawned from the primary MC.Nastran run using the
command
nastran jid.nast rc=nast2.rc
The nast2.rc file can be the same as nast1.rc or can contain different items. Usually memory will
need to be larger in nast2.rc than in nast1.rc.
The second MSC Nastran run computes the complex eigenvalues and finishes.
Control of the process returns to the primary MSC Nastran run and it finishes.
The first portion of the dmig002 file is as follows:
$2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 234567812345
DMIG KAAX 0 1 2 0 324
DMIG* KAAX 6 1
PARAM,MARCFILi,DMIG002 This means that a file named dmig002 will be used. It
contains stiffness matrix terms (possibly from a set of
unsymmetric friction stiffness matrices)
PARAM,MRMTXNAM, Name,KAAX This means that in the dmig002 file, use DMIG matrix
terms labeled kaax (or KAAX case does not matter).
PARAM,MRSPAWN2, CMD,TRAN This means that the primary MSC Nastran run will spawn
another MSC Nastran run to compute the complex
eigenvalues. The name of the command is nastran.
PARAM,MRRCFILE, RCF,NAST2.RC This is the name of the rc file to be used for the second
(spawned) MSC Nastran run.
Main Index
24
* 6 1 3.014712042D+05
* 6 2 4.204709763D+08
*
DMIG* KAAX 6 2
* 6 1 1.204709763D+05
* 6 2 3.014712042D+05
*
DMIG* KAAX 6 3
* 6 1-4.616527206D+04
* 6 2-4.616527206D+04
* 6 3 1.308497299D+05
DMIG* KAAX 17 1
* 6 1 6.239021038D+04
* 6 2-2.528344607D+03
* 6 3-6.239758760D+03
* 17 1 5.939989945D+05
*
When the PATH keyword is omitted on the SOL 600 Executive statement, the program will search the
following location to find Marc:
MSC_BASE/MSC_VERSD/marc/MSC_ARCHM/marc20xx/tools
If MSC_ARCHM does not exist, MSC_ARCH is used instead. The environmental variables
MSC_BASE, MSC_VERSD, MSC_ARCH and/or MSC_ARCHM are set by the MSC Nastran script
(see the MSC Nastran Installation and Operations Guide for further details). If Marc is not found on the
above path, likely locations near that path are searched. If Marc is still not found, the job will terminate
with an appropriate message and the user must determine the correct location of the Marc installation,
use the PATH=1 keyword (see the SOL 600,ID (p. 142) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide for
further details).
DMIG-OUT
The option DMIGOUT allows the stiffness, differential stiffness, damping, mass (assembled or element-
by-element) and heat transfer matricies to be output for selected output times or at the end of each
nonlinear subcase for use in other analyses. This is a less expensive procedure, than using the Bulk Data
entry, MDMIOUT (which creates a superelement), but results in a much larger matrix, however both
methods can produce very large files.
Restart from SOL 600 into SOL 103 or into Another Linear
Solution Sequence
For the purpose of a prestressed normal modes analysis, the old way of restarting from SOL 106 into
SOL 103 is no longer necessary; the user can, instead, restart from a SOL 600 run into another SOL 600
run to perform the prestressed normal modes calculation.
Restarts from SOL 600 into linear solution sequences are not recommended to the novice user because
of several limitations. The results of the linear restart are incremental values with respect to the preload,
not total values. However, some experienced users restart from SOL 600 into SOL 103 to perform
Main Index
25
CHAPTER 2
prestressed modal analysis with changing boundary conditions, or restart into another linear solution
sequence to perform a perturbed linear solution on a preluded structure.
Generating and Editing the Bulk Data File in Patran
Patran offers a MSC Nastran interface that provides a communication link between Patran and MSC
Nastran. It provides for the generation of the MSC Nastran Input file as well as customization of certain
features in Patran. The interface is a fully integrated part of the Patran system.
Generating the BDF
Selecting MSC Nastran as the analysis code preference in Patran, activates the customization process.
These customizations ensure that sufficient and appropriate data is generated for the MSC Nastran
interface. Specifically, the Patran forms in these main areas are modified:
Materials
Element Properties
Finite Elements/MPCs and Meshing
Analysis Forms
Using Patran, you can run a MSC Nastran analysis or you may generate the MSC Nastran Input File to
run externally. For information on generating the MSC Nastran Input file from within Patran, see
Analysis Form (Ch. 3) in the Patran Interface to MSC Nastran Preference Guide.
Editing the BDF
Once the Bulk Data File has been generated, you can edit the file directly from Patran.
1. Click the Analysis Application button to bring up Analysis Application form.
2. On the Analysis form set the Action>Object>Method combination to Analyze>Existing
Deck>Full Run and click Edit Input File...
Patran finds the BDF with the current job name and displays the file for editing in a text editing
window.
Main Index
Output Requests
26
Output Requests
As a part of the input, you can request which results quantities you want to be returned from Marc back
to MSC Nastran and the formats of the results files.
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) produces stress and strain results that differ from those
results available with SOL 106 and 129. A detailed discussion of the stress and strain measures for SOL
600 is given in the following section. For a complete listing of all possible results quantities that can be
returned for a SOL 600 analysis, see Output from the Analysis (Ch. 8).
Any of the results quantities can be placed on Marcs t16/t19 output files to be postprocessed by Patran.
In addition, the more basic types of output (displacements, velocities, accelerations, Cauchy stress tensor
and one type of strain tensor) and basic contact information, can be translated to MSC Nastranss
standard op2, xdb, punch and even f06 files using the OUTR option described above. At present, new
datablock definitions have not been created to handle all types of nonlinear output. Therefore, it is
strongly suggested that the t16 or t19 file be selected for postprocessing in order to view all types of
output. Patran can postprocess nearly all types of output selected by the MARCOUT entry. For a
complete description of the outputs available using MARCOUT (p. 2045) in the MSC Nastran Quick
Reference Guide. The default output for nodes or elements is ALL, this can be reduced by using the
MT16SEL bulk data entry.
Deformations
Consider a three dimensional body in its undeformed and deformed configuration (see Figure 2-1).
With respect to a Cartesian coordinate system , the position vector of a material point in the
undeformed configuration is written as:
(2-1)
In the deformed configuration, the material point has a position vector , given by:
(2-2)
The displacement vector is defined as the difference between the position vector in the deformed and
the undeformed configuration and reads:
(2-3)
B
E
1
E
2
E
3
, , ( )
X X
1
E
1
X
2
E
2
X
3
E
3
+ + =
x
x x
1
E
1
x
2
E
2
x
3
E
3
+ + =
u
u x X u
1
E
1
u
2
E
2
u
3
E
3
+ + = =
Main Index
27
CHAPTER 2
Figure 2-1 Body in Undeformed and Deformed Configuration
It will be assumed that there is always a unique relation between the position vector of a point in the
deformed and the position vector of this point in the undeformed configuration. This can formally be
expressed as:
(2-4)
Based on Equation (2-4), a fundamental deformation measure can be given, namely the deformation
gradient , which is defined by:
(2-5)
Substituting Equation (2-5) into Equation (2-3) shows that the deformation gradient can also be written
as a function of the coordinates in the undeformed configuration and the displacement components:
E
1
E
3
E
2
X
x
u
B
B
Deformed
Undeformed
dF
n
dA
N
dA
0
d
^
F
B
x x X ( ) =
F
F
x
1
c
X
1
c
---------
x
1
c
X
2
c
---------
x
1
c
X
3
c
---------
x
2
c
X
1
c
---------
x
2
c
X
2
c
---------
x
2
c
X
3
c
---------
x
3
c
X
1
c
---------
x
3
c
X
2
c
---------
x
3
c
X
3
c
---------
=
Main Index
Output Requests
28
(2-6)
in which is the 3x3 unit tensor:
(2-7)
Starting out from the deformation gradient, several well-known symmetric strain tensors can be defined,
namely the engineering strain tensor , the Green-Lagrange strain tensor and the right Cauchy-
Green strain tensor :
(2-8)
(2-9)
(2-10)
where denotes the transpose of .
Notice that the Green-Lagrange and the right Cauchy-Green strain tensor are related by:
(2-11)
Example
Suppose that the deformation of a body is described by:
, ,
This deformation can be obtained by first stretching a block of material in the -direction and then
rotating it around the -axis (see Figure 2-2). The deformation gradient can easily be evaluated as:
F
1
u
1
c
X
1
c
--------- +
u
1
c
X
2
c
---------
u
1
c
X
3
c
---------
u
2
c
X
1
c
--------- 1
u
2
c
X
2
c
--------- +
u
2
c
X
3
c
---------
u
3
c
X
1
c
---------
u
3
c
X
2
c
--------- 1
u
3
c
X
3
c
--------- +
I
u
1
c
X
1
c
---------
u
1
c
X
2
c
---------
u
1
c
X
3
c
---------
u
2
c
X
1
c
---------
u
2
c
X
2
c
---------
u
2
c
X
3
c
---------
u
3
c
X
1
c
---------
u
3
c
X
2
c
---------
u
3
c
X
3
c
---------
+ = =
I
I
1 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 1
=
e E
C
e
1
2
--- F F
T
2I + ( ) =
E
1
2
--- F
T
F I ( ) =
C F
T
F =
F
T
F
E
1
2
--- C I ( ) =
x
1
4X
1
o cos
1
2
--- X
2
o sin = x
2
4X
1
o sin
1
2
--- X
2
o cos + = x
3
1
2
--- X
3
=
E
1
E
3
Main Index
29
CHAPTER 2
so that the engineering and the right Cauchy-Green strain tensors are given by:
,
From these expressions, it can be concluded that the engineering strain tensor only provides a useful
deformation measure if the angle remains small, so that and . On the other hand,
the components of the right Cauchy-Green tensor, and by virtue of Equation (2-11) also the components
of the Green-Lagrange strain tensor, are independent of the value of the angle .
The deformation gradient can be rewritten as:
Figure 2-2 Stretching and Rotating a Body
F
4 o cos
1
2
--- o sin 0
4 o sin
1
2
--- o cos 0
0 0
1
2
---
=
e
4 o cos 1
7
2
--- o sin 0
7
2
--- o sin
1
2
--- o 1 cos 0
0 0
1
2
---
= C
16 0 0
0
1
4
--- 0
0 0
1
4
---
=
o o cos 1 ~ o sin 0 ~
o
E
1
E
2
E
3
o
L
3
L
2
L
1
L
1
AL
1
+
L
2
AL
2
+
L
3
AL
3
+
Main Index
Output Requests
30
in which is a rotation tensor and is a symmetric stretch tensor, where the stretch tensor and the right
Cauchy-Green strain tensor are related by:
It can be proved that in this way any deformation gradient can be uniquely decomposed into a rotation
tensor and a stretch tensor.
If there is no rotation of the material the non-zero components of the right Cauchy-Green strain tensor
can be expressed in terms of the components of the engineering strain tensor as:
, ,
Instead of , , and , one often uses the principal stretch ratios , and ,
respectively.
A geometrical interpretation of the principal stretch ratios can be given by indicating the initial edge
lengths as , , and the changes in edge lengths as , , (see Figure 2-2). Now the
principal stretch ratios can be written as:
, ,
In the example discussed above, the right Cauchy-Green strain tensor only has non-zero terms on its main
diagonal, indicating that the deformation consists of a pure stretch. In a general state of deformation,
there will also be non-zero off-diagonal terms. Then the principal stretch ratios must be determined based
on the eigenvalues of the right Cauchy-Green strain tensor. Denoting these eigenvalues as , , and
, the principal stretch ratios are generally given by:
, , (2-12)
It can be concluded that the principal stretch ratios completely define the stretch of a material, but not the
rotation.
F
o cos o sin 0
o sin o cos 0
0 0 1
4 0 0
0
1
2
--- 0
0 0
1
2
---
RU = =
R U
C U
1 2
=
C
11
1 e
11
+ = C
22
1 e
22
+ = C
33
1 e
33
+ =
1 e
11
+ 1 e
22
+ 1 e
33
+
1

2

3
L
1
L
2
L
3
AL
1
AL
2
AL
3
1
L
1
AL
1
+
L
1
----------------------- =
2
L
2
AL
2
+
L
2
----------------------- =
3
L
3
AL
3
+
L
3
----------------------- =
C'
11
C'
22
C'
33
1
C'
11
=
2
C'
22
=
3
C'
33
=
Main Index
31
CHAPTER 2
Another way to characterize the deformation of a material is based on the invariants of the right Cauchy-
Green strain tensor. These invariants are defined as:
(2-13)
(2-14)
(2-15)
Because , , and are invariants of the right Cauchy-Green strain tensor, their values can also be
determined based on the eigenvalues of the right Cauchy-Green strain tensor. Using Equation (2-12), this
yields:
(2-16)
(2-17)
(2-18)
It should be noted that incompressibility of the material can be expressed as:
(2-19)
or:
(2-20)
The compressibility can also be expressed in terms of the determinant of the deformation gradient,
. Since , this can be evaluated as:
(2-21)
so that incompressibility of the material yields:
(2-22)
I
1
C
11
C
22
C
33
+ + =
I
2
C
11
C
22
C
22
C
33
C
33
C
11
C
12
2
C
23
2
C
31
2
+ + =
I
3
C
11
C
22
C
33
2C
12
C
23
C
31
C
11
C
23
2
+ + =
C
22
C
31
2
C
33
C
12
2

I
1
I
2
I
3
I
1

1
2
2
2
3
2
+ + =
I
2

1
2
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
2
1
2
+ + =
I
3

1
2
2
2
3
2
=
3
1 =
I
3
1 =
det F ( ) F RU =
det F ( ) det RU ( ) det R ( )det U ( ) det U ( ) det C
1
2
---
\ .
| |

1
2
3
= = = = =
det F ( ) 1 =
Main Index
Output Requests
32
Stresses
Consider the deformed configuration of body , as indicated in Figure 2-4. On an elemental area
with unit normal vector , an elemental force vector is acting. This force vector is a result of forces
being transmitted from one portion of the body to another. According to the Cauchy stress principle, the
stress vector or traction vector is defined as:
(2-23)
Similar to Equation (2-1) to Equation (2-3), the components of , , and are indicated as , , ,
, , , , and . Now the following relation between the components of the stress vector
and the components of the normal vector can be given:
(2-24)
which, by virtue of Equation (2-23), can also be written as:
(2-25)
In Equation (2-24) and Equation (2-25), to are the components of the true or Cauchy stress tensor
. The components , and are called the normal or direct stress components, while the other
components are called shear stress components. The first index of the stress components defines the
normal of the plane on which the stress vector acts. The second index indicates the positive direction of
the component (see Figure 2-3). It can be shown that the Cauchy stress tensor is symmetric, so ,
and . The physical meaning of the Cauchy stress tensor is that it gives the current
force per unit deformed area.
Another frequently used stress tensor in a large deformation analysis is the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress
tensor. In order to define this tensor, the force vector is transformed using the inverse of the
deformation gradient :
B dA
n dF
t
t
dF
dA
--------- =
t n dF t
1
t
2
t
3
n
1
n
2
n
3
dF
1
dF
2
dF
3
t
1
t
2
t
3
T
11
T
12
T
13
T
21
T
22
T
23
T
31
T
32
T
33
n
1
n
2
n
3
=
dF
1
dF
2
dF
3
T
11
T
12
T
13
T
21
T
22
T
23
T
31
T
32
T
33
n
1
n
2
n
3
dA =
T
11
T
33
T T
11
T
22
T
33
T
12
T
21
=
T
13
T
31
= T
23
T
32
=
dF
F
Main Index
33
CHAPTER 2
Figure 2-3 Interpretation of Stress Components
(2-26)
Assuming that the transformed force vector acts on the elemental area with unit normal vector
in the undeformed configuration (see Figure 2-4), the components to of the symmetric second
Piola-Kirchhoff stress tensor are defined as:
(2-27)
The physical meaning of the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress tensor is not so clear. It can be considered to
give the transformed current force per unit undeformed area.
Using the deformation gradient, the Cauchy stress tensor and the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress tensor
can be related to another by:
(2-28)
(2-29)
T
22
T
23
T
21
E
3
E
2
E
1
dF
1
dF
2
dF
3
F
1
dF
1
dF
2
dF
3
=
d
^
F
dA
0
N S
11
S
33
S
dF
1
dF
2
dF
3
S
11
S
12
S
13
S
21
S
22
S
23
S
31
S
32
S
33
N
1
N
2
N
3
dA
0
=
S det F ( )F
1
T F
1
( )
T
=
T
1
det F ( )
----------------- FSF
T
=
Main Index
Output Requests
34
Notice that for small deformations and small rotations, , so the differences between the Cauchy
stress tensor and the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress tensor vanish. In that case they reduce to the so-called
engineering stress tensor , which is known to give the force per unit undeformed area.
Example
Due to a uniaxial tensile load, the state of deformation of a body is assumed to be given by (see also
Figure 2-4):
, ,
The force is assumed to be homogeneously distributed over the cross section in the - -plane.
Evaluating Equation (2-25) for the cases that , , and yields:
Figure 2-4 Uniaxially Loaded Body
F I ~
o
x
1
4X
1
= x
2
1
2
--- X
2
= x
3
1
2
--- X
3
=
A E
2
E
3
n E
1
= n E
2
= n E
3
=
A
0
A
F
F
A
0
A
E
1
E
2
E
3
F
0
0
T
11
T
12
T
13
T
21
T
22
T
23
T
31
T
32
T
33
1
0
0
A =
0
0
0
T
11
T
12
T
13
T
21
T
22
T
23
T
31
T
32
T
33
0
1
0
A =
0
0
0
T
11
T
12
T
13
T
21
T
22
T
23
T
31
T
32
T
33
0
0
1
A =
Main Index
35
CHAPTER 2
so that the only nonzero component of the Cauchy stress tensor is:
Because:
,
it follows from Equation (2-28) that the only non-zero component of the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress
tensor is:
Upon rewriting the current cross sectional area in terms of the original cross-sectional area as
, the nonzero component of the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress tensor can also be written as:
in which is recognized as the engineering stress . The differences between the various stress
components can be summarized as:
,
Grid Point Force Balance and Element Strain Energy
Theory
In nonlinear analysis, the strain energy, , for an element is defined by integrating the specific energy
rate, the inner product of strain rate and stress, over element volume and time
(2-30)
T
11
F
A
--- =
F
4 0 0
0
1
2
--- 0
0 0
1
2
---
= det F ( ) 1 =
S
11
1
16
------
F
A
--- =
A A
0
A
1
4
--- A
0
=
S
11
1
4
---
F
A
0
------ =
F A
0
o
11
T
11
4o
11
= S
11
1
4
--- o
11
=
E
E c
T
o V d t d
V
}
0
t
}
=
Main Index
Output Requests
36
The integration over time leads to the following recursive formula using the trapezoidal rule
(2-31)
The steps and are converged solution steps.
By integrating Equation (2-31) over the element volume, we get
(2-32)
For computational convenience, MSC Nastran uses Equation (2-32) to calculate the element strain
energy. The internal element forces are readily available in every step because they are needed for the
force equilibrium. Note that temperature effects are included in the internal element forces.
When loads from temperature differences or element deformation are present, the default definition of
element strain energy for linear elements differ from the definition for nonlinear elements. For linear
elements, the element strain energy is defined as
(2-33)
where is the element load vector for temperature loads and element deformation. Equation (2-33)
assumes that the temperatures are constant within a subcase. For nonlinear elements, the definition of
Equation (2-30) is used. In the case of linear material and geometry, Equation (2-30) becomes
stress tensor
strain rate
element volume
actual time in the load history
current load step
previous load step
strain energy increment
strain-increment
internal element forces
displacement increment from to
o
c
V
t
E
n 1 +
E
n
= AE
n 1 +
+ E
n
=
1
2
--- Ac
n 1 +
T
o
n
o
n 1 +
+ ( ) V d
}
+
n 1 +
n
AE
Ac
n n 1 +
E
n 1 +
E
n
=
1
2
--- Au
n 1 +
T
f
n
f
n 1 +
+ ( ) +
f
Au n n 1 +
E
1
2
--- u
T
K
e
u = u
T
P
et
P
et
Main Index
37
CHAPTER 2
(2-34)
Equation (2-34) assumes that the temperature varies linearly within a subcase. The user may request the
definition of Equation (2-34) to be applied to linear elements by adding PARAM,XFLAG,2 to the input
file. The default value for XFLAG is 0, meaning that linear elements will use the definition of
Equation (2-33).
User Input
The output of grid point force balance and strain energy in nonlinear analysis is requested with the
existing GPFORCE and ESE Case Control commands, respectively. The Case Control commands
remain unchanged.
Example
The following Nastran input file represents a simplified model of a mechanical clutch that consists of
springs, beams, rigid elements, and gap elements. A geometric nonlinear analysis in SOL 106 is
performed. Both GPFORCE and ESE output requests are applied above all subcases. This is a good
example to show the grid point force balance with both linear and nonlinear elements, that includes:
applied loads
element forces
SPC forces
MPC forces
The model is shown in Figure 2-5. For clarity, only the elements are displayed. See
Install_dir/doc/pdf_nastran/implicit_nonlinear_examples/example_input_files/gpf005bnl.dat for the
complete input file.
E
1
2
--- = u
T
K
e
u
1
2
--- u
T
P
et
Main Index
Output Requests
38
Figure 2-5
The gap and beam elements are shown, the rigid elements are not displayed and the Spring elements are
not visible in the figure because their connection points are coincident.
Listing 2-2 Grid Point Force Output
LOAD STEP = 2.00000E+00
G R I D P O I N T F O R C E B A L A N C E

POINT-ID ELEMENT-ID SOURCE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3
1 APP-LOAD 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -2.400000E+02
1 F-OF-SPC 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.400000E+02
1 10001 BEAM 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1 10002 BEAM 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1 *TOTALS* 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
100 F-OF-SPC 7.056885E-24 -2.106726E-23 0.0 2.103107E-22 7.093074E-23 0.0
100 F-OF-MPC -7.056885E-24 2.106726E-23 0.0 -2.103107E-22 -7.093074E-23 2.492302E-24
100 3 ELAS2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 6.229551E-25
100 *TOTALS* 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 3.115257E-24
101 F-OF-SPC 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.614713E-28 -1.654361E-24 0.0
101 101 BEAM -3.730332E-08 2.927822E-07 0.0 0.0 0.0 -5.301744E-09
101 2004 BEAM -3.896168E-07 -1.146324E-07 0.0 -1.614713E-28 1.654361E-24 -2.646978E-23
101 1 GAP 1.270000E-10 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
101 TOTALS* -4.267931E-07 1.781498E-07 0.0 0.0 0.0 -5.301744E-09
102 101 BEAM -2.731871E-08 -2.938820E-07 0.0 0.0 0.0 -2.468966E-09
102 102 BEAM -1.637746E-08 1.273060E-07 0.0 0.0 0.0 -4.135903E-25
102 2 GAP 1.270000E-10 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
102 *TOTALS* -4.356917E-08 -1.665760E-07 0.0 0.0 0.0 -2.468966E-09
Main Index
39
CHAPTER 2
Listing 2-3 Element Strain Energy Output
Remarks
Linear and nonlinear elements can be mixed. The output for grid point force and element strain
energy in nonlinear analysis follow the same format as in linear analysis.
The reference system for the grid point force output is the grid point global coordinate system.
The user cannot specify another output coordinate system. In nonlinear, the grid point forces are
not aligned with element edges. Therefore, PARAM,NOELOF and PARAM,NOELOP are
ignored in nonlinear analysis.
In nonlinear analysis, the element strain energy must be calculated for each intermediate load
step even if the output is requested only in the last load step. To save computations, the element
strain energy is only calculated upon user request. The Case Control commands, GPFORCE
must be present to activate grid point force output or element strain energy calculations
and output.
LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00
E L E M E N T S T R A I N E N E R G I E S

ELEMENT-TYPE = BEAM * TOTAL ENERGY OF ALL ELEMENTS IN PROBLEM = 3.069659E+03
SUBCASE 1 * TOTAL ENERGY OF ALL ELEMENTS IN SET -1 = 3.069659E+03

ELEMENT-ID STRAIN-ENERGY PERCENT OF TOTAL STRAIN-ENERGY-DENSITY
101 3.963134E+02 12.9107 1.858459E+00
102 2.560559E+01 0.8342 1.200740E-01
103 2.954497E+00 0.0962 1.385472E-02
104 2.831680E+00 0.0922 1.327879E-02
105 3.055125E+00 0.0995 1.432660E-02
106 2.984272E+00 0.0972 1.399434E-02
107 2.854425E+00 0.0930 1.338544E-02
108 2.822066E+00 0.0919 1.323370E-02
109 3.316133E+00 0.1080 6.220224E-03
110 9.060877E+00 0.2952 2.010873E-02
111 1.350183E+01 0.4398 5.651308E-02
112 1.904008E+01 0.6203 7.969392E-02
113 1.038940E+01 0.3385 4.348574E-02
121 7.140515E+01 2.3262 6.761059E-01
Main Index
Results Files
40
Results Files
When a SOL 600 analysis has been completed successfully, a message file and a results file are created
and saved. If you request that a print file be saved in addition to the standard results file, or if the analysis
aborts prematurely due to an error, a print file is also saved.
Files Generated During the Analysis
Print Files
The print files jobname.f06 and jobname.marc.out contain a complete text output of solution
information, including an input summary, solution diagnostics from each processor, a geometry
summary, and results if requested.
Because of the potential size of the print file, certain information is optional. Instead of printing out a
complete echo of the input deck, a summary can be printed. Stress and strain results, at the nodes of each
element, can be printed or not as selected by the user included in the print file.
Analysis Results Files
The analysis results file contains some all of the numerical results computed in the analysis. This file in
MSC Nastran is designated as jobname.op2 or jobname.xdb. Because SOL 600 uses the Marc
solver, a Marc results file is also available, designated jobname.t16/t19. If you are using Patran, the
full set of stress and strain measures are available in the t16/t19 file while the more basic measures are
available in the .op2 and .xdb files. The t19 file is an ASCII file. The t16 file is a binary file and can be
moved and used on different platforms.
For more information, see Patran Reference Manual, Part 6: Results Postprocessing.
Message Files
The message files jobname.marc.sts and jobname.msg (if it is run from Patran) contain
diagnostic error and warning messages output by MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600). The
message file is the best way to immediately check an analysis for successful execution if the job is run
from Patran. Otherwise, check JID.MARC.OUT and JID.f06.
SOL 600 has five levels of messages:
1. Informative messages.
2. Nonfatal warning message of something that could affect the results.
3. Severe warnings (similar to fatal errors).
4. Fatal errors (all occurrences will be found before aborting).
Main Index
41
CHAPTER 2
5. Immediately fatal errors:
An example of a Level 1 message is a message that indicates that a new processor has begun
execution. These messages provide job information.
An example of a Level 2 message is one indicating that the aspect ratio is greater than 15. This
may or may not be a serious problem.
An example of a Level 3 message is a warning about a highly distorted element or a in Marc
that is not in SOL 600.
An example of a Level 4 message is the warning undefined node used in rigid element.
An example of a Level 5 message is Unable to open file message. The job is
immediately aborted.
Postprocessing with Patran
The results from an MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear Analysis can be read into and postprocessed using
Patran. Typically you will get the most complete set of results (i.e. rigid contact body information such
as reaction forces, etc.) if you use the .t16 or .t19 results options (see Output from the Analysis (Ch. 8) on
how to select which output files will be created), but you can also postprocess using an .xdb or .op2
formatted file.
The Results application in Patran provides the capabilities for creating, modifying, deleting, posting,
unposting and manipulating results visualization plots as well as viewing the finite element model. In
addition, results can be derived, interpolated, extrapolated, transformed, and averaged in a variety of
ways, all controllable by the user.
Control is provided for manipulating the color/range assignment and other attributes for plot tools, and
for controlling and creating animations of static and transient results.
Results are selected from the database and assigned to plot tools using simple forms. Results
transformations are provided to derive scalars from vectors and tensors as well as to derive vectors from
tensors. This allows for a wide variety of visualization tools to be used with all of the available results.
If the job was created within Patran such that a Patran jobname of the same name as the Nastran jobname
exists, you only need to use the Results tools and Patran will import or attach the jobname.xxx file
without you having to select it. If you did not create the job in Patran you can still import the model and
results and postprocess (both are on the t16 file).
Main Index
Results Files
42
Main Index
Chapter 3: Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
3
Solution Methods and Strategies
in Nonlinear Analysis
Introduction
Linear Static Analysis Procedure
Differences Between Linear and Nonlinear Analysis
Applying Constraints
Adding Nonlinear Effects
Numerical Methods in Solving Equations
Iteration Methods
Load Increment Size
Convergence Controls
Singularity Ratio
Guidelines for Analysis Methods

Main Index
Introduction
44
Introduction
The finite element method is a powerful tool for analyzing complex problems in structural and continuum
mechanics. The analysis of a structure using the finite element method has four basic steps:
1. Modeling, in which the structure is subdivided into an assemblage of discrete volumes called
finite elements, and properties are assigned to each element.
2. Evaluation of element characteristics, such as stiffness and mass matrices, followed by
assembling the element characteristic matrices to obtain the assembled or so-called global
matrices characteristic of the entire structure. A similar process is followed to obtain the total
loads, in vector form, applied to the structure.
3. Solution of the system equations for displacements, natural frequencies and mode shapes, or
buckling load factors.
4. Calculating other quantities of interest, such as strains, stresses and strain energy.
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses the finite element displacement method, in which a large system
of equations is solved to obtain the displacements at all node points of the structure. Strains are then
obtained on the element level as derivatives of displacements and stresses are obtained by multiplying a
small matrix of material constants by the strains. Comprehensive presentations of the finite element
method together with numerous applications are available in textbooks and the research literature.
The main purposes of this chapter are more limited, namely:
1. To give a brief overview of the finite element displacement method for solving linear and
nonlinear structural problems in statics.
2. To describe the theory, techniques and algorithms specifically used in MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear (SOL 600).
3. Outline some guidelines for selecting appropriate analysis methods.
Main Index
45
CHAPTER 3
Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
Linear Static Analysis Procedure
In a linear static analysis there is assumed to be a linear relationship between the applied loads and the
response of the structure. Because of the linear relationship you need only calculate the stiffness of the
structure once. From this stiffness representation you can find the structures response to other applied
loads by multiplying the load vectors by the decomposed stiffness matrix. In addition, loads can be
combined using the principle of superposition.
A linear analysis is the simplest and most cost effective type of analysis to perform. Because linear
analysis is simple and inexpensive to perform and often gives satisfactory results, it is the most
commonly used structural analysis. Nonlinearities due to material, geometry, or boundary conditions are
not included in this type of analysis. The behavior of an isotropic, linear, elastic material can be defined
by two material constants: Youngs modulus, and Poissons ratio.
In actuality, linear analysis is merely an approximation to the true behavior of a structure. In some cases
the approximation is very close to the true behavior, in other cases linear analysis may provide highly
inaccurate results.
The following is a summary of the main steps in a linear static analysis:
1. Input: The problem geometry (nodes and elements), physical and material properties, and loads
and boundary conditions are taken from the MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear input file and put
into the MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear database.
2. Bandwidth: Minimization (Optional). The nodes are renumbered internally for
minimum bandwidth.
3. Element stiffness matrix and force vector calculation: The element stiffness matrices and
equivalent nodal forces for distributed forces are computed. The detailed descriptions in the
Element Library (Ch. 11) provide the kinds of forces that each element can support.
4. Global stiffness matrix and load vector assembly: The global stiffness matrix and the combined
nodal force vectors are assembled. Boundary and constraint conditions are incorporated by
modifying the element stiffness matrices and force vectors.
5. Solution of equations: The nodal displacement vector {o} is computed by solving the system of
simultaneous Equation (3-6).
6. Strain energy and reaction force calculation: The strain energy and reaction forces (unbalanced
grid point forces) are computed using the displacement vector, the element stiffness matrices and
the force vectors.
7. Stresses and strains calculation: The strains and stresses are computed at selected points for each
element. See the Element Library (Ch. 11) for a detailed descriptions of the stress recovery points
for the MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear elements.
Main Index
46
Non-linear analysis is intrinsically a multi-increment load process where the applied loads and/or
displacements are solved for, not in a single load increment but in a number of load increments. The
multiple-step procedure is necessary for the FE code to update changing conditions in the model during
the analysis. This situation is routinely encountered in non-linear analysis because the material properties
and/or boundary conditions can change during the analysis e.g. with the onset of plasticity (material non-
linearity), or with the occurrence of contact (BC nonlinearity). Below are the steps in a general linear and
a non-linear analysis. The presence of an extra loop of iterations (Newton-Raphson iterations) is the
unique feature of a nonlinear solution procedure.
A. Steps in Linear Analysis:
1. Set up the model (done by user, before the model is submitted)
Mesh the part
Apply Material Properties
Apply Boundary Conditions
Submit Job
2. Job Solution (done by FE Code)
Assembly of stiffness Matrix
Solution of stiffness matrix
Compute displacements, strains, stresses (and other results)
3. View Results
The user is guaranteed a solution if the boundary conditions and material properties are set up
correctly (and sometimes even incorrectly!). The stiffness matrix is assembled and solved only once in
the entire analysis.
B. Steps in Nonlinear Analysis:
1. Set up the model (done by the user, before model set-up)
Mesh the part
Apply Material Properties
Apply Boundary Conditions
Submit Job
2. Job Solution (done by FE Code):
Newton-Raphson Iteration scheme begins: Apply a portion of the total load to start: (1% in
this case):
Assembly of stiffness Matrix
Solution of the Stiffness Matrix
Check for convergence (IMPORTANT step, seen only in non-linear analysis)
Main Index
47
CHAPTER 3
If converged, the solution/structure is in equilibrium. Go to step 3 below
If not converged, update information and re-assemble, re-solve stiffness matrix
Keep iterating till convergence is achieved.
3. (After convergence) Get displacements, strains, stresses
4. Apply the next increment of load and go to Step 2. Keep doing this until all the load is applied
5. View Results
The important point to note is that the total load is applied gradually in steps (or increments) and for each
load step, the solution is arrived at after one or more iterations. If the behavior of the model is generally
linear, few iterations are required to solve that load step. If the model behavior is complex/nonlinear,
many iterations might be required. Each iteration involves an assembly and solution of the stiffness
matrix. Hence, nonlinear problems inherently take longer than linear models (of the same size) to solve.
At the end of each iteration, a check is made to see if the solution has converged. If the convergence
check fails, the iteration is re-repeated with the new information; and it is re-assembled and re-solved.
This process repeats until convergence is achieved. Following that, the next increment of load is applied.
The load increments are applied until the full load of the model is solved.
Main Index
48
Once you have constructed a model of your structure, constraints are added that force selected portions
of your model to remain fixed or to move by a specified amount. These constraints can be either:
Single Point Constraints
Multipoint Constraints
Single Degrees of Freedom
A constraint on a single degree of freedom (Single Point Constraint, or SPC) assigns a zero or nonzero
value to a single degree of freedom. It can be expressed as:
(3-1)
where is the value of the prescribed displacement on the degree of freedom
.
The case of u = 0 is the
most common case, and is often used as a boundary condition, to fix or ground the movement of a
point in a certain direction.
Since the value of

is known, one could, in principle, eliminate the specified degree of freedom from
the other degrees of freedom to be solved for as unknowns. This would reduce the size of the system of
equations to be solved, but on the other hand it would take time to perform the elimination, and this
approach adds complexity to the code.
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses a different technique. A number which is large compared to the
stiffness coefficients (say, for discussion, ) is added to the diagonal term of the equation for the
degree of freedom to be constrained. Also, if the degree of freedom is to be constrained to a nonzero value
u, then is added to the right hand side of the modified equation. This modified equation is now:
Assuming all to be small with respect to , the solution of the system of equations is obtained with
negligible error.
The modified system of equations remain well conditioned. The value used by MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear for the large number is times the largest stiffness coefficient found on the diagonal of the
stiffness matrix.
Multiple Degrees of Freedom
A multipoint constraint (MPC) equation is a relationship between several degrees of freedom that must
be enforced on the structure.
o
i
u =
u o
i
o
i
10
20
K
11
u 10
20
K
i 1
o
1
. K
i i
( )10
20
o
i
. K
i n
o
n
+ + + + F
i
u 10
20
( ) + =
K
i j
10
20
10
10
Main Index
49
CHAPTER 3
Some examples are as follows:
Consider the structure in Figure 3-1, made up of three plane stress elements. To make node 4 lie exactly
on the straight line between nodes 2 and 7, we need to enforce the two MPC equations.
UX(4) = 0.5 x UX(2) + 0.5 x UX(7)
UY(4) = 0.5 x UY(2) + 0.5 x UY(7)
Figure 3-1 Multipoint Equations to Enforce Compatibility of Node 4 Along Line Connecting
Nodes 2 and 7
To connect a plate or beam element (which has six degrees of freedom per node three displacements
and three rotations) to a solid element (which has only three translations), it is necessary to relate the
rotation of the plate to the displacements of the solid. As an example, consider Figure 3-2 where we see
the side view of a plate-to-solid transition. The equation:
where DELTAY is the difference in Y-coordinate between nodes 2 and 6, will enforce the desired
compatibility on the rotation about the global Z axis. Other constraints would need to be written to ensure
the compatibility of the other displacements and rotations.
Figure 3-2 Side View of a Solid-to-Plate Transition
Compatibility requires that the rotations of the plate element be related to the displacements on the top
and bottom of the solid element.
Consider Figure 3-3, showing a rigid link connecting two nodes M and S, each of which has six degrees
of freedom and is attached to other elements in the structure.
Y
3 2 1
8 7 6
1
2
3
4
5
X
ROTZ 3 ( ) UX 2 ( ) UX 6 ( ) ( ) DELTAY ( ) =
Y
3
2 1
6
4
5
X
Z
Main Index
50
The displacements at the dependent node S are related to those at the independent node M by the
following relationship:
and
where [I] is a 3 x 3 unit matrix and [H] is given by
Figure 3-3 Example of a Rigid Link in the Model
If both nodes have six degrees of freedom, then multipoint constraint equations can be written to ensure
that, for small displacements, the two nodes move as a rigid body.
Incorporating MPC Equations
Various techniques can be used to incorporate MPC equations into the equilibrium equations. Two of the
methods are as follows:
UX
s
UY
s
UZ
s
)

`

UX
m
UY
m
UZ
m
)

`

H | |
ROTX
m
ROTY
m
ROTZ
m
)

`

+ =
ROTX
s
ROTY
s
ROTZ
s
)

`

I | |
ROTX
m
ROTY
m
ROTZ
m
)

`

=
H | |
0
Z
m
Z
s
( )
Y
s
Y
m
( )
Z
s
Z
m
( )
0
X
m
X
s
( )
Y
m
Y
s
( )
X
s
X
m
( )
0
=
Y
X
Z
S (XS, YS, ZS)
M (XM, YM, ZM)
M = Independent (master) node
S = Dependent (slave) node
Main Index
51
CHAPTER 3
Lagrange Multiplier Method. This method uses the mathematical technique of Lagrange multipliers to
enforce the constraints. The number of degrees of freedom is increased, and the conditioning and
definiteness of the global matrix may be adversely affected.
Transformation Method. Using the constraint equations, this method eliminates dependent variables
from the list of unknowns, modifying the stiffness associated with the independent degrees-of-freedom
to account for the constraints.
The following describes the multipoint constraint algorithm used in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
First, we rewrite the constraint equations in matrix form as
(3-2)
where are the dependent (slave) variables and are the independent (master) variables.
Then, the global matrix of Equation (3-6) can be rewritten in partitioned form as
(3-3)
where the subscript i refers to those degrees of freedom which are not referenced in any
constraint equation.
Substituting from Equation (3-2) into Equation (3-3) and rearranging, we get
(3-4)
and
(3-5)
Premultiplying Equation (3-5) by , we get
(3-6)
o { }
s
A | | o { }
m
=
o { }
s
o { }
m
K
ss
K
sm
K
si
K
ms
K
mm
K
mi
K
i s
K
i m
K
i i
o
s
o
m
o
i
)

`

F
s
F
m
F
i
)

`

=
o { }
s
K
mm
K
mi
K
i m
K
i i
K
ms
A 0
K
i s
A 0
\ .
|
|
| |
o
m
o
i
)
`

F
m
F
i
)
`

=
K
sm
K
si
| | K
s s
A 0 | | ( )
o
m
o
i
)
`

F
s
{ } =
A 0 , | |
T
A
T
K
sm
A
T
K
si
0 0
A
T
K
ss
A 0
0 0
\ .
|
| |
o
m
o
i
)
`

A
T
F
s
0 )
`

=
Main Index
52
Now subtracting Equation (3-6) from Equation (3-4):
(3-7)
This symmetric Equation (3-7) gives the reduced equations, which can be solved for the variables
{o}
m
,{o}
i
. Values of {o}
s
can then be recovered from Equation (3-2). However, this needs
rearrangement of the coefficients in the stiffness matrix. Hence, we do some more manipulation.
First, we combine Equation (3-2) with Equation (3-7):
(3-8)
Then we restore symmetry to Equation (3-8) by first premultiplying the first equation of Equation (3-8)
by and adding the resulting equation to the second part of Equation (3-8), and then,
premultiplying the first equation of Equation (3-8) by . This results in
(3-9)
If we solve this modified Equation (3-9), which is symmetric, the resulting solution vector will satisfy the
constraint equations.
For large problems, the modifications implied by Equation (3-9) will take a substantial amount of
computer time, if performed on the global stiffness matrix.
K
mm
K
mi
K
i m
K
i i
K
ms
A 0
K
i s
A 0
A
T
K
sm
A
T
K
si
0 0
A
T
K
ss
A 0
0 0
+
\ .
|
|
| |
o
m
o
i
)
`

F
m
A
T
F
s
F
i
)
`

=
I | |
0
0
A | |
K
mm
K
ms
A A
T
K
sm
A
T
K
ss
A + ( )
K
i m
K
i s
A ( )
0
K
mi
A
T
K
si
( )
K
i i
o
s
o
m
o
i
)

`

0
F
m
A
T
F
s
F
i )

`

=
A | |
T
K
ss
| |
K
ss
K
ss
A
T
K
ss
0
K
ss
A
K
mm
K
ms
A A
T
K
sm
2A
T
K
ss
A + ( )
K
i m
K
i s
A ( )
0
K
mi
A
T
K
si
( )
K
i i
o
s
o
m
o
i
)

`

0
F
m
A
T
F
s
F
i )

`

=
Main Index
53
CHAPTER 3
Linear analysis is based on the following assumptions:
the structure is only subjected to small displacements when loads are applied.
the materials in the structure exhibit a linear relationship between stress and strain.
boundary conditions remain constant.
When these assumptions are violated, linear analysis is no longer valid and nonlinear effects must
be introduced.
Nonlinear problems are classified into three broad categories: geometric nonlinearity, material
nonlinearity, and boundary condition nonlinearity (contact).
Sources of Nonlinearity
Geometric Nonlinearity
Geometrically nonlinear problems involve large displacements; large means that the displacements
invalidate the small displacement assumptions inherent in the equations of linear analysis. For example,
consider a classical thin plate subject to a lateral load; if the deflection of the plates midplane is anything
close to the thickness of the plate, then the displacement is considered large and a linear analysis is
not applicable.
Another aspect of geometric nonlinear analysis involves follower forces. Consider a slender cantilever
beam subject to an initially vertical end load. The load is sufficient to cause large displacements.
In the deformed shape plot, the load is no longer vertical; it has followed the structure to its deformed
state. Capturing this behavior requires the iterative update techniques of nonlinear analysis.
For details on the finite element formulations for geometric nonlinearities, see Geometric Nonlinearities
(Ch. 4).
Material Nonlinearity
Recall that linear analysis assumes a linear relationship between stress and strain.
Material nonlinear analysis solution sequences can be used to analyze problems in static analysis where
the stress-strain relationship of the material is nonlinear. In addition, large strain situations can be
analyzed. Examples of material nonlinearities include metal plasticity, materials such as soils and
Main Index
54
concrete, or rubbery materials (where the stress-strain relationship is nonlinear elastic). Various plasticity
theories such as von Mises or Tresca (for metals), and Mohr-Coulomb or Drucker-Prager (for frictional
materials such as soils or concrete) can be selected by the user. Three choices for the definition of
subsequent yield surfaces are available in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear. They are isotropic hardening,
kinematic hardening, or combined isotropic and kinematic hardening. With such generality, most plastic
material behavior, with or without the Bauschinger effect, can be modeled.
For details on the finite element formulations for material nonlinearities, see Material Nonlinearities
(Ch. 4).
Contact
Contact problems exhibit nonlinear effects due to changes in boundary conditions. If there is a change in
constraints due to contact during loading, the problem may be classified as a boundary nonlinear problem
and would require CGAP elements or the BCONTACT, BCBODY, or BSURF option. The use of GAP
elements is discouraged in SOL 600.
For details on the finite element formulations for boundary nonlinearities, see Nonlinear Boundary
Conditions (Ch. 4).
Subcases, Load Increments, and Iterations
In a nonlinear analysis, loading is typically applied in subcases both to allow for the nonlinear behavior
to occur in the numerical processing and to give you control over restarts if problems (divergence,
excessive iterations, etc.) occur during the solution. The subcase structure in a nonlinear analysis differs
from a typical linear analysis. In a nonlinear analysis, subcases are cumulative; that is, the loads and
boundary conditions at the end of a subcase are the initial conditions for the next subcase. Superposition
cannot be applied in nonlinear problems. In general, a different loading sequence (reordering of the
subcases) requires a complete new analysis.
Function of the Subcase
In a nonlinear static analysis, you first determine the total value of loading to be applied at a particular
stage of the analysis. This loading value is selected with the LOAD Case Control command specifying a
load set ID that exists in the Bulk Data. In this case, the subcase functions as a type of landmark in the
loading history. It may be an expected point or a point at which the nature of the loading changes (for
example, first applying an internal pressure loading and then an axial loading on a cylinder). The subcase
is a major partition of the loading history. The loading history should be divided into subcases since this
provides you with more control over the solution and restart strategy.
Load Increments
In the loading history, the total change of loading applied during a subcase can be subdivided into smaller
parts to allow the solution to converge. These subdivisions within a subcase are termed load increments.
Load increments are specified in Patran on the Load Increments subform and are defined in the Bulk Data
file by the NINC field on the NLPARM entry. Selecting a number of increments divides the total load
change applied during the subcase into NINC equal parts for FIXED load incrementation, but only
Main Index
55
CHAPTER 3
provides the initial load increment size in the case of adaptive load incrementation. See NLPARM and
NLAUTO Bulk Data entries for more details. Load increments may be saved for restart if desired.This is
important because sometimes the solution does not converge during a subcase. If the loading is divided
into increments and these values are saved to the database, the restart strategy can continue from a
loading value closer to the problem value than having to go back to the previous subcase.
Iterations
In the incremental solution process, the unbalanced forces that occur during a load increment are
reintroduced internally into the solution until the solution has converged. The process of redistributing
the unbalanced force within a load increment is known as an iteration. The iteration is the lowest level
of the solution process. Iterations continue within a load increment until the solution converges or any
of the specified convergence parameters are exceeded.
Nonlinear Equation Solution
A linear finite element system is expressed as:
(3-10)
And a nonlinear system is expressed as:
(3-11)
where is the elastic stiffness matrix, is the tangent stiffness matrix in a nonlinear system, is
the displacement vector, is the applied load vector, and is the residual.
The linearized system is converted to a minimization problem expressed as:
(3-12)
For linear structural problems, this process can be considered as the minimization of the potential energy.
The minimum is achieved when
(3-13)
The function decreases most rapidly in the direction of the negative gradient.
(3-14)
One method to solve both linear and nonlinear problems is to use iterations. The objective of the
iterative techniques is to minimize the function, , without decomposing the stiffness matrix. In the
simplest methods,
(3-15)
Ku F =
K
T
Au F R r = =
K K
T
Au
F r
u ( ) 1 2u
T
Ku u
T
F =
u K
1
F =
V u ( ) F Ku r = =
u
k 1 +
u
k
o
k
r
k
+ =
Main Index
56
where
(3-16)
The problem is that the gradient directions are too close, which results in poor convergence.
An improved method led to the conjugate gradient method, in which
(3-17)
(3-18)
The trick is to choose to be conjugate to . Hence, the name conjugate gradient
methods. Note the elegance of these methods is that the solution may be obtained through a series of
matrix multiplications and the stiffness matrix never needs to be decomposed.
Certain problems which are ill-conditioned can lead to poor convergence. The introduction of a
preconditioner has been shown to improve convergence. The next key step is to choose an appropriate
preconditioner which is both effective as well as computationally efficient. The easiest is to use the
diagonal of the stiffness matrix. The incomplete Cholesky method has been shown to be very effective
in reducing the number of required iterations.
o
k
r
k
T
r
k
r
k
T
Kr
k
=
u
k 1 +
u
k
o
k
P
k
+ =
o
k
P
k
T
r
k 1
P
k
T
KP
k
=
P
k
K P
1
P
2
. P
k 1
, , ,
Main Index
57
CHAPTER 3
SOL 600 Analysis Procedure
Figure 3-4 is a diagram showing the flow sequence of the nonlinear solution sequence of SOL 600. This
diagram shows the input phase, equivalent nodal load vector calculation, matrix assembly, matrix
solution, stress recovery, and output phase. It also indicates load incrementation and iteration within a
load increment.
Figure 3-4 MSC Nastran Advanced Nonlinear Flow Diagram
No
No
Yes
Yes
Equivalent Nodal
Load Vector
Matrix Assembly
Input Phase:
Read Input Data
Space Allocation
Data Check
Matrix Solution
Stress Recovery
Convergence
Output Phase
Next
Increment
Stop
Incremental
Loads
T
i
m
e

S
t
e
p

L
o
o
p
I
t
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

L
o
o
p
Main Index
58
The finite element formulation leads to a set of linear equations. The solution is obtained through
numerically decomposing the system or obtaining the solution using iterations. Because of the wide
range of problems encountered with MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, there are several solution
procedures available.
Most analyses result in a system which is real, symmetric, and positive definite. While this is true for
linear structural problems, assuming adequate boundary conditions, it is not true for all analyses. MSC
Nastran Implicit Nonlinear has two main modes of solvers direct and iterative. Each of these modes has
two families of solvers, based upon the storage procedure. While all of these solvers can be used if there
is adequate memory, only a subset uses spill logic for an out-of-core solution. Finally, there are
classifications based upon nonsymmetric and complex systems. This is summarized below:
Direct Methods
Traditionally, the solution of a system of linear equations was accomplished using direct solution
procedures, such as Cholesky decomposition and the Crout reduction method. These methods are usually
reliable, in that they give accurate results for virtually all problems at a predictable cost. For positive
definite systems, there are no computational difficulties. For poorly conditioned systems, however, the
results can degenerate but the cost remains the same. The problem with these direct methods is that a
large amount of memory (or disk space) is required, and the computational costs become very large.
Direct
Profile
Iterative
Sparse
Multifrontal Sparse
(default) CASI
Solver Option 0 2 8 9
Real Symmetric Yes Yes Yes Yes
Real Nonsymmetric Yes No Yes No
Complex Symmetric Yes No Yes No
Complex nonsymmetric No No Yes No
Out-of-core Yes No Yes Yes
Possible problem with poorly conditioned
systems
No Yes No Yes
Can be used in Parallel Yes Yes Yes No
Main Index
59
CHAPTER 3
Iterative Methods
Iterative solvers are a viable alternative for the solution of large systems. These iterative methods are
based on preconditioned conjugate gradient methods. The single biggest advantage of these iterative
methods is that they allow the solution of very large systems at a reduced computational cost. This is true
regardless of the hardware configuration. The disadvantage of these methods is that the solution time is
dependent not only upon the size of the problem, but also the numerical conditioning of the system. A
poorly conditioned system leads to slow convergence hence increased computation costs.
When discussing iterative solvers, two related concepts are introduced: fractal dimension, and
conditioning number. Both are mathematical concepts, although the fractal dimension is a simpler
physical concept. The fractal dimension, the range of which is between 1 and 3, is a measure of the
chunkiness of the system. For instance, a beam has a fractal dimension of 1, while a cube has a fractal
dimension of 3.
The conditioning number is related to the ratio of the lowest to the highest eigenvalues of the system.
This number is also related to the singularity ratio, which is reported in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
output when using a direct solution procedure. In problems involving beams or shells, the conditioning
number is typically small, because of large differences between the membrane and bending stiffnesses.
Preconditioners
The choice of preconditioner can substantially improve the conditioning of the system, which in turn
reduces the number of iterations required. While all positive definite systems with degrees of freedom
converges in iterations, a well conditioned system typically converges in less than the square root of
iterations.
The available preconditioners available in the sparse iterative solver are
The sparse iterative solver requires an error criteria to determine when convergence occurs. The default
is to use an error criteria based upon the ratio between the residuals in the solution and the reaction force.
After obtaining the solution of the linear equations evaluate:
(3-19)
The residual from the solution procedure is:
(3-20)
Preconditioner Sparse
Diagonal Yes
Scaled Diagonal Yes
Incomplete Cholesky Yes
N
N
N
u
c
Ku
C
F
C
=
Res F
A
F
C
F
A
Ku
C
= =
Main Index
60
If the system is linear ( does not change) and exact numerics are preformed, then .
Because this is an iterative method the residual is nonzero, but reduces in size with further iterations.
Convergence is obtained when
(3-21)
The tolerance is specified through the NLPARM, TSTEPNL, NLAUTO, and NLSTRAT options.
Iterative Solvers
In MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, two iterative solvers are available: one using a sparse matrix
technique and the other an element-based CASI technique. This method is advantageous for different
classes of problems.
There exist certain types of analyses for which the iterative solver is not appropriate. These types include:
Elastic analysis
Explicit creep analysis
Eigenvalue analysis
Use of gap elements
Elastic or explicit creep analysis involves repeated solutions using different load vectors. When a direct
solver is used, this is performed very efficiently using back substitution. However, when an iterative
solver is used, the stiffness matrix is never decomposed, and the solution associated with a new load
vector requires a complete re-solution.
The sparse iterative solver can exhibit poor convergence when shell elements or Herrmann
incompressible elements used for hyperelastic analyses are present.
Storage Methods
In general, a system of linear equations with N unknown is represented by a matrix of size N by , or
variables. Fortunately, in finite element or finite difference analyses, the system is banded and not
all of the entries need to be stored. This substantially reduces the memory (storage) requirements as well
as the computational costs.
In the finite element method, additional zeroes often exist in the system, which results in a partially full
bandwidth. Hence, the profile (or skyline) method of storage is advantageous. This profile storage method
is used in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear to store the stiffness matrix. When many zeroes exist within
the bandwidth, the sparse storage methods can be quite advantageous. Such techniques do not store the
zeroes, but require additional memory to store the locations of the nonzero values. You can determine the
sparsity of the system (before decomposition) by examining the statements:
Number of nodal entries excluding fill in x
Number of nodal entries including fill in y
K Res 0 =
Res Reac TOL <
N
N
2
Main Index
61
CHAPTER 3
If the ratio ( ) is large, then the sparse matrix storage procedure is advantageous.
Nonsymmetric Systems
The following analyses types result in nonsymmetric systems of equations:
Inclusion of convective terms in heat transfer analysis
Coriolis effects in transient dynamic analysis
Fluid mechanics
Soil analysis
Follower force stiffness
Frictional contact
The first three always result in a nonsymmetric system. The last three can be solved either fully using
the nonsymmetric solver, or (approximately) using a symmetric solver. The nonsymmetric problem uses
twice as much memory for storing the stiffness matrix. Approximations using the symmetric solver may
require more iterations.
Specifying the Solution Procedure
Selection of the solution procedure is made through the solver related parameters (ISOLVER, ISYMM,
NONPOS, MBYTE, MAXITER, PREVITER, PRECOND, CJTOL) on the NLSTRAT Bulk Data entry
or the parameter MARCSOLV.
Other Factors Affecting Performance
.Multifrontal Solver Memory Reduction
In order to efficiently run large analyses using scratch files, the out-of-core behavior of the multi-frontal
sparse solver (Marc Solver 8) has been updated. These updates include:
1. Adding functionality to use out-of-core assembly of the operator matrix.
2. Utilizing the RAM, which affects both the in-core and out-of-core assembly of the operator
matrix, allocated for the solver more efficiently.
3. Rewriting the code applying the multi-point constraint equations such that the amount of scratch
file access is tremendously reduced. This is active in solver by default. If needed, it can be
switched off by using the parameter feature, 4900.
x y
Note: For very large analyses, it may be advantageous to set the third entry of the OOC
parameter to 1, in which case the solver memory is also used to store some nodal vectors,
so that the amount of RAM needed for the analysis is decreased considerably. This is
activated using Bulk Data PARAM,MARCOOCC,2.
Main Index
62
Large Models
Translator speed enhancements have been implemented for certain types of large models. These are not
necessary for small or medium sized models but can be requested using the following parameters:
Rigid Element Use
The majority of SOL 600 models using MPC's, RBE2, RBE3, RBAR, RSPLINE, RSSCON and RTRPLT
to run to completion without difficulty. But should your analysis exit with a Marc exit code 2011, have a
very low singularity ratio, or experience convergence problems (for example Marc exit code 3015), then
there are several potential workarounds that you can try to attempt to get the problem to run.
First, try the Bulk Data PARAM,MARMPCHK,3. This will cause Marc to attempt to rearrange these
entities if possible. If that does not work, and RBE3s are present, they can be changed to MPCs using
Bulk Data PARAM,MARCRBE3,0. If there are still problems, all rigid elements can be changed to stiff
beams using bulk data parameters PARAM,MARCRIGD,1. If the model still does not run, check all rigid
elements carefully and run the model using MSC Nastran SOL 101 and/or 106, replace contact with
MPCs or springs between the surfaces, determine from the f06 file if any negative or very large terms on
the main diagonal of the decomposed stiffness matrix exist, and add CELAS or SPC to ground for these
degrees of freedom. If the MSC Nastran run is satisfactory but SOL 600 still fails, the only other solution
is to remodel the rigid elements and MPCs.
An alternative approach is to add the AUTOMSET option, which is triggered by
PARAM,AUTOMSET,YES in the bulk data. The use of the AUTOMSET option will increase the
simulation cost, so the MARCMPCHK,3 is preferred. If the PARAM,MARMPCHK is also included in
the model, it will be ignored.
Improved Contact
MPC's and rigid elements combined with contact and/or the same node in more than one contact body
sometimes caused the Marc portion of SOL 600 to fail. If Marc exit 2011 or convergence problems are
encountered with such models, you should try optimized contact. To invoke optimized contact from MSC
Nastran, set field 6 of each BCBODY entry with flexible contact to 2. In addition, set field 3 of each
SLAVE: continuation line (the next line after all lines with SLAVE) to 2. In turn, this sets Marc's
CONTACT entry 4th datablock, 3rd field to 2 and each CONTACT TABLE 3rd datablock 8th entry to 2
respectively.
References
For selecting the solution procedure in Patran, see Defining the Solution Type in Patran (Ch. 7).
Detailed discussions and an example of optimized are provided in Chapter 8 of the Marc Theory
and User Information Manual (Volume A of the Marc documentation) - see text before and after
Figure 8-4.
PARAM,MSPEEDSE,1 speeds up element processing
PARAM,MSPEEDP4,1 speeds up PLOAD4 processing particularly for solids
Main Index
63
CHAPTER 3
Iteration Methods
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) offers four iterative procedures that are employed to solve
the equilibrium problem at each load increment: Newton-Raphson, Modified Newton-Raphson,
Newton-Raphson with strain correction, and a secant procedure.
Full Newton-Raphson Algorithm
The basis of the Newton-Raphson method in structural analysis is the requirement that equilibrium must
be satisfied. Consider the following set of equations:
(3-22)
where is the nodal-displacement vector, is the external nodal-load vector, is the internal
nodal-load vector (following from the internal stresses), and is the tangent-stiffness matrix. The
internal nodal-load vector is obtained from the internal stresses as
(3-23)
In this set of equations, both and are functions of . In many cases, is also a function of (for
example, if follows from pressure loads, the nodal load vector is a function of the orientation of the
structure). The equations suggest that use of the full Newton-Raphson method is appropriate.
Suppose that the last obtained approximate solution is termed , where indicates the iteration
number. Equation (3-22) can then be written as
(3-24)
This equation is solved for and the next appropriate solution is obtained by
and (3-25)
Solution of this equation completes one iteration, and the process can be repeated. The subscript
denotes the increment number representing the state . Unless stated otherwise, the subscript
is dropped with all quantities referring to the current state.
The full Newton-Raphson method is the default in MSC Nastran Advanced Nonlinear (see Figure 3-5).
The full Newton-Raphson method provides good results for most nonlinear problems, but is expensive
for large, three-dimensional problems when the direct solver is used. The computational problem is less
significant when the iterative solvers are used. It is also the best method for contact problems.
K u ( )ou F R u ( ) =
u F R
K
R |
T
o v d
V
}
elem
=
R K u F u
F
ou
i
i
K u
n 1 +
i 1
( )ou
i
F R u
n 1 +
i 1
( ) =
ou
i
Au
i
Au
i 1
ou
i
+ = u
n 1 +
i
u
n 1 +
i 1
ou
i
+ =
n
t n =
n 1 +
Main Index
Iteration Methods
64
Figure 3-5 Full Newton-Raphson
Modified Newton-Raphson Algorithm
The modified Newton-Raphson method is similar to the full Newton-Raphson method, but does not
reassemble the stiffness matrix in each iteration.
(3-26)
Figure 3-6 Modified Newton-Raphson
The process is computationally inexpensive because the tangent stiffness matrix is formed and
decomposed once. From then on, each iteration requires only forming the right-hand side and a backward
ou1
Au1 Au2 Au3
r1
Solution Converged
Incremental Displacements
0
Fn + 1
Fn
Force
K u
0
( )ou
i
F R u
i 1
( ) =
r1
ou1
Solution Converged
Force
Fn + 1
Fn
0
Au1 Au2 Au5
Main Index
65
CHAPTER 3
substitution in the solution process. However, the convergence is only linear, and the potential for a very
large number of iterations, or even nonconvergence, is quite high.
If contact or sudden material nonlinearities occur, reassembly cannot be avoided. The modified
Newton-Raphson method is effective for large-scale, only mildly nonlinear problems. When the iterative
solver is employed, simple back substitution is not possible, making this process ineffective. In such
cases, the full Newton-Raphson method should be used instead.
If the load is applied incrementally, MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear recalculates the stiffness matrix at
the start of each increment or at selected increments, as specified.
Strain Correction Method
The strain correction method is a variant of the full Newton method. This method uses a linearized strain
calculation, with the nonlinear portion of the strain increment applied as an initial strain increment in
subsequent iterations and recycles. This method is appropriate for shell and beam problems in which
rotations are large, but membrane stresses are small.
In such cases, rotation increments are usually much larger than the strain increments, and, hence, the
nonlinear terms can dominate the linear terms. After each displacement update, the new strains are
calculated from and which yield
This expression is linear except for the last term. Since the iteration procedures start with a fully
linearized calculation of the displacement increments, the nonlinear contributions yield strain increments
inconsistent with the calculated displacement increments in the first iteration. These errors give rise to
either incorrect plasticity calculations (when using small strain plasticity method), or, in the case of
elastic material behavior, yields erroneous stresses. These stresses, in their turn, have a dominant
effect on the stiffness matrix for subsequent iterations or increments, which then causes the relatively
poor performance.
The remedy to this problem is simple and effective. The linear and nonlinear part of the strain increments
are calculated separately and only the linear part of
is used for calculation of the stresses. The nonlinear part
(3-27)
is used as an initial strain in the next iteration or increment, which contributes to the residual load
vector defined by
E
o|
i 1 +
u
i
ou o = u
i
( )
E
o|
i 1 +
E
o|
i
=
1
2
--- o ( u
o | ,
ou
| o ,
) u
k o ,
i
ou
k | ,
ou
k o ,
u
k|
i
ou
k o ,
ou
k o ,
+ + + + +
E
l
o|
( )

E
o|
i
=
1
2
--- ou
o | ,
ou
| o ,
+ ( ) u
k o ,
i
ou
k | ,
ou
k o ,
u
k|
i
+ + +
E
o|
nl
( )
i 1 + 1
2
--- ou
k o ,
ou
k | ,
=
Main Index
Iteration Methods
66
(3-28)
This strain correction term is defined by
(3-29)
Since the displacement and strain increments are now calculated in a consistent way, the plasticity and/or
equilibrium errors are greatly reduced. The performance of the strain correction method is not as good if
the displacement increments are (almost) completely prescribed, which is not usually the case. Finally,
note that the strain correction method can be considered as a Newton method in which a different stiffness
matrix is used.
The Secant Method
The Secant method used by MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is based on the Davidon-rank one,
quasi-Newton update. The Secant method is similar to the modified Newton-Raphson method in that the
stiffness matrix is calculated only once per increment. The residual is modified to improve the rate of
convergence. When the iterative solver is employed, simple back substitution is not possible, making this
process ineffective. Use the full Newton-Raphson method instead.
Figure 3-7 Secant Newton
The quasi-Newton requirement is that a stiffness matrix for iteration could be found based on the
right-hand sides of iterations, and , as follows
(3-30)
R
C
o
k | ,
X
k o ,
L
o|o
AE
o
nl
V d
V
0
}
=
K u
n 1 +
i
( )ou
i
F R u
n 1 +
i
( ) R
C
=
r1
Fn + 1
Fn
Force
ou1
Au1 Au4
i
i i 1
K
i
ou
i
F R u
n 1 +
i
( ) | | F R u
n 1 +
i 1
( ) | | r
i
r
i 1
= =
Main Index
67
CHAPTER 3
This problem does not uniquely determine . The Davidon-rank one update uses an additive form on
the inverse of the tangent stiffness matrix as follows:
(3-31)
Specifying the Iteration Method
Selection of the iteration method in MSC Nastran is made through the IKMETH parameter on the
NLSTRAT Bulk Data entry and on the NLPARM entry.
References
For selecting the iteration method in Patran, see Subcase Parameters (Ch. 7).
K
i
K
i
( )
1
K
0
( )
1 ou
i 1
K
0
( )
1
r
i
r
i 1
( ) | | ou
i 1
K
0
( )
1
r
i
r
i 1
( ) | |
T
ou
i 1
K
0
( )
1
r
i
r
i 1
( ) | |
T
r
i
r
i 1
( )
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + =
Main Index
Load Increment Size
68
Load Increment Size
Selecting a proper load step (time step) increment is an important aspect of a nonlinear solution scheme.
Large steps often lead to many recycles per increment and, if the step is too large, it can lead to
inaccuracies and nonconvergence. On the other hand, using too small steps is inefficient.
Fixed Load Incrementation
When a fixed load stepping scheme is used, it is important to select an appropriate load step size that
captures the loading history and allows for convergence within a reasonable number of recycles. For
complex load histories, it is often necessary to break up the analysis into separate load cases with
different step sizes. For fixed stepping, there is an option to have the load step automatically cut back in
case of failure to obtain convergence. When an increment diverges, the intermediate deformations after
each recycle can show large fluctuations and the final cause of program exit can be any of the following:
maximum number of recycles reached (exit 3002), elements going inside out (exit 1005 or 1009) or, in a
contact analysis, nodes sliding off a rigid contact body (exit 2400). These deformations are normally not
visible as post results (there is a feature to allow for the intermediate results to be available on the post
file, see the POST option). If the cutback feature is activated and one of these failures occurs, the state of
the analysis at the end of the previous increment is restored from a copy kept in memory or disk, and the
increment is subdivided into a number of subincrements. The step size is halved until convergence is
obtained or the user-specified number of cutbacks has been performed. Once a subincrement is
converged, the analysis continues to complete the rest of the original increment. No results are written to
the post file during subincrementation. When the original increment is finished, the calculation continues
to the next increment with the original increment count maintained. These issues are avoided by using
the AUTO increment options (AUTO on the NLPARM entry).
Adaptive Load (AUTO) Incrementation
In many nonlinear analyses, it is useful to have MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear figure out the
appropriate load step size automatically. The basic scheme for automatic load incrementation is NLAUTO
which is appropriate for most applications and is the default in SOL 600. In addition, so-called arc-
length methods are available which are designed for applications like post buckling and snap-through
analysis.
NLAUTO Basic Load Incrementation Scheme
The scheme appropriate for most applications is NLAUTO (Marc AUTO STEP). The primary control of
the load step is based upon the number of recycles needed to obtain convergence. There are a number of
optional user-specified physical criteria that can be used to additionally control the load step, but they are
rarely used or required. The NLAUTO defaults are appropriate for most models and the NLAUTO entry
is not required. For the recycle based option, the user specifies a desired number of recycles. This number
is used as a target value for the load stepping scheme. If the number of recycles needed to obtain
convergence exceeds the desired number, the load step size is reduced, the recycle counter is reset to zero
and the increment is performed again with the new load step. The factor with which the time step is cut
back defaults to 1.2 and can be specified by you. The load step for the next increment is increased if the
Main Index
69
CHAPTER 3
number of recycles required in the current increment is less than the desired number. The same factor
that is used for decreasing the time step is used for increasing it. The load step is never increased during
an increment. In addition, the same type of cut-back feature for fixed load stepping, as described in Load
Increments, 54, is available for this scheme as well.
There are some exceptions to the basic scheme outlined above. If an increment is consistently converging
with the original load step and the number of recycles exceeds the desired number, the number of
recycles is allowed to go beyond the desired number until convergence or up to the user specified
maximum number. The time step is then decreased for the next increment. An increment is determined
to be converging if the convergence ratio was decreasing in three previous recycles.
Special rules also apply in a contact analysis. For quasi-static problems, the NLAUTO option is designed
to only use the automated penetration check option (see CONTACT option, 7th field of 2nd data block;
option 3 is always used). Even if you flag the increment splitting penetration check option, MSC Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear internally converts it to the automated penetration check. During the recycles, the
contact status can keep changing (new nodes come in contact, nodes slide to new segments, separate
etc.). Whenever the contact status changes during an increment, a new set of contact constraints are
incorporated into the equilibrium equations and more recycles are necessary in order to find equilibrium.
These extra recycles, which are solely due to contact changes, are not counted when the comparison is
made to the desired number for determining if the load step needs to be decreased within the increment.
Thus, only true Newton-Raphson iterations are taken into account. For the load step of the next
increment, the accumulated number of recycles during the previous increment is used. This ensures that
the time step is not increased when there are many changes in contact during the previous increment.
In addition to allowing MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear to use the number of recycles for automatically
controlling the step size for NLAUTO, user-specified physical criteria can be used for controlling the
step size. You can specify the maximum allowed incremental change within certain ranges for specific
quantities during an increment. The quantities available are displacements, rotations, stresses, strains,
strain energy, and temperature (in thermal or thermomechanically coupled analyses). These criteria can
be utilized in two ways. By default, they are used as limits, which means that the load step is decreased
if a criterion is violated during the current increment, but they do not influence the decision to change
the load step for the next increment (that is, only the actual number of recycles versus desired number of
recycles controls the load step for the next increment). The criteria can also be used as targets; in which
case, they are used as the main means for controlling the time step for the current and next increments.
If the calculated values of the criteria are higher than the user-specified values the time step is scaled
down. If the obtained values for a converged increment are less than the user-specified, the time step is
scaled up. The scale factor used is the ratio between the actual value and the target value and this factor
is limited by user-specified minimum and maximum factors (defaults to 0.1 and 10 respectively). If this
type of load step control is used together with the recycle based control, the time step can be reduced due
to whichever criterion that is violated. The decision to increase the step size for the next increment is
based upon the physical criteria.
In many analyses, it is convenient to obtain post file results at specified time intervals. This is naturally
obtained with a fixed load stepping scheme but not with an automatic scheme. Traditionally, the post
output frequency is given as every n
th
increment. With the NLAUTO procedure, you can request post
Main Index
Load Increment Size
70
output to be obtained at equally spaced time intervals. In this case, the time step is temporarily modified
to exactly reach the time for output. The time step is then restored in the following increment.
The NLAUTO option also has an artificial damping feature available by default for structured statics
analyses. If the time step is decreased to below the user-specified minimum time step, MSC Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear normally stops with exit number 3015; but if the artificial damping feature is
activated, the analysis is continued with a smaller time step. The solution is stabilized by adding a
factored lumped mass matrix to the stiffness matrix and modifying the force vector consistently. This
artificial stabilization is turned off once the time step increases above the minimum time step. If the
feature is used, it might be useful to write post file results at fixed time interval; otherwise, many
increments might appear on the post file even for a small time period. The critical parameter for this
feature is the (artificial) mass density, is normally selected automatically by the program. Use of the
artificial damping feature allows solution of many post-buckling problems without the need to use
arc-length methods (see below).
The defaults of the NLAUTO option are carefully chosen to be adequate in a wide variety of applications.
There are cases, however, when the settings may need to be modified. Assume that the default settings
are used, which means that the recycle based control is active with an initial load of one per cent of the
total. If the structure is weakly nonlinear, convergence is obtained in just a few recycles and the for
successive increments get progressively larger. This can lead to problems if the initially weakly nonlinear
structure suddenly exhibits stronger nonlinearities; for instance, occurrence of plasticity or parts coming
into contact. Possible remedies to this problem include:
decrease the time step scale factor from 1.2 to a smaller number so the step size does not grow
so rapidly;
use a physical criterion like maximum increment of displacements to limit the load step;
use the maximum time step to limit large steps;
decrease the desired and maximum number of recycles to make the scheme more prone to
decrease the load step if more recycles are needed.
Another situation is if the structure is highly nonlinear and convergence is slow. In this case, it may be
necessary to increase the desired number and maximum number of recycles. In general, there is a close
connection between the convergence tolerances used and the desired number and maximum number of
recycles. In some rare cases, it may be beneficial to use one or more physical criteria; for example, the
increment of plastic strain as targets for controlling the load step.
Arc-Length (AUTO INCREMENT) Methods Formulation
The solution methods described above involve an iterative process to achieve equilibrium for a fixed
increment of load. None of them have the ability to deal with problems involving snap-through and
snap-back behavior except the NLAUTO method with artificial damping. An equilibrium path as shown
in Figure 3-8 displays the features possibly involved.
Main Index
71
CHAPTER 3
Figure 3-8 Snap-through Behavior
The issue at hand is the existence of multiple displacement vectors, , for a given applied force vector,
. This method provides the means to ensure that the correct displacement vector is found. If you have
a load controlled problem, the solution tends to jump from point 2 to 6 whenever the load increment after
2 is applied. If you have a displacement controlled problem, the solution tends to jump from 3 to 5
whenever the displacement increment after 3 is applied. Note that these problems appear essentially in
quasi-static analyses. In dynamic analyses, the inertia forces help determine equilibrium in a snap-
through problem.
Thus, in a quasi-static analysis sometimes it is impossible to find a converged solution for a particular
load (or displacement increment):
This is illustrated in Figure 3-8 where both the phenomenon of snap-through (going from point 2 to 3)
and snap-back (going from point 3 to 4) require a solution procedure which can handle these problems
without going back along the same equilibrium curve.
As shown in Figure 3-9, assume that the solution is known at point A for load level . For arriving at
point B on the equilibrium curve, you either reduce the step size or adapt the load level in the iteration
process. To achieve this end, the equilibrium equations are augmented with a constraint equation
expressed typically as the norm of incremental displacements. Hence, this allows the load level to change
from iteration to iteration until equilibrium is found.
u
5
4
3
2
6
F
Force
Displacements
u
F
n 1 +
F
n
F AF =
n
F
Main Index
Load Increment Size
72
Figure 3-9 Intersection of Equilibrium Curve with Constraining Surface
The augmented equation, , describes the intersection of the equilibrium curve with an auxiliary
surface for a particular size of the path parameter :
(3-32)
Variations of the parameter moves the surface whose intersection with the equilibrium curve
generates a sequence of points along the curve. The distance between two intersection points, denoted
with and , denoted by l is the so-called arc-length.
Linearization of equation Equation (3-33) around point A in Figure 3-9 yields:
(3-33)
where:
(3-34)
(3-35)
(3-36)
(3-37)
F
n
F
n 1 +
F
A
B
r
u
g
c u , ( )
g q
r u , ( ) F R u ( ) 0 = =
c u , ( ) g u , ( ) Aq 0 = =
q r
q
0
q
K P
n
T
n
0
ou
o
)
`

r
r
0
)
`

=
K
cr
cu
------ : P
cr
c
------ = =
n
T cc
cu
------ : n
0
cc
c
------ = =
r F R =
r
0
g u , ( ) Aq =
Main Index
73
CHAPTER 3
It can be noted that a standard Newton-Raphson solution procedure is obtained if the constraint condition
is not imposed. The use of the constraint equation causes a loss of the banded system of equations which
would have been obtained if only the matrix was used. Instead of solving the set of equations
iteratively, the block elimination process is applied.
Consider the residual at iteration to which the fraction of load level corresponds
(3-38)
The residual for some variation of load level, , becomes
(3-39)
which can be written as:
(3-40)
where (3-41)
and (3-42)
Notice that does not depend on the load level. The equation above essentially establishes the
influence of a change in the load level during one iteration on the change in displacement increment
for that iteration. After one iteration is solved, this equation is used to determine the change in the load
level such that the constraint is followed. There are several arc-length methods corresponding to
different constraints.
Among them, the most well-known arc-length method is one proposed by Crisfield, in which the iterative
solution in displacement space follows a spherical path centered around the beginning of the increment.
This requirement is translated in the formula:
(3-43)
where l is the arc length. The above equation with the help of Equation (3-46) and Equation (3-25) is
applied as:
(3-44)
The equation above is interpreted with and in the prediction phase while retaining the
full form of Equation (3-50) in the correction phase. Two solutions for are available. We choose the
one that maintains a positive angle of the displacement increment from one iteration to the next.
K N 1 +
i
i 1
r
i
i 1
( )
i 1
F R
i
u
i 1
( ) =
o
i
r
i
i 1
o
i
+ ( ) o
i
F r
i
i 1
( ) + =
ou
i
i 1
o
i
+ ( ) ou
i
i 1
( ) o
i
ou
*
i
+ =
ou
i
i 1
( ) K
i
( )
1
r =
ou
*
i
K
i
( )
1
F =
ou
*
i
o
i
c l
2
Au
i
Au
i
= =
ou
*
i
( )
T
ou
*
i
| | o
i
( )
2
2 Au
i 1
ou
i
i 1
( ) + ( )
T
ou
*
i
| | o
i
( ) + +
Au
i 1
ou
i
i 1
( ) + ( )
T
Au
i 1
ou
i
i 1
( ) + ( ) l
2
| | 0 =
i 1 = ou
1
0 =
o
Main Index
Load Increment Size
74
The two roots of this scalar equation are and . To avoid going back on the original
load-deflection curve, the angle between the incremental displacement vectors, and (before
and after the current iteration, respectively) should be positive. Two alternative values of (namely,
and corresponding to and are obtained and the cosine of two corresponding
angles ( and ) are given by
(3-45)
and (3-46)
Once again, the prediction phase is interpreted with and , while Equation (3-51) and
Equation (3-52) retain their full form in the correction phase.
As mentioned earlier, the appropriate root, or is that which gives a positive . In case
both the angles are positive, the appropriate root is the one closest to the linear solution given as:
(3-47)
Crisfields solution procedure, generalized to an automatic load incrementation process, has been
implemented in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear as one of the options using (NLPCI, NLSTRAT and
PARAM,MARCAUTO). Various components of this process are shown in Figure 3-10.
Figure 3-10 Crisfields Constant Arc Length
o
i
( )1 o
i
( )2
Au
i 1
Au
i
Au
i
Au
i
( )1 Au
i
( )2 o
i
( )1 o
i
( )2
|
1
|
2
|
1
cos
Au
n 1 +
i
( )
1
| |
T
Au
n 1 +
i 1
l
----------------------------------------------------- =
|
2
cos
Au
n 1 +
i
( )
2
| |
T
Au
n 1 +
i 1
l
----------------------------------------------------- =
i 1 = Au
n 1 +
0
Au
n
=
o
i
( )1 o
i
( )2 | cos
o
i Au
i 1
ou
i
+ ( ) Au
i 1
ou
i
+ ( ) l
2
2 Au
i 1
ou
i
+ ( )ou
*
i
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- =
ou
*
2
( )
Au
*
1
( )
0
Au
*
1
( )
r
1
ou
2
1
( ) K
2
1
f
2
=
F
Force
Incremental Displacement
Main Index
75
CHAPTER 3
The constraints in Equation (3-49) and Equation (3-50) are imposed at every iteration. Disadvantage of
the quadratic equation suggested by Crisfield is the introduction of an equation with two roots and thus
the need for an extra equation to solve the system for the calculated roots if two real roots exists. This
situation arises when the contribution (or ) is very large in comparison to the arc-length. This
can be avoided in most cases by setting sufficiently small values of the error tolerance on the residual
force. In case the above situation still persists despite the reduction of error tolerance, MSC Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear has two options to proceed:
1. To attempt to continue the analysis with the load increment used in the initial step of auto
increment process.
2. Use the increment resulting from the linear constraint for the load.
This is circumvented in Ramms procedure due to the linearization.
Another approach to impose the constraint is due to Ramm, who also makes use of a quadratic equation
to impose the constraint giving rise to the Riks-Ramm method. The difference is that while Crisfield
imposes the constraint as a quadratic equation, Ramm linearized the constraint.
Geometrically, the difference between the two methods is that the Crisfield method enforces the
correction on the curve of the augmented equation introducing no residual for the augmented equation.
Ramm takes the intersection between the linearizations of the curves which gives a residual of the
augmented equation for the next step. Both methods converge to the same solution, the intersection of
the two curves, unless approximations are made.
The Riks-Ramm constraint is linear, in that:
which results in a linear equation for :
Thus, the load parameter predictor is calculated as:
(3-48)
while during the corrector phase it is:
(3-49)
It is noted that in the definition of the constraint, the normalized displacement of the previous step is used
for the normal to the auxiliary surface . Thus, problems can arise if the step size is too big. In
Au
1
ou
1
c l
2
Au
n
Au
n 1 +
= =
o
Au
n
T
ou
i
o ou
*
i
+ ( ) l
2
=
o
n 1 +
1 Au
n
l Au
n
( )
T
K
i
( )
1
r
i
| |
Au
n
T
ou
*
1
( )
---------------------------------------------------------------------- =
o
n 1 +
i

Au
n 1 +
i
( )
T
K
i
( )
1
r
i
| |
Au
n 1 +
i
( )
T
ou
*
i
( )
---------------------------------------------------- =
cc
cu
------ n =
Main Index
Load Increment Size
76
situations with sharp curvatures in the solution path, the normal to the prediction may not find
intersections with the equilibrium curve. Note that the norm of the displacement increment during the
iterations is not constant in Riks-Ramm method.
In contact problems, sudden changes of the stiffness can be present (due to two bodies which are initially
not in contact suddenly make contact). Hence, a potential problem exists in the Riks-Ramm method if
the inner-product of the displacement due to the load vector and the displacement increment is
small. This could result in a very large value of the load increment for which convergence in the
subsequent iterations is difficult to achieve. Therefore, a modified predictor can be used resulting in a
modified Riks-Ramm procedure as:
(3-50)
where
(3-51)
This method effectively scales the load increment to be applied in the prediction and is found to be
effective for contact problems.
Refinements and Controls
The success of the methods depend on the suitable choice of the arc-length:
The initial value of the arc-length is calculated from the initial fraction of the load specified by you in
the following fashion:
(3-52)
(3-53)
In subsequent steps the arc-length can be reduced or increased at the start of a new load step depending
on the number of iterations in the previous step. This number of iterations in compared with the desired
number of iterations which is typically set to 3 or 5. The new arc-length is then given by:
(3-54)
Two control parameters exist to limit the maximum enlargement or the minimum reduction in the
arc-length.
ou
*
i
Au
n
A
1
l
n 1
ou
*
1
oou
*
1
| |
T
ou
1
ooAu
*
1
| |Au
*
1
------------------------------------------------------------------ =
o
Au
n
T
ou
*
i
Au
n
T
ou
*
i
-------------------------- =
C l
2
=
|
Kou |F R =
l
i ni
2
Au =
I
0
I
d
l
new
2
I
d
I
0
---- l
prev
2
=
Main Index
77
CHAPTER 3
(3-55)
In addition, the maximum value can be set to the load multiplier during a particular iteration. In general,
control on the limiting values with respect to the arc-length multiplier is preferred in comparison with
the maximum fraction of the load to be applied in the iteration since a solution is sought for a particular
value of the arc-length.
Also, attention must be paid to the following:
1. In order to tract snap-through problems, the method of allowing solution if the stiffness matrix
becomes nonpositive needs to be set.
2. The maximum number of iterations must be set larger than the desired number of iterations.
Specifying the Load Incrementation Method
Selection of the load incrementation method in MSC Nastran is made on the NLSTRAT (p. 2679) in the
MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide Bulk Data entry.
References
For selecting the load incrementation method in Patran, see Subcase Parameters (Ch. 7).
min
l
2
l
ini
2
------- max < <
Main Index
78
Three methods are available for determining if convergence is obtained on any given iteration: residual
force, displacement, and strain energy. You can select one of these three criteria for convergence or you
may specify a combination of residual and displacement. The AND combination signals that both
residual and displacement must be met, while the OR combination specifies that either one can satisfy
convergence criteria. If you are using residual there may be cases in which the force residuals are null in
which case is it necessary to switch over to displacement. An Autoswitching option (on by default)
allows for this switching. In addition you can specify that the convergence measures be in absolute terms,
in relative terms, or in both.
The default measure for convergence in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is residual which is based on
the magnitude of the maximum residual load compared to the maximum reaction force. This method is
appropriate since the residuals measure the out-of-equilibrium force, which should be minimized. This
technique is also appropriate for Newton methods, where zero-load iterations reduce the residual load.
The method has the additional benefit that convergence can be satisfied without iteration. You have
complete control over how convergence is defined through the Iterations Parameters form in Patran or
through the options on the NLSTRAT entry.
The basic procedures are outlined below.
1. RESIDUAL CHECKING
(3-56)
(3-57)
(3-58)
(3-59)
Where is the force vector, and is the moment vector. and are control tolerances.
indicates the component of with the highest absolute value. Residual checking has one
drawback. In some special problems, such as free thermal expansion, there are no reaction forces.
If the AUTOSW flag on the NLSTRAT entry is ON the program automatically uses displacement
checking in this cases.
2. DISPLACEMENT CHECKING
(3-60)
(3-61)
F
resi dual

F
react i on

-------------------------------- TOL
1
<
F
resi dual

F
react i on

-------------------------------- TOL
1
and <
M
resi dual

M
react i on

---------------------------------- TOL
2
<
F
resi dual

TOL
1
<
F
resi dual

TOL
1
and M
resi dual

TOL
2
< <
F M TOL
1
TOL
2
F

F
ou

Au

---------------- TOL
1
<
ou

Au

---------------- TOL
1
and <
o|

A|

---------------- TOL
2
<
Main Index
79
CHAPTER 3
(3-62)
(3-63)
where is the displacement increment vector, is the displacement iteration vector, is
the incremental rotation vector, and is the rotation iteration vector. With this method,
convergence is satisfied if the maximum displacement of the last iteration is small compared to
the actual displacement change of the increment. A disadvantage of this approach is that it results
in at least one iteration, regardless of the accuracy of the solution.
Figure 3-11 Displacement Control
3. STRAIN ENERGY CHECKING
This is similar to displacement testing where a comparison is made between the strain energy
of the latest iteration and the strain energy of the increment. With this method, the entire model
is checked.
(3-64)
where is the strain energy of the increment and is the correction to incremental strain
energy of the iteration. These energies are the total energies, integrated over the whole volume.
A disadvantage of this approach is that it results in at least one iteration, regardless of the accuracy
of the solution. The advantage of this method is that it evaluates the global accuracy as opposed
to the local accuracy associated with a single node.
Different problems require different schemes to detect the convergence efficiently and accurately. To do
this, the following combinations of residual checking and displacement checking are also available.
4. RESIDUAL OR DISPLACEMENT CHECKING
This procedure does convergence checking on both residuals (Procedure 1) and displacements
(Procedure 2). Convergence is obtained if one converges.
5. RESIDUAL AND DISPLACEMENT CHECKING
ou

TOL
1
<
ou

TOL
1
and o|

TOL
2
< <
Au ou A|
o|
F
u
ok
o1
o0
Correction to incremental displacements of ith iteration oi
Displacements at increment n u
n
o
i
o
j
j 0 =
i
---------------
s Tolerance
u
n 1 +
0
u
n 1 +
k 1 +
oE
AE
------- TOL
1
<
AE oE
Main Index
80
This procedure does a convergence check on both residuals and displacements (Procedure 4).
Convergence is achieved if both criteria converge simultaneously.
For problems where maximum reactions or displacements are extremely small (even close to the
round-off errors of computers), the convergence check based on relative values could be meaningless if
the convergence criteria chosen is based on these small values. It is necessary to check the convergence
with absolute values; otherwise, the analysis is prematurely terminated due to a nonconvergent solution.
Such situations are not predicable and usually happen at certain stages of an analysis. For example,
problems with stress free motion (rigid body motion or free thermal expansion) and small displacements
(springback or constraint thermal expansion) may need to check absolute value at some stage of the
analysis, as shown in the table below. However, it is also difficult to determine when to check the absolute
value and how small the absolute criterion value should be. In order to improve the robustness of an FE
analysis, MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear allows you to use the AUTOSW option specified on the
NLSTRAT entry to switch the convergence check scheme automatically if the above mentioned situation
occurs during the analysis. Using the AUTOSW option allows MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear to
automatically change the convergence check scheme to Procedure 4 if small reactions or displacements
are detected. This function can be deactivated by specifying an absolute value check as before.
.
Specifying Convergence Criteria
Selection of the convergence criteria in MSC Nastran is made through the convergence criteria
parameters on the NLPARM and NLSTRAT Bulk Data entries.
References
For selecting the load incrementation method in Patran, see Solution Parameters (Ch. 7).
Analysis Type
Convergence Variable
Displacement/
Rotation
Residual
Force/Torque
Strain Energy
Stress-free motion Yes No No
Springback No Yes No
Free Thermal Expansion Yes No No
Constraint Thermal Expansion No Yes Yes
Yes relative tolerance testing works.
No relative tolerance testing doesnt work.
Main Index
81
CHAPTER 3
Singularity Ratio
The singularity ratio, , is a measure of the conditioning of the system of linear equations. is related
to the conditioning number, , which is defined as the ratio between the highest and lowest eigenvalues
in the system. The singularity ratio is an upper bound for the inverse of the matrix conditioning number.
(3-65)
and establish the growth of errors in the solution process. If the errors on the right-hand side of the
equation are less than prior to the solution, the errors in the solution will be less than , with
(3-66)
The singularity ratio is a measure that is computed during the Crout elimination process of MSC Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear using the direct solver. In this process, a recursive algorithm redefines the
diagonal terms
(3-67)
where is a function of the matrix profile. is a diagonal of the k
th
degree of freedom. The singularity
ratio is defined as
(3-68)
If all and are positive, the singularity ratio indicates loss of accuracy during the Crout
elimination process. This loss of accuracy occurs for all positive definite matrices. The number of digits
lost during the elimination process is approximately equal to
(3-69)
The singularity ratio also indicates the presence of rigid body modes in the structure. In that case, the
elimination process produces zeros on the diagonal . Exact zeros never appear because of
numerical error; therefore, the singularity ratio is of the order
(3-70)
where is the accuracy of floating-point numbers used in the calculation. For most versions of MSC
Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, . If rigid body modes are present, is very small or negative. If
either a zero or a negative diagonal is encountered, execution of MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is
terminated because the matrix is diagnosed as being singular.
R R
C
1 R C s
C R
E o
o CE s
K
kk
k ( )
K
kk
k 1 ( )
K
mk
m i =
k 1
= K
mk
1 i k 1 s s
i K
kk
R min K
kk
k ( )
K
kk
k 1 ( )
=
K
kk
k ( )
K
kk
k 1 ( )
n
l ost
log
10
R =
K
kk
k ( )
0 ~
R O 10
n
di gi t
\ .
| |
=
n
digit
n
digit
12 > K
kk
k ( )
Main Index
Singularity Ratio
82
You can force the solution of a nonpositive definite or singular matrix. In this case, MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear does not stop when it encounters a negative or small term on the diagonal. If you use
Lagrangian multiplier elements, the matrix becomes nonpositive definite and MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear automatically disables the test on the sign of . However, it still tests for singular behavior.
MSC Nastran SOL 600 also supports the PARAM,AUTOSPC, in which case the rigid body mechanism
is suppressed by putting a large number on the diagonal. The value of EPS on the AUTOSPC Case
Control is set to 1.E-8.
K
kk
k ( )
K
kk
k ( )
Note: The correctness of a solution obtained for a linearized set of equations in a nonpositive
definite system is not guaranteed.
Main Index
83
CHAPTER 3
Analysis Methods
Nonlinear analysis is usually more complex and expensive than linear analysis. Also, a nonlinear
problem can never be formulated as a set of linear equations. In general, the solutions of nonlinear
problems always require incremental solution schemes and sometimes require iterations (or recycles)
within each load/time increment to ensure that equilibrium is satisfied at the end of each step.
Superposition cannot be applied in nonlinear problems.
General Tips
A nonlinear problem does not always have a unique solution. Sometimes a nonlinear problem does not
have any solution, although the problem can seem to be defined correctly.
Nonlinear analysis requires good judgment and uses considerable computing time. Several runs
are often required. The first run should extract the maximum information with the minimum
amount of computing time. Some design considerations for a preliminary analysis are:
Minimize degrees of freedom whenever possible.
Always run a linear static analysis to check the model before attempting a nonlinear analysis.
Impose a coarse tolerance on convergence to reduce the number of iterations. A coarse run
determines the area of most rapid change where additional load increments might be required.
Plan the increment size in the final run by the following rule of thumb: there should be as many
load increments as required to fit the nonlinear results by the same number of straight lines.
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear solves nonlinear static problems according to one of the following two
methods: tangent modulus or initial strain. Examples of the tangent modulus method are elastic-plastic
analysis, nonlinear springs, nonlinear foundations, large displacement analysis and gaps. This method
requires at least the following three controls:
A tolerance on convergence.
A limit to the maximum allowable number of recycles.
Specification of a minimum number of recycles.
An example of the initial strain method is creep or viscoelastic analysis. Creep analysis requires the
following tolerance controls:
Maximum relative creep strain increment control.
Maximum relative stress change control.
A limit to the maximum allowable number of recycles.
Main Index
84
Choosing a Solution Method
Which solution method to use depends very much on the problem. In some cases, one method can be
advantageous over another; in other cases, the converse might be true.
The four iterative procedures available in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear are: Newton-Raphson,
Modified Newton-Raphson, Newton-Raphson with strain correction modification, and a
Secant procedure.
For Static analysis, MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses the Newton-Raphson method as the default for
solving the nonlinear equilibrium equations. The motivation for this choice is primarily the convergence
rate obtained by using Newtons method compared to the convergence rates obtained by alternate
methods (modified Newton or quasi-Newton methods) for the types of nonlinear problems most often
studied by MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
Time Steps or Load Increments
The issue of choosing suitable time steps is a difficult problem to resolve. First of all, considerations are
quite different in static, dynamic, and heat transfer cases. It is always necessary to model the response as
a function of time to some acceptable level of accuracy. In the case of dynamic or heat transfer problems,
time is a physical dimension for the problem, and the time-stepping scheme must provide suitable steps
to allow accurate modeling in this dimension. Even if the problem is linear, this accuracy requirement
imposes restrictions on the choice of the time step. In contrast, most static problems have no imposed
time scale, and the only criterion involved in time step choice is accuracy involved in modeling nonlinear
effects. In dynamic and heat transfer problems, it is exceptional to encounter discontinuities in the time
history, because inertia and viscous effects provide smoothing in the solution (an exception is impact).
However, in static cases, sharp discontinuities (such as bifurcation caused by buckling) are common.
Softening systems or unconstrained systems require special attention in static cases, but are handled
naturally in static or heat transfer cases. Thus, the consideration upon which time step choice is made are
quite different for the three problem classes.
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear provides both fixed and automatic time step choice. Fixed time stepping
is useful in cases where the problem behavior is well understood (as might occur when the user is
carrying out a series of parameter studies), or in cases where the automatic algorithms do not handle the
problem well. However, the automatic schemes in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear are based on
extensive experience with a wide range of problems, and therefore generally provide a reliable approach.
A fixed-time stepping approach avoids some convergence problems with Marc AUTO LOAD
particularly for multiple subcases. Marc AUTO LOAD is still available but the new approach is
recommended particularly for multiple subcases. The available methods are selected using
PARAM,MARCITER,N where N is the number of fixed time steps desired.
For static problems, MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses a scheme based predominantly on the
maximum force residuals following each iteration. By comparing consecutive values of these quantities,
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear determines whether convergence is likely in a reasonable number of
iterations. If convergence is deemed unlikely, MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear adjusts the load
increment; otherwise MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear continues with the iteration process. In this way,
Main Index
85
CHAPTER 3
excessive iteration is eliminated in cases, where convergence is unlikely, and an increment that appears
to be converging is not aborted due to its needing a few more iterations. One other ingredient in this
algorithm is that a minimum increment size is specified. This prevents excessive computation in cases
where buckling, limit load, or some modeling error causes the problem to stall. Other controls are built
into the algorithm, for example, it will cut back the increment size if an element inverts due to
excessively large geometry changes.
Nonlinear Dynamics
In dynamic analysis when implicit integration is used, the automatic time stepping is based on the
concept of half-step residuals. The basic idea is that the time-stepping operator defines the velocities and
accelerations at the end of the step in terms of displacement at the end of the step and conditions at the
beginning of the step. Equilibrium is then established at the end of the step. This, then ensures an
equilibrium solution at the end of each time step, and thus, at the beginning and end of any individual
time step. However, these equilibrium solutions do not guarantee equilibrium throughout the step. The
time-step control is based on measuring the equilibrium error (the force residuals) at some point during
the time step, by using the integrator operator together with the solution obtained at the end of the step,
to interpolate within a time step. This evaluation is performed at the half step. If the maximum entry in
this residual vector (the maximum half step residual) is greater than a user-specified tolerance, the time
step is considered too big and is replaced by an appropriate factor. If the maximum half-step residual is
sufficiently below the user-specified tolerance, the time step may be increased by an appropriate factor
for the next increment. Otherwise, the time step is deemed adequate.
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is designed to analyze structural components, by which is meant that
the overall dynamic response of a structure is sought, in contrast to wave propagation solutions
associated with relatively local response in continua. These are labelled inertial problems, classified
as problems in which wave effects such as focusing, reflection, and diffraction are not important.
Structural problems are considered inertial because the response time sought is long compared to the
time required for waves to traverse the structure. The equilibrium considerations are similar to those for
nonlinear statics.
Buckling
In problems which are linear until buckling occurs, due to a sudden development of nonlinearity, it is
sometimes necessary for you to guide the arc-length algorithm by making sure that the arc length remains
sufficiently small prior to the occurrence of buckling.
Efficiency
Even if a solution is obtainable, there is always the issue of efficiency. The pros and cons of each solution
procedure, in terms of matrix operations and storage requirements have been discussed in the previous
sections. A very important variable regarding overall efficiency is the size of the problem. The time
required to assemble a stiffness matrix, as well as the time required to recover stresses after a solution,
vary roughly linearly with the number of degrees of freedom of the problem. On the other hand, the time
Main Index
86
required to go through the solver when using the direct method varies roughly quadratically with the
bandwidth, as well as linearly with the number of degrees of freedom.
In small problems, where the time spent in the solver is negligible, you can easily wipe out any solver
gains, or even of assembly gains, with solution procedures such as a line search which requires a
double stress recovery. Also, for problems with strong material or contact nonlinearities, gains
obtained in assembly in modified Newton-Raphson can be nullified by increased number of iterations
or nonconvergence.
References
1. Zienkiewicz, O. C. and R. L. Taylor. The Finite Element Method (4th ed.) Vol. 1. Basic
Formulation and Linear Problems (1989),) Vol. 2. Solid and Fluid Mechanics, Dynamics, and
Nonlinearity (1991) McGraw-Hill Book Co., London, U. K.
2. Bathe, K. J. Finite Element Procedures, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1995.
3. Hughes, T. J. R. The Finite Element MethodLinear Static and Dynamic Finite Element Analysis,
Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ. 1987.
4. Ogden, R. W. Large Deformation Isotropic Elasticity: On The Correlation of Theory and
Experiment for Incompressible Rubberlike Solids, Proceedings of the Royal Society, Vol. A
(326), pp. 565-584, 1972.
5. Cook, R. D., D. S. Malkus, and M. E. Plesha, Concepts and Applications of Finite Element
Analysis (3rd ed.), John Wiley & Sons, New York, NY, 1989.
6. Bathe, K. J. Finite Element Procedures, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1996.
7. Riks, E. An incremental approach to the solution of solution and buckling problems, Int. J. of
Solids and Structures, V. 15, 1979.
8. Riks, E. Some Computational Aspects of the Stability Analysis of Nonlinear Structures, Comp.
Methods in Appl. Mech. and Eng., 47, 1984.
9. Crisfield, M. A. A fast incremental iterative procedure that handles snapthrough, Comput. &
Structures, V. 13, 1981.
10. Ramm, E. Strategies for tracing the nonlinear response near limit points, in K. J. Bathe et al
(eds), Europe-US Workshop on Nonlinear Finite Element Analysis in Structural Mechanics, Ruhr
University Bochum, Germany, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, pp/ 63-89. Berlin, 1985.
Main Index
Chapter 4: Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
4
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
Linear and Nonlinear Analysis
Nonlinear Effects and Formulations
Overview of Analysis Types
Static Analysis
Body Approach
Buckling Analysis
Normal Modes
Transient Dynamic Analysis
Creep
Main Index
88
In a linear static analysis we implicitly assume that the deflections and strains are very small and the
stresses are smaller than the material yield stresses. Consequently, the stiffness can be considered to
remain constant (i.e., independent of the displacements and forces) and the finite element equilibrium
equations
are linear. Where the stiffness matrix is independent of both , the generalized displacement vector,
and , the generalized force vector. This linearity implies that any increase or decrease in the load will
produce proportional increase or decrease in displacements, strains and stresses. Linear static problems
are solved in one step-a single decomposition of the stiffness matrix.
However, we know that in many structures the deflections and the stresses do not change proportionately
with the loads. In these problems the structures response depends upon its current state and the
equilibrium equations reflect the fact that the stiffness of the structure is dependent on both and .
As the structure displaces due to loading, the stiffness changes, and as the stiffness changes the structures
response changes. As a result, nonlinear problems require incremental solution schemes that divide the
problem up into steps calculating the displacement, then updating the stiffness. Each step uses the results
from the previous step as a starting point. As a result the stiffness matrix must be generated and inverted
many times during the analysis adding time and costs to the analysis.
Linear Analysis
SOL 600 allows you to perform linear elastic analysis using any element type in the program. Various
kinematic constraints and loadings can be prescribed to the structure being analyzed; the problem can
include both isotropic and anisotropic elastic materials.
The principle of superposition holds under conditions of linearity. Therefore, several individual solutions
can be superimposed (summed) to obtain a total solution to a problem.
Linear analysis does not require storing as many quantities as does nonlinear analysis; therefore, it uses
the core memory more sparingly. The assembled and decomposed stiffness matrices can be reused to
arrive at repeated solutions for different loads.
Nonlinear Analysis
Nonlinear analysis, while most complex and expensive, must be used to establish accurate results when
a structure is subject to large deformations, when the material behavior falls outside of a linear elastic
model, or where the structural interactions include contact.
In nonlinear analysis the stiffness matrix is assembled and decomposed repeatedly throughout the
incrementation process. This adds considerable time and cost to the analysis. In addition, because the
P Ku =
K u
P
u P
P K P u , ( )u =
Main Index
89
CHAPTER 4
response is not proportional to the loads, each load case must be solved separately and the principle of
superposition is not applicable.
Main Index
90
There are three sources of nonlinearity: material, geometric, and nonlinear boundary conditions. Material
nonlinearity results from the nonlinear relationship between stresses and strains. Considerable progress
has been made in attempts to derive the continuum or macroscopic behavior of materials from
microscopic backgrounds, but, up to now, commonly accepted constitutive laws are phenomenological.
Difficulty in obtaining experimental data is usually a stumbling block in mathematical modeling of
material behavior. A plethora of models exist for more commonly available materials like elastomers and
metals. Other material model of considerable practical importance are: composites, viscoplastics, creep,
soils, concrete, powder, and foams. Figure 4-1 shows the elastoplastic, elasto-viscoplasticity, and creep.
Although the situation of strain hardening is more commonly encountered, strain softening and
localization has gained considerable importance in recent times.
Geometric nonlinearity results from the nonlinear relationship between strains and displacements on the
one hand and the nonlinear relation between stresses and forces on the other hand. If the stress measure
is conjugate to the strain measure, both sources of nonlinearity have the same form. This type of
nonlinearity is mathematically well defined, but often difficult to treat numerically. Two important types
of geometric nonlinearity occur:
1. The analysis of buckling and snap-through problems (see Figure 4-2 and Figure 4-3).
2. Large strain problems such as manufacturing, crash, and impact problems. In such problems, due
to large strain kinematics, the mathematical separation into geometric and material nonlinearity
is nonunique.
Figure 4-1 Material Nonlinearity
o
c
Elasto-Plastic Behavior
o
c
Elasto-Viscoplastic Behavior
c
c
c
t
Creep Behavior
o
Main Index
91
CHAPTER 4
Figure 4-2 Buckling
Figure 4-3 Snap-Through
Boundary conditions and/or loads can also cause nonlinearity. Contact and friction problems lead to
nonlinear boundary conditions. This type of nonlinearity manifests itself in several real life situations;
for example, metal forming, gears, interference of mechanical components, pneumatic tire contact, and
crash (see Figure 4-4). Loads on a structure cause nonlinearity if they vary with the displacements of the
structure. These loads can be conservative, as in the case of a centrifugal force field (see Figure 4-5); they
can also be nonconservative, as in the case of a follower force on a cantilever beam (see Figure 4-6).
Also, such a follower force can be locally nonconservative, but represent a conservative loading system
when integrated over the structure. A pressurized cylinder (see Figure 4-7) is an example of this.
Figure 4-4 Contact and Friction Problem
P
u
Linear
Stable
Neutral
Unstable
P
P
c
u
P
u
P
u
Main Index
92
Figure 4-5 Centrifugal Load Problem (Conservative)
Figure 4-6 Follower Force Problem (Nonconservative)
Figure 4-7 Pressurized Cylinder (Globally Conservative)
The three types of nonlinearities are described in detail in the following sections.
P
P
Main Index
93
CHAPTER 4
Geometric Nonlinearities
Geometric nonlinearity leads to two types of phenomena: change in structural behavior and loss of
structural stability.
There are two natural classes of large deformation problems: the large displacement, small strain
problem and the large displacement, large strain problem. For the large displacement, small strain
problem, changes in the stress-strain law can be neglected, but the contributions from the nonlinear terms
in the strain displacement relations cannot be neglected. For the large displacement, large strain problem,
the constitutive relation must be defined in the correct frame of reference and is transformed from this
frame of reference to the one in which the equilibrium equations are written.
The collapse load of a structure can be predicted by performing an eigenvalue analysis. If performed after
the linear solution (increment zero), the Euler buckling estimate is obtained. An eigenvalue problem can
be formulated after each increment of load; this procedure can be considered a nonlinear buckling
analysis even though a linearized eigenvalue analysis is used at each stage.
The kinematics of deformation can be described by the following approaches:
Lagrangian Formulation
Eularian Formulation
The choice of one over another can be dictated by the convenience of modeling physics of the problem,
rezoning requirements, and integration of constitutive equations, and can be specified using
PARAM,MARUPDAT.
Lagrangian Formulation
In the Lagrangian method, the finite element mesh is attached to the material and moves through space
along with the material. In this case, there is no difficulty in establishing stress or strain histories at a
particular material point and the treatment of free surfaces is natural and straightforward.
The Lagrangian approach also naturally describes the deformation of structural elements; that is, shells
and beams, and transient problems, such as the indentation problem shown in Figure 4-8.
Figure 4-8 Indentation Problem with Pressure Distribution on Tool
s
z
A
u
Main Index
94
This method can also analyze steady-state processes such as extrusion and rolling. Shortcomings of the
Lagrangian method are that flow problems are difficult to model and that the mesh distortion is as severe
as the deformation of the object. Severe mesh degeneration is shown in Figure 4-9b. However, recent
advances in adaptive meshing and rezoning available in Marc have alleviated the problems of premature
termination of the analysis due to mesh distortions as shown in Figure 4-9c.
Figure 4-9 Rezoning Example
The Lagrangian approach can be classified in two categories: the total Lagrangian method and the
updated Lagrangian method. In the total Lagrangian approach, the equilibrium is expressed with the
original undeformed state as the reference; in the updated Lagrangian approach, the current configuration
acts as the reference state. The kinematics of deformation and the description of motion is given in
Table 4-1 and Figure 4-10.
Table 4-1 Kinematics and Stress-Strain Measures in Large Deformation
Configuration Measures Reference (t = 0 or n) Current (t = n + 1)
Coordinates X x
Deformation Tensor C (Right Cauchy-Green) b (Left Cauchy-Green)
Strain Measure E (Green-Lagrange)
F (Deformation Gradient)
e (Logarithmic)
Stress Measure S (second Piola-Kirchhoff)
P (first Piola-Kirchhoff)
o (Cauchy)
(a) Original (b) Deformed Mesh
(Undeformed Mesh)
Before Rezoning
(c) Deformed Mesh
After Rezoning
Main Index
95
CHAPTER 4
Figure 4-10 Description of Motion
Total Lagrangian Procedure
The total Lagrangian procedure can be used for linear or nonlinear materials, in conjunction with static
or dynamic analysis. Although this formulation is based on the initial element geometry, the incremental
stiffness matrices are formed to account for previously developed stress and changes in geometry.
This method is particularly suitable for the analysis of nonlinear elastic problems (for instance, with the
Mooney or Ogden material model). The total Lagrangian approach is also useful for problems in
plasticity and creep, where moderately large rotations but small strains occur. A case typical in problems
of beam or shell bending. However, this is only due to the approximations involved.
In the total Lagrangian approach, the equilibrium can be expressed by the principle of virtual work as:
(4-1)
Here is the symmetric second Piola-Kirchhoff stress tensor, , is the Green-Lagrange strain, is
the body force in the reference configuration, is the traction vector in the reference configuration, and
is the virtual displacements. Integrations are carried out in the original configuration at . The
strains are decomposed in total strains for equilibrated configurations and the incremental strains
between and as:
(4-2)
while the incremental strains are further decomposed into linear, and nonlinear, parts as:
Reference
t = 0
Current
t = n + 1
Previous
t = n
u
n + 1
F
f
Au
F
n
u
n
F
n+1
= F
n
S
i j
oE
i j
V d
V
0
}
b
i
0
oq
i
V t
i
0
oq
i
A d
A
0
}
+ d
V
0
}
=
S
i j
E
i j
b
i
0
t
i
0
q
i
t 0 =
t n = t n 1 + =
E
i j
n 1 +
E
i j
n
AE
i j
+ =
AE
i j
AE
i j
n
Main Index
96
where is the linear part of the incremental strain expressed as:
(4-3)
The second term in the bracket in Equation (4-3) is the initial displacement effect.

is the nonlinear
part of the incremental strain expressed as:
(4-4)
Linearization of equilibrium of Equation (4-1) yields:
(4-5)
where is the small displacement stiffness matrix defined as
is the initial displacement stiffness matrix defined as
in the above equations, and are the constant and displacement dependent symmetric shape
function gradient matrices, respectively, and is the material tangent,
and is the initial stress stiffness matrix
in which is the second Piola-Kirchhoff stresses and is the shape function gradient matrix.
Also, is the correction displacement vector. and are the external and internal
forces, respectively.
This Lagrangian formulation can be applied to problems if the undeformed configuration is known so
that integrals can be evaluated, and if the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress is a known function of the strain.
The first condition is not usually met for fluids, because the deformation history is usually unknown. For
AE
i j
AE
i j
AE
n
i j
+ =
AE
AE
1
2
---
cAu
i
cX
j
------------
cAu
j
cX
i
------------ +
1
2
---
cu
k
n
cX
i
---------
\ .
|
| | cAu
k
cX
j
------------
\ .
| |
+ =
AE
n
AE
n 1
2
---
cAu
k
cX
i
------------
\ .
| |
cAu
k
cX
j
------------
\ .
| |
cu
k
n
cX
j
---------
\ .
|
| | cAu
k
cX
i
------------
\ .
| |
+ =
K
0
K
1
K
2
+ + { }ou F R =
K
0
K
0
( )
i j
|
i mn
0
D
mnpq
|
pqj
0
V d
V
0
}
=
K
1
K
1
( )
i j
|
i mn
u
D
mnpq
|
pqj
u
|
i mn
u
D
mnpq
|
pqj
0
|
i mn
u
D
mnpq
|
pqj
u
+ + { } V d
V
0
}
=
|
i mn
0
|
i mn
u
D
mnpq
K
2
K
2
( )
i j
N
i k ,
N
j l ,
S
kl
V d
V
0
}
=
S
kl
N
i k ,
ou F R
Main Index
97
CHAPTER 4
solids, however, each analysis usually starts in the stress-free undeformed state, and the integrations can
be carried out without any difficulty.
For viscoelastic fluids and elastic-plastic and viscoplastic solids, the constitutive equations usually
supply an expression for the rate of stress in terms of deformation rate, stress, deformation, and
sometimes other (internal) material parameters. The relevant quantity for the constitutive equations is the
rate of stress at a given material point.
It, therefore, seems most obvious to differentiate the Lagrangian virtual work equation with respect to
time. The rate of virtual work is readily found as
(4-6)
This formulation is adequate for most materials, because the rate of the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress
can be written as
(4-7)
For many materials, the stress rate is even a linear function of the strain rate
(4-8)
Equation (4-6) supplies a set of linear relations in terms of the velocity field. The velocity field can be
solved noniteratively and the displacement can be obtained by time integration of the velocities.
The second Piola-Kirchhoff stress for elastic and hyperelastic materials is a function of the Green-
Lagrange strain defined below:
(4-9)
If the stress is a linear function of the strain (linear elasticity)
(4-10)
the resulting set of equations is still nonlinear because the strain is a nonlinear function of displacement.
Updated Lagrangian Procedure
The updated Lagrange formulation takes the reference configuration at . True or Cauchy
stress and an energetically conjugate strain measure, namely the true strain, are used in the constitutive
relationship.
The updated Lagrangian approach is useful in:
analysis of shell and beam structures in which rotations are large so that the nonlinear terms in
the curvature expressions may no longer be neglected, and
S
i j
oE
i j
S
i j
cv
k
cX
i
--------
coq
k
cX
j
------------ + dV
V
0
}
b
i
oq
i
dV t
i
oq
i
dA
A
0
}
+
V
0
}
=
S
i j
S
i j
E
kl
S
mn
E
pq
, , ( ) =
S
i j
D
i j kl
S
mn
E
pq
, ( )E
kl
=
S
i j
S
i j
E
kl
( ) =
S
i j
D
i j kl
E
kl
=
t n 1 + =
Main Index
98
large strain plasticity analysis, for calculations which the plastic deformations cannot be
assumed to be infinitesimal.
In general, this approach can be used to analyze structures where inelastic behavior (for example,
plasticity, viscoplasticity, or creep) causes the large deformations. The (initial) Lagrangian coordinate
frame has little physical significance in these analyses since the inelastic deformations are, by definition,
permanent. For these analyses, the Lagrangian frame of reference is redefined at the last completed
iteration of the current increment.
It is instructive to derive the stiffness matrices for the updated Lagrangian formulation starting from the
virtual work principle in Equation (4-9).
Direct linearization of the left-hand side of Equation (4-9) yields:
(4-11)
where Au and q are actual incremental and virtual displacements respectively, and is Cauchy stress
tensor.
(4-12)
denotes the symmetric part of , which represents the gradient operator in the current configuration.
Also, in Equation (4-11) and Equation (4-12), three identities are used:
(4-13)
in which represents the material moduli tensor in the reference configuration which is convected
to the current configuration, . This yields:
(4-14)
where is the material stiffness matrix written as
S
i j
oE
i j
( ) d ( ) V d
V
0
}
Vq
i k
o
kj
VAu
i j
v d
V
n 1 +
}
=
o
kj
S
i j
oE
i j
d V d
V
0
}
V
s
q
i j
L
i j kl
V
s
Au
kl
( ) v d
V
n 1 +
}
=
V
s
V
o
i j
1
J
--- F
i m
S
mn
F
j n
=
oE
i j
F
mi
V
s
q
mn
F
nj
=
L
i j kl
1
J
--- F
i m
F
j n
F
kp
F
l q
D
mnpq
=
and
D
mnpq
L
i j k
K
1
K
2
+ { }ou F R =
K
1
Main Index
99
CHAPTER 4
in which is the symmetric gradient operator-evaluated in the current configuration and is the
Cauchy stresses and is the geometric stiffness matrix written as
while and are the external and internal forces, respectively.
Keeping in view that the reference state is the current state, a rate formulation analogous to Equation
(4-6) can be obtained by setting:
(4-15)
where F is the deformation tensor, and d is the rate of deformation. Hence,
(4-16)
in which and is the body force and surface traction, respectively, in the current configuration
In this equation, is the Truesdell rate of Cauchy stress which is essentially a Lie derivative of Cauchy
stress obtained as:
(4-17)
The Truesdell rate of Cauchy stress is materially objective implying that if a rigid rotation is imposed on
the material, the Truesdell rate vanishes, whereas the usual material rate does not vanish. This fact has
important consequences in the large deformation problems where large rotations are involved. The
constitutive equations can be formulated in terms of the Truesdell rate of Cauchy stress as:

Specifying the Geometric Nonlinearity Formulation
Selection of the geometric nonlinearity formulation in MSC Nastran is made on the MARUPDAT
parameter entry.
K
1
( )
i j
|
i mn
L
mnpq
|
pqj
V
n 1 +
}
=
|
i mn
o
kl
K
2
K
2
( )
i j
o
kl
N
i k ,
N
j l ,
v d
V
n 1 +
}
=
F R
F
i j
o
i j
oE
i j
, od
i j

c
cX
i
-------- ,
c
cx
i
------- S
i j
, o
i j
= = = =
V
o
i j
od
i j
o
i j
cv
k
cx
i
--------
coq
k
cx
j
------------ + dv
V
n 1 +
}
b
i
oq
i
dv
V
n 1 +
}
t
i
oq
i
da
A
n 1 +
}
+ =
b
i
t
i
V
o
i j
o
i j
V
F
i n
JF
nk
1
o
kl
F
ml
1
( )
= F
mj
V
o
i j
L
i j k
d
k
=
Main Index
100
References
For selecting the geometric nonlinearity formulation in Patran, see Subcase Parameters (Ch. 7).
More on Using Total Lagrangian
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear will normally determine whether Total Lagrangian or Updated
Lagrangian is best for a particular problem. If you wish to exert more control, the parameters discussed
in this section and the next may be employed.
For problems (such as centrifugal or pressure load) that require follower forces, use the LGDISP
parameter. This parameter forms all distributed loads on the basis of the current geometry.
When the total Lagrangian method is used, the program uses and prints second Piola-Kirchhoff stress and
Green-Lagrange strain. These measures are suitable for analysis with large incremental rotations and
large incremental strains.
More on Using Updated Lagrangian
You can use the updated procedure with or without MSC Nastrans LGDISP parameter. When you use
the LGDISP parameter, MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear takes into account the effect of the internal
stresses by forming the initial stress stiffness. MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear also calculates the strain
increment to second order accuracy to allow large rotation increments.
Another option is to use the MARUPDAT parameter (with or without the LGDISP parameter) to define a
new (Lagrangian) frame of reference at the beginning of each increment. This option is suitable for
analysis of problems of large total rotation but small strain. If analysis of large plastic strain is required,
use PARAM,MRFINITE,1 in addition to the PARAM, MARUPDAT parameter in which case MSC
Nastran Implicit.
With MARUPDAT,1 MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses Cauchy stresses and true strains. This
combination of parameters is suitable for analyses with small incremental rotations and small
incremental strains. Stress and strain components are printed with respect to the current state.
The Marc plasticity parameter with options 3 or 5 utilize the updated Lagrange procedure for elastic-
plastic analysis. The Marc,elasticity parameter with option 2 utilizes the updated Lagrange procedure for
large strain elasticity (Mooney or Ogden).
Note: Depending on the type of analysis specified by all entries in the input file,
PARAMETER,MARUPDAT will be specified automatically as -1 or 1 unless entered by
the user.
Note: Do not use Marcs CENTROID parameter with this parameter. Always use residual load
corrections with this parameter. To input control tolerances for large displacement
analysis, use model definition option NLSTRAT.
Main Index
101
CHAPTER 4
The combination of PARAM,MARUPDAT,1 and PARAM,MARCDILT (i.e., with constant dilatation) or
a MATEP material entry results in a complete large strain plasticity formulation (with B-Bar method) to
satisfy incompatibility using the updated Lagrange procedure. The use of MATEP replaces the need of
the MARCDILT parameter. The program internally uses true (Cauchy) stress and rotation neutralized
strains. In the case of proportional straining, this method leads to logarithmic strains.
Theoretically and numerically, if formulated mathematically correct, the two formulations yield exactly
the same results. However, integration of constitutive equations for certain types of material behavior
(for example, plasticity) make the implementation of the total Lagrange formulation inconvenient. If the
constitutive equations are convected back to the original configuration and proper transformations are
applied, then both formulations are equivalent.
Note: For materials exhibiting large strain plasticity with volumetric changes (for example, soils,
powder, snow, wood) only Marcs LARGE DISP, FINITE and UPDATE should be used
(these are created automatically for you by the internal Marc translator in MSC Nastran).
Use of MARCDILT parameter or MATEP will enforce the incompressibility condition and,
in such materials, yield incorrect and nonphysical behavior.
Options Kinematics Formulation
param,MARCPLA
S, n,1
Total Lagrange Small strain, mean normal, additive decomposition of
strain rates.
param,marcplas,3
default
Updated Lagrange Large strain, mean normal, additive decomposition of
strain rates.
param,marcplas,5 Updated Lagrange Large strain, radial return multiplicative decomposition of
deformation gradient.
param,marcelas,1 Total Lagrange Large strain.
param,marcelas,2 Updated Lagrange Large strain.
Main Index
102
Material Nonlinearities
In a large strain analysis, it is usually difficult to separate the kinematics from the material description.
The following table lists the characteristics of some common materials.
A complete description of the material types mentioned in the table is given in Materials (Ch. 10).
However, some notable characteristics and procedural considerations of some commonly encountered
materials behavior are listed next.
Material Characteristics Examples Models
Composites Anisotropic:
1) layered,
21 constants
2)Fiber reinforced,

one-dimensional strain in fibers
Bearings, aircraft
panels
Tires, glass/epoxy
Composite
continuum elements
Rebars
Creep Strains increasing with time under
constant load.
Stresses decreasing with time under
constant deformations.
Creep strains are non-instantaneous.
Metals at high
temperatures,
polymide films
ORNL
Norton
Maxwell
Elastic Stress functions of instantaneous strain
only. Linear load-displacement
relation.
Small deformation
(below yield) for
most materials:
metals, glass, wood

Hookes Law
Elasto-
plasticity
Yield condition flow rule and
hardening rule necessary to calculate
stress, plastic strain. Permanent
deformation upon unloading.
Metals
Soils
von Mises Isotropic
Cam -Clay
Hills Anisotropic
Hyperelastic Stress function of instantaneous strain.
Nonlinear load-displacement relation.
Unloading path same as loading.
Rubber Mooney
Ogden
Arruda Boyce
Gent
Foam
Hypoelastic Rate form of stress-strain law Concrete NLELAST
Viscoelastic Time dependence of stresses in elastic
material under loads. Full recovery
after unloading.
Rubber
Glass
Simo Model
Narayanaswamy
Viscoplastic Combined plasticity and creep
phenomenon
Metals
Powder
Power law
Shima Model
ds
i j
C
i j k
dc
k
=
S
E
2
--- T
t
CT 1 ( ) =
Main Index
103
CHAPTER 4
Inaccuracies in experimental data, misinterpretation of material model parameters and errors in user-
defined material law are some common sources of error in the analysis from the materials viewpoint. It
is useful to check the material behavior by running a small model with prescribed displacement and load
boundary conditions in uniaxial tension and shear (single element tests are not recommended).
Elasticity
Structures composed of elastomers, such as tires and bushings, are typically subjected to large
deformation and large strain. An elastomer is a polymer, such as rubber, which shows a nonlinear elastic
stress-strain behavior. The large strain elasticity capability in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear deals
primarily with elastomeric materials. These materials are characterized by the form of their elastic strain
energy function.
For the finite element analysis of elastomers, there are some special considerations that do not apply for
linear elastic analysis. These considerations include:
Mesh Distortion
Incompressible Behavior
Instabilities
Existence of Multiple Solutions
Mesh Distortions
When extremely large deformations occur, the element mesh should be designed so that it can follow
these deformations without complete degeneration of elements. This problem is more prevalent when the
updated Lagrange procedure is used. For problems involving extreme distortions, the Marc global
adaptive remeshing capability should be used.
Incompressible Behavior
One of the most frequent causes of problems analyzing elastomers is the incompressible material
behavior. Lagrangian multipliers (pressure variables) are used to apply the incompressibility constraint.
The result is that the volume is kept constant in a generalized sense, over an element.
Both the total, as well as updated Lagrange formulations, are implemented with appropriate constraint
ratios for lower- and higher-order elements in 2D and 3D. For many practical analysis, the LBB
(Ladyszhenskaya-Babuska-Brezzi) condition does not have to be satisfied in the strictest sense; for
example, four node quadrilateral based on Herrmann principle.
For elements that satisfy the LBB condition, error estimates of the following form can be established
(4-18)
where and are the orders of displacements and pressure interpolations, respectively. If
, the rate of convergence is said to be optimal, and elements satisfying the LBB
condition will not lock.
u
h
u
1
p
h
p
0
+ O h
mi n k 1 + , { }
( ) =
k
K min k 1 + , { } =
Main Index
104
The large strain elasticity formulation may also be used with conventional plane stress, membrane, and
shell elements. Because of the plane stress conditions, the incompressibility constraint can be satisfied
without the use of Lagrange multipliers.
Instabilities
Under some circumstances, materials can become unstable. This instability can be real or can be due to
the mathematical formulation used in the calculations.
Instability can also result from the approximate satisfaction of incompressibility constraints. If the
number of Lagrangian multipliers is insufficient, local volume changes can occur. Under some
circumstances, these volume changes can be associated with a decrease in total energy. This type of
instability usually occurs only if there is a large tensile hydrostatic stress. Similarly, overconstraints give
rise to mesh locking and inordinate increase in total energy under large compressive stresses.
Existence of Multiple Solutions
It is possible that more than one stable solution exists (due to nonlinearity) for a given set of boundary
conditions. An example of such multiple solutions is a hollow hemisphere with zero prescribed loads.
Two equilibrium solutions exist: the undeformed stress-free state and the inverted self-equilibrating state.
An example of these solutions is shown in Figure 4-11 and Figure 4-12. If the equilibrium solution remains
stable, no problems should occur; however, if the equilibrium becomes unstable at some point in the
analysis, problems can occur.
Figure 4-11 Rubber Hemisphere
y
x
Main Index
105
CHAPTER 4
Figure 4-12 Inverted Rubber Hemisphere
When incompressible material is being modeled, the basic linearized incremental procedure is used in
conjunction with mixed variational principles similar in form to the Herrmann incompressible elastic
formulation. These formulations are incorporated in plane strain, axisymmetric, and three-dimensional
elements. These mixed elements may be used in combination with other elements in the library (suitable
constraint equations may be necessary) and with each other. Where different materials are joined, the
pressure variable at the corner nodes must be uncoupled to allow for mean pressure discontinuity. MPCs
must be used to couple the displacements only.
Plasticity
In recent years there has been a tremendous growth in the analysis of metal forming problems by the
finite element method. Although an Eularian flow-type approach has been used for steady-state and
transient problems, the updated Lagrangian procedure, pioneered by McMeeking and Rice, is most
suitable for analysis of large strain plasticity problems. The main reasons for this are: (a) its ability to
trace free boundaries, and (b) the flexibility of taking elasticity and history effects into account. Also,
residual stresses can be accurately calculated.
The large strain plasticity capability in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear allows you to analyze problems
of large-strain, elastic-plastic material behavior. These problems can include manufacturing processes
such as forging, upsetting, extension or deep drawing, and/or large deformation of structures that occur
during plastic collapse. The analysis involves both material, geometric and boundary nonlinearities.
In addition to the options required for plasticity analysis, the PARAM, MRTABLS1 parameters are
needed for large strain plasticity analysis.
y
x
Main Index
106
In performing finite deformation elastic-plastic analysis, there are some special considerations which do
not apply for linear elastic analysis. These considerations include:
Choice of Finite Element Types
Nearly Incompressible Behavior
Treatment of Boundary Conditions
Severe Mesh Distortion
Instabilities
Choice of Finite Element Types
Accurate calculation of large strain plasticity problems depends on the selection of adequate finite
element types. In addition to the usual criteria for selection, two aspects need to be given special
consideration: the element types selected need to be insensitive to (strong) distortion; for plane strain,
axisymmetric, and three-dimensional problems, the element mesh must be able to represent
nondilatational (incompressible) deformation modes.
Nearly Incompressible Behavior
Most finite element types tend to lock during fully plastic (incompressible) material behavior. A remedy
is to introduce a modified variational principle which effectively reduces the number of independent
dilatational modes (constraints) in the mesh. This procedure is successful for plasticity problems in the
conventional small strain formulation. Zienkiewicz pointed out the positive effect of reduced
integration for this type of problem and demonstrates the similarity between modified variational
procedures and reduced integration. MSC.Software Corporation recommends the use of lower-order
elements, invoking the constant dilatation option with certain exceptions such as 4-node tetras. The
lower-order elements, which use reduced integration and hourglass control, also behave well for nearly
incompressible materials.
Treatment of Boundary Conditions
In many large strain plasticity problems, specifically in the analysis of manufacturing processes, the
material slides with or without friction over curved surfaces. This results in a severely nonlinear
boundary condition. The MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear CONTACT option can model such sliding
boundary conditions.
Severe Mesh Distortion
Because the mesh is attached to the deforming material, severe distortion of the element mesh often
occurs, which leads to a degeneration of the results in many problems. To avoid this degeneration,
generate a new finite element mesh for the problem and then transfer the current deformation state to the
new finite element mesh.
Main Index
107
CHAPTER 4
Instabilities
Elastic-plastic structures are sometimes unstable due to necking phenomena. Consider a rod of a rigid-
plastic incompressible workhardening material. With the current true uniaxial strain rate and H the
current workhardening, the rate of true uniaxial stress is equal to
(4-19)
The applied force is equal to , where is the current area of the rod. The rate of the force is
therefore equal to
(4-20)
On the other hand, conservation of volume requires that
(4-21)
Hence, the force rate can be calculated as
(4-22)
Instability clearly occurs if . For applied loads (as opposed to applied boundary conditions), the
stiffness matrix becomes singular (nonpositive definite).
For the large strain plasticity option, the workhardening slope for plasticity is the rate of true (Cauchy)
stress versus the true (logarithmic) plastic strain rate. The workhardening curve must, therefore, be
entered as the true stress versus the logarithmic plastic strain in a uniaxial tension test.
Computational Procedures for Elastic-Plastic Analysis
For more information on computational procedures, please see the Marc Reference manual.
Creep
Creep is a time-dependent inelastic behavior that can occur at any stress level, either below or above the
yield stress of a material. Creep is an important factor at elevated temperatures. In many cases, creep is
also accompanied by plasticity, which occurs above the yield stress of the material.
Conventional creep behavior is based on a von Mises creep potential with isotropic behavior described
by the equivalent creep law:
The material behavior is therefore described by:
c
Hc
=
F oA = A
F
A o
A
+ =
Ac
+ 0 =
F
H o ( )Ac
=
o H >
c
cr
f o c
cr
T t , , , ( ) =
Main Index
108
where is the outward normal to the current von Mises stress surface and is the equivalent creep
strain rate.
There are two numerical procedures used in implementing creep behavior. The default is an explicit
procedure in which the above relationship is implemented in the program by an initial strain technique.
In other words, a pseudo-load vector due to the creep strain increment is added to the right-hand side of
the stiffness equation.
where K is the stiffness matrix, and and are incremental displacement and incremental nodal
force vectors, respectively. The integral:
is the pseudo-load vector due to the creep strain increment in which is the strain displacement relation
and is the stress-strain relation. When plasticity is also specified through a suitably defined yield
criterion and yield stress in MSC Nastran, the plasticity is treated implicitly while the creep is treated
explicitly.
As an alternative, an implicit creep procedure can be requested. In this case, the inelastic strain rate has
an influence on the stiffness matrix. Using this technique, significantly larger steps in strain space can be
used. This option is only to be used for isotropic materials with the creep strain rate defined by a creep
constant.
Ac
cr
c
cr
co
co
'
-------- At =
co
co
'
-------- c
cr
KAu AP |
T
V
}
DAc
cr
dv + =
Au AP
|
T
V
}
DAc
cr
dv
|
D
Main Index
109
CHAPTER 4
Creep Buckling
MSC Nastran also predicts the creep time to buckling due to stress redistribution under given load or
repeated cyclic load. The buckling option solves the following equation for the first eigenvalue
(4-23)
The geometric stiffness matrix, , is a function of the increments of stress and displacement. These
increments are calculated during the last creep time step increment. To determine the creep time to
buckle, perform a buckle step after a converged creep increment. Note that the incremental time must be
scaled by the calculated eigenvalue, and added to the total (current) time to get an estimate as to when
buckling occurs.
Viscoelasticity
In certain problems, structural materials exhibit viscoelastic behavior. Two examples of these problems
are quenching of glass and time-dependent deformation of polymeric materials. The viscoelastic
material retains linearity between load and deformation; however, this linear relationship depends on
time. Consequently, the current state of deformation must be determined from the entire history of
loading. Different models consisting of elastic elements (spring) and viscous elements (dashpot) can be
used to simulate the viscoelastic material behavior described in Materials (Ch. 10). Both the equation of
state and the hereditary integral approaches can be used for viscoelastic analysis.
A special class of temperature dependence known as the Thermo-Rheologically Simple behavior (TRS)
is also applicable to a variety of thermal viscoelastic problems. To model the thermo-rheologically
simple material behavior, MATTVE can be used to choose the Williams-Landel-Ferry equation or the
power series expression or Narayanaswamy model.
In MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, two options are available for small strain viscoelastic analysis. The
first option uses the equation of state approach and represents a Kelvin model. The second option is
based on the hereditary integral approach and allows the selection of a generalized Maxwell model. The
thermo-rheologically simple behavior is also available in the second option for thermal viscoelastic
analysis. The Viscoelastic (Ch. 10) discusses these models in detail.
The Simo model for large strain viscoelasticity can be used in conjunction with the damage and
hyperelastic Mooney, Ogden, Gent, or Arruda Boyce material model. The large strain viscoelastic
material behavior can be simulated by incorporating MATVE.
Nonlinear structural relaxation behavior of materials can be modeled by the Narayanaswamy model
which accounts for memory effect. This model allows simulation of evolution of physical properties of
glass subjected to complex time temperature histories. The thermal expansion behavior for the
Narayanaswamy model is controlled via the MATTVE Bulk Data option.
Viscoplasticity
There are two procedures in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear for viscoplastic analysis: explicit and
implicit. A brief description of each procedure follows:
K K
G
+ ( )| 0 =
K
G
Main Index
110
Explicit Method
The elasto-viscoplasticity model in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is a modified creep model to which
a plastic element is added. The plastic element is inactive when the stress is less than the yield stress of
the material. You can use the elasto-viscoplasticity model to solve time-dependent plasticity and creep as
well as plasticity problems with a nonassociated flow law.
The MPCREEP option in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear has been modified to enable solving problems
with viscoplasticity. The method is modified to allow solving elastic-plastic problems with nonassociated
flow rules which result in nonsymmetric stress-strain relations if the tangent modulus method is used.
The MPCREEP allows you to select the procedure used to perform the time integration.If the explicit
method is used, then the time step must be small, but is the material is elastic and small deformation, no
reassembly of the stiffness matrix is required. If the implicit method is chosen, then larger time steps may
be used, but reassembly occurs at every increment.
In thermal creep simulations it is necessary that the time step be chosen to satisfy accuracy of both the
rate independent thermal stress problem and the rate dependent creep problem. To insure that this occurs
the MTCREEP bulk data option has been introduced.
The viscoplastic approach converts an iterative elastic-plastic method to one where a fraction of the
initial force vector is applied at each increment with the time step controls. The success of the method
depends on the proper use of the automatic creep time step controls. This means that it is necessary to
select an initial time step that will satisfy the tolerances placed on the allowable stress change.
The allowable stress change is specified in the creep controls. The most highly stressed element usually
yields the maximum strain rate. It is also important to select a total time that gives sufficient number of
increments to work off the effects of the initial force vector. A total time of 30 times the estimated At is
usually sufficient.
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear does not distinguish between viscoplastic and creep strains. A flag is
set in the CREEP parameter in order to use the viscoplastic option with a nonassociated flow rule.
The viscoplasticity feature can be used to implement very general constitutive relations with the aid of
user subroutines ZERO and YIEL.
Since the viscoplasticity model in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is a modified creep model, you
should familiarize yourself with the creep analysis procedure (see Creep, Viscoplastic, and Viscoelastic
Behavior, 115).
Implicit Method
A general viscoplastic material law can be implemented through user subroutine UVSCPL. When using
this method, you are responsible for defining the inelastic strain increment and the current stress.
The initial time step At =
allowable stress change x 0.7
Maximum viscoplastic strain rate x Youngs modulus
Main Index
111
CHAPTER 4
Nonlinear Boundary Conditions
There are three types of nonlinear boundary conditions: contact, nonlinear support, and nonlinear
loading. The contact problem is solved using the BCONTACT Case Control specification. Nonlinear
support might involve nonlinear springs and/or foundations. Sometimes nonlinearities due to rigid links
that become activated or deactivated during an analysis can be modeled through adaptive linear
constraints. Nonlinear loading is present if the loading system is nonconservative, as is the case with
follower forces or frictional slip effects.
Discontinuities are inherent in the nature of many of these nonlinearities, making the solution more
challenging. Some of the most severe nonlinearities in mechanics are introduced by nonlinear boundary
conditions. It is, therefore, very important to be aware of potential problem areas and to have a good
understanding of the underlying principles. This awareness and understanding enables you to validate
numerical answers and to take alternative approaches if an initial attempt fails.
Nonlinear Loading
When the structure is deformed, the directions and the areas of the surface loads are changed. For most
deformed structures, such changes are so small that the effect on the equilibrium equation can be ignored.
For some structures, such as flexible shell structure with large pressure loads, the effects on the results
can be quite significant so that the surface load effects have to be included in the finite element equations.
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear forms both pressure stiffness and pressure terms based on current
deformed configuration with MSC Nastrans PARAM,LGDISP. The PARAM,MARCCENT should not
be included due to the use of the residual load correction. Point forces may also be updated with
deformation.
Main Index
112
A large class of stress analysis problems can be solved with MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600).
A fundamental division of stress problems is into static and dynamic response, the distinction being
whether or not inertia effects are significant. SOL 600 allows complete flexibility in making this
distinction, so that the same analysis may contain several static and dynamic phases. Thus, a static
preload might be applied, and then the linear or nonlinear dynamic response computed, (as in the case of
vibrations of a component of a rotating machine, or the response of a flexible offshore system which is
initially moved to an equilibrium position subject to buoyancy and steady current loads, then is excited
by wave loading).
Static
Nonlinear static analysis requires the solution of nonlinear equilibrium equations. Many problems
involve history dependent response, so that the solution is usually obtained as a series of increments, with
iteration within each increment to obtain equilibrium. For most cases, the automatic incrementation
provided by MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is preferred, although direct user control is also provided
for those cases where the user has experience with a particular problem.
Static analysis procedures frequently involve post buckling behavior where the load-displacement
response shows a negative stiffness, and the structure must release strain energy to remain in equilibrium.
Buckling
Eigenvalue buckling estimates are obtained. Classical eigenvalue buckling analysis (e.g., Euler
buckling) is often used to estimate the critical (buckling) load of stiff structures. Stiff structures are
those that carry their design loads primarily by axial or membrane action, rather than by bending action.
Their response usually involves very little deformation prior to buckling, although nonlinear effects can
be accounted for by preceding the buckling calculations with a nonlinear static analysis.
Normal Modes
This solution type uses eigenvalue techniques to extract the frequencies of the current system. The
stiffness determined at the end of the previous step is used as the basis for the extraction, so that small
vibrations of a preloaded structure or nonlinearly deformed structure can be modeled.
Transient Dynamic
This solution type is used when the transient dynamic response, which includes inertial effects, is being
studied. Because all of the equations of motion of the system must be integrated through time, direct
integration methods (which can be used for both linear and nonlinear problems) are generally
significantly more expensive than modal methods (which can only be used for linear problems). For most
cases, the automatic incrementation provided is preferred, although direct user control is also provided
for those cases where the user has experience with a particular problem.
Main Index
113
CHAPTER 4
Creep
This analysis procedure performs a transient, static, stress/displacement analysis. It is especially
provided for the analysis of materials which are described by the MATVP material form.
Viscoelastic (Time Domain)
This is especially provided for the time domain analysis of materials which are described by the MATVE
material options. The dissipative part of the material behavior is defined through a Prony series
representation of the normalized shear and bulk relaxation moduli.
Contact
This type of problem can be solved by either nonlinear static or nonlinear transient dynamic solution
procedures and simultaneous tracks the movement of multiple geometric bodies to detect contact and
then uses appropriate boundary conditions to simulate the friction between surfaces. A robust numerical
procedure is required to simulate these complex physical problems.
Main Index
Static Analysis
114
Static Analysis
Static stress analysis is used when inertia effects can be neglected. The problem may still have a real time
scale, for example when the material has a viscoplastic response, such as rate dependent yield. The
analysis may be linear or nonlinear. Nonlinearity may arise from large displacement effects, material
nonlinearity and boundary nonlinearity (such as contact and friction).
Linear static analysis involves the specification of load cases and appropriate boundary conditions.
Solutions may be combined in a postprocessing mode.
Nonlinear static analysis requires the solution of nonlinear equilibrium equations, for which the program
uses Full Newton-Raphson, Modified Newton-Raphson, Newton-Raphson with Strain Correction, or the
Secant method. Many problems involve history dependent response, so that the solution is usually
obtained as a series of increments, with iteration within each increment to obtain equilibrium. Increments
must sometimes be kept small (in the sense that rotation and strain increments must be small) to assure
correct modeling of history dependent effects, but most commonly the choice of increment size is a
matter of computational efficiency - if the increments are too large, more iteration will be required. Each
solution method has a finite radius of convergence, which means that too large an increment can prevent
any solution from being obtained because the initial state is too far away from the equilibrium state that
is being sought - it is outside the radius of convergence. Thus, there is an algorithmic restriction on the
increment size. For most cases, the automatic incrementation scheme is preferred, because it will select
increment sizes based on these considerations. Direct user control of increment size is also provided
because there are cases when the user has considerable experience with his particular problem and can
therefore select a more economic approach.
References
For directions on setting up a Static analysis using Patran, see Specifying the Analysis Type for a
Subcase and Specifying Static Subcase Parameters (Ch. 7).
Main Index
115
CHAPTER 4
Post-Buckling
Geometrically nonlinear static problems frequently involve buckling or collapse behavior, where the
load-displacement response shows a negative stiffness, and the structure must release strain energy to
remain in equilibrium. Several approaches are possible in such cases. One is to treat the buckling
response dynamically, thus actually modeling the kinetic response with inertia effects included as the
structure snaps. This is easily accomplished by using a transient dynamic procedure to include inertial
effects when the solution goes unstable. In some simple cases, displacement control can provide a
solution, even when the conjugate load (the reaction force) is decreasing as the displacement increases.
More generally, static equilibrium states during the unstable phase of the response can be found by using
an arc-length method. This method is for cases where the loading is proportional - that is, where the load
magnitudes are governed by a single scalar parameter. The method obtains equilibrium solutions by
controlling the path length along the load-displacement curve within each increment (rather than
controlling the load or displacement increment), so that the load magnitude becomes an unknown of the
system.
The method can provide solutions even in cases of complex or unstable response.
Creep, Viscoplastic, and Viscoelastic Behavior
Time dependent material response in static analysis may involve creep and swelling (generally occurring
over fairly long time periods), or rate dependent yield (which is often important in fairly rapid processes,
such as metal working problems). For rate dependent yield, the usual static procedure is used and an
appropriate time scale must be introduced so that MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear will treat the
viscoplasticity correctly. The backward difference operator is used to integrate the plastic strains. Creep
and swelling problems, as well as hereditary viscoelasticity models, are analyzed by the CREEP
procedure (which is specified by including a non-zero time interval on the NLPARM entry). Nonlinear
creep problems are often solved efficiently by forward difference integration of the inelastic strains (the
initial strain method), because the numerical stability limit of this operator is usually sufficiently large
to allow the solution to be developed in a small number of time increments. Linear viscoelasticity models
are integrated with a simple, implicit, unconditionally stable operator. Automatic time stepping in such
cases is governed by an accuracy tolerance parameter specified by the user. This limits the maximum
inelastic strain rate change allowed over an increment.
Main Index
Body Approach
116
Body Approach
Body Approach enables you to position rigid bodies to just touch deformable bodies before beginning a
subsequent Load Step. No analysis is actually performed during a Body Approach step.It is used
commonly in multi-forming simulations where bodies are brought just into contact before the analysis
begins.
Body positioning can be synchronized or not, meaning that if Synchronized is ON, then as soon as one
rigid body contacts, all others stop at that point also. Otherwise all rigid bodies move until they come into
contact. The SOL 600,ID option, APPROACH and SYNCHRONIZE implement these concepts.
References
For directions on setting up a Body Approach analysis using Patran, see Specifying the Analysis Type
for a Subcase and Specifying Body Approach Subcase Parameters (Ch. 7).
Main Index
117
CHAPTER 4
Buckling Analysis
Buckling analysis allows you to determine at what load the structure will collapse. You can detect the
buckling of a structure when the structures stiffness matrix approaches a singular value. You can extract
the eigenvalue in a linear analyses to obtain the linear buckling load.You can also perform eigenvalue
analysis for buckling load in a nonlinear problem based on the incremental stiffness matrices.
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) solves elastic instability problems using the bifurcation
approach. Bifurcation buckling analysis predicts the load at which the structure becomes unstable, and
it predicts the shape that the structure will tend to have after the onset of instability. It does not make any
statement about whether buckling is coincident with overall structural failure. Some structures, including
flat plates, retain finite positive stiffness in the post-buckled range; others, such as thin cylinders under
external pressure, do not. In general, bifurcation buckling calculates critical loads which are
unconservative (i.e., higher than the loads at which the structure actually becomes elastically unstable).
Eigenvalue Buckling Prediction
The approach to buckling prediction with MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is based on the development
of a linear perturbation of the structures stiffness about an equilibrium solution point, which may be the
initial equilibrium under no load, or a preloaded state. At any time a structures total elastic stiffness is
(4-24)
where

is the stiffness caused by the material stiffness, and is the initial stress and load stiffness
caused by non-zero loading. For a stiff elastic system, is almost constant, and the variation of
is proportional to the load variation.
During the BUCKLING step there may be a non-zero dead load, P, and there must be a linear
perturbation load, Q, specified in the BIFURCATION BUCKLING step. We wish to estimate what
multiple of Q, combined with P, which causes instability. Since the response is assumed to be stiff and
elastic, and therefore closely proportional to load, the stiffness at P + Q. is, to a good approximation,
, where is the initial stress and load stiffness caused by Q. Thus, the buckling
load estimate is provided by the eigen problem.
(4-25)
The eigenvalue, , is a multiplier of the applied load which added to the preload provides the critical load
estimate: the predicted collapse load is P + Q. | is the collapse mode.
If no boundary conditions are given in the BIFURCATION BUCKLING step, the boundary conditions
of the state at the start of the buckling investigation (that is, of the previous nonlinear step) are used for
the buckling modes as well as for the perturbation loading. Since boundary conditions within any linear
perturbation step apply only locally within the step, if BIFURCATION BUCKLING steps follow one
another, boundary conditions for the buckling modes must be repeated within each of the
BIFURCATION BUCKLING steps except in steps where they are the same as those belonging to the
state at the start of the buckling investigation.
K | |
0
K | |
p
+
K | |
0
K | |
p
K | |
0
K | |
p
K | |
0
K | |
p
K | |
q
+ + ( ) K | |
q
K | |
0
K | |
p
K | |
q
+ + ( ) | { } 0 { } =
Main Index
Buckling Analysis
118
If boundary conditions are specified in the BIFURCATION BUCKLING step, the complete set of
boundary conditions must be given, since MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear assumes complete definition
of such an option in any linear perturbation analysis.
Several modes can be extracted simultaneously. This is often useful when the structure has different
buckling modes for which the critical loads have about the same magnitude, so that the designer must
consider the possibility of collapse in any of these modes. The collapse modes may be plotted with
Patran.
Bifurcation Approach
To illustrate the bifurcation approach, consider Equation (4-3), which shows a flat plate loaded by
uniaxial edge compression. Using linear static analysis, we can find the so-called primary equilibrium
path of the structure, which is always a straight line (denoted A in Figure 4-3). As shown, increasing the
loads will produce no out-of-plane deflection
.
Figure 4-13 Load vs. Deflection Paths for Central Deflection of a Flat Square Plate
Subjected to Uniaxial Edge Compression
UZ
P
Z
X
Y
P
P
Pcrit
A
B
C
Main Index
119
CHAPTER 4
Eigenvalue Extraction Methods
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses either the inverse power sweep or the Lanczos method to extract
eigenvalues and eigenvectors. Both of these methods are described in the following section, see
Eigenvalue Analysis, 122.
References
For directions on setting up a Buckling analysis, see Specifying the Analysis Type for a Subcase and
Specifying Buckling Subcase Parameters (Ch. 7).
A = Primary equilibrium path, determined by linear elastic static analysis.
B = Secondary equilibrium path, determined by bifurcation buckling analysis.
C = Actual load deflection path, considering initial imperfections and geometrical
nonlinear effects.
Pcrit = Elastic buckling load.
Main Index
Normal Modes
120
Normal Modes
The usual first step in performing a dynamic analysis is determining the natural frequencies and mode
shapes of the structure with damping neglected. Eigenvalue analysis is used to determine these basic
dynamic characteristics. The results of an eigenvalue analysis indicate the frequencies and shapes at
which a structure naturally tends to vibrate. These results characterize the basic dynamic behavior of the
structure and are an indication of how the structure will respond to dynamic loading.
The natural frequencies of a structure are the frequencies at which the structure naturally tends to vibrate
if it is subjected to a disturbance. For example, the strings of a piano are each tuned to vibrate at a specific
frequency. The deformed shape of the structure at a specific natural frequency of vibration is termed its
normal mode of vibration. Each mode shape is associated with a specific natural frequency.
Natural frequencies and mode shapes are functions of the structural properties and boundary conditions.
A cantilever beam has a set of natural frequencies and associated mode shapes (Figure 4-14). If the
structural properties change, the natural frequencies change, but the mode shapes may not necessarily
change. For example, if the elastic modulus of the cantilever beam is changed, the natural frequencies
change but the mode shapes remain the same. If the boundary conditions change, then the natural
frequencies and mode shapes both change. For example, if the cantilever beam is changed so that it is
pinned at both ends, the natural frequencies and mode shapes change.
Main Index
121
CHAPTER 4
Figure 4-14 The First Four Mode Shapes of a Cantilever Beam
Modal quantities can be used to identify problem areas by indicating the more highly stressed elements.
Elements that are consistently highly stressed across many or all modes will probably be highly stressed
when dynamic loads are applied.
Modal strain energy is a useful quantity in identifying candidate elements for design changes to eliminate
problem frequencies. Elements with large values of strain energy in a mode indicate the location of large
elastic deformation (energy). These elements are those which most directly affect the deformation in a
mode. Therefore, changing the properties of these elements with large strain energy should have more
effect on the natural frequencies and mode shapes than if elements with low strain energy were changed.
SOL 600 contains two methods for eigenvalue extraction and three time integration operators. Nonlinear
effects, including material nonlinearity, geometric nonlinearity, and boundary nonlinearity, can be
incorporated.
In addition to distributed mass, you can also attach concentrated masses associated with each degree of
freedom of the system. You can include damping in either the modal superposition or the direct
x
y
z
4
x
y
z
1
x
y
z
2
x
y
z
3
Main Index
Normal Modes
122
integration methods. You can also include (nonuniform) displacement and/or velocity as an initial
condition, and apply time-dependent forces and/or displacements as boundary conditions.
Eigenvalue Analysis
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses either the inverse power sweep method or the Lanczos method to
extract eigenvalues and eigenvectors. The inverse power sweep method is typically used for extracting a
few modes while the Lanczos method is optimal for a few or many modes.
In dynamic eigenvalue analysis, we find the solution to an undamped linear dynamics problem:

where is the stiffness matrix, is the mass matrix, are the eigenvalues (frequencies) and are
the eigenvectors. In MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, is the tangent stiffness matrix, which can
include material and geometrically nonlinear contributions. The mass matrix is formed from both
distributed mass and point masses.
Inverse Power Sweep
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear creates an initial trial vector. To obtain a new vector, the program
multiplies the initial vector by the mass matrix and the inverse (factorized) stiffness matrix. This
process is repeated until convergence is reached according to either of the following criteria: single
eigenvalue convergence or double eigenvalue convergence. In single eigenvalue convergence, the
program computes an eigenvalue at each iteration. Convergence is assumed when the values of two
successive iterations are within a prescribed tolerance. In double eigenvalue convergence, the program
assumes that the trial vector is a linear combination of two eigenvectors.
Using the three latest vectors, the program calculates two eigenvalues. It compares these two values with
the two values calculated in the previous step; convergence is assumed if they are within the prescribed
tolerance.
When an eigenvalue has been calculated, the program either exits from the extraction loop (if a sufficient
number of vectors has been extracted) or it creates a new trial vector for the next calculation. If a single
eigenvalue was obtained, MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses the double eigenvalue routine to obtain
the best trial vector for the next eigenvalue. If two eigenvalues were obtained, the program creates an
arbitrary trial vector orthogonal to the previously obtained vectors.
K e
2
M ( )| 0 =
K M e |
K
Main Index
123
CHAPTER 4
After MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear has calculated the first eigenvalue, it orthogonalizes the trial
vector at each iteration to previously extracted vectors (using the Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization
procedure). Note that the power shift procedure is available with the inverse power sweep method.
To select the power shift, set the following parameters:
Initial shift frequency This is normally set to zero (unless the structure has rigid body modes,
preventing a decomposition around the zeroth frequency).
Number of modes to be extracted between each shift A value smaller than five is probably not
economical because a shift requires a new decomposition of the stiffness matrix.
Auto shift parameter When you decide to do a shift, the new shift point is set to
Highest frequency2 + scalar x (highest frequency - next highest frequency)2
You can define the value of the scalar through the EIGR/EIGRL option.
The Lanczos Method
The Lanczos algorithm converts the original eigenvalue problem into the determination of the
eigenvalues of a tri-diagonal matrix. The method can be used either for the determination of all modes
or for the calculation of a small number of modes. For the latter case, the Lanczos method is the most
efficient eigenvalue extraction algorithm. A simple description of the algorithm is as follows.
Consider the eigenvalue problem:
(4-26)
Equation (4-26) can be rewritten as:
(4-27)
Consider the transformation:
(4-28)
Substituting Equation (4-30) into Equation (4-29) and premultiplying by the matrix on both sides of
the equation, we have
(4-29)
The Lanczos algorithm results in a transformation matrix such that:
(4-30)
(4-31)
where the matrix is a symmetrical tri-diagonal matrix of the form:
e
2
M u K u + 0 =
1
e
2
------ M u M K
1
M u =
u Q q =
Q
T
1
e
2
------ Q
T
M Q q Q
T
M K
1
M Q q =
Q
Q
T
M Q I =
Q
T
M K
1
MQ T =
T
Main Index
Normal Modes
124
(4-32)
Consequently, the original eigenvalue problem, Equation (4-26), is reduced to the following new
eigenvalue problem:
(4-33)
The eigenvalues in Equation (4-33) can be calculated by the standard QL-method.
You can either select the number of modes to be extracted, or a range of modes to be extracted. The Sturm
sequence check can be used to verify that all of the required eigenvalues have been found. In addition,
you can select the lowest frequency to be extracted to be greater than zero.
The Lanczos procedure also allows you to restart the analysis at a later time and extract additional roots.
It is unnecessary to recalculate previously obtained roots using this option.
Eigenvalue extraction is controlled by:
1. The maximum number of iterations per mode in the power sweep method; or the maximum
number of iterations for all modes in the Lanczos iteration method,
2. an eigenvalue has converged when the difference between the eigenvalues in two consecutive
sweeps divided by the eigenvalue is less than the tolerance, and
3. the Lanczos iteration method has converged when the normalized difference between all
eigenvalues satisfies the tolerance. The maximum number of iterations and the tolerance can be
specified.
Modal Stresses and Reactions
After the modal shapes (and frequencies) are extracted, stresses and reactions at a specified mode may
be recovered if desired. This option can be repeated for any of the extracted modes. The stresses are
computed from the modal displacement vector ; the nodal reactions are calculated from
.
T
o
1
|
2
0 0
|
2
o
2
|
3
0
0 |
3
o
3
|
m
0 0 |
m
o
m
=
1
e
2
------ q T q =
|
F K| e
2
M| =
Main Index
125
CHAPTER 4
Free Vibration Analysis
If a structure is not totally constrained in space, it is possible for the structure to displace (move) as a
rigid body or as a partial or complete mechanism. For each possible component of rigid-body motion or
mechanism, there exists one natural frequency which is equal to zero. The zero-frequency modes are
called rigid-body modes. Rigid-body motion of all or part of a structure represents the motion of the
structure in a stress-free condition. Stress-free, rigid-body modes are useful in conducting dynamic
analyses of unconstrained structures, such as aircraft and satellites. Also, rigid-body modes can be
indicative of modeling errors or an inadequate constraint set.
Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, SOL 600 can perform free vibration analysis to compute the natural
frequencies and associated mode shapes of linear elastic structures. The structure is assumed to be
initially unstressed. A real eigenvalue analysis is performed, which assumes that there is no damping and
that the structure is not spinning (i.e., no Coriolis force).
Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, SOL 600 free vibration analysis consists of the following steps:
1. Input. The problem geometry (nodes and elements), physical and material properties, loads and
boundary conditions are taken from the Patran Neutral File and put into the MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear, SOL 600 file.
2. Bandwidth Minimization (Optional). The FEA nodes are renumbered for minimum bandwidth.
3. Element stiffness matrix and mass matrix. The element stiffness matrices and the consistent mass
matrices are computed. See Element Library (Ch. 11) for a detailed description of the MSC
Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, SOL 600.
4. Global stiffness matrix and mass matrix assembly. Stiffness matrix and the mass matrix are
assembled. Boundary and constraint conditions are incorporated by appropriately modifying the
element stiffness and mass matrices.
5. Solution of the generalized eigenvalue problem. The frequencies and mode shape vectors are
computed by solving the generalized eigenvalue problem.
Modal strain energy. The modal strain energies are computed using the mode shape vectors.
References
For directions on setting up a Normal Modes analysis, see Specifying the Analysis Type for a Subcase
and Specifying Normal Modes Subcase Parameters (Ch. 7).
Main Index
Normal Modes
126
Support of Complex Eigenvalue Analysis
SOL 600 supports complex eigenvalue analysis via the CMETHOD Case Control command and the EIGC
Bulk Data entry. In addition, four new Bulk Data parameters have been introduced:
The flow of the run is as follows:
Create a primary MSC Nastran SOL 600 input file (we will name it jid.dat for this example),
using CONTINUE option on the command line.
Submit MSC Nastran in the standard fashion. For this example, the following command is used:
nastran jid rc=nast1.rc
The nast1.rc file contains items such as scratch=yes, memory=16mw, etc.
The primary MSC Nastran run creates an Marc input file named jid.marc.dat
The primary MSC Nastran run spawns Marc to perform nonlinear analysis. Marc generates the
required DMIG matrices for this example.
The nonlinear Marc analyses completes and generates standard files.
Control of the process returns to MSC Nastran. A new MSC Nastran input file named jid.nast.dat
will be created from the original input file. This file will contain the CMETHOD Case Control
command and EIGC Bulk Data entry, all of the original geometry and additional entries to read
the dmig002 file.
A second MSC Nastran job will be spawned from the primary MSC Nastran run using the
command
nastran jid.nast rc=nast2.rc
The nast2.rc file can be the same as nast1.rc or can contain different items. Usually memory will
need to be larger in nast2.rc than in nast1.rc.
The second MSC Nastran run computes the complex eigenvalues and finishes.
Control of the process returns to the primary MSC Nastran run and it finishes.
param,MARCFILi,dmig00
2
This means that a file named dmig002 will be used. It contains stiffness
matrix terms (possibly from a set of unsymmetric friction stiffness
matrices)
param,MRMTXNAM, Na
me,kaax
This means that in the dmig002 file, use DMIG matrix terms labeled kaax
(or KAAX case does not matter).
param,MRSPAWN2, CM
D,tran
This means that the primary MSC Nastran run will spawn another MSC
Nastran run to compute the complex eigenvalues. The name of the
command is nastran (nas is always used and the characters specified by
this parameter are added to the end of nas. Thus, we get nas+tran=nastran).
param,MRRCFILE, RCF,
nast2.rc
This is the name of the rc file to be used for the second (spawned) MSC
Nastran run.
Main Index
127
CHAPTER 4
The first portion of the dmig002 file is as follows:
$2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 234567812345
DMIG KAAX 0 1 2 0 324
DMIG* KAAX 6 1
* 6 1 3.014712042D+05
* 6 2 4.204709763D+08
*
DMIG* KAAX 6 2
* 6 1 1.204709763D+05
* 6 2 3.014712042D+05
*
DMIG* KAAX 6 3
* 6 1-4.616527206D+04
* 6 2-4.616527206D+04
* 6 3 1.308497299D+05
DMIG* KAAX 17 1
* 6 1 6.239021038D+04
* 6 2-2.528344607D+03
* 6 3-6.239758760D+03
* 17 1 5.939989945D+05
Main Index
128
Transient response analysis is the most general method for computing forced dynamic response. The
purpose of a transient response analysis is to compute the behavior of a structure subjected to
time-varying excitation. The transient excitation is explicitly defined in the time domain. All of the forces
applied to the structure are known at each instant in time. Forces can be in the form of applied forces
and/or enforced motions.
The important results obtained from a transient analysis are typically displacements, velocities, and
accelerations of grid points, and forces and stresses in elements.
Depending upon the structure and the nature of the loading, two different numerical methods can be used
for a transient response analysis: direct and modal. The direct method performs a numerical integration
on the complete coupled equations of motion. The Direct method can take into account nonlinearities.
The modal method is a linear solution and utilizes the mode shapes of the structure to reduce and
uncouple the equations of motion (when modal or no damping is used); the solution is then obtained
through the summation of the individual modal responses.
Direct Transient Response
Transient dynamic analysis deals with an initial-boundary value problem. In order to solve the equations
of motion of a structural system, it is important to specify proper initial and boundary conditions. You
obtain the solution to the equations of motion by direct integration (for linear or nonlinear systems). In
direct integration, selecting a proper time step is very important. You can include damping in the system.
The following sections discuss the applicable aspects of transient analysis listed below.
Direct Integration
Time Step Definition
Initial Conditions
Time-Dependent Boundary Conditions
Damping
Main Index
129
CHAPTER 4
Direct Integration
Direct integration is a numerical method for solving the equations of motion of a dynamic system. It is
used for both linear and nonlinear problems. In nonlinear problems, the nonlinear effects can include
geometric, material, and boundary nonlinearities. For transient analysis, MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear offers three direct integration operators listed below.
Newmark-beta Operator
Houbolt Operator
Single Step Houbolt
Direct integration techniques are imprecise; this is true regardless of which technique you use. Each
technique exhibits at least one of the following problems: conditional stability, artificial damping, and
phase errors, but all can be minimized so that they are negligible.
This operator is probably the most popular direct integration method used in finite element analysis. For
linear problems, it is unconditionally stable and exhibits no numerical damping. The Newmark-beta
operator can effectively obtain solutions for linear and nonlinear problems for a wide range of loadings.
The procedure allows for change of time step, so it can be used in problems where sudden impact makes
a reduction of time step desirable. This operator can be used with adaptive time step control. Although
this method is stable for linear problems, instability can develop if nonlinearities occur. By reducing the
time step and/or adding damping, you can overcome these problems.
Houbolt Operator
This operator has the same unconditional stability as the Newmark-beta operator. In addition, it has
strong numerical damping characteristics, particularly for higher frequencies. This strong damping
makes the method very stable for nonlinear problems as well. In fact, stability increases with the time
step size. The drawback of this high damping is that the solution can become inaccurate for large time
steps. Hence, the results obtained with the Houbolt operator usually have a smooth appearance, but are
not necessarily accurate. The Houbolt integration operator, implemented in MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear uses a fixed time step procedure, is particularly useful in obtaining a rough scoping solution
to the problem.
Single Step Houbolt Operator
Two computational drawbacks of the Houbolt operator are the requirement of a special starting
procedure and the restriction to fixed time steps. A Single Step Houbolt procedure has been presented
[Ref. 1.], being unconditionally stable, second order accurate and asymptotically annihilating. In this
way, the algorithm is computationally more convenient compared to the standard Houbolt method, and
the numerical damping for this method as implemented in SOL 600 has been significantly improved over
the standard Houbolt method. This algorithm is recommended for all dynamic analyses.
Main Index
130
Technical Background
Consider the equations of motion of a structural system:
(4-34)
where , , and are mass, damping, and stiffness matrices, respectively, and , , , and are
acceleration, velocity, displacement, and force vectors. Various direct integration operators can be used
to integrate the equations of motion to obtain the dynamic response of the structural system. The
technical background of the three direct integration operators available in MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear is described below.
The generalized form of the Newmark-beta operator is
(4-35)
(4-36)
where superscript denotes a value at the nth time step and , , and take on their usual meanings.
The particular form of the dynamic equations corresponding to the trapezoidal rule
results in
(4-37)
where the internal force is
Ma Cv Ku + + F =
M C K a v u F
U
t
At +
t ( )
t
t At + ( )
U
t
U
t
uAt +
t uAt + ( )
u
n 1 +
u
n
Atv
n
1 2 | ( )At
2
a
n
|At
2
a
n 1 +
+ + + =
v
n 1 +
v
n
1 ( )Ata
n
Ata
n 1 +
+ + =
n
u v a
1 2 = | 1 4 = ,
4
At
2
-------- M
2
At
----- C K + +
\ .
| |
Au F
n 1 +
R
n
M a
n
4
At
----- v
n
+
\ .
| |
Cv
n
+ + =
R
Main Index
131
CHAPTER 4
(4-38)
Equation (4-39) allows implicit solution of the system
(4-39)
Notice that the operator matrix includes , the tangent stiffness matrix. Hence, any nonlinearity results
in a reformulation of the operator matrix. Additionally, if the time step changes, this matrix must be
recalculated because the operator matrix also depends on the time step. It is possible to change the values
of and if so desired.
Step by Step Solution Algorithm using Newmark Beta Method
1. Initialize:
2. Select time step size At and calculate integration constants:
3. Form effective stiffness matrix [K]*:
[K]* = [K] + a
0
[M] + a
1
[C]
4. Triangularize (reduce) [K]*:
5. Compute effective load vector at time t + At:
(4-40)
6. Solve for displacements at time t + At:
R |
T
odv
V
}
=
u
n 1 +
u
n
Au + =
K
|
U
o
, U
o
, U
o
a
o
1
|At
--------- ; a
1

|At ( )
-------------- = =
a
2

|At ( )
-------------- ; a
3
1
2|
------
\ .
| |
1 = =
a
4
1
|
---
\ .
| |
1 ; a
5
At
2
-----
\ .
| |

|
--- 2
\ .
| |
= =
R
t At +
*
R
t At +
M | | a
0
U
t
a
2
U
t
a
3
U
t
+ + ( ) + =
+ C | | a
1
U
t
a
4
U
t
a
5
U
t
+ + ( )
K | |
*
U
t At +
R
t At +
*
=
Main Index
132
7. Compute accelerations at time t + At, using:
8. Compute velocities at time t + At, using:
Repeat steps 5 through 8 for each time step.
Houbolt Operator
The Houbolt operator is based on the use of a cubic fitted through three previous points and the current
(unknown) in time. This results in the equations
(4-41)
and
(4-42)
Substituting this into the equation of motion results in
(4-43)
This equation provides an implicit solution scheme. By solving Equation (4-39) for , you obtain
Equation (4-44), and so obtain and .
(4-44)
Equation (4-43) is based on uniform time steps errors occur when the time step is changed. Also, a
special starting procedure is necessary since and appear in Equation (4-43).
U
t At +
a
0
U
t At +
U
t
( ) a
2
U
t
a
3
U
t
=
U
t At +
U
t
1 ( )AtU
t
At ( )U
t At +
+ + =
v
n 1 +
11
6
------ u
n 1 +
3u
n
3
2
--- u
n 1
1
3
--- u
n 2
+
\ .
| |
At =
a
n 1 +
2u
n 1 +
5u
n
4u
n 1
u
n 2
+ ( ) At
2
=
2
At
2
-------- M
11
6At
--------- C K + +
\ .
| |
Au F
n 1 +
R
n
1
At
2
-------- 3u
n
4u
n 1
u
n 2
+ ( )M + + =
1
At
-----
7
6
--- u
n
3
2
--- u
n 1
1
3
--- u
n 2
+
\ .
| |
C
Au
v
n 1 +
a
n 1 +
u
n 1 +
u
n
Au + =
u
n 1
u
n 2
Main Index
133
CHAPTER 4
Single Step Houbolt Operator
The Single Step Houbolt operator starts with the following equilibrium equation and expressions for the
velocity and acceleration:
(4-45)
(4-46)
(4-47)
Notice that in contrast to the Newmark and the standard Houbolt method, the equilibrium equation also
contains terms corresponding to the beginning of the increment. Without loss of generality, the parameter
can be set to 1. Based on asymptotic annihilation and second order accuracy, the remaining
parameters can be shown to fulfill:
, , , , ,
, , ,
In this way, the number of unknown parameters has been reduced to two. Based on a Taylor series
expansion of the displacement about the nth time step, and should be related by ,
which finally yields . According to [Ref. 1.], should be set to 3/2 (with )
to minimize the velocity error and to 1/2 (with ) to avoid velocity overshoot. The default values
in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear are and , but the user can modify and if
so desired.
Substitution of the velocity and acceleration into the equilibrium equation results in:
(4-48)
o
m1
Ma
n 1 +
o
c1
Cv
n 1 +
o
k1
Ku
n 1 +
o
m
Ma
n
o
c
Cv
n
o
k
Ku
n
+ + + + + =
o
f 1
F
n 1 +
a
f
F
n
+
u
n 1 +
u
n
Atv
n
|At
2
a
n
|
1
At
2
a
n 1 +
+ + + =
v
n 1 +
v
n
Ata
n
1
Ata
n 1 +
+ + =
o
m1
o
k
0 = | = |
1

1
+ = o
m
1 2 = o
k1
1 2|
1
=
o
c
2| |
1
+ ( ) 4|
1
2
= o
c1
2| 3|
1
+ ( ) 4|
1
2
= o
f
o
k
= o
f 1
o
k1
=
| |
1
| |
1
+ 1 2 =
1 2 1 2
1
( ) =
1
1 2 =
0 =
1
3 2 = 1 2 =
1
1
|
1
At
2
o
k1
------------------------ M
o
c1
1
|
1
Ato
k1
--------------------- C K + +
)
`

Au F
n 1 +
Ku
n
1
|
1
At
2
o
k1
------------------------ M Atv
n
|At
2
a
n
+ { }
o
m
o
k1
--------- Ma
n
o
c1
o
k1
--------- C v
n
At a
n
1
|
1
At
------------ Atv
n
|At
2
a
n
+
)
`

+
)
`

o
c
o
k1
--------- Cv
n
+ =
Main Index
134
Time Step Definition
In a transient dynamic analysis, time step parameters are required for integration in time. MSC Nastrans
PARAM,MARCAUTO,-1 option can be used for the Newmark-beta operator and the Single Step Houbolt
operator to invoke the adaptive time control. Enter parameters to specify the time step size and period of
time for this set of boundary conditions.
When using the Newmark-beta operator, decide which frequencies are important to the response. The
time step in this method should not exceed 10 percent of the period of the highest relevant frequency in
the structure. Otherwise, large phase errors will occur. The phenomenon usually associated with too large
a time step is strong oscillatory accelerations. With even larger time steps, the velocities start oscillating.
With still larger steps, the displacement eventually oscillates. In nonlinear problems, instability usually
follows oscillation. When using adaptive dynamics, you should prescribe a maximum time step.
As in the Newmark-beta operator, the time step in Houbolt integration should not exceed 10 percent of
the period of the highest frequency of interest. However, the Houbolt method not only causes phase
errors, it also causes strong artificial damping. Therefore, high frequencies are damped out quickly and
no obvious oscillations occur. It is, therefore, completely up to the engineer to determine whether the
time step was adequate. The damping problem is alleviated to a large extent with the Single Step Houbolt
operator.
In nonlinear problems, the mode shapes and frequencies are strong functions of time because of plasticity
and large displacement effects, so that the above guidelines can be only a coarse approximation. To obtain
a more accurate estimate, repeat the analysis with a significantly different time step (1/5 to 1/10 of the
original) and compare responses.
Initial Conditions
In a transient dynamic analysis, you can specify initial conditions such as nodal displacements and/or
nodal velocities. To enter initial conditions, use the following option: TIC for specified nodal
displacements, and Bulk Data nodal velocities.
Main Index
135
CHAPTER 4
Damping
In a transient dynamic analysis, damping represents the dissipation of energy in the structural system. It
also retards the response of the structural system.
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear allows you to enter two types of damping in a transient dynamic
analysis: discrete dampers and Rayleigh damping.
For direct integration damping, you can specify the damping matrix as a linear combination of the mass
and stiffness matrices of the system. You can specify damping coefficients on an element basis.
Stiffness damping should not be applied to either Herrmann elements or gap elements because of the
presence of Lagrange multipliers.
Numerical damping is used to damp out unwanted high-frequency chatter in the structure. If the time step
is decreased (stiffness damping might cause too much damping), use the numerical damping option to
make the damping (stiffness) coefficient proportional to the time step. Thus, if the time step decreases,
high-frequency response can still be accurately represented. This type of damping is particularly useful
in problems where the characteristics of the model and/or the response change strongly during analysis
(for example, problems involving opening or closing gaps).
Element damping uses coefficients on the element matrices and is represented by the equation:
(4-49)
where
If the same damping coefficients are used throughout the structure, Equation (4-49) is equivalent to
Rayleigh damping.
The damping on elastic foundations is the same as the damping on the element on which the foundation
is applied.
References
For directions on setting up a Transient Dynamic analysis, see Specifying the Analysis Type for a
Subcase and Specifying Transient Dynamic Subcase Parameters (Ch. 7).
= the global damping matrix
= the mass matrix of i
th
element
= the stiffness matrix of the i
th
element
= the mass damping coefficient on the i
th
element
= the usual stiffness damping coefficient on the i
th
element
= the numerical damping coefficient on the i
th
element
= the time increment
C o
i
M
i
|
i

i
At
t
----- +
\ .
| |
K
i
+
)
`

i 1 =
n
=
C
M
i
K
i
a
i
|
i
i
At
Main Index
Creep
136
Creep
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) offers two schemes for modeling creep in conjunction with
plasticity. Creep for SOL 600 is described differently than Creep for SOL 106. The CREEP entry used
in SOL 106 will not work in SOL 600, and if entered will cause the job to terminate with an appropriate
message. Creep in SOL 600 must be described using viscoplastic materials (MATVP). The creep
formulations for SOL 600 are:
1. Treating creep strains and plastic strains separately using an explicit procedure (where the creep
is treated explicitly) or an implicit procedure (where both creep and plasticity are treated
implicitly). These procedures are available with standard options via data input or with user-
specified options via user subroutines. More details are provided below.
2. Modeling creep strains and plastic strains in a unified fashion (viscoplasticity). Both explicit and
implicit procedures are again available for modeling unified viscoplasticity. More details are
provided in the section titled Viscoplasticity, 109. The options offered by MSC Nastran for
modeling creep are as follows:
Creep data can be entered directly through the MATVP Bulk Data entry. The form of the creep is
designated with either POWER for empirical creep law or TABLE for a tabular input of creep
model parameters.
An automatic time stepping scheme can be used to maximize the time step size in the analysis.
Eigenvalues can be extracted for the estimation of creep buckling time. In addition, for explicit
creep, the following additional options can be used:
Creep behavior can be either isotropic or anisotropic.
The Oak Ridge National Laboratory (ORNL) rules on creep can be activated.
Adaptive Time Control
An automatic creep option takes advantage of the diffusive characteristics of most creep solutions.
Specifically, this option controls the transient creep analysis. You specify a period of creep time and a
suggested time increment. The program automatically selects the largest possible time increment that is
consistent with the tolerance set on stress and strain increments (see Creep Control Tolerances, 137 in
this chapter).
The algorithm is: for a given time step, a solution is obtained. The program then finds the largest values
of stress change per stress, and creep strain change per elastic strain. It compares these values to the
tolerance values, (stress change tolerance) and (strain change tolerance), for this period.
The value is calculated as the larger of:
(4-50)
or
(4-51)
o A o ( ) T
o
Ac
cr
c
el
( ) T
c
Main Index
137
CHAPTER 4
If , the program resets the time step as:
(4-52)
The time increment is repeated until convergence is obtained or the maximum recycles control is
exceeded. In the latter case, the run is ended.
If the first repeat does not satisfy tolerances, the possible causes are:
Excessive residual load correction
Strong additional nonlinearities such as creep buckling-creep collapse
Incorrect coding in user subroutine CRPLAW, VSWELL, or UVSCPL
Appropriate action should be taken before the solution is restarted.
If all is well, the solution is stepped forward and the next step is begun. The time step used in the next
increment is chosen as
if (4-53)
if (4-54)
if (4-55)
Since the time increment is adjusted to satisfy the tolerances, it is impossible to predetermine the total
number of time increments for a given total creep time.
Creep Control Tolerances
SOL 600 performs a creep analysis under constant load or displacement conditions on the basis of a set
of tolerances and controls you provide.These are as follows:
1. Stress change tolerance This tolerance controls the allowable stress change per time step during
the creep solution, as a fraction of the total stress at a point. Stress change tolerance governs the
accuracy of the transient creep response. If you need accurate tracking of the transient response,
specify a tight tolerance of 1 percent or 2 percent stress change per time step. If you need only the
steady-state solution, supply a relatively loose tolerance of 10-20 percent. It is also possible to
check the absolute rather than the relative stress.
2. Creep strain increment per elastic strain SOL 600 uses either explicit or implicit integration of
the creep rate equation. When the explicit procedure is used, the creep strain increment per elastic
strain is used to control stability. In almost all cases, the default of 50 percent represents the
stability limit, so that you need not provide any entry for this value. It is also possible to check
the absolute rather than the relative strain.
p 1 >
At
new
0.8At
ol d
p =
At
new
At
ol d
= 0.8 p s 1 <
At
new
1.25At
ol d
= 0.65 p s 0.8 <
At
new
1.5At
ol d
= p 0.65 <
Main Index
Creep
138
3. Maximum number of recycles for satisfaction of tolerances The automatic creep option in
SOL 600 chooses its own time step. In some cases, the program recycles to choose a time step that
satisfies tolerances, but recycling rarely occurs more than once per step. Excessive recycling can
be caused by physical problems such as creep buckling, poor coding of user subroutine
CRPLAW, VSWELL, or UVSCPL or excessive residual load correction that can occur when the
creep solution begins from a state that is not in equilibrium. The maximum number of recycles
allows you to avoid wasting machine time under such circumstances. If there is no satisfaction of
tolerances after the attempts at stepping forward, the program stops. The default of five recycles
is conservative in most cases.
4. Low stress cut-off Low stress cut-off avoids excessive iteration and small time steps caused by
tolerance checks that are based on small (round off) stress states. A simple example is a beam in
pure bending. The stress on the neutral axis is a very small roundoff-number, so that automatic
time stepping scheme should not base time step choices on tolerance satisfaction at such points.
The default of five percent of the maximum stress in the structure is satisfactory for most cases.
5. Choice of element for tolerance checking Creep tolerance checking occurs as a default for all
integration points in all elements. You might wish to check tolerances in only 1 element or in up
to 14 elements of your choice. Usually, the most highly stressed element is chosen.
References
1. Chung, J. and Hulbert, G.M., A family of single-step Houbolt time integration algorithms for
structural dynamics, Comp. Meth. in App. Mech. Engg., 118, 1994.
Main Index
Chapter 5: Analysis Techniques
5
Analysis Techniques
Domain Decomposition
RESTARTS
Inertia Relief with Auto-Support
Superelements and Modal Neutral Files
BRKSQL
User Subroutine Support

Main Index
140
The Domain Decomposition Method (DDM) is the ability to subdivide your model into domains. Each
domain is then submitted to a separate computer or CPU for parallel processing. With this ability, you
can analyze large models with much less over all compute time. A single processor job that might take
30 hours to run, can run in half the time on two processors, or even a quarter of the time with four
processors. Jobs that take days to run on a single machine can be run overnight on multiple processors
that would otherwise lay idle. With DDM, large models that were once thought impossible to practically
optimize, now can be solved.
Specifying Domain Decomposition
The PARAMARC Bulk Data entry controls the domain decomposition process. Domains can now be
specified by you or automatically determined.
Defining Domain Decomposition Parameters in Patran
2. Click on Solution Type..., then click Solution Parameters...
3. Select Domain Decomposition... to bring up the subform shown below.
Entry Description
PARAMARC Specifies parallel regions for domain decomposition in nonlinear analysis when
Marc is executed from MSC Nastran
Main Index
141
CHAPTER 5
Analysis Techniques
Decomposition Method
Automatic Automatic is recommended because the work is done by MSC
Nastran.
Manual If manual is selected, groups must be defined previously.
Number of Domains Defines the number of domains to be created.
Model/Current Group This switch is not applicable to this release. By default groups from
all domains will be translated.
Main Index
142
Single Input File Parallel Processing for SOL 600
MSC Nastran has the capability to use a Marc feature called the Single File Parallel file. To use this
capability specify KIND=0 or blank on the PARAMARC entry as shown below.
Format:
Example: To create 4 parallel processes using a single file input procedure.
A similar option to create a single-file Marc t16 file is also available. This option is selected using Bulk
Data PARAM,MARCOUTR,1 which is the default starting with the 2005 r3 version.
DDM Results in Patran
There may be multiple results (post) files from a DDM run just as there may be multiple input files. There
is one for each domain by the same names with the .t16 /.t19 file extension plus the master. If the
master jobname.marc.t16/t19 file is attached, results from all domains are automatically accessed
from each domain post file. If however, you want only results for a particular domain, you must attach
that file only.
DDM Configuration
Please see the MSC.Marc Parallel Version for Windows NT / UNIX Installation and User Notes for
proper configuration. MSC.Marc Parallel must be configured properly in order for DDM to work from
MSC.Patran or MSC Nastran. If you have trouble, please check the following:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PARAMA
RC
ID KIND NPROC
PARAMA
RC
51 4
Field Contents
ID Identification number of the PARAMARC entry -- Not presently used. (Integer)
KIND Designates how parallel domains are created. (Integer > 0, Default = 0)
0=Parallel processing is accomplished using Marcs single file input. The command line
to execute Marc is changed from -np N (or -nprocd N) to -nps N where N is the number of
processors. The maximum number of processors for is 256. Continuation lines may not be
entered for KIND=0.
NPROC Number of processors to be used.
Main Index
143
CHAPTER 5
Analysis Techniques
On Windows machines:
1. Make sure MPICH is installed. This can be done automatically by including bulk data PARAM,
MARMPICH,1 and a file named mpich.dat in the same directory as the Nastran input deck with 3
lines having the content (book) user name (the name you use to log in the PC) domain name (if
you are not a member of the domain, enter local) password (password you enter to login in to the
PC). All items must start in column 1.
2. When using a cluster of Windows machines you must have all the input files in a shared directory
when you submit the job. The MSC.Marc installation on the master host must be in a shared
directory also unless all machines have their own installation of MSC.Marc, and then they must
be referenced in the hostfile.
For UNIX you must be able to rlogin to all referenced machines in the hostfile without
supplying a password. If you cannot, check that your .rhosts file has the name of all the
machines in it. Check with a system administrator if you need help.
Only homogeneous clusters of machines are currently supported. They must all be running the same MPI
service or daemons. For example a cluster of 64 bit HP machines must all use the HP MPI; a cluster of
32 bit HP machines can use either HP MPI or MPICH, but not a mixture; heterogeneous clusters should
work if they all use MPICH; UNIX and Windows clusters are not supported.
More information on running jobs in parallel is provided in the MSC Nastran Implicit SOL 600
Parallel Guide.
Main Index
RESTARTS
144
RESTARTS
A restart capability is available in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600). Any analysis can be
saved from any point for a possible restart. A new static load case or a buckling analysis can be solved
by restarting from the original static analysis.
Specifying Restarts and Parameters
The RESTART Bulk Data entry controls a restart for SOL 600.
Specifying a Restart in Patran
2. On the Analysis form, set the Action>Object>Method combination to Analyze>Restart>Full
Run.
3. Click on Restart Parameters... to bring up the subform shown below.
Entry Description
RESTART Specifies writing or reading of restart data .
Main Index
145
CHAPTER 5
Analysis Techniques
Inertia Relief in SOL 600 exceeds that available in other MSC Nastran solution sequences by using the
Bulk Data entry, SUPORT6. One method is available for MSC.Nastran 2005 r3.
The support method may be used to specify which degrees of freedom should be supported for each
body. This is an extension of the PARAM,INREL,1 method and may use fewer computer resources than
the eigenvalue method for some models.
Inertia Relief may be employed on a subcase-by-subcase basis and can be removed if all previously
unsupported bodies merge into the main body (which is supported) either all at once or gradually.
Review
Inertia relief has long been a feature in MSC Nastran SOL 101, which enables applied static loading to
an unconstrained structure and the calculation of deformed shape and internal loads within the
accelerated structure. Inertia relief calculates the rigid body mass x acceleration loads imparted by the
applied loads, and applies them in combination to the flexible body to produce a load-balanced static
formulation in the linear acceleration reference frame. The steady-state relative structural
displacements and internal loads are calculated using support entries (PARAM,INREL,-1) or the auto-
support capability (PARAM,INREL,-2).
Inertia relief is commonly used to calculate psuedo-static stresses, strains, and loads of unsupported
structures due to static loading.
Main Index
146
General Formulation
Consider common 3D unconstrained structure with six rigid body modes.
Rigid body mechanics loads balance (small motion):
and (5-1)
In finite element matrix notation:
(5-2)
is a (a-dof x 6) geometric rigid body matrix resulting from unit displacements in each basic direction
with respect to GRDPNT or (0,0,0). provides summation and cross-product utilities for loads and
motion at each dof . Rigid body accelerations and are represented by 6 x 1 at
PARAM,GRDPNT. All and are entered into load vector ; and are entered into a-set mass
matrix . Solve for the rigid body accelerations:
(5-3)
is the total 6 x 6 a-set mass, nonsingular for normal 3D models with appropriate mass properties.
Apply the balanced loads to the finite element structure in linear statics formulation. This form is
employed by the PARAM,INREL,-2 method:
(Inrel = -2) (5-4)
In contrast, older method INREL = -1 and SOL 111 employ the following:
(Inrel = -1) (5-5)
(SOL 111 free-free RESVECs) (5-6)
Each method uses a different representation for the rigid body matrix and accelerations. Stiffness matrix
K is singular (i.e., rank ), and each method likewise employs different techniques to solve for
displacement shape U.
F
i
m
i
a
i
0 = M
i
r
i o
+ F
i
( )
I
i
o
i
r
i o
+ m
i
a
i
( )
0 =
R | |
T
P { } R | |
T
M | | R | | u
o
{ } 0 { } =
R
R
i a
i
o
i
u
o
F
i
M
i
P m
i
I
i
M
u
o
{ } R | |
T
M | | R | | ( )
1
R | |
T
P { } =
R
T
MR
K | | U { } P { } = M | | R | | u
o
{ }
K | | U { } P { } = M | | D | | U
r
{ }
K | | U { } P { } = M | | |
r
| | q
r
{ }
l a 6 =
Main Index
147
CHAPTER 5
Analysis Techniques
SUPORT6 Entry
SUPORT6 Inertia relief used in SOL 600 only.
Format:
Example:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SUPORT6
SID METH IREMOV IDS1
SUPORT6 0 3 1 101
SUPORT6 4 3 -2
Field Contents
SID Set ID corresponding to a Case Control SUPORT1 entry or zero. (Integer; Default = 0)
0 If this is the only SUPORT6 entry, use this SUPORT6 entry for all subcases.
If there are multiple SUPORT6 entries, use the one with SID=0 for Marc
increment zero.
N Use this SUPORT6 entry for the subcase specified by Case Control
SUPORT1=N.
Different SUPORT6 entries can be used for each subcase if desired and different
subcases can use different methods.
If there is only one SUPORT6 entry (with SID=0), no Case Control SUPORT1 entries
are necessary.
METH Method to use (Integer; Default = 0)
0 Inertia relief is not active for this subcase.
3 Use the Support Method, usually specified using param,inrel,-1 for other
solution sequences. (See Remark 1.) Input will come from all SUPORT
entries and those SUPORT1 entries with ID=SID.
IREMOV Method to retain or remove inertia relief from a previous subcase (Integer; Default =
1).
1 Retain inertia relief conditions from previous subcase.
-1 Remove inertia relief loads immediately.
Main Index
148
Remark:
1. The parameter INREL is ignored by SOL 600.
-2 Remove inertia relief loads gradually
IREMOV should be blank or 1 unless METH is 0.
IDS1 ID of SUPORT1 entries to be used if METH=3 and SID=0 (Integer; no Default).
For METH=3, only SUPORT1 entries with ID=IDS1 will be used in Marc increment
zero. All SUPORT entries will be used.
(Used for METH=3 when SID=0 ONLY.)
Field Contents
Main Index
149
CHAPTER 5
Analysis Techniques
Superelements and Modal Neutral Files
MSC Nastran SOL 600 allows you to create external superelements or to output MSC Adams MNF files.
External Superelements
External superelements are available both for input (generated by previous MSC Nastran jobs) and
output. To generated matrices use Bulk Data entry, MDMIOUT to obtain the reduced (or full) stiffness.
These matrices can then be used to compute eigenvalues, perform harmonic or random vibration
analyses, etc.
For MSC Nastran-generated matrices, use the same procedures that are used by other MSC Nastran
external superelement creation runs employing the EXTSEOUT Case Control command. For the analysis
that combines the external superelements, use the new Bulk Data entry, MESUPER and include the .asm
and .pch files from the superelement creation runs.
Example
An example of the input data for the combination run follows:
SOL 600,101 path=1 stop=1
CEND
param,marcbug,0
TITLE = 2 SUPERELEMENTS AND THE RESIDUAL -- TEST PROBLEM NO. EXTSE2R
SUBTITLE = 8 X 8 MESH OF QUAD4 ELEMENTS; GM-CMS PROJECT
param,mextsee,1
SPC = 100
LOAD = 1000
DISP = ALL
K2GG=KAAX
M2GG=MAAX
BEGIN BULK
param,marcnd99,-1
force, 1000, 844, , 0.1, 0., 0., 1.
SPC1 100 12346 840 848
$2345678 2345678 2345678
mesuper 100 extse2a.pch
mesuper 200 extse2b.pch
include 'OUTDIR:extse2a.asm'
include 'OUTDIR:extse2b.asm'
include 'OUTDIR:extse2a.pch'
include 'OUTDIR:extse2b.pch'
ENDDATA
MDMIOUT Entry for MNF Files and Stiffness Matrices
You can now create MSC Adams modal neutral files (MNF) using the Bulk Data entry, MDMIOUT. Once
read into MSC Adams you can view and animate modal results. You can find more information on the
MSC Adams family of motion products by visiting our MSC website.
Main Index
BRKSQL
150
BRKSQL
Bulk Data entry BRKSQL is available for brake squeal simulation which replaces several parameters and
MARCIN entries previously used. It is now possible to determine the unstable brake squeal roots using
MSC Nastrans complex eigenvalue solver and unsymmetric friction stiffness matrices form Marc either
for an undeformed structure or after a nonlinear subcase. Brake squeal analysis for SOL 600 is
accomplished by starting a primary MSC Nastran job, spawning Marc to calculate the unsymmetric
friction stiffness matrices either at the beginning or end of a nonlinear subcase, then spawning a second
MSC Nastran job to calculate the complex eigenvalues. Unstable roots indicate potential brake squeal.
They are designated by positive real roots and negative damping in the f06 output file.
Specifies data for brake squeal calculations using SOL 600.
Format:
Example:
BRKSQL Specifies data for Brake Squeal Calculations using SOL 600
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BRKSQL METH AVSTIF FACT1 GLUE ICORD
R1 R2 R3 X Y Z
NASCMD
RCFILE
BRKSQL 1 5.34E6 1.0 1.0
0.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
tran
nastb
Main Index
151
CHAPTER 5
Analysis Techniques
Field Contents
METH Method flag corresponding to the type of brake squeal calculations to be performed.
(Integer, Default = 1)
0 = Perform brake squeal calculations before any nonlinear analysis has taken place
1 = Perform brake squeal calculations after all nonlinear load cases
AVSTIF Approximate average stiffness per unit area between the pads and disk. Corresponds to
Marcs PARAMETERS fifth datablock, field 1. This value is also known as the initial
friction stiffness in the Marc Volume C documentation. AVSTIF can be obtained by
either experiment or numerical simulation. A larger value of AVSTIF corresponds to a
higher contact pressure, which usually results in more unstable modes. (Real; no Default;
required field)
FACT1 Factor to scale friction stiffness values calculated by Marc. (Real; Default = 1.0)
GLUE Flag specifying whether MPC for non-pad/disk surfaces with glued contact are used or
ignored (Integer, Default = 0). A value of 0 means ignore the MPC; a value of 1 means
include the MPCs (see Remark 6).
ICORD Flag indicating whether coordinates are updated or not. A value of 0 means coordinates
are not updated. A value of 1 means coordinates are updated using the formula
Cnew=Corig+Defl where Cnew are updated coordinates, Corig are original coordinates,
and Defl are the final displacements from last Marc increment. (Integer; Default = 0)
R1 X direction cosine (basic coord system) of axis of rotation; corresponds to Marc
ROTATION A second datablock. (Real; no Default. Required field)
R2 Y direction cosine (basic coord system) of axis of rotation; corresponds to Marc
ROTATION A second datablock.
R3 Z direction cosine (basic coord system); corresponds to Marc ROTATION A second
datablock. (Real; no Default. Required field)
X X coordinate in basic coord system of a point on the axis of rotation; corresponds to Marc
ROTATION A third datablock. (Real; no Default. Required field)
Y Y coordinate in basic coord system of a point on the axis of rotation; corresponds to Marc
Z Z coordinate in basic coord system of a point on the axis of rotation; corresponds to Marc
Main Index
BRKSQL
152
Remarks:
1. This entry is used to calculate complex eigenvalues for brake squeal using unsymmetric stiffness
friction matrices calculated by Marc. Options exist to obtain the unsymmetric stiffness matrices
using the undeformed geometry (initial contact) or after all specified nonlinear subcases.
2. SOL 600 performs brake squeal calculations. The main (original) MSC Nastran job with input file
jid.dat or jid.bdf spawns Marc just as it does for any other SOL 600 job. Marc calculates
unsymmetric friction stiffness matrices that1 are saved on a file (jid.marc.bde with associated file
jid.marc.ccc). The primary MSC Nastran job then creates input data for a second MSC Nastran
job (jid.nast.dat) to use the unsymmetric stiffness matrices in an complex eigenvalue extraction.
The primary MSC Nastran job spawns a second MSC Nastran job to calculate the complex
eigenvalues. The complex eigenvalues and eigenvectors are found in jid.nast.f06, jid.nast.op2,
etc.
NASCMD is the name of the command used to execute the secondary MSC Nastran job.
NASCMD can be up to 64 characters long and must be left justified in field 2. The sting as entered
will be used as is -- except that it will be converted to lower case regardless of whether it is entered
in upper or lower case.
RCFILE is the name of an RC file to be used for the secondary MSC Nastran job. It should be
similar to the RC file used for the primary run except that additional memory will usually be
necessary to calculate the complex eigenvalues and batch=no should also be specified. RCFILE
is limited to 8 characters and an extension of .rc will be added automatically. This entry will be
converted to upper case in MSC Nastran but will be converted to lower case before spawning the
complex eigenvalue run. This RC file must be located in the same directory as the MSC Nastran
input file. This entry is the same as specifying PARAM,MRRCFILE. One or the other should be
used.
3. MPC are produced for contact surfaces with glued contact. DMIGs are produced for contact
surfaces without glued contact. The brakes and drums should not use glued contact; other regions
of the structure can used glued contact.
4. The continuation lines may be omitted if defaults are appropriate.
5. When a BRKSQL entry is used, PARAM,MRMTXNAM and PARAM,MARCFIL1 should not
be entered.
NASCMD Name of a command to run MSC Nastran (limited to 64 characters) -- used in
conjunction with the CONTINUE options on the SOL 600 entry. The full path of the
command to execute MSC Nastran should be entered. The string will be converted to
lower case. See Remark 2. (Character; Default = nastran)
RCFILE Name of an RC file to be used with a secondary MSC Nastran job (limited to 8
characters) -- used in conjunction with the CONTINUE options on the SOL 600 entry.
An extension of .rc will automatically be added. See Remark 2. (Character; Default =
nastb.rc)
Field Contents
Main Index
153
CHAPTER 5
Analysis Techniques
6. When brake squeal matrices are output by Marc, unsymmetric friction stiffness matrices are
output for non-glued contact surfaces. For surfaces with glued contact, MPCs are output. The
GLUE flag signals SOL 600 to look for these MPCs and combine them with other MPCs that
might be in the model using MPCADD, or if no MPCs were originally used, to add the MCPs due
to glued contact. Glued contact surfaces may not be used for the disk-rotor interface. If GLUE is
zero or blank, the MPC for glued contact in the Marc brake squeal bde file (if any) will be ignored.
Sometimes Marc puts out MPCs with only one degree-of-freedom defined. Such MPCs will be
ignored; otherwise, MSC Nastran will generate a fatal error.
7. If ICORD=1, an Marc t19 file will automatic.
8. The names NASCMD and RCFILE must be entered in small fixed field and start in column 9 (i.e.,
left justified in the field).
9. The Nastran input file name used for a brake squeal analysis may only contain lower case letters
and the underscore and/or dash characters.
10. Brake squeal is not available with DDM (parallel processing). Do not enter a PARAMARC when
using the BRKSQL entry.
Main Index
154
User subroutine support has been added through the bulk data entry USRSUB6.
Defines user subroutines used in SOL 600 only.
Format:
Examples:
Notes:
1. All user subroutines must reside in the directory where the Nastran input file resides.
2. All user subroutines on disk must be in lower case and have an extension of .f. The names entered
in the bulk data entry may be in upper or lower case. They will be converted to lower case.
3. SOL 600 combines all user subroutines into one large subroutine named u600.f and u600.f is
passed to the Marc command line when spawned from Nastran.
4. If only one user subroutine is required, an alternate is to use PARAM,MARCUSUB,name.
USRSUB6 Defines User Subroutines for SOL 600
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
USRSUB6
U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8
U9 U10
USRSUB6 UDAMAG
uvoid TENSOF
USRSUB6* SEPFORBBC
Field Contents
Ui Name of user subroutine(s) to be included. See Marc Volume D for list of available
user subroutines. Do not include the .f extension on this entry, however, the actual
file on the disk must have the .f extension. If any user subroutine exceeds 8
characters, use the wide field format for the primary line and all continuation lines.
(Character; no Default)
Main Index
Chapter 6: Modeling
6
Modeling
Coordinate Systems
Nodes
Elements
Modeling in Patran
Main Index
Coordinate Systems
156
Coordinate Systems
The basic coordinate system in MSC Nastran Nonlinear is a right-handed, rectangular Cartesian system.
Your may choose other systems locally for input, for output of nodal variables (displacements, velocities,
etc.) and point loads or boundary condition specification, and for material options. In general, all
coordinate systems are assumed to be right-handed. MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear output is provided
in the Global Coordinate System. The Global Coordinate System is defined by field 7 of each GRID
entry and therefore may refer to a rotated rectangular or cylindrical coordinate system. If field 7 is blank
or zero, the output is in the Basic Coordinate System (which is rectangular). MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear does not support output in spherical coordinate systems, however input may be specified in
spherical coordinate systems.
Nodal Coordinate Systems
If the GRID CP (Coordinate system ID) is nonzero, it may refer to a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical
local coordinate frame. See CORD1Ci Bulk Data entries.
Note the following points regarding nodal coordinate systems:
1. Displacement vectors and unbalanced force vectors are computed and written to the results file in
the global coordinate system.
2. Boundary conditions and nodal forces are applied in the global coordinate system.
3. Coupling equations and multipoint constraint (MPC) equation, including the MPC equations that
result from rigid links, relate displacement components in the global coordinate system.
4. Rigid link elements will produce erroneous results if a local coordinate system is defined at either
end of the element.
5. For 2-D models (i.e., models whose elements have only UX and UY degrees-of-freedom),
the Z-axis of the nodal coordinate system must coincide with the Z-axis of the basic
coordinate system.
Element Coordinate Systems
There is a rectangular coordinate system associated with each element in a MSC Nastran SOL 600
analysis. The default coordinate system and the options available for modifying it, depend on the element
type. Descriptions are given in Element Library (Ch. 11) for each element type.
If the element is homogeneous and either isotropic or orthotropic, the components of stress and strain are
computed and passed to the results file in the element coordinate system.
If the element is homogeneous and orthotropic, the directions of orthotropy coincide with the element
coordinate system, unless an MCID is specified.
For laminated elements each layer has its own coordinate system. The reference line for defining layer
orientations is the X-axis of the element coordinate system. Material properties are entered, and stresses
and strains are computed in the layer coordinate systems for all layers of laminated elements.
Main Index
157
CHAPTER 6
Modeling
Depending on the element type and material model, the default element coordinate system can be
overridden by referring to a nonzero Coordinate ID when meshing.
Defining Material Axes Orientations
With MSC Nastrans THETA and MCID fields on the CQUAD4, CTRIA3, etc. elements you specify the
orientation of the material axes of symmetry (relationship between the element coordinate system and
the global coordinate system, or the 0
o
ply angle line, if composite) in one of four different ways:
1. as a specific angle offset from an element edge,
2. as a specific angle offset from the line created by two intersecting planes,
3. as a particular coordinate system specified by user-supplied unit vectors, or
4. as specified by user subroutine ORIENT. This is accomplished by the specification of an
orientation type, an orientation angle, or one or two user-defined vectors.
Defining Material Axes in Patran
The orientation of the material axes are defined in Patran using the Element Properties application.
1. Click the Properties application icon to access the Element Properties application.
2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to create a CQUADi or CTRIAi element.
3. Click Input Properties... and enter the material axes orientation information.
There are three ways to assign the material orientation:
a. reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element,
b. define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or
c. define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system.
This defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUADi or CTRIAi entry. This
scalar value can either be a constant value in degrees, a vector, or a reference to an existing
coordinate system. This property is optional.
Note: When used to define an element coordinate system, the Coordinate ID can reference only a
rectangular coordinate system.
Main Index
Nodes
158
Nodes
Model geometry is defined in MSC Nastran with GRID points. A grid point is a point on or in the
structural continuum which is used to define a finite element. A simple model may have only a handful
of grid points; a complex model may have many tens of thousands. The structures grid points displace
with the loaded structure. Each grid point of the structural model has six possible components of
displacement: three translations (in the x-, y-, or z-directions) and three rotations (about the x-, y-, or z-
axes). These components of displacement are called degrees of freedom (DOFs).
Degrees-of-Freedom
The degrees-of-freedom in MSC Nastran Nonlinear are always referred to as follows:
MSC Nastran Nonlinear only activates those degrees-of-freedom needed at a node. Thus, some of the
degrees of freedom listed above may not be used at all nodes in a model, because each element type only
uses those degrees of freedom which are relevant. For example, two-dimensional solid (continuum)
stress/displacement elements only use degrees of freedom 1 and 2. The degrees of freedom actually used
at any node are thus the envelope of those variables needed in each element that uses the node.
1 x-displacement.
2 y-displacement.
3 z-displacement.
4 Rotation about the x-axis.
5 Rotation about the y-axis.
6 Rotation about the z-axis.
Main Index
159
CHAPTER 6
Modeling
Elements
Once the geometry (grid points) of the structural model has been established, the grid points are used to
define the finite elements.
MSC Nastran has an extensive library of finite elements covering a wide range of physical behavior.
Some of these elements and their names are shown in figure below. The C in front of each element name
stands for connection.
Point Element (not a finite element, but can be included in the finite element model)
Spring Elements (they behave like simple extensional or rotational springs)
Line Elements (they behave like rods, bars, or beams)
Surface Elements (they behave like membranes or thin plates)
Solid Elements (they behave like bricks or thick plates)
Rigid Bar (infinitely stiff without causing numerical difficulties in the mathematical model)
Structural elements are defined on Bulk Data connection entries that identify the grid points to which
the element is connected. The mnemonics for all such entries have a prefix of the letter C, followed by
an indication of the type of element, such as CBAR and CROD. The order of the grid point identification
defines the positive direction of the axis of a one-dimensional element and the positive surface of a plate
element. The connection entries include additional orientation information when required. Some
elements allow for offsets between its connecting grid points and the reference plane of the element. The
coordinate systems associated with element offsets are defined in terms of the grid point coordinate
systems. For most elements, each connection entry references a property definition entry. If many
elements have the same properties, this system of referencing eliminates a large number of duplicate
entries.
CMASS1 (Scalar mass connection)
CONM1 (Concentrated mass)
CELAS2
CROD, CBAR, CBEAM
CTRIA3 CQUAD4
CHEXA CTETRA CPENTA
RBE2
Main Index
Elements
160
Details for each element type are described in Element Library (Ch. 11).
Main Index
161
CHAPTER 6
Modeling
Modeling in Patran
In Patran, geometric models are the foundation on which most finite element models are built. Geometric
curves, surfaces, or solids provide the base for creating nodes, elements, and loads and boundary
conditions; the geometric model also serves as the structure to which material properties, as well as
element properties, may be assigned even before any mesh is actually generated.
Creating Geometry in Patran
Model geometry may be constructed in Patran, accessed directly from a CAD application, or imported
in specially formatted translator files. Whatever the source of the geometry, a single geometric model
will be maintained throughout all geometric and finite element operations. Geometric entities, even if
obtained from external files, retain their original mathematical representation without any
approximations or substitutions.
Accessing the Geometry Application
In Patran you can create, modify, and delete points, curves, surfaces, and solids. Patran assigns a default
color to the display of all geometric entities.
Pick the Geometry icon in the Patran Main Form to access the Geometry application.
The Geometry form controls all
processes in the Geometry application. The top
portion of the form contains three keywords,
Action, Object, and Method; these remain the
same throughout all activities. The rest of the
entries will vary depending on the requirements
posed by the specified action, object, and method.
There are hundreds of action, object, method combinations available for creating geometric entities in
Patran. For complete descriptions on creating geometry models, see the Geometry Modeling - Reference
Manual Part 2,.
Action Names the operation that will be performed; for example Create, Edit, or
Delete.
Object Identifies the geometric entity upon which the action is performed, for
example, Solid. In this case, if the Action is Create, then the command
requests that a solid be created.
Method Specifies the procedure used to perform the action. Taking the above
example one step further, if the Method is Surface, a solid will be created
by one of the techniques that utilize surfaces.
Main Index
Modeling in Patran
162
Utilizing External Geometry (CAD) Files
Patran can make use of geometry created in databases outside of Patran by either accessing geometric
data directly from one of several CAD systems, or importing geometry using special files.
Geometry access, performed through the unique Direct Geometry Access (DGA) feature, does not
require any translation. Patran accesses the original geometry and uses the geometric definitions of all
entities.
On the other hand, when geometry is imported, Patran first evaluates the mathematical definition of
entities in their originating CAD system, and then formulates the information to be appropriate for Patran
operations.
Imported geometry comes to Patran via IGES, Express Neutral files, or Patran Neutral files.
IGES (Initial Graphic Exchange Specification) is an ANSI standard formatted file that makes it possible
to exchange data among most commercial CAD systems. Express Neutral files are intermediate files
created during a Unigraphics or CV CAD model access. Patran Neutral files are specially formatted for
the purpose of providing a means of importing and exporting model data.
Geometry received into the database, whether through direct access or import, is treated as if it had been
built in Patran; meshing, load and boundary condition assignments, element and material properties
definitions are all performed as if on Patrans own native geometry.
Main Index
163
CHAPTER 6
Modeling
Creating Finite Element Meshes in Patran
Finite elements themselves are defined by both their topology (i.e., their shape) and their properties. For
example, the elements used to create a mesh for a surface may be composed of quadrilaterals or triangles.
Similarly, one element may be a steel plate modeling structural effects such as displacement and rotation,
while another may represent an air mass in an acoustic analysis.Patran provides numerous ways to create
a finite element mesh.
At this stage of using Patran, where you are creating a finite element mesh using the Finite Elements
application form, elements are defined purely in terms of their topology. Other properties such as
materials, thickness and behavior types are then defined for these elements in subsequent applications,
and discussed in later chapters of this guide.
The most rudimentary method of creating a finite element mesh is to manually generate individual nodes,
and then to create individual elements from previously defined nodes. Individual nodes can be either
be generated from the geometry model or directly created using node creation tools that bypass the
need for point definitions. A finite element model created manually supports the entire Patran element
library and where applicable, Patran automatically generates midedge, midface and midbody nodes.
Patran contains many capabilities to help you manually create the right kind of finite element mesh for
your model, and capabilities that automate the process of finite element creation. Patran provides the
following capabilities for finite element modeling (FEM):
Mesh seeding tools to control specific mesh densities in specific areas of your geometry.
Several highly automated techniques for mesh generation.
Equivalencing capabilities for joining meshes in adjacent regions.
Tools to verify the quality and accuracy of your finite element model.
Capabilities for direct input and editing of finite element data.
Automatic Meshing Tools
There are four basic mesh generation techniques available in Patran: IsoMesh, Paver Mesh, Auto
TetMesh, and 2-1/2D Meshing. Selecting the right technique for a particular model must be based on
geometry, model topology, analysis objectives, and engineering judgment.
Isomesh
Creates a traditional mapped mesh on regularly shaped geometry via simple subdivision. This method
creates Quad and Tria elements on surfaces and brick elements on solids. The resulting mesh supports
all element configurations in Patran.
Paver
The Paver is an automated surface meshing technique that you can use with any arbitrary surface region,
including trimmed surfaces, composite surfaces, and irregular surface regions. Unlike the IsoMesh
approach, the Paver technique creates a mesh by first subdividing the surface boundaries into mesh
points, and then operates on these boundaries to construct interior elements
Main Index
Modeling in Patran
164
TetMesh
Arbitrary solid mesher generates tetrahedral elements within Patran solids defined by an arbitrary
number of faces or volumes formed by collection of triangular element shells. This method is based on
MSC plastering technology.
2-1/2D Mesher
Transforms a planar 2D mesh to produce a 3D mesh of solid elements, using sweep and
extrude operations.
Accessing the Finite Element Application
All of Patrans finite element modeling capabilities are available by selecting the Finite
Element button on the main form.
Like the Geometry Application, the top portion of the Finite Element form contains three
keywords, Action, Object, and Method; these remain the same throughout all activities. Finite Element
(FE) Meshing, Node and Element Editing, Nodal Equivalencing, ID Optimization, Model Verification,
FE Show, Modify and Delete, and ID Renumber, are all accessible by setting the Action/Object/Method
combination on the Finite Elements form.
For complete descriptions on creating geometry models, see the Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite
Element Modeling.
Main Index
Chapter 7: Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
7
Setting Up, Monitoring, and
Debugging the Analysis
Solution Type
Analysis Procedures
Translation Parameters
Solution Parameters
Subcases
Subcase Parameters
Execution Procedure for MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear from the

Command Line
Monitoring the Analysis

Main Index
Solution Type
166
Solution Type
MSC Nastran can simulate many different types of structural response. In general an analysis type can
be either static or dynamic. In a static analysis, loads and boundary conditions are applied to a model and
the response is assumed to remain the constant over time. In dynamic analysis the response changes over
time. In MSC Nastran, both static and dynamic analysis may simulate linear response or nonlinear
response. SOL 600 incorporates the formulations and functionality to simulate nonlinear static and
dynamic structural responses. The specific procedure MSC Nastran will run is specified on the Executive
Control Statement by the ID entry. SOL 600 represents multiple types of analysis procedures, any of
which can be specified by the ID value on the SOL 600 Executive Control Statements.
Specifying the Solution Type
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) is designated with the following Executive Control
Statement in the MSC Nastran Bulk Data file, where the ID entry indicates which analysis procedure is
to be run.
SOL 600 Executive Control Statement
The SOL 600,ID Executive control statement is as follows:
SOL 600, ID PATH= COPYR= NOERROR MARCEXE=SOLVE NOEXIT
OUTR=op2,xdb,pch,f06,eig,dmap,beam, sdrc,pst,cdb=(0, 1, 2, or 3) STOP= CONTINUE=
S67OPT= MSGMESH= SCRATCH= TSOLVE= SMEAR PREMGLUE MRENUELE=
MRENUGRD= MRENUMBR= SYSabc= S6NEWS=
See SOL 600 Executive Control Statement: (Ch. 2) for an explanation of some of the options.
Defining the Solution Type in Patran
Prior to selecting a Solution Type, check to see that under Analysis Preferences the Analysis Code is set
to MSC Nastran, and the Analysis Type is set to Structural.
To set the Solution Type:
1. Click on the Analysis Application button.
2. On the Analysis Application form, click Solution Type... and select Implicit Nonlinear from the
list of available Solution Types.
Entry Description
SOL 600, ID Creates Marc input and optionally executes Marc from inside MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear (SOL 600).
Main Index
167
CHAPTER 7
Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
References
Analyze - Setting Up a File for Analysis (p. 9) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual)
Main Index
Analysis Procedures
168
Analysis Procedures
The subcase is the MSC Nastran mechanism for associating loads and boundary conditions, output
requests, and various other parameters to be used during part of a complete run. Each subcase can be
designated with one of the analysis types listed below. For each analysis type, you will define the Solution
Parameters and Output Requests; these collectively constitute the Analysis Procedures.
In MSC Nastran, Case Control options provide the loads and constraints, and load incrementation
method, and controls the program after the initial elastic analysis. Case Control options also include
blocks which allow changes in the initial model specifications. Case Control options can also specify
print-out and postprocessing options.Each set of load sets must be begin with a SUBCASE command and
be terminated by another SUBCASE or a BEGIN BULK command. If there is only one load case, the
SUBCASE entry is not required. The SUBCASE option requests that the program perform another
increment or series of increments. The input format for these options is described in MSC Nastran Quick
Reference Guide.
Analysis Types
Analysis Types for subcases in SOL 600 include the following:
Type Description
Linear Static Static stress analysis is used when inertia effects can be neglected. During a
linear static step, the models response is defined by the linear elastic stiffness at
the base state, the state of deformation and stress at the beginning of the step.
Contact conditions cannot change during the step - they remain as they are
defined in the base state.
Nonlinear Static Nonlinear static analysis requires the solution of nonlinear equilibrium
equations, for which MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses Newtons method.
Many problems involve history dependent response, so that the solution is
usually obtained as a series of increments, with iteration within each increment
to obtain equilibrium. For most cases, the automatic incrementation provided by
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is preferred, although direct user control is also
provided for those cases where the user has experience with a particular problem.
Normal Modes This solution type uses eigenvalue techniques to extract the frequencies of the
current system, The stiffness determined at the end of the previous step is used
as the basis for the extraction, so that small vibrations of a preloaded structure
can be modeled.
Transient
Dynamic
This solution procedure integrates all of the equations of motion through time.
For linear systems, the dynamic method, using the Single-Step Houbolt operator,
is unconditionally stable, meaning there is no mathematical limit on the size of
the time increment that can be used to integrate a linear system. However, the
time step or the maximum allowable error parameter must be small enough to
ensure an accurate solution.
Main Index
169
CHAPTER 7
Specifying the Analysis Type for a Subcase
The Analysis Type is designated by specifying an ID as part of the Executive Control Statement in the
MSC Nastran Bulk Data file.
For example SOL 600, 101 selects the Linear Statics Solution Sequence.
The following Solution Sequences are available with SOL 600.
Nonlinear
Transient
Dynamic
This solution type is used when nonlinear dynamic response is being studied. For
most cases, the automatic incrementation provided is preferred, although direct
user control is also provided for those cases where the user has experience with
a particular problem.
Buckling Eigenvalue buckling estimates are obtained. Classical eigenvalue buckling
analysis (e.g., Euler buckling) is often used to estimate the critical (buckling)
load of stiff structures. Stiff structures are those that carry their design loads
primarily by axial or membrane action, rather than by bending action. Their
response usually involves very little deformation prior to buckling.
Creep This analysis procedure performs a transient, static, stress/displacement analysis.
It is especially provided for the analysis of materials which are described by the
CREEP material form.
Viscoelastic
(Time Domain)
This is especially provided for the time domain analysis of materials which are
described by the VISCOELASTIC, TIME material forms. The dissipative part
of the material behavior is defined through a Prony series representation of the
normalized shear and bulk relaxation moduli, either specified directly on the
VISCOELASTIC, TIME material forms, determined from user input creep test
data, or determined from user input relaxation test data.
Body Approach Body Approach enables you to position rigid bodies to just touch deformable
bodies before beginning a subsequent Load Step. No analysis is actually
performed during a Body Approach step.It is used commonly in multi-forming
simulations where bodies are brought just into contact before the analysis begins.
Entry Description
SOL 600,ID Creates Marc input and optionally executes Marc from inside MSC Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600).
Type Description
Main Index
Analysis Procedures
170
Defining Analysis Type for a Subcase in Patran
To define the Analysis Type for a subcase:
1. Click on the Analysis Application button to bring up the Analysis Application form.
2. Click Solution Type... and click on the Implicit Nonlinear toggle.
3. Click Subcases... and select an analysis type from the Analysis Type pull-down menu.
Table 7-1 Solution Sequences
SOL
Number SOL Name Description
101 SESTATIC Statics
103 SEMODES Normal Modes
105 SEBUCKL Buckling
106 NLSTATIC Nonlinear or Linear Statics
108 SEDFREQ Direct Frequency Response
109 SEDTRAN Direct Transient Response
111 SEMFREQ Modal Frequency Response
112 SEMTRAN Modal Transient Response
129 NLTRAN Nonlinear or Linear Transient Response
153 NLSCSH Static structural and/or steady state heat
Transfer analysis with options: Linear or
nonlinear analysis
159 NLTCSH Transient structural and/or Transient heat
Transfer analysis with options: Linear or
nonlinear analysis
Other, as specified in the QRG, are available for special use.
Note: There are two ways to set up SOL 600 analysis jobs in Patran. The first is to select
Implicit Nonlinear as the Solution Type. This option gives you access to most of the
various analysis capabilities and numerical controls available through SOL 600. The
second option uses the same menus as if you were setting up a non-SOL 600
analysis, such as a SOL 106 or 129, but simply changes the executive command line.
To use this second option, simply set up your analysis the same way you would a
non-SOL 600 job and click on the SOL 600 Run toggle on the Solution Parameters
form.
Main Index
171
CHAPTER 7
References
Solution Types (p. 261) in the Patran Interface to MSC Nastran Preference Guide)
Main Index
172
Translation parameters define file formats, numerical tolerances, processing options, numbering offsets,
and include files.
Specifying the Translation Parameters
There are numerous translation parameters for SOL 600. Most of these parameters start with the letters
M, MR or MARC and follow the format MXXXX, MRXXXX, or MARCXXX. See the MSC Nastran
Quick Reference Guide
Defining Translation Parameters in Patran
To set translation parameters:
2. On the Analysis Application form, click Translation Parameters...
Main Index
173
CHAPTER 7
Main Index
174
References
Translation Parameters (p. 255) in the Patran Interface to MSC Nastran Preference Guide)
Data Output Defines the type of data output.
XDB Buffer Size For the XDB results file, defines the buffer size used for
accessing results.
Tolerances Division - prevents divide by zero errors.
Numerical - determines if two real values are equal.
Writing determines if a value is approximately zero when
generating a Bulk Data entry field.
Bulk Data Format Sorted Bulk Data -
Card Format -
Grid Precision Digits - Specifies where to round off a grid point
coordinate before its written out to the bdf file. For example if
this value is specified as 2 the number 1.3398 will be written
out as 1.34.
Node Coordinates Defines which coordinate frame is used when generating the
grid coordinates.
Number of Tasks Represents the number of processors to be used to run an analysis.
It is assumed that the environment is configured for distributed
parallel processing.
Numbering Options... Subform used to indicate offsets for all IDS to be automatically
assigned during translation.
Bulk Data Include File... Prompts you for the filename of the include file.
Main Index
175
CHAPTER 7
Solution Parameters
Solution parameters control a range of functions in the SOL 600 analysis. Functions such as
selecting the solver type, establishing a restart, specifying domain decomposition are all part of the
solution parameters.
Specifying Solution Parameters
Solution Parameters are designated in the Parameters portion of the MSC Nastran Input file with the
following entries.
Entry Description
INCLUDE Inserts an external file into the input file. The INCLUDE statement may appear
anywhere within the input data file.
NLPARM Selects the parameters used for nonlinear static analysis.
TSTEPNL Selects integration and output time steps for a nonlinear dynamic analysis.
NLSTRAT Defines strategy parameters for nonlinear structural analysis.*
NLAUTO Defines parameters for automatic load/time stepping.*
Note: *NLSTRAT and NLAUTO defaults are appropriate for most analyses and these entries are
not normally required.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
176
Defining Solution Parameters in Patran
To set solution parameters:
2. On the Analysis Application form, click Solution Type..., and select Implicit Nonlinear. Then
click Solution Parameters...
Solver Options Specifies the solver to be used in numerically inverting the system of
linear equilibrium equations.
Contact Parameters Defines options for detecting and handling contact.
Direct Text Input This subform is used to directly enter entries in the File Management,
Executive Control, Case Control, and Bulk Data sections of the MSC
Nastran input file.
Restart Parameters Includes a Restart option in the MSC Nastran input file.
Advanced Job Control Sets alternate versions of the solver and alternate formats for the
results file.
Domain Decomposition Designates that domain decomposition be done manually,
semi-automatically, or automatically.
Main Index
177
CHAPTER 7
References
For more information on Solver Options, see Numerical Methods in Solving Equations (p. 58) in
the .
For more information on Contact parameters, see Contact Parameters Subform (p. 299) in the
Patran Interface to MSC Nastran Preference Guide.
For more information on Restart Parameters, see Restart Parameters Subform (p. 308) in the
For more information on Domain Decomposition, see Domain Decomposition (p. 311) in the
Main Index
Subcases
178
Subcases
Creating multiple subcases allows you to efficiently analyze multiple load cases in one run. Each subcase
is a collection of loads and boundary conditions, output requests, and other parameters. For nonlinear
analysis runs the starting point of each subcase is the ending point of the previous subcase.
Specifying Subcases
Each subcase is designated with the following Case Control Command.
Defining Subcases in Patran
To define a subcase:
Entry Description
SUBCASE Delimits and identifies a subcase.
Main Index
179
CHAPTER 7
2. From the Analysis Application form click Subcases...
Main Index
Subcases
180
Subcase Name Specifies a name for a new subcase.
Available Load Cases Selects one or more available load cases to be applied to the
new subcase.
Subcase Options
Subcase Parameters Controls load increment and iteration parameters for the subcase. Also
defines the nonlinear effects for the subcase. See Subcase
Parameters, 181.
Output Requests Defines the nodal and element results quantities and also determines
the frequency of results reporting. See Output Requests (Ch. 8).
Direct Text Input This subform is used to directly enter entries in the File Management,
Executive Control, Case Control, and Bulk Data Sections of the MSC
Nastran input file.
Select Superelements Defines which superelements are to be included in the subcase.
Select Explicit MPCs Selects explicit MPCs to be included in the subcase.
Main Index
181
CHAPTER 7
Subcase Parameters
The subcase parameters represent the settings in MSC Nastran Case Control and Bulk Data Section that
take effect within a subcase and do not affect the analysis in other subcases. Subcase parameters are
dependent on the type of analysis being performed. The set of subcase parameters applicable for each
analysis type are described in the following sections. For more information, see Solution Methods and
Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis (Ch. 3).
Specifying Static Subcase Parameters
For static nonlinear analysis the subcase parameters control the iteration process and the
load incrementation.
Defining Static Subcase Parameters in Patran
1. Click the Analysis Application button to bring up Analysis Application form. Click on Solution
Type and check to see that Implicit Nonlinear is the selected Solution Type, then click OK.
2. On the Analysis form select Subcases... and choose Static from the Analysis Type
pull-down menu.
Entry Description
NLPARM Nonlinear Static Analysis Parameter Selection.
NLPCI Defines a set of parameters for the arc-length incremental solution strategies in
nonlinear static analysis.
NLAUTO Defines parameters for automatic load/time stepping used in SOL 600.
NLSTRAT Defines strategy parameters for nonlinear structural analysis used in SOL 600.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
182
3. Click Subcase Parameters...
Linearity Prescribes the nonlinear effects for the subcase.
Nonlinear Solution Parameters
Nonlinear Geometric Effects Defines the type of geometric or material nonlinearity to be
included in the subcase.
Follower Forces Specifies whether forces will follow displacements.
Load Increment Params... Defines whether the load increments will be fixed or adapted in
each iteration and the method by which adaptive load
increments will be determined.
Iteration Parameters... Sets forth the iterative procedures that are employed to solve the
equilibrium problem at each load increment.
Contact Table... Activates, deactivates, and controls the behavior of contact
bodies in the analysis.
Active/Deactive Elements... Defines groups of elements to be active or deactive for
the subcase.
Main Index
183
CHAPTER 7
Specifying Normal Modes Subcase Parameters
For normal modes nonlinear analysis the subcase parameters control the eigenvalue extraction
techniques and the range of frequencies to be targeted for extraction.
Defining Normal Modes Subcase Parameters in Patran
2. On the Analysis form select Subcases... and choose Normal Modes from the Analysis Type
pull-down menu.
Entry Description
EIGR Defines data needed to perform real eigenvalue analysis.
EIGRL Defines data needed to perform real eigenvalue (vibration or buckling) analysis
with the Lanczos method.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
184
Extraction Method Defines the method to use to extract the real eigenvalues.
Lancozs Parameters
Number of Modes Indicates an estimate of the number of eigenvalues to be located.
Lowest/Highest Frequency Defines the lower and upper limits to the range of frequencies to
be examined.
Sequence Checking Requests that Sturm sequence checking be performed on the
extracted eigenvalues.
Main Index
185
CHAPTER 7
Specifying Buckling Subcase Parameters
For nonlinear buckling analysis the subcase parameters control the eigenvalue extraction techniques and
the range of frequencies to be targeted for extraction.
A METHOD command is specified in the desired subcase and selects an EIGB, or EIGRL Bulk
Data entry.
The linear buckling load analysis is correct when you take a very small load step in increment zero, or
make sure the solution has converged before buckling load analysis (if multiple increments are taken).
In a buckling problem that involves material nonlinearity (for example, plasticity), the nonlinear
problem must be solved incrementally. During the analysis, a failure to converge in the iteration process
or nonpositive definite stiffness signals the plastic collapse.
For extremely nonlinear problems, the EIGB option cannot produce accurate results. In that case, use
NLSTRAT options to specify an arc-length method that allows automatic load stepping in a quasi-static
fashion for both geometric large displacement and material (elastic-plastic) nonlinear problems. The
option can handle elastic-plastic snap-through phenomena. Therefore, the post-buckling behavior of
structures can be analyzed.
The eig option must be specified with the OUTR option on SOL 600 Executive Control statement if op2,
xdb, pch, or .f06 options are specified and Marc performs natural frequency or buckling eigenvalue
analysis. The reason it must be provided on the SOL entry is to enable MSC Nastran to create DMAP on
the fly which include the LAMA data block. If the eig option is omitted, eigenvectors will be present in
the MSC Nastran output but no eigenvalues will be available.
Defining Buckling Subcase Parameters in Patran
2. On the Analysis form select Subcases... and choose Buckling from the Analysis Type
pull-down menu.
Entry Description
METHOD Selects the real eigenvalue extraction parameters.
EIGB Defines data needed to perform buckling analysis.
EIGRL Defines data needed to perform real eigenvalue (vibration or buckling) analysis
with the Lanczos method.
MARCRBAL This parameter is used for eigenvalue analysis where natural frequencies or
buckling modes need to be calculated using the deformed geometry from a
nonlinear analysis.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
186
Specifying Transient Dynamic Subcase Parameters
For transient dynamic nonlinear analysis the subcase parameters control the iteration process and the
Defining Transient Dynamic Subcase Parameters in Patran
2. On the Analysis form select Subcases... and choose Transient Dynamic from the Analysis Type
pull-down menu.
Extraction Method Defines the method to use to extract the real eigenvalues.
Lancozs Parameters
Max # of Modes Indicates the maximum number of eigenvalues to be located.
Max # of Modes
w/Pos. Eigenvalues
Indicates the maximum number of positive eigenvalues to be located.
Entry Description
TSTEPNL Nonlinear Dynamic Analysis Parameter Selection.
NLAUTO Parameters for automatic load/time stepping.
NLSTRAT Strategy Parameters for nonlinear structural analysis.
Main Index
187
CHAPTER 7
Linearity Prescribes the nonlinear effects for the subcase.
Nonlinear Solution Parameters
Load Increment Params... Defines whether the load increments will be fixed or adapted in
each iteration and the method by which adaptive load
increments will be determined.
Iteration Parameters... Sets forth the iterative procedures that are employed to solve
the equilibrium problem at each load increment.
Active/Deactive Elements... Defines groups of elements to be active or deactive for the
subcase. Note that this option uses the equivalent of direct text
input (MARCIN option) and is not explicitly supported by
SOL 600.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
188
Specifying Creep Subcase Parameters
The creep analysis option is activated in MSC Nastran through the CREEP Bulk Data entry. The creep
time period and control tolerance information are input through the MARCAUTO=1 parameter. This
option can be used repeatedly to define a new creep time period and new tolerances. These tolerances are
defined in the section on Creep Control Tolerances. Alternatively, a fixed time step can also be specified
through the MARCAUTO parameter. In this case, no additional tolerances are checked for controlling
the time step.
Creep analysis is often carried out in several runs using the RESTART Bulk Data entry. Save restart files
for continued analysis. The RESTART entry allows you to reset the parameters defined in MARCAUTO
upon restart.
Defining Creep Subcase Parameters in Patran
2. On the Analysis form select Subcases... and choose Creep from the Analysis Type
pull-down menu.
Entry Description
NLPARM Nonlinear Static Analysis Parameter Selection.
MATVP Defines creep characteristics based on experimental data or known empirical
creep law.
MARCAUTO Determines which Marcs increment option is used.
RESTART Specifies writing or reading of restart data for Nonlinear Analysis when Marc
is executed from MSC Nastran.
Main Index
189
CHAPTER 7
3. Click Subcase Parameters...:
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
190
Specifying Body Approach Subcase Parameters
For body approach analysis the subcase parameters control the iteration process and the
Defining Body Approach Subcase Parameters in Patran
2. On the Analysis form select Subcases... and choose Body Approach from the Analysis Type
pull-down menu.
Creep Solution Parameters
Procedure Selects Implicit or Explicit Creep method.
Increment Type Defines a fixed or adaptive increment method.
Adaptive Increment
Parameters...
For adaptive methods, sets boundaries for incrementation.
Iteration Parameters Sets forth the iterative procedures that are employed to solve
the equilibrium problem at each load increment.
Active/Deactive Elements... Defines groups of elements to be active or deactive for
the subcase.
Entry Description
BCMOVE Specifies movement of rigid surfaces.
Main Index
191
CHAPTER 7
Body Approach Parameters
Total Time Places a time step option in the Load Step.
Synchronized If ON, specifies that when the first rigid body comes into contact, the
rest stop moving.
Contact Table... Activates, deactivates, and controls the behavior of contact bodies in
the analysis.
Main Index
Execution Procedure for MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear from the Command Line
192
Execution Procedure for MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear from the Command Line
After the generation of the input file is complete, it is submitted for execution as a batch process (MSC
Nastran is not an interactive program). Once the input file has been submitted, you have no additional
interaction with MSC Nastran until the job is complete except that you can terminate the job prior to
completion if it becomes necessary and monitor several keys files such as, .f04, .sts, .log, etc.
MSC Nastran is executed with a command called nastran. (Your system manager may assign a different
name to the command.) The nastran command permits the specification of keywords used to request
options affecting MSC Nastran job execution. The format of the NASTRAN command is:
nastran input_data_file [keyword1 = value1 keyword2 = value2 ...]
where input_data_file is the name of the file containing the input data and keyword
i
=value
i
is one or more
optional keyword assignment arguments. For example, to run an a job using the data file example1.dat,
enter the following command:
nastran example1
See The nastran Command (p. 2) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
The details of submitting an MSC Nastran job are specific to your computer system contact
your computer system personnel or your MSC Nastran 2012 Installation and Operations Guide for
further information.
Main Index
193
CHAPTER 7
Using Patran to Execute MSC Nastran
The Analysis Application controls the execution of MSC Nastran.
When the Action is set to Analyze, the Method is set to Full Run, and the Apply button is selected from
the Analysis form, a jobname.bdf file is created which contains the analysis model, and the
P3TRANS.INI script is spawned by Patran. This script controls the analysis process outside and
independent of Patran.
When the analysis is successfully completed, one or more output file is produced. These output files can
be directly imported or attached into the Patran database for postprocessing by setting the Action menu
to Access Results.
How to Tell When the Analysis is Done
If you submit the job from the MSC Nastran icon (i.e., outside Patran), as long as the parent window the
job was run from is active, the analysis is still running. If you submit the job from within Patran and use
-stdout when you execute Patran, you can look in the Patran parent window and it will tell you when it
submits the Nastran job, and also when the Nastran job is completed. Of course you can always use the
Analysis Manager. Once the job is complete look in the parent window to see what files were generated.
Main Index
Execution Procedure for MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear from the Command Line
194
How to Tell if the Analysis Ran Successfully
Look in the working directory and you will see the typical jobname.f06, jobname.f04,
jobname.log. If these files are there, you successfully submitted the Nastran job. If you submitted a
job with SOL 600, xxx as the executive command, there will also be some jobname.marc.xxx files
in the subdirectory. These are the files from the Marc run. To see if the run was successful, open
jobname.marc.sts and look for the number at the bottom. For most analyses, 3004 means the run
was successful.
For others, such as thermal contact, generation of DMIG matrices for subsequent use, other exit codes
such as 3031, 3030, 3031, and 3022 mean a successful run. Exit code 13 signifies a dta input error which
must normally be evaluated by MSC development. Exit 3015 means the job diverged and requires
additional time steps, changes to convergence controls or other changes to the input. A brief description
of most errors is provided at the end of this jid.mar.out file.
If there are no jobname.marc.xxx files, check to make sure you can submit Marc jobs successfully.
At the end of the jobname.f06 file, Nastran will tell you what command it used to submit the Marc
job. Take this command to a command prompt and enter it to see why the Marc job wasnt submitted. If
you can go to a command window and type in run_marc jid-jobname and it finds the Marc
executable and runs the jobname.dat Marc input file, you can just use PATH=2 on the SOL 600 command
line.
Main Index
195
CHAPTER 7
The nastran command permits the specification of keywords used to request options affecting MSC
Nastran job execution. The format of the NASTRAN command is:
nastran input_data_file [keyword1 = value1 keyword2 = value2 ...]
where input_data_file is the name of the file containing the input data and keyword
i
=value
i
is one or
more optional keyword assignment arguments.
Use the keyword xmonast to monitor a MSC Nastran job as described below.
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear provides a status file (jobname.marc.sts) that can be queried
periodically to see how the analysis is progressing and if the job is completed. The file will report the
information relating to the progress of the analysis, with warning and informative messages.
The file review is especially important when manual or automatic time stepping procedures are being
used to step through an analysis procedure. One line is written after each successful increment. An
example file output is shown below.
Figure 7-1 information Summary of Job: nas.cant_bmsm.marc
The first column shows the procedural step, while the second column shows the increment number. Note
that not every increment size is equal, as can be seen in the TimeStep of the INC column. For this
example, the third increment size is larger than the first two increments, which means that the procedure
is satisfied that equilibrium is being satisfied and that it has increased the time step size to take advantage
of the better convergence characteristics. The third column (cycle# of the Inc) indicates the number of
xmonast xmonast={yes|no|kill Default: No
Indicates if XMONAST is to be run to monitor the MSC Nastran job. If xmonast=yes is
specified, XMONAST will be automatically started; you must manually exit XMONAST
when the MSC Nastran job has completed. If xmonast=kill is specified, XMONAST will
start and will automatically exit when the MSC Nastran job has completed.
Example: nastran example xmon=kill
This example runs the XMONITOR utility while the MSC Nastran job is running. Once
the job completes, the XMONITOR program is automatically terminated.
dip
Main Index
196
Newton Raphson iterations made during this increment. The next three columns show the increment
information, while the next six columns show the numbers for the total analysis.
Sepa means number of contact separations, cut refers to the number of time step size cutbacks, and split
refers to the number of increment splits due to contact penetration.
If the increment size becomes small, and there are a number of increments of this size, the analysis has
probably stalled, indicating that convergence is becoming very difficult to attain for the problem. A
review of the model is indicated.
The max disp column provides a valuable means to tell if a job is diverging or in some other way not
proceeding correctly.
Editing a MSC Nastran Input File
There may be instances when you want to directly edit the MSC Nastran Bulk Data file. Some
experienced MSC Nastran users may want to add options directly to specific Parameters and Bulk Data
entries. Patran provides direct access to the Bulk Data file as follows.
To edit an existing Bulk Data File:
1. Click on the Analysis Application icon to bring up the Analysis Application form.
2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to Analyze>Existing Deck>Full Run.
3. Click Edit Input File...
Patran automatically looks for an existing deck name that matches the current database name and
displays the existing deck.
Main Index
197
CHAPTER 7
MSC Nastran generates a substantial amount of information concerning the problem being executed. The
.f04 file provides information on the sequence of modules being executed and the time required by each
of the modules; the .log file contains system messages.
MSC Nastran may terminate as a result of errors detected by the operating system or by the program. If
the DIAG 44 is set, MSC Nastran will produce a dump of several key internal tables when most of these
errors occur. Before the dump occurs, there may be a fatal message written to the .f06 file. The general
format of this message is
***SYSTEM FATAL ERROR 4276, subroutine-name ERROR CODE n
These messages are SEVERE WARNING, or other text ... issued whenever an interrupt occurs that MSC
Nastran is unable to satisfactorily process. The specific reasons for the interrupt are usually printed in
the .f06 and/or .log file.
Resolving Convergence Problems
There are three major steps in getting a complete solution.
1. get the model input debugged (see section titled Exit 13 Errors).
2. establish initial equilibrium (see section titled Exit 2004 Errors).
3. getting the analysis to run to completion.
Step 1: De-Bugging the Model Input
See How to Tell if the Analysis Ran Successfully, 194.
To Debug a Failed Analysis
First, check the .sts, .f04, .f06, or .out files for licensing, disk access or format errors. The number a the
bottom of the jobname.marc.sts is the Marc Exit Number. Exit 13 means there was a format error in the
Marc input. Exit 2004 generally means you have unconstrained degrees of freedom or rigid body modes.
3002 means the analysis got part way through and then stopped. The complete Marc Exit message is
given at the end of the jobname.marc.out file, which may also be in jobname.f06 depending on the value
of COPYR.
If you get an Exit 13 check your input, make sure everything you need is in the Nastran input deck. Check
for elements, grids, contact body creation, etc. An easy way to debug these type of problems is to read
the jobname.marc.dat file (the Marc input file Nastran created) in to Mentat or Patran (an empty db with
preference set to Marc) and see what is missing. Often you will see that some elements are missing, or
that the contact bodies were not created as you would expect them. For more information see Figure 7-2.
Main Index
198
Figure 7-2 Flowchart to Debugging a SOL 600 Run
Submit job
Wait until process
finishes.
Does .sts
file exist?
Do
.f06, .f04,
.log files
exist?
Is
there a Fatal
Error Message
in .f06, .f04,
.log?
Ck Marc submit card,
find in .f06 and type
in a cmd window to
see why Marc job
was not submitted.
no yes no
Nastran job submit
from windows
w/Pause=YES, ck
error msg
no
ck .sts for
Exit #
fix-it - typical
Nastran debug
Is
Exit
#=3004?
yes
yes
Do you
get Nastran
requested
formatted output,
such
as .xdb?
yes
Successful completion
- go on to postprocess
yes
look in
jobname.marc.out for
Exit # and message.
ck T160P2.exe run, on windows
make sure it is in search path.
Is
Exit #=13?
Follow instructions in exit msg; if
its a formatting error ck Marc,
Volc, or read the
jobname.marc.dat file into
Patrans Marc pref (or Mentat)
and compare this model
w/original. The problem may be
displayed when the file is read in.
Is
Exit #=3002?
Is
Exit #=2004?
Some convergence
increments exist,
postprocess them & look
for possible causes of
stability loss, such as
contact changes. Ck
, you may be
encountering buckling
modes. Do a buckling
solution to see or try an
arc-length method.
o
max
No converged
increments, likely
unconstrained rigid
body motion exists: a.)
do modal to ID them,
b.) Ck equivalencing of
modal integrity, c.) add
constraints or weak
springs, d.) see section
on convergence
problems.
no
no
yes
no no
yes
yes
Main Index
199
CHAPTER 7
Step 2: Establishing Initial Equilibrium
If you get an Exit 2004 it means that the model was unable to reach equilibrium for the loads and
constraints applied in the initial subcase. Options include:
adding more constraints (or equivalently soft springs) to ground the model.
run a modal analysis to identify unconstrained rigid body modes.
Step 3: Getting the Analysis to Run to Completion
The first thing to check at this point is: Has the solution gone as far as it can, i.e. maybe you already
have the complete solution. Sometimes nonlinear loading causes structures to buckle which may take
your analysis into the post-buckled region. Depending on the type of buckling, you may be simply trying
to drive your analysis farther into the post-buckling range which may not give you the information you
are after. For example, if you load a frame structure with a load that exceeds the critical buckling load
and the analysis is simply working to drive the structure further into a plastic hinge.
Things to Do to Fix Non-Convergence
Check the .sts, .log, and .out files for Exit 2004, 3002, or 3003 format error messages.
If using fixed load incrementation try using a smaller time step, or use the automatic cutback
feature, or use adaptive time-stepping.
Try running an eigenvalue buckling solution to see if youve passed a critical buckling load or
examine the stresses and strains to see if some portion of the structure has failed (if MATF
failure criteria was not included in the modal).
If using Contact set the Contact Tolerance Bias to 0.9, particularly if doing shell contact (done
by default in SOL 600).
Turn on Quasi-Static inertial damping or Non-Positive Definite to eliminate un-constrained rigid
body motions (done by default in SOL 600).
Try running an eignevalue modal solution to identify unconstrained rigid body modes.
Try using an arc-length method - you may be encountering local buckling.
Look at any available results of converged increments.
If doing contact try a different contact tolerance value.
Isolate Non-linearities and add them one at a time.
Making Sure Appropriate Non-linearities are Included.
Check Material Stability Make sure the entire strain range is covered by the material data.
For complex models involving multiple forms of nonlinear behavior the tried and true approach
(particularly if you are new to this type of problem) is to start with a linear model and add non-linearities
one at a time. Alternatively, remove the non-linearities one at a time until it runs. This approach helps
you determine which type of non-linearity is causing the convergence problem. If you have contact,
remove it and let the bodies pass through one another or replace the contact condition with an
equivalent displacement constraint. If you have nonlinear materials replace them with simple elastic
Main Index
200
ones. Add the non-linearities back one at a time, making sure the behavior is reasonable and correct. Look
at reaction forces and displacements of any converged increments to make sure they are of the
expected magnitude.
If you run the analysis and it doesnt run at all, or ends before completing, you will get an error message
in the .OUT or .LOG file that will give you an indication of what the problem is. Do a text search on the
word error in the .OUT file. The first thing to check is to make sure you were able to get a license to
run the job. Licensing problems are one of the most common reasons for a run to fail. If you are sure you
have a license and submit the job correctly you should get a .OUT file that will end with an Exit #
preceded by a description of why the run stopped. Common Exit #s are: Exit 3004 means success, i.e.
the job ran to completion and did everything you asked it to. Exit 13 means you have a syntax error in
the input file. You should check the input syntax of the line the error message points to, but it is likely
that the actual error was in the input block PRIOR to where the message points. Exit 2004 typically
means non-convergence due to rigid body motions. See recommendations for Equilibrium. Exit 3002
this means the analysis ran into convergence problems part way through and did not complete. Any Exit
Message of 3000 or higher means there are converged increments. Plot the converged increments to see
what is going on. See Technical Application Note 4575 or Appendix A of Volume C: Program Input for
a more complete list with suggested fixes.
Things to consider if your model doesnt converge:
1. Equilibrium - Make sure your model has LBCs and contact conditions that will ensure force
equilibrium at EVERY increment/iteration and for ALL rigid-body modes (typically there are 6).
When in doubt eliminate this as the source of non-convergence by intentionally over-constraining
the model (or adding soft springs) and then removing constraints one at a time until you figure out
the unconstrained rigid body mode. One area that is sometimes overlooked regarding equilibrium
is that of the rigid body control. If you dont specify adequate control information (e.g. you forget
to add the zero that fixes the rigid body rotation value) you may have convergence problems.
2. LBCs - When LBCs are removed, the forces/pressures (and the reaction forces due to
displacement constraints) are removed gradually over the subsequent step. The forces and
pressures are always removed gradually, but the reaction forces of displacement constraints may
be are removed suddenly at the beginning of the subsequent step. This sudden change in loading
can cause convergence problems.
3. Stability and Collapse - Non-convergence will occur when a structural instability (i.e., buckling)
mode is encountered. Buckling can occur either locally (in highly stressed area where the stability
of individual elements is exceeded) or globally when the critical buckling load of any part of the
model is exceeded. You may want to do a linear buckling analysis to determine the load that
would buckle the least-stable part of the structure. If you suspect that you are approaching the
post-buckled region here are some other things to try: a) try using Quasi-static inertial damping
(turn this on under Analysis Step Create Solution Parameters) or one of the Arc-length
methods. This will help get through the unstable region if doing a snap-through buckling problem,
and may help get you past one or two elements of local buckling, but probably not more than that.)
try a finer mesh (smaller elements have shorter length and so higher Pcr);
Main Index
201
CHAPTER 7
4. Materials - Make sure that the material coefficient values are realistic and that the models will
support the stresses and loads developed in the model. For example if you hang a 1000 lb. weight
from a perfectly plastic wire with a 0.001 in**2 cross section and a 20 ksi yield stress, the
resulting 100 ksi stress cannot be supported by the (20 ksi yield stress) material and the run will
not converge. Comparable behavior in bending is referred to as a plastic hinge. Units mis-
matches will often result in this type of problem (note that this only occurs in non-linear
analyses). For example, lets say you are modeling a cantilever beam and using a perfectly plastic
material model and a follower force tip load, and you mistakenly add an extra zero to the tip
load. A plastic hinge will develop with the beam winding up like a spring and the analysis
continuing to run until it runs out of increments (which may take a long time). If you suspect this
type of problem first run the problem with a small fraction of the load to see if it will converge.
If you are using an orthotropic or hyperelastic material it is possible to select combinations of
material properties that will result in a non-positive definite material coefficient matrix. Normally
the analysis code will warn you if you violate this requirement.
5. Contact - If there is a problem with chattering (a condition where a particular node jumps into
and out of contact thus preventing the increment from converging), you can go to Translation
Parameters Contact Control Parameters Separation and set the Chattering toggle to
Suppress. The parameters which have the biggest effect on contact behavior are Contact
Distance Tolerance, D (see Fig. 1), Bias Factor, B (see Fig. 2) -) and Separation Force. The
default uses D = 1/20 the of the element edge length. You can find the specific value in the.OUT
file and try a larger or smaller value, whichever you feel is most appropriate. The default on the
bias value is 0, if having problems with contact one of the first things to try is to over-ride this
value on the Analysis Translation Parameters Contact Detection Contact Parameters form
with 0.9. Another option would be to increase the separation force (which defaults to 0) to prevent
chattering. When considering contact problems look for places (such as corners and other
discontinuities) where one contact surface may slip off.
Standard Steps to Resolving Convergence Problems:
If your model doesnt run, or stops pre-maturely: FIRST, READ THE MESSAGES IN The .sts, .f06, .log
and .out files. Common causes of the run to fail include:
1. unconstrained rigid body modes.
2. you're in the post-buckled region.
3. problems resolving contact.
4. some part of the model/material is over-constrained such that the given displacement solution
doesnt change when the load is increased (i.e. individual elements are buckling locally), this type
of non-unique solution can prevent convergence.
After trying the obvious things, talk to other experienced users about possible reasons your run isnt
working. In one case, a user was using the standard element formulation with = 0.5 and hex/21
elements and his model would not converge even though there were no obvious problems. For this case,
using the constant volume formulation should provide a unique solution and allow convergence, unless
= 0.5 causes numerical problems. In that case you should use the Herrmann elements which should
u
u
Main Index
202
take care of the numerical problems as well as the non-unique solution problem. If these options dont
work, you could try using reduced integration, which may solve both problems at once, but may
have problems with energy-free or spurious deformation modes (also called hour-glassing),
although the analysis has built-in hour glass stabilization. Also, try quasi-static inertial damping or an
arc-length methods.
Here are some other things to try:
a. try a finer mesh;
b. modify the material model: if its simple elastic-perfectly plastic with large plastic strains try
using constant volume Herrmann elements, if using a hyper-elastic material model try
lowering Nu from 0.5 to maybe 0.49 or so (or lower if you have to); make sure its based on
test data that includes the type of behavior you are trying to model (i.e. if your test data is from
a uni-axial tensile test and you are modeling a pressurized cylinder, which is a bi-axial stress
state, try analyzing a simple bi-axial sheet to see if your hyper-elastic material model will
successfully handle bi-axial stress states; if not you may have to include some bi-axial test data
(hyper-elastic models based on test data should include at least 2 "modes," although the
program has a new Arruda-Boyce model which often yields better results with limited
experimental data);
c. simplify - if the model you are running is a 3D cylinder made of solid elements, run a 2D axi-
symmetric test case to check out the mesh refinement and material model. If not in the post-
buckled region try: 1) look at deformed shape to see if it looks reasonable. Remember that
static equilibrium must be maintained at every step; 2) check reaction forces to see if the load
path is reasonable; 3) look for highly distorted elements, both visually and in the .out file - if
you find any you may need to go back and refine your mesh in that area to keep those elements
well-behaved, i.e. converging, or use adaptive re-meshing. Although distorted elements will
normally just give you bad results but not necessarily prevent convergence. Typically linear
elements (i.e. quad/4 instead of quad/8) do better in analyses where severe distortion is
expected. 4) if using contact elements you may be able to ease convergence problems by
simplifying the contact interaction: a) look at the .sts file for the # of increment splits and # of
separations to see if contact is the problem; b) set bias to 0.9, increase (or decrease) the contact
tolerance distance, suppress chattering; c) modify the contact table to eliminate suspected
trouble areas (at least as a diagnostic measure); d) look for areas where contact bodies may be
sliding off. 5) PAY ATTENTION TO THE MESSAGES IN THE .STS, .LOG, .f06 AND
.OUT FILES, they may tell you why the model was not translated or convergence was not
reached and the analysis terminated. 6) if non-convergence relates to inelastic behavior of the
material, such as in a plasticity analysis, make sure there are no "plastic hinges" formed, where
static equilibrium cannot be achieved because the material is not strong enough, in this case
all the iterations go to deforming the body around the plastic region and static equilibrium may
never be reached. 7) when doing a hyperelastic material analysis the material model may be
unpredictable since the coefficients are generally quite unintuitive. The run may not converge
simply because the material model, while it may look reasonable, may actually be inherently
unstable (things like negative energy behavior, etc.) 8) make sure you aren't stuck at a stability
Main Index
203
CHAPTER 7
bifurcation point, (i.e. at a buckling mode), what may be happening is that there are 2 valid
(post-buckling in this case) equilibrium paths and the code flips back and forth between them
preventing convergence; the way to get past this is to make the problem dynamic and use the
inertia of the body to select the appropriate equilibrium path.
Again, the tried and true method is to start with a linear model and add non-linearities one at a time,
or remove nonlinearities.
Consider changing the Contact Distance Tolerance. If you run into contact-related convergence problems
this is one of the first things to try.
Standard Exit Messages
Please refer to the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide and the MSC Nastran Reference Manual for exit
codes and numbers.
SOL 600 Exit Numbers and their Interpretation:
Most SOL 600 jid.marc.out files end with an EXIT MESSAGE & NUMBER. This exit number is located
in the last few lines of the output file (.out file) of the SOL 600 run. If a.out file is not created, that
sometimes points to an installation issue or a FATAL ERROR or SEVERE WARNING will be present
in the jid.f06 file. EXIT #3004 is GOOD. It indicates a successful run. Most other exit numbers indicate
a failed run. Below are some common exit numbers that a user might encounter. Information on more
exit numbers are given in Volume C (Program Messages) of SOL 600 documentation, which contains
the full list of exit numbers/messages.
1. Exit 13: This exit # indicates an error with the SOL 600 input file. SOL 600 gives an exit 13
if it does not understand some term in the input deck. Causes include either the input deck is
written out incorrectly, or because the set-up is inconsistent (user set-up issue) e.g. user may set
up a shell model and not provide shell thickness; or the user creates but neglects to assign
material properties.
Fixing exit 13 errors: Go to the.out file and search for the keyword: error (*** error). The error
message listed there points to the section/line of the input deck causing the problem. The user has
to figure out why that is incorrect, along the lines discussed in the above paragraph or send the
MSC Nastran implicit file (2) to MSC.
2. Exit 2004: If the user gets this message as soon as the job is submitted - i.e. no
increments/iterations successfully completed, it points to an unconstrained mesh. Exit 2004, from
a numerical stand-point, indicates a non-positive definite stiffness matrix. From a model set-up
stand-point, this implies that the mesh is not constrained in space, i.e. either incomplete (or no)
BCs have been applied to the model. User needs to check the BCs.
Main Index
204
If this exit number comes after the analysis begins i.e. after some increments are done, the reasons
are to do with the mechanics of the model e.g. formation of a plastic hinge, or due to buckling, or
a deformable body sliding due to lack of friction in the model. The fix for each situation is unique
to the underlying physics of the model e.g. adding friction if that reflects the actual situation.
Turning on the Suppress Rigid Body Motion option on the NonLinear Solution parameters can
help in some cases.
3. Exit 1005, Exit 1009: If this exit message (exit 1005) comes as soon as the job is submitted i.e.
at the first assembly of the first iteration, it indicates a meshing problem. Re-check mesh and re-
mesh. In most cases, this error message(s) comes after an analysis has started. Both exit numbers
1005 & 1009 indicate excessive element deformation during a particular load increment, in a
particular iteration. The way to get around this error is to reduce step size. However SOL 600 does
that automatically and if the problem still persists it gives exit 3015/3009. See explanations
below on exit 3015/3009.
4. Exit 3002: This message indicates that SOL 600 has reached the user-specified upper limit on
the number of (Newton-Raphson) iterations within a load increment. The default is set to 25.
SOL 600 keeps iterating 25 times, and tries to converge to a solution for that increment. If that
does not happen, SOL 600 will cut back the load (by half) and re-solve that increment. Sometimes
this is not enough to get convergence, and it will exit with 3002. One way to get around this exit
message is to increase the # of iterations, but that may not be the best way, since 25 is a high
number to begin with. Treat this exit message the same way you would treat exit 3015/3009 i.e.
look at the model to see what is causing it to not converge (i.e. what is causing it difficulty at that
stage of the analysis) and make changes accordingly. If this exit message shows up in the first
increment of the run, it could happen if the residual loads are very low in the model to
begin with. Check the output file to confirm this. Switching from relative to absolute criterion
will help, as might switching from load to displacement-based criteria.
5. Exit 3015, Exit 3009:
Exit 3009: This exit number indicates that SOL 600 cuts back to a the time-step size too small
for the analysis to continue. The load stepping algorithm has a cut-back feature where the load-
step is automatically reduced (halved) if SOL 600 runs into certain problems (exit 3002, or exit
1005). When an increment runs into these exit numbers, it will automatically cut the load-step and
re-solve that increment. If the problem continues to persist, it will cut back the load-step again.
This happens until the limit of the number of cut-backs is reached. This can result in a very small
time-step. In such a case, SOL 600 stops the analysis with an exit 3009. To fix this situation, the
user has to look at the results up to the point of failure to understand why SOL 600 cuts back
repeatedly at this stage of the analysis. An understanding of the physics of the model and/or
run-time issues at this stage of the analysis is important here. The user has to make a
determination and modify the model.
Exit 3015: SOL 600s automatic load-stepping scheme is set up such that the applied load in an
increment scales up (or down) depending on how easy (or difficult) the solution was in the
previous increment. The degree of difficulty is determined based on the parameter: desired
number of recycles (default = 3). SOL 600 will scale down the step size until it reaches a lower
limit on the step size (default = 0.001% of total time step) and then exit with # 3015. This is an
indication to the user that the analysis encountered some difficulty at that stage. As before, the
Main Index
205
CHAPTER 7
user has to view the results of the run up to that point and make a determination, based on the
physics of the run, as to why the analysis has problems. For more information on SOL 600s
Automatic load-stepping procedure, please see Chapter 11 of Volume A: Considerations for
Non-linear Analysis, section: Automatic load-stepping.
6. Exit 2400 (seen only in contact problems):
This is seen in problems where a node on a mesh (deformable body) slides off from a rigid surface
that it was in contact with. For this exit # (and for exit numbers 1005, 1009 and 2004), SOL 600
attempts an automatic internal correction if the cut-back option is turned on (this is the default).
SOL 600 tries to set it right by cutting back the load step and re-solve. It keeps cutting back and
if it cannot resolve the problem, you get an exit 3009. To avoid this situation altogether, during
model set-up make sure that the ends of the rigid surface (or curves) are not close to the mesh. If
they are, you must extend them to beyond the end of the mesh- in any direction, preferably in a
manner satiate a smooth profile is maintained. If the extension of the rigid curve/surface results
in a sharp corner in the rigid body, put a fillet at the corner.
General Hints for Starting out with Nonlinear Analysis in Contact:
1. Start your model simple and gradually add complexity. For example, if you have a 4-body 3-D
contact problem that you are solving for the first time, initially try to run it as a 2-body contact
problem, get that running, and THEN add the 3
rd
and 4
th
contact body. In general, for any
nonlinear model, try to start with a simpler model and gradually add complexity.
2. A deformable-to-deformable contact problem takes more time/effort than a rigid-to-deformable
contact problem. So, wherever possible, use a rigid body in place of a mesh if that is appropriate
for the problem.
3. When starting with a new model, set up your model such that you get some initial results or a run-
failure within a few minutes. This means that you may need to start with a coarse mesh. Once you
know your model runs to completion, you can add refinement and/or complexity. As a general
comment, a 1000-2000 node job would fail within few minutes if there are set-up errors. This is
what we want: if the job fails, it should fail fast. These initial few runs serve the purpose of testing
the set-up parameters to make sure that they work right for this model. One can expect to make a
few/several runs to determine that the parameters are OK for that class of problems. Once these
parameters are known, the user can apply them to other models in that class of problems. Once
the job runs to completion, you can add complexity/refinement. Now the job will take longer, but
we know that it will run to completion.
4. Memory issues: Make sure your machine has enough RAM to accommodate the job run. If the
job goes out of RAM, the model will slow down significantly. The RAM needed for the run is
listed in the.out file (look for the keyword: memory and/or workspace). Open the file, search for
the key-words and pick out the largest RAM number you see. The RAM is in 'words'. Multiply
by 4 to get it in bytes. If the phrase out-of-core appears in the.out file, it means that the job went
out of RAM. Typically, for large contact problems, it is recommended that the computer have
1.0+ GB of RAM but you can run non-linear jobs on computers with a fraction of that RAM.
Main Index
206
5. Displacement control: In general, problems with applied displacements are numerically more
stable than problems with applied forces. For example, if a cantilever beam with a point BC at
the end is loaded using a force, formation of a plastic hinge can make the model go non-positive
definite. With an applied displacement, this scenario is less likely.
6. Linear problems have a unique solution, but that is not always true of non-linear problems.
Solutions to non-linear problems can also be quite sensitive to initial and boundary conditions.
Small changes in BCs/Is can sometimes change the solution quite a bit. When tackling nonlinear
problems, the user should take these into consideration.
Using Patran to Debug an Analysis
There are many error or warning messages that may be generated by the Patran MSC Nastran Interface.
The following table outlines some of these.
Description
Unable to open a new message file
" ". Translation messages will be
written to standard output.
If Patran tries to open a message file and cannot, it will write
messages to Standard Output. On most systems, messages are
written to standard output and never to a separate message file.
Unable to open the specified
OUTPUT2 file " ".
The OUTPUT2 file was not found. Check the OUTPUT2 file
specification in the translation control file.
The specified OUTPUT2 file " "
is not in standard binary format and
cannot be translated.
The OUTPUT2 file is not in standard binary format. Check the
OUTPUT2 file specification in the translation control file.
Group " " does not exist in the
database. Model data will not be
translated.
The name of a nonexistent group was specified in the translator
control file. No model data will be translated from the
OUTPUT2 file.
Needed file specification missing!
The full name of the job file must be
specified as the first command-line
argument to this program.
The Patran control file must be specified as the first on-line
argument to the translator.
database " ". Writing the
OUTPUT2 information to the PCL
command file " ".
If Patran cannot communicate directly to the specified database.
It will write the results and/or model data to a PCL session file.
Unable to open either the specified
database " ", or a PCL command
file, " ".
The naspat3 translator is unable to open any output file. Check
file specification and directory protection.
Unable to open the NASTRAN
input file " ".
Patran was unable to open a file to where the input file
information will be written.
Main Index
207
CHAPTER 7
database, " " .
The forward Patran MSC Nastran translator was unable to open
the specified Patran database.
Alter file of the name " " could
not be found. No OUPUT2 alter
will be written to the NASTRAN
input file.
The OUTPUT2 DMAP alter file, for this type of analysis, could
not be found. Correct the search path to include the necessary
directory if you want the alter files to be written to the input file.
No property regions are defined in
the database. No elements or
element properties can be
translated.
Elements referenced by an element property region in the Patran
database will not get translated by the forward Patran MSC
Nastran translator. If no element regions are defined, no
elements will be translated.
Description
Main Index
208
Main Index
Chapter 8: Output from the Analysis
8
Output from the Analysis
Overview
Output Requests
SOL 600 Results Quantities
MSC Nastran Results Quantities

Main Index
Overview
210
Overview
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) produces stress and strain results that may differ from those
results available with SOL 106 and 129.
The Marc t16 or t19 file can be used to evaluate results. The result quantities included in the t16/t19 files
are controlled using the MARCOUT Bulk Data entry. Patran can be used to postprocess nearly all types
of output selected by the MARCOUT entry. In general, if the t16 file is saved and brought into Patran,
the types of stresses and strains will be labeled correctly and you can easily choose which quantities to
plot.
The more basic types of output (displacements, velocities, accelerations, Cauchy stress tensor and one
type of strain tensor) can be translated back to standard MSC Nastran op2, xdb, punch and even f06 files
using the OUTR option on the SOL 600,ID Executive Control statement. If the stresses and strains are
brought back into the MSC Nastran files (op2, xdb, f06 or pch), only one type of stress and strain may
be placed on the OP2 file. Generally the Cauchy Stress tensor will be available along with a user selection
of one of the following strains: plastic, total or elastic in the strain measure selected for the analysis. The
type of stress-strain pair brought back into the Nastran results files is specified using PARAM,
MARCEKND.
Input
SOL 600 Statement Default
If SOL 600 with nothing else on the line is entered, the statement will act the same as if the following
statement was used:
SOL 600,NLSTATIC OUTR=OP2
.OP2 Data
Outputs in the OP2 file (as well as f06, xdb and punch) have been enhanced in the following areas:
MPC forces are available
SPC forces are available
3-D contact results are available
Displacement, velocity, acceleration results are available
Cauchy Stress and one type of strain (total, plastic or elastic) are available
Beam loads are available
Output in the MSC Nastran files is controlled the same way as in other MSC Nastran
solution sequences
Set definitions may be used to limit output for any of the above items
Grid force
Main Index
211
CHAPTER 8
You must include Case Control requests such as DISPLACEMENT(PLOT)=ALL in order to obtain output
in op2, xdb, punch or f06 files. In addition, OUTR requests on the SOL 600 entry must be made (for
example OUTR=OP2,F06). The applicable Case Control requests for SOL 600 are DISPLACEMENT,
STRESS, STRAIN, SPCFORCES, MPCFORCES, and BOUTPUT. BOUTPUT maps 3D contact to the
older 2D Slideline Contact datablock (see item codes for contact in section 6 of the 2005 Quick
Reference Guide).
The output interval for the t16 file (and thus the OP2 file) is controlled by the NLPARM Bulk Data entry
or the MARCOTIM entry..
Main Index
Output Requests
212
Output Requests
Output requests are made in the Case Control Section of the MSC Nastran Input file. Case Control
commands are organized into three categories:
1. Output Control - defines how and where the output is delivered.
2. Sets/Grouping of Output - prescribes the set of geometrical or FEM entities for which results are
to be returned.
3. Actual Result Quantities - identifies the individual result quantities to be returned.
Specifying Output Requests
For a complete list of the output requests available via the Case Control commands, see Case Control
Command Summary (p. 185) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Making Output Requests in Patran
The Output Requests form is used to request results from the MSC Nastran analysis for use in
postprocessing (post tape) and verification (output file).
2. On the Analysis Application form, select Subcases... and choose Output Requests... from the
Subcase Options section.
Main Index
213
CHAPTER 8
Although printed output requests can be different from Subcase to Subcase, there are certain aspects of
these requests that can only be written once. For those aspects of output requests that must remain
constant regardless of the Load Step, that information is extracted from the first Subcase in the Subcase
Selection form.
Results (POST) File Options
Increments between
Writing Results
Defines the number of increments between writing results to
the MSC Nastran results file after the first increment of the
analysis. The default is one (1) for every increment.
Select Nodal Results... Brings up a subform for selecting nodal results
Select Element Results... Brings up a subform for selecting elemental results.
Main Index
Output Requests
214
Select Nodal Results
This subform controls which nodal result quantities are returned from the analysis.
Available Result Types Lists all of the available result types for the analysis. The numbers
in parentheses are the Marc POST code numbers.
Selected Result Types Shows the set of result types that have been selected to be returned
in the analysis.
Main Index
215
CHAPTER 8
The following table shows the post codes that may be selected for a SOL 600 structural
nonlinear analysis.
Nodal Result Postcode Default(?)
DISPLACEMENT 1 YES
ROTATION 2 YES
EXTERNAL FORCE 3 no
EXTERNAL MOMENT 4 no
REACTION FORCE 5 YES
REACTION MOMENT 6 no
PORE PRESSURE 23 no
VELOCITY 28 no
ROTATIONAL VELOCITY 29 no
ACCELERATION 30 no
ROTATIONAL ACCELERATION 31 no
MODAL MASS 32 no
ROTATION MODAL MASS 33 no
CONTACT NORMAL STRESS 34 no
CONTACT NORMAL FORCE 35 YES
FRICTION STRESS 36 no
FRICTION FORCE 37 YES
CONTACT STATUS 38 no
CONTACT TOUCHED body 39 YES
HERRMANN VARIABLE 40 no
POST CODE, No. -11 -11 thru -16 no
POST CODE, No. -22 -21 thru -23 no
POST CODE, No. -31 -31 no
Note: The POST CODE (<0) are for user-defined quantities via user subroutine UPSTNO.
Main Index
Output Requests
216
Element Output Requests
This subform controls which element result quantities are returned from the analysis.
Main Index
217
CHAPTER 8
The following table shows the post codes that may be selected for a SOL 600 structural
nonlinear analysis.
Available Result Types Lists all of the available result types for the analysis. The numbers
in parentheses are the Marc POST code numbers.
Selected Result Types Shows the set of result types that have been selected to be returned
in the analysis.
Element X-section Results Defines the number of layer points to use through the cross section
of homogeneous shells, plates and beams. This number must be odd
if not a composite.
Note: If no elemental results are selected and no nodal results are selected, no POST option
is written.
Elemental Result Postcode Solutions Default(?)
STRAIN, TOTAL COMPONENTS 301 nonlinear only YES
STRAIN, TOTAL COMPONENTS
(defined system)
461 nonlinear only no
STRAIN, ELASTIC COMPONENTS 401 any YES
STRAIN, ELASTIC COMPONENTS
(global system)
421 any no
STRAIN, ELASTIC EQUIVALENT 127 any no
STRAIN, PLASTIC COMPONENTS 321 nonlinear only YES
STRAIN, PLASTIC COMPONENTS
(global system)
STRAIN, PLASTIC EQUIVALENT 27 nonlinear only YES
STRAIN, PLASTIC EQUIVALENT
(from rate)
7 nonlinear only YES
STRAIN, CREEP COMPONENTS 331 creep only no
STRAIN, CREEP COMPONENTS
(global system)
441 creep only no
STRAIN, CREEP EQUIVALENT 37 creep only no
STRAIN, CREEP EQUIVALENT
(from rate)
8 creep only no
STRAIN, THERMAL 371 any no
STRAIN, THICKNESS 49 any no
Main Index
Output Requests
218
STRAIN, VELOCITY 451 nonlinear only no
STRESS, COMPONENTS 311 any no
STRESS, COMPONENTS
(defined system)
391 an no
STRESS, COMPONENTS
(global system)
411 any no
STRESS, EQUIVALENT YIELD 59 nonlinear only no
STRESS, EQUIVALENT MISES 17 any YES
STRESS, MEAN NORMAL 18 any YES
STRESS, INTERLAMINAR SHEAR
No. 1
108 any no
STRESS, INTERLAMINAR SHEAR
No. 2
109 any no
STRESS, INTERLAMINAR
COMPONENTS
501,511 any no
STRESS, CAUCHY COMPONENTS 341 nonlinear only no
STRESS, CAUCHY EQUIVALENT 47 nonlinear only YES
STRESS, HARMONIC
COMPONENTS
351 (real)
361(imag)
harmonic only no
FORCES, ELEMENT 264-269 any no
BIMOMENT 270 any no
STRAIN RATE, PLASTIC 28 nonlinear only no
STRAIN RATE, EQUIVALENT
VISCOPLASTIC
175 any no
STATE VARIABLE, SECOND 29 any no
STATE VARIABLE, THIRD 39 any no
TEMPERATURE, ELEMENT
TOTAL
9 any no
TEMPERATURE, ELEMENT
INCREMENTAL
10 any no
STRAIN ENERGY DENSITY,
TOTAL
48 nonlinear only YES
ELASTIC
58 any no
PLASTIC
THICKNESS, ELEMENT 20 any no
Main Index
219
CHAPTER 8
VOLUME, ELEMENT 78 any no
VOLUME, VOID FRACTION 177 any no
FAILURE, INDEX No. 1-7 91-103 any no
POST CODE, No. 19 19 any no
POST CODE, No. 38 38 any no
POST CODE, No. -11 -11 thru -16 any no
POST CODE, No. -21 -21 thru -23 any no
POST CODE, No. -31 -31 any no
Main Index
220
The following table indicates all the possible result quantities which can be loaded into the Patran
database from the t16 file. The Primary and Secondary Labels are items selected from the postprocessing
menus. The Type indicates whether the results are Scalar, Vector, or Tensor. These types will determine
which postprocessing techniques will be available in order to view the results quantity. Postcodes
indicates which MSC.Marc element postcodes (selected automatically or by Nastran bulk data card
MARCOUT) the data comes from. The Description gives a brief discussion about the results quantity.
The Output Request forms use the actual primary and secondary labels which will appear in the results.
For example, if Strain, Elastic is selected on the Element Output Requests form, the Strain, Elastic
is created for postprocessing.
Primary
Label
Secondary
Label Type Postcodes Description
Displacement Translation Vector 1 (nodal) Translational displacements at nodes
from a structural analysis.
Displacement Rotation Vector 2 (nodal) Rotational displacements at nodes
Velocity Translation Vector 28 (nodal) Translational velocities at nodes from
a dynamic analysis.
Velocity Rotation Vector 29 (nodal) Rotational velocities at nodes.
Acceleration Translation Vector 30 (nodal) Translational accelerations at nodes
from a dynamic analysis.
Acceleration Rotation Vector 31 (nodal) Rotational accelerations at nodes from
a dynamic analysis.
Force Nodal External
Applied
Vector 3 (nodal) Forces applied to the model in a
structural analysis.
Force Nodal Reaction Vector 5 (nodal) Reaction forces at boundary
conditions from a structural analysis.
Moment Nodal External
Applied
Vector 4 (nodal) Moments applied to the model in a
Moment Nodal Reaction Vector 6 (nodal) Reaction moments at boundary
conditions from a structural analysis.
Modal Mass Translation Vector 32 (nodal) Translational modal masses from
modal extractions.
Modal Mass Rotation Vector 33 (nodal) Rotational modal masses from modal
extractions.
Stress Contact Normal Vector 34 (nodal) Contact Normal Stress
Force Contact Normal Vector 35 (nodal) Contact Normal Force
Stress Friction Vector 36 (nodal) Friction Stress
Main Index
221
CHAPTER 8
Force Friction Vector 37 (nodal) Friction Force
Contact Status Scalar 38 (nodal) Contact Status
Contact Touched Body Scalar 39 (nodal) Touched Body Contact
Variable Herrmann Scalar 40 (nodal) Herrmann Variable
Post Code No. -11 through -
16
Tensor -11 thru -16,
(nodal)
User defined nodal quantities via user
subroutine UPSTNO.
Post Code No. -21 through -
23
Vector -21 thru -23,
(nodal)
User defined nodal quantities via user
subroutine UPSTNO.
Post Code No. -31 Scalar -31, (nodal) User defined nodal quantities via user
subroutine UPSTNO.
subroutine UPSTNO.
subroutine UPSTNO.
Strain Creep Tensor 31-36 or 331 Creep strain from a nonlinear
Strain Plastic
Equivalent Rate
Scalar 28 Equivalent plastic strain rate from a
nonlinear structural analysis.
Strain Thermal Tensor 71-76 or 371 Thermal strain from a structural
analysis.
Strain Thickness Scalar 49 Thickness strain from a structural
analysis.
Strain Total Tensor 1-6 or 301 Total strain from a structural analysis.
Temperature Element Scalar 9 Element temperature from a thermal or
Temperature Element Gradient Vector 181-183 Element temperature gradient from a
thermal analysis.
Temperature Element
Incremental
Scalar 10 Incremental element temperature from
a thermal or structural analysis.
Stress Tensor 11-16 or 311 Stress from a structural analysis.
Stress Cauchy Tensor 41-46 or 341 Cauchy stress from a nonlinear
Stress Cauchy
Equivalent Mises
Scalar 47 Equivalent Cauchy stress from a
Stress Equivalent Mises Scalar 17 Equivalent (von mises) stress from a
Primary
Label
Secondary
Main Index
222
Stress Hydrostatic Scalar 18 Hydrostatic stress from a structural
analysis.
Stress Interlaminar
Shear No. 1
Scalar 108 Interlaminar shear in one direction
Stress Interlaminar
Shear No. 2
Scalar 109 Interlaminar shear in two direction
Energy
Density
Elastic Scalar 48 Elastic strain energy density from a
Energy
Density
Plastic Scalar 58 Plastic strain energy density from a
Energy
Density
Total Scalar 68 Total strain energy density from a
Flux Element Vector 184-186 Element heat flux from a thermal
analysis.
State Variable Second Scalar 29 Second state variable from a nonlinear
thermal or structural analysis.
State Variable Third Scalar 39 Third state variable from a nonlinear
thermal or structural analysis.
Failure Index No. 1 Scalar 91 Failure index one from a structural
analysis.
Failure Index No. 2 Scalar 92 Failure index two from a structural
analysis.
Failure Index No. 3 Scalar 93 Failure index three from a structural
analysis.
Failure Index No. 4 Scalar 94 Failure index four from a structural
analysis.
Failure Index No. 5 Scalar 95 Failure index five from a structural
analysis.
Failure Index No. 6 Scalar 96 Failure index six from a structural
analysis.
Failure Index No. 7 Scalar 97 Failure index seven from a structural
analysis.
Thickness Scalar 20 Element thickness from a thermal or
Volume Scalar 78 Element Volume from a thermal or
Primary
Label
Secondary
Main Index
223
CHAPTER 8
In addition to these standard results quantities, several Global Variable results can be created. Global
Variables are results quantities where one value is representative of the entire model. The following
table defines the Global Variables which may be created.
Using Patran to Postprocess Results Quantities
2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to Access Results>Attach
t16/t19>Results Entities.
Global Variable Label Type Description
Increment Scalar Increment of the analysis.
Time Scalar Time of the analysis.
Buckling Mode Scalar Buckling mode number.
Critical Load Factor Scalar Critical load factor for buckling analysis.
Dynamic Mode Scalar Dynamic mode number from modal extraction.
Frequency (radians/time) Scalar Frequency in radians per unit time for modal extraction.
Main Index
224
After selecting a t16 or t19 file, you will need to specify the translation parameters.
Main Index
225
CHAPTER 8
If you wish to return result quantities from Marc back to MSC Nastran you must include the OUTR
option on the SOL 600,ID Executive Control statement.
Using Patran to Postprocess MSC Nastran Results Quantities
2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to Access Results>Attach XBD>Results Entities
or Access Results>Read Output2>Results Entities.
Entry Description
OUTR Specifies that Marc output results be converted to various types of MSC Nastran
formats
Main Index
226
After selecting an XDB or op2 file, you will need to specify the translation parameters.
Main Index
227
CHAPTER 8
Tolerances
Division Prevent division by zero errors.
Numerical Compares real values for equality.
Additional Results to be Imported
Rotational Nodal Results Indicates whether Rotational Nodal Results are skipped or
included in translation.
Stress/Strain Invariants Indicates whether Stress/Strain Invariants are skipped or
Principal Directions Indicates whether Principal Directions are skipped or
Element Results Positions If an element has results at both the centroid and at the
nodes, this filter indicates which results are to be included
in the translation.
Main Index
228
Main Index
Chapter 9: Assigned Conditions
9
Assigned Conditions
Constraints
Initial Conditions
Main Index
Constraints
230
Constraints
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear allows you to input kinematic constraints through various options that
include multi-point constraints, boundary conditions and support conditions.
Multi-Point Constraints
MPCs are special element types which define a rigorous behavior between several specified nodes. The
following table lists the MPC types which are supported for MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
Specifying Explicit MPCs
Explicit MPCs may be created between a dependent degree of freedom and one or more independent
degrees of freedom. The dependent term consists of a node ID and a degree of freedom, while an
independent term consists of a coefficient, a node ID, and a degree of freedom. An unlimited number of
independent terms can be specified, while only one dependent term can be specified.
Defining Explicit MPCs in Patran
To define an Explicit MPC:
1. Click on the FE Application icon located on the Main form to bring up the Finite Elements
Application form.
2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to Create> MPC>Explicit.
MPC Types
Explicit RBE1
Rigid (Fixed) RBE2
Cyclic Symmetry RBE3
Sliding Surface RROD
RJOINT
RSPLINE
RSSCON
RBAR
RBAR1
RTRPLT
RTRPLT1
Entry Description
MPC Defines a multipoint constraint equation.
Main Index
231
CHAPTER 9
Assigned Conditions
3. Click on Define Terms... to define the explicit constraints.
Entry Description
Dependent Terms Dependent terms define the fields for G1 and C1 on the MPC entry. Only one
node and DOF combination may be defined for any given explicit MPC. The
A1 field on the MPC entry is automatically set to -1.0.
Independent Terms Independent terms define the Gi, Ci, and Ai fields on the MPC entry, where i
is greater than one. As many coefficient, node, and DOF combinations as
desired may be defined.
Main Index
Constraints
232
Specifying Rigid MPCs
Rigid MPCs may be created between one independent node and one or more dependent nodes in which
all six structural degrees of freedom are rigidly attached to each other. An unlimited number of dependent
terms can be specified, while only one independent term can be specified. Each term consists of a single
node. There is no constant term for this MPC type.:
Defining Rigid MPCs in Patran
To define a Rigid MPC:
Application form.
2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to Create> MPC>Rigid (Fixed).
3. Click on Define Terms... to define the rigid constraints.
Entry Description
RBE2 Defines a rigid body with independent degrees-of-freedom that are specified at a
single grid point and with dependent degrees-of-freedom that are specified at an
arbitrary number of grid points.
Main Index
233
CHAPTER 9
Assigned Conditions
Specifying Sliding Surface MPCs
Describes the boundary conditions of sliding surfaces, such as pipe sleeves. These boundary conditions
are written as explicit MPCs. Be careful, for this option automatically redefines the analysis coordinate
references of all affected nodes. This could erroneously alter the meaning of previously applied load and
boundary conditions, as well as element properties.
Defining Sliding Surface MPCs in Patran
To define a Sliding Surface MPC:
Application form.
2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to Create> MPC>Sliding Surface.
Entry Description
Dependent Terms Dependent terms define the GMi fields on the RBE2 entry. As many nodes as
desired may be selected as dependent terms.
Independent Terms Independent terms define the GN field on the RBE2 entry. Only one node may
be selected.
Entry Description
Shell Nodes Dependent terms define the ESi fields on the RSSCON entry. One dependent
node must be selected for every two independent terms.
Solid Nodes ndependent terms define the EA and EB field on the RSSCON entry. Two
independent terms are required.
Entry Description
MPC Defines a multipoint constraint equation.
Main Index
Constraints
234
3. Click on Define Terms... to define the sliding surface constraints.
Specifying RBAR MPCs
Creates an RBAR element, which defines a rigid bar between two nodes. Up to two dependent and two
independent terms can be specified. Each term consists of a node and a list of degrees of freedom. The
nodes specified in the two dependent terms must be the same as the nodes specified in the two
independent terms. Any combination of the degrees of freedom of the two nodes can be specified as
independent as long as the total number of independent degrees of freedom adds up to six. There is no
constant term for this MPC type.
Defining RBAR MPCs in Patran
To define a RBAR MPC:
Entry Description
Dependent Region Specifies the dependent nodes on the sliding surface. The same number of
unique nodes must be specified in both regions.
Independent Region Specifies the independent nodes on the sliding surface. The same number of
unique nodes must be specified in both regions.
Entry Description
RBAR Defines a rigid bar with six degrees-of-freedom at each end.
Main Index
235
CHAPTER 9
Assigned Conditions
Application form.
2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to Create> MPC>RBAR.
3. Click on Define Terms... to define the RBAR constraints.
Specifying RBE1 MPCs
RBAR1 is not allowed in SOL 600.
Defining RBE1 MPCs in Patran
To define a RBE1 MPC:
Application form.
Entry Description
Dependent Terms Either one or two nodes may be defined as having dependent terms. The Nodes
define the GA and GB fields on the RBAR entry. The DOFs define the CMA
and CMB fields.
Independent Terms Either one or two nodes may be defined as having independent terms.The
Nodes define the GA and GB fields on the RBAR entry.The DOFs define the
CNA and CNB fields.
Main Index
Constraints
236
2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to Create> MPC>RBE1.
Creates an RBE2 element, which defines a rigid body between an arbitrary number of nodes. Although
the user can only specify one dependent term, an arbitrary number of nodes can be associated to this term.
The user is also prompted to associate a list of degrees of freedom to this term. A single independent term
can be specified, which consists of a single node. There is no constant term for this MPC type.
Application form.
3. Click on Define Terms... to define the RBE2 constraints.
Entry Description
RBE2 Defines a rigid body with independent degrees of freedom that are specified at
a single grid point and with dependent degrees of freedom that are specified at
an arbitrary number of grid points.
Main Index
237
CHAPTER 9
Assigned Conditions
Creates an RBE3 element, which defines the motion of a reference node as the weighted average of the
motions of a set of nodes. An arbitrary number of dependent terms can be specified, each term consisting
of a node and a list of degrees of freedom. The first dependent term is used to define the reference node.
The other dependent terms define additional node/degrees of freedom, which are added to the m-set. An
arbitrary number of independent terms can also be specified. Each independent term consists of a
constant coefficient (weighting factor), a node, and a list of degrees of freedom. There is no constant term
for this MPC type.
Application form.
Entry Description
Dependent Terms Dependent terms define the GMi and CM fields on the RBE2 entry. As many
nodes as desired may be selected as dependent terms.
Independent Terms Independent terms define the GN field on the RBE2 entry. Only one node may
be selected.
Entry Description
RBE3 Defines the motion at a reference grid point as the weighted average of the
motions at a set of other grid points.
Main Index
Constraints
238
3. Click on Define Terms... to define the RBE3 constraints.
Specifying RROD MPCs
Creates an RROD element, which defines a pinned rod between two nodes that is rigid in extension.
One dependent term is specified, which consists of a node and a single translational degree of freedom.
One independent term is specified, which consists of a single node. There is no constant term for this
MPC type.
.Defining RROD MPCs in Patran
To define a RROD MPC:
Entry Description
Dependent Terms Dependent terms define the GMi and CMi fields on the RBE3 entry. The first
dependent term will be treated as the reference node, REFGRID and REFC.
The rest of the dependent terms become the GMi and CMi components.
Independent Terms Independent terms define the Gi, j, Ci, and WTi fields on the RBE3 entry.
Entry Description
RROD Defines a pin-ended element that is rigid in translation.
Main Index
239
CHAPTER 9
Assigned Conditions
Application form.
2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to Create> MPC>RROD.
3. Click on Define Terms... to define the RROD constraints.
Specifying RTRPLT MPCs
Creates an RTRPLT element, which defines a rigid triangular plate between three nodes. Up to three
dependent and three independent terms can be specified. Each term consists of a node and a list of
degrees of freedom. The nodes specified in the three dependent terms must be the same as the nodes
specified in the three independent terms. Any combination of the degrees of freedom of the three nodes
can be specified as independent as long as the total number of independent degrees of freedom adds up
to six. There is no constant term for this MPC type.
Entry Description
Dependent Terms Dependent terms define the GB and CMB on the RROD entry. Only one
translational degree of freedom may be referenced for this entry.
Independent Terms Independent terms define the GA field on the RROD entry. The CMA field is
left blank.
Entry Description
RTRPLT Defines a rigid triangular plate.
Main Index
Constraints
240
Defining RTRPLT MPCs in Patran
To define a RTRPLT MPC:
Application form.
2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to Create> MPC>RTRPLT.
3. Click on Define Terms... to define the RTRPLT constraints.
Support Conditions
In static analysis by the displacement method, the rigid body modes must be restrained in order to remove
the singularity of the stiffness matrix. The required constraints may be supplied with single point
constraints, multipoint constraints, or free body supports. If free body supports are used, the rigid body
characteristics will be calculated and a check will be made on the sufficiency of the supports.
Entry Description
Dependent Terms Dependent terms define the GA, GB, GC, CMA, CMB, and CMC fields of the
RTRPLT entry.
Independent Terms The total number of nodes referenced in both the dependent terms and the
independent terms must equal three. There must be exactly six independent
degrees of freedom, and they must be capable of describing rigid body motion.
Defines the GA, GB, GC, CNA, CNB, and CNC fields of the RTRPLT entry.
Main Index
241
CHAPTER 9
Assigned Conditions
Free-body supports are defined with a SUPORT6 or SUPORT1 entry. Free-body supports must be
defined in the global coordinate system. The SUPORT6 entry must be selected by the SUPORT1 Case
Control command.
For more information on Support Conditions, see Rigid Body Supports (p. 297) in the MSC Nastran
Reference Manual.
Main Index
242
The loads for the analysis can be either Static or Time Dependent (dynamic). Time dependency is
introduced either through the inclusion of a time dependent field multiplier, or through use of initial
condition options (e.g., initial displacements).
Boundary conditions, in terms of fixed displacements at nodes, define one type of kinematic constraint
for a structural analysis.
When defining loads on a model it is important to define the following terms and concepts.
Load Sets
A Loads/BC set is comprised of a collection of data (which may include fields) that are associated with
both an analysis type and geometric and/or FEM entities. A typical example is displacements associated
with nodes in a structural analysis.
Load Cases
A load case contains all the loads and boundary conditions used within a single analysis step. For
example, one load case may represent the loads and BC for each time point in a time-dependent nonlinear
analysis. Multiple load cases can be applied to the same model for linear analysis to examine how the
model reacts to different loading conditions. Load cases are central to the ability to perform complex
analyses on an individual model. For nonlinear analysis multiple loadcase runs are used to define the load
history on the model. The ending point of the last subcase is the starting point of the next subcase.
Load Steps
A Load Step (or analysis step) is defined by associating a load case, an analysis procedure, output
requests, and any associated parameters that guide the solution path for the chosen analysis procedure.
Whereas a load case is a collection of loads and boundary conditions for a particular Load Step, a Load
Step is a collection of relevant analysis parameters including the associated load case.
The load for a subcase is often subdivided into the number of increments specified for the subcase. The
solution strategy in nonlinear analysis is to apply the loads in an incremental fashion until the desired
load level is reached.
Load Types
The static loads in nonlinear analysis consist of concentrated loads, distributed loads, and thermal loads
as well as applied displacements. Most of the relevant loads data applicable to the linear static analysis
are also applicable to nonlinear static analysis. Transient loads define the loadings as functions of time
and the location. A load can be applied at a particular degree of freedom, pressure over the surface area,
or the body force simulating an acceleration.
The following types of loads are available for MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
Main Index
243
CHAPTER 9
Assigned Conditions
Table 9-1 Bulk Data Entries for Loads
Loads
FORCEi Defines concentrated load at grid point.
MOMENTi Defines moment at a grid point.
NOLIN1i Defines nonlinear transient load.
PLOAD Defines pressure loads on CQUAD4, CTRIA3, CHEXA, CPENTA, and CTETRA.
Should not be used for hyperelastic plane elements CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CQUAD,
CTRIA3, and CTRIA6 or for hyperelastic CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA with
midside nodes.
PLOAD2 Defines pressure loads on shell elements, CQUAD4 and CTRIA3. Not available for
hyperelastic elements.
PLOAD4 Defines pressure loads on surfaces of CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA, CTRIA3 and
CQUAD4 elements. Not available for hyperelastic plane elements CQUAD4,
CQUAD8, CQUAD, CTRIA3, and CTRIA6.
PLOADX1 Defines pressure loads on axisymmetric elements CQUADX and CTRIAX.
RFORCE Defines load due to centrifugal force field.
TIC Specifies initial values for displacement and velocity.
TLOAD1i Defines loads as a function of time.
Main Index
244
Using Patran to Apply Loads and Boundary Conditions
The Loads and Boundary Conditions application controls which loads and boundaries and contact
information will be created in the MSC Nastran input file.
The Loads and Boundary Conditions application in Patran provides the ability to apply a variety of static
and dynamic loads and boundary conditions including contact surfaces to finite element models.
Loads/BCs may be associated with geometric entities as well as FEM entities. When associated with
geometric entities, they can be transferred to finite elements created on the geometry. Loads and
boundary conditions are intended to be created in multiple single purpose groups referred to as load sets.
These sets are grouped into load cases in the Load Cases application.
One of the most elegant features in Patran is its ability to create fields that describes the variation of loads
and boundary conditions. The way in which Loads and BCs vary may be defined spatially, by previous
analysis results, based on time, or associated with material properties.
Sets can be visually displayed on the screen by markers which show the location, type, magnitude, and
direction of the applied loads or boundary condition. Only the static portion of a dynamic Loads/BCs set
is reflected in the marker display. Sets can also be displayed as tables.
A powerful capability is the display of any set scalar data directly on the model as a fringe plot. For
display purposes, data are treated as results, with full user control over the spectrum, method, shading,
etc. Data display is scalar, but the data can be pressures, vector component magnitudes, and vector
resultant magnitudes. Fringe plots can only be displayed on finite elements. Fringes of a dynamic
Loads/BCs set may be displayed at user-specified times.
Creating Load Cases
The Load Cases application enables you to combine a large number of individual loads and boundary
condition (LBCs) sets into a single coherent case for application to the model. Each load case you create
has a unique user-selected descriptive name as well as an associated descriptive statement. Load case
information is permanently stored in the database (unless deleted). You can modify it at any time
.
Even if you do not create any load cases, your load and boundary conditions will still be placed into a
default current load case, named default. If you create a special load case and make it the current load
case, then all subsequent LBCs will be placed in that load case as long as it is current.
Static Load Cases
Load cases in which none of the constituent loads or boundary conditions sets has a time varying
component are called static load cases. Loads and boundary conditions that will make up a static load
Main Index
245
CHAPTER 9
Assigned Conditions
case are generated using the Input Data subform. For static load cases, this subform will vary according
to the type of load being created, but its general format remains constant.
Main Index
246
Time-Dependent Load Cases
Load cases in which one or more of the loads and boundary conditions sets has a time varying component
are called time-dependent, or dynamic load cases Loads and boundary conditions that will make up a
time-dependent load case are also generated using the Input Data subform. For time-dependent load
cases, this subform incorporates time dependency data fields.
For more information, see Overview of the Loads and Boundary Conditions Application (p. 6) in the
Patran Reference Manual.
Main Index
247
CHAPTER 9
Assigned Conditions
Displacement LBCs
Boundary conditions can be used to specify the value of the displacements at nodes. To create a boundary
condition for displacement, you need to specify the node number, the degree of freedom(s), and the
magnitude of the displacement.
Displacements can be imposed directly on nodes using SPC1 and SPCD Bulk Data entries. All non blank
entries will cause an SPC1 entry to be created. If the specified value is not 0.0, an SCPD entry will also
be created to define the non zero enforced displacement or rotation.
Zero or nonzero displacements can also be applied across elements in a uniform or variable fashion. The
primary use of this boundary condition is to apply constraints to solid elements.
Patran LBC Application Input Data
Displacement boundary conditions are generated in Patran using the following Object/Type
combinations on the LBC Application form.
References
Loads and Boundary Conditions Form (p. 21) in the Patran Reference Manual.
Object Type Dimension Bulk Data Entries
Displacement Nodal SPC1, SPCD
Element Uniform
Element Variable
2-D/3-D SPC1, SPCD
Entry Description
Translations
(T1,T2,T3)
Defines the enforced translational displacement values. These are in model
length units.
Rotations (R1,R2,R3) Defines the enforced rotational displacement values. These are in radians.
Main Index
248
Force LBCs
Concentrated forces and moments can be applied directly to nodes with the ability to define the direction
as well as the magnitude.
Forces and moments are specified with FORCEi and MOMENTi Bulk Data entries, where:
Forces and moments are generated in Patran using the following Object/Type combination on the LBC
Application form.
References
Entry Description
FORCE
MOMENT
Defines a static concentrated force/moment at a grid point by specifying the
magnitude and direction.
FORCE1
MOMENT1
Defines a static concentrated force/moment at a grid point where the direction
of the force/moment is defined to be parallel to a vector between two defined
grid points.
FORCE2
MOMENT2
Defines a static concentrated force/moment at a grid point where the direction
of the force/moment is parallel to the cross product of vectors from G1 to G2
and G3 to G4.
Force Nodal FORCEi, MOMENTi
Entry Description
Force (F1,F2,F3) Defines the applied forces in the translation degrees of freedom. This
defines the N vector and the F magnitude on the FORCE entry.
Moment (M1,M2,M3) Defines the applied moments in the rotational degrees of freedom. This
defines the N vector and the M magnitude on the MOMENT entry.
Main Index
249
CHAPTER 9
Assigned Conditions
Pressure LBCs
Pressure loads can be applied to edges or surfaces of 2-D and 3-D elements. Several Bulk Data entries
are used to apply pressure loading depending on the element topology.
These pressures are applied to 2-D and 3-D elements only. Pressures for 1-D elements are applied using
the Total Load LBCs, 258 object.
Pressures are generated in Patran using the following Object/Type combination on the LBC Application
form.
1. Uniform Pressure Loads on 2-D Elements
Entry Description
PLOAD Defines pressure loads on CQUAD4, CTRIA3, CHEXA, CPENTA, and
CTETRA. Should not be used for hyperelastic plane elements CQUAD4,
CQUAD8, CQUAD, CTRIA3, and CTRIA6 or for hyperelastic CHEXA,
CPENTA, CTETRA with midside nodes.
PLOAD2 Defines pressure loads on shell elements, CQUAD4 and CTRIA3.
PLOAD4 Defines pressure loads on surfaces of CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA, CTRIA3
and CQUAD4 elements.
PLOADX1 Defines pressure loads on axisymmetric elements CQUADX and CTRIAX.
Pressure Element Uniform 2-D PLOAD4, PLOADX1, or FORCE
Main Index
250
2. Uniform Pressure Loads on 3-D Elements
3. Variable Pressure Loads on 2-D Elements
Entry Description
Top Surf Pressure Defines the top surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4 entry.
The negative of this value defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. These values
are all equal for a given element, producing a uniform pressure field across
that face.
Bot Surf Pressure Defines the bottom surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4
entry. This value defines the P1 through P4 values.These values are all equal
for a given element, producing a uniform pressure field across that face.
Edge Pressure For Axisymmetric Solid elements (CTRIAX6), defines the P1 through P3
values on the PLOADX1 entry where THETA on that entry is defined as zero.
For other 2D elements, this will be interpreted as a load per unit length (i.e.
independent of thickness) and converted into equivalent nodal loads (FORCE
entries). If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated at the middle of the
application region. Edge pressures are not available in SOL 600 prior to the
2006 release.
Pressure Element Uniform 3-D PLOAD4
Entry Description
Pressure Defines the face pressure value on solid elements using a PLOAD4 entry. This
defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced, it will be
evaluated once at the center of the applied region.
Pressure Element Variable 2-D PLOAD4, PLOADX1, FORCE
Main Index
251
CHAPTER 9
Assigned Conditions
4. Variable Pressure Loads on 3-D Elements
References
Temperature LBCs
Temperatures can be defined directly at nodes or temperature fields can be defined across
element surfaces.
Temperatures are specified with TEMP, TEMPPi, or TEMPRB Bulk Data entries, where:
Entry Description
Top Surf Pressure Defines the top surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4 entry.
The negative of this value defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a scalar field
is referenced, it will be evaluated separately for the P1 through P4 values.
Bot Surf Pressure Defines the bottom surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4
entry. This value defines the P1 through P4 values. If a scalar field is
referenced, it will be evaluated separately for the P1 through P4 values.
Edge Pressure For Axisymmetric Solid elements (CTRIAX6), defines the P1 through P3
values on the PLOADX1 entry where THETA on that entry is defined as
zero. For other 2D elements, this will be interpreted as a load per unit length
(e.g., independent of thickness) and converted into equivalent nodal loads
(FORCE entries). If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated
independently at each node. Edge pressures are not available in SOL 600
prior to the 2006 release.
Pressure Element Variable 3-D PLOAD4
Entry Description
Pressure Defines the face pressure value on solid elements using a PLOAD4 entry. This
defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced, it will be
evaluated separately for each of the P1 through P4 values.
Note: In the current version of SOL 600, a constant pressure is applied on the element face based
on the average of P1, P2, P3, and P4.
Main Index
252
Temperatures are generated in Patran using the following Object/Type combinations on the LBC
Application form.
1. Grid Point Temperatures
2. Uniform Temperature Fields on 1-D Elements
3. Uniform Temperature Fields on 2-D Elements
Entry Description
TEMP Defines temperature at grid points.
TEMPP1i Defines temperature field for surface elements.
TEMPRB Defines temperature field for line elements.
Temperature Nodal 0D TEMP
Entry Description
Temperature Defines the T fields on the TEMP entry.
Temperature Element Uniform 1-D TEMPRB
Entry Description
Temperature Defines a uniform temperature field using a TEMPRB entry. The temperature
value is used for both the TA and TB fields. The T1a, T1b, T2a, and T2b fields
are all defined as 0.0.
Temperature Element Uniform 2-D TEMPP1
Main Index
253
CHAPTER 9
Assigned Conditions
4. Variable Temperature Fields on 1-D Elements
5. Variable Temperature Fields on -2D Elements
Entry Description
Temperature Defines a uniform temperature field using a TEMPP1 entry. The temperature
value is used for the T field. The gradient through the thickness is defined to
be 0.0.
Temperature Element Variable 1-D TEMPRB
Entry Description
Centroid Temp Defines a variable temperature file using a TEMPRB entry. A field reference
will be evaluated at either end of the element to define the TA and TB fields.
Axis-1 Gradient Defines the temperature gradient in the 1 direction. A field reference will be
evaluated at either end of the element to define the T1a and T1b fields.
Axis-2 Gradient Defines the temperature gradient in the 2 direction. A field reference will be
evaluated at either end of the element to define the T2a and T2b fields.
Temperature Element Variable 2-D TEMPP1
Entry Description
Top Surf Temp Defines the temperature on the top surface of a shell element. The top and
bottom values are used to compute the average and gradient values on the
TEMPP1 entry.
Bot Surf Temp Defines the temperature on the bottom surface of a shell element. The top and
bottom values are used to compute the average and gradient values on the
TEMPP1 entry.
Main Index
254
6. Uniform and Variable Temperature Fields on 3-D Elements
References
Loads and Boundary Conditions Form (p. 21) in the Patran Reference Manual
Inertial Loads LBCs
Inertial loads can be applied to the entire model using the GRAV or RFORCE Bulk Data entries.
The IDRF field on the RFORCE entry can be used to allow different portions of the structure to rotate
with different angular velocities or in different directions.
Inertial loads are generated in Patran using the following Object/Type combination on the LBC
Application form.
Temperature Element Uniform
Element Variable
3-D TEMP
Entry Description
Temperature Defines the temperature or temperature distribution in the element.
Entry Description
GRAV Defines acceleration vectors for gravity or other acceleration loading.
RFORCE Defines load due to centrifugal force field.
Inertial Load Element Uniform Entire Model GRAV or RFORCE
Entry Description
Trans Accel (A1,A2,A3) Defines the N vector and the G magnitude value on the GRAV entry.
Rot Velocity (w1,w2,w3) Defines the R vector and the A magnitude value on the RFORCE entry.
Main Index
255
CHAPTER 9
Assigned Conditions
The acceleration and velocity vectors are defined with respect to the input analysis coordinate frame. The
origin of the rotational vectors is the origin of the analysis coordinate frame. In generating the GRAV
and RFORCE entries, the interface produces one GRAV and/or RFORCE entry image for each Patran
load set.
References
Velocity LBCs
Velocities can be defined for transient analysis using the TLOAD entry.
:
Velocities are generated in Patran using the following Object/Type combination on the LBC Application
form.
References
Acceleration LBCs
Accelerations can be defined for transient response analysis using the TLOAD entry.
:
Entry Description
TLOAD1 Defines a time-dependent dynamic load or enforced motion
Velocity Nodal TLOAD
Entry Description
Trans Veloc (v1,v2,v3) Defines the velocity values for the translational degrees-of-freedom.
Rot Veloc (w1, w2, w3) Defines the velocity values for the rotational degrees-of-freedom.
Entry Description
TLOAD1 Defines a time-dependent dynamic load or enforced motion
Main Index
256
Accelerations are generated in Patran using the following Object/Type combination on the LBC
Application form.
References
Distributed Load LBCs
Distributed forces and moments can be applied in a uniform or variable fashion to 1D and 2D elements.
Several Bulk Data entries are used to apply distributed loading depending on the element topology.
Distributed loads are generated in Patran using the following Object/Type combinations on the LBC
Application form.
1. Uniform and Variable Loads on 1-D Elements
Acceleration Nodal TLOAD
Entry Description
Trans Accel (A1,A2,A3) Defines the acceleration values for the translational degrees-of-freedom.
Rot Accel (a1,a2,a3) Defines the acceleration values for the rotational degrees-of-freedom.
Entry Description
PLOAD Defines a uniform static pressure load on a triangular or quadrilateral surface
comprised of surface elements and/or the faces of solid elements.
PLOAD1 Defines concentrated, uniformly distributed, or linearly distributed applied
loads to the CBAR or CBEAM elements at user-chosen points along the
axis. For the CBEND element, only distributed loads over an entire length
may be defined
PLOAD2 Defines a uniform static pressure load applied to CQUAD4, CSHEAR, or
CTRIA3 two-dimensional elements.
PLOAD4 Defines a pressure load on a face of a CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA, CTRIA3,
CTRIA6, CTRIAR, CQUAD4, CQUAD8, or CQUADR element.
PLOADX1 Defines surface traction to be used with the CQUADX, CTRIAX, and
CTRIAX6 axisymmetric element.
Main Index
257
CHAPTER 9
Assigned Conditions
Defines distributed force or moment loading along beam elements using MSC Nastran PLOAD1
entries. The coordinate system in which the load is applied is defined by the beam axis and the
Bar Orientation element property. The Bar Orientation must be defined before this Distributed
Load can be created. If the Bar Orientation is subsequently changed, the Distributed Load must
be updated manually if necessary.
For the element variable type, a field reference is evaluated at each end of the beam to define a
linear load variation.
2. Uniform and Variable Loads on 2-D Elements
Defines a distributed force or moment load along the edges of 2-D elements. The coordinate
system for the load is defined by the surface or element edge and normal. The x direction is along
the edge. Positive x is determined by the element corner node connectivity. See The Patran
Element Library (p. 343) in the MSC Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling.
For example, if the element is a CQUAD4, with node connectivity of 1, 2, 3, 4. The positive x
directions for each edge would be from nodes 1 to 2, 2 to 3, 3 to 4, and 4 to 1. The z direction
is normal to the surface or element. Positive z is in the direction of the element normal. The y
direction is normal to x and z. Positive y is determined by the cross product of the z and x axes and
always points into the element. The MSC Nastran entries generated, depend on the element type.
Distributed Load Element Uniform
Element Variable
1-D PLOAD1
Entry Description
Distributed Load (f1,f2,f3) Defines the FXE, FYE, and FZE fields on three
PLOAD1 entries.
Distributed Moment (m1,m2,m3) Defines the MXE, MYE, and MZE fields on three
PLOAD1 entries.
Distributed Load Element Uniform
Element Variable
2-D PLOAD, PLOAD2, PLOAD4,
PLOADX1
Main Index
258
For the element variable type, a field reference is evaluated at each end of the beam to define a
linear load variation.
References
Total Load LBCs
The total load capability is not available directly in MSC Nastran, but is a convenient way to have Patran
distribute a force load uniformly over an application area without having to calculate the number of nodes
or application area. The total force load is defined for the application region, but equivalent uniform
pressures are written to the Bulk Data. The equivalent pressure value is are found by dividing the total
load value by the area of the application region.
Total Loads are generated in Patran using the following Object/Type combination on the LBC
Application form
Entry Description
Edge Distributed Load
(f1,f2,f3)
For axisymmetric solid elements (CTRIAX6), the PA, PB, and
THETA fields on the PLOADX1 entry are defined. For other 2-D
elements, the input vector is interpreted as load per unit length and
converted into equivalent nodal loads (FORCE entries).
Edge Distributed Moment
(m1,m2,m3)
For 2-D shell elements, the input vector is interpreted as moment
per unit length and converted into equivalent nodal moments
(MOMENT entries).
Entry Description
PLOAD4 Defines a pressure load on a face of a CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA, CTRIA3,
CTRIA6, CTRIAR, CQUAD4, CQUAD8, or CQUADR element.
PLOADX1 Defines surface traction to be used with the CQUADX, CTRIAX, and
CTRIAX6 axisymmetric element.
Note: Currently only 1D element types are supported with this Object even though the form
allows for other types.
Main Index
259
CHAPTER 9
Assigned Conditions
References
Contact LBCs
A complete description of Contact loads and boundary conditions is given in Specifying Contact Body
Entries (Ch. 12).
References
Total Load Element Uniform 1-D PLOAD4
Entry Description
Load <F1 F2 F3> Defines the total load component values to element nodes.
Analysis Coordinate Frame Defines the coordinate frame for the distributed load.
Main Index
Initial Conditions
260
Initial Conditions
Initial conditions provides various ways of initializing the state variables throughout the model.
Initial Displacement LBCs
Creates a set of TIC Bulk Data entries.
.
Initial Displacements are generated in Patran using the following Object/Type combination on the LBC
Application form.
References
Initial Velocity LBCs
Creates a set of TIC Bulk Data entries.
.
Entry Description
TIC Defines values for the initial conditions of variables used in structural transient
analysis. Both displacement and velocity values may be specified at
independent degrees-of-freedom.
Object Type Bulk Data Entries
Initial Displacement Nodal TIC
Entry Description
Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the initial translational displacement values. These are in model
length units.
Rotations (R1,R2,R3) Defines the initial rotational displacement values. These are in radians.
Entry Description
TIC Defines values for the initial conditions of variables used in structural transient
analysis. Both displacement and velocity values may be specified at
independent degrees-of-freedom.
Main Index
261
CHAPTER 9
Assigned Conditions
Initial velocities are generated in Patran using the following Object/Type combination on the LBC
Application form.
References
Object Type Bulk Data Entries
Initial Velocity Nodal TIC
Entry Description
Trans Veloc (v1,v2,v3) Defines the V0 fields for translational degrees of freedom on the TIC entry.
A unique TIC entry will be created for each nonblank entry.
Rot Veloc (w1,w2,w3) Defines the V0 fields for rotational degrees of freedom on the TIC entry. A
unique TIC entry will be created for each nonblank entry.
Main Index
Initial Conditions
262
Main Index
Chapter 10: Materials
10
Materials
Overview
Linear Elastic
Nonlinear Elastic
Inelastic
Failure and Damage Models
Creep
Composite
Gasket
Material Damping
Experimental Data Fitting

Main Index
Overview
264
Overview
A wide variety of materials are encountered in stress analysis problems, and for any one of these
materials a range of constitutive models is available to describe the materials behavior. We can broadly
classify the materials of interest as those which exhibit almost purely elastic response, possibly with some
energy dissipation during rapid loading by viscoelastic response (the elastomers, such as rubber or solid
propellant); materials that yield, and exhibit considerable ductility beyond yield (such as mild steel and
other commonly used metals, ice at low strain rates, and clay); materials that flow by rearrangement of
particles which interact generally through some dominantly frictional mechanism (such as sand); and
brittle materials (rock, concrete, ceramics).
Composites
(MATi,
MATORT,
PCOMP)
Anisotropic:
1) Layered,
21 Constants
2)Fiber Reinforced,
One dimensional strain in fibers
Aircraft panels
Tires, glass/epoxy
Composite
continuum
elements
Creep
(MATVP)
Strains increasing with time under
constant load. Stresses decreasing
with time under constant
deformations. Creep strains are
noninstantaneous.
Metals at high
temperatures, polymide
films, semiconductor
materials
ORNL
Norton
Maxwell
Elastic
(MATi,
MATORT)
Stress functions of instantaneous
strain only. Linear
load-displacement relation.
Small deformation
(below yield) for most
materials: metals, glass,
wood
Hookes Law
Elastoplasticity
(MATEP)
Yield condition flow rule and
hardening rule necessary to
calculate stress, plastic strain.
Permanent deformation
upon unloading.
Metals
Soils
von Mises
Isotropic
Cam -Clay
Hills Anisotropic
Hyperelastic
(MATHE)
Stress function of instantaneous
strain. Nonlinear load-
displacement relation. Unloading
path same as loading.
Rubber Mooney
Ogden
Arruda-Boyce
Gent
ds
i j
C
i j kl
dc
kl
=
S
E
2
--- T
t
CT 1 ( ) =
Main Index
265
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Constitutive Models
A single material may contain multiple constitutive models. Each constitutive model characterizes
distinct ranges of the materials response. The constitutive models in MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear contain a range of linear and nonlinear material models that can address or approximate the
material response of most commonly encountered materials. The constitutive models in MSC Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear can be accessed by any of the solid or structural elements. The models are assessed
independently at each constitutive calculation point (i.e., the numerical integration points in the
elements). Thus, the constitutive models are concerned only with a single calculation point. The element
then provides an estimate of the kinematic solution to the problem at the point under consideration.
Constitutive Models in Patran
In Patran, the constitutive model to be used is defined by the Constitutive Model Status. MSC/PATRAN
uses all active constitutive models when the analysis is submitted. Redundant or unneeded constitutive
models should be rendered inactive.
Existing constitutive models of an existing material appear in either the active or inactive listbox
depending on their active/inactive status. Selection of a model from one listbox will add it to the other
one. If you do not wish for a constitutive model to be translated into the MSC Nastran input file, place
it in the inactive list box
To view or change the constitutive model status:
1. Click on the Materials Application icon located on the Main form to bring up the Materials
Application form.
Hypoelastic Rate form of stress-strain law Concrete Buyukozturk
Viscoelastic
(MATVE)
Time dependence of stresses in
elastic material under loads. Full
recovery after unloading.
Rubber,
Glass, industrial
plastics
Simo Model
Narayanaswamy
Viscoplastic
(MATVP)
Combined plasticity and creep
phenomenon
Metals
Powder
Power law
Shima Model
Shape Memory
(MATSMA)
Thermal - Mechanical Aruchhios model
Asaro-Sayeedvafa
model
Main Index
Overview
266
2. Select Change Material Status...
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear Material Entries
The following material bulk data entries are available in SOL 600. Each of these options are overviewed
in the sections of this chapter and detailed in the Bulk Data Entries (Ch. 8) in the MSC Nastran Quick
Reference Guide. All standard MSC Nastran materials are also available in SOL 600.
Bulk Data Entry Description
MATEP Specifies elasto-plastic material properties.
MATTEP Specifies temperature-dependent elasto-plastic material properties.
MATF Specifies failure model properties for linear elastic materials.
MATG Specifies gasket material properties to be used in MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear.
MATTG Specifies gasket material property temperature variation to be used in MSC
Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
MATHE Specifies hyperelastic (rubber-like) material properties for nonlinear (large strain
and large rotation) analysis in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
MATTHE Specifies temperature-dependent properties of hyperelastic (rubber-like)
materials (elastomers) in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
MATORT Specifies elastic orthotropic material properties for 3-dimensional and plane
strain behavior for linear and nonlinear analyses in MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear.
Main Index
267
CHAPTER 10
Materials
The following sections describe how to model material behavior in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
Modeling material behavior consists of both specifying the constitutive models used to describe the
material behavior and defining the actual material data necessary to represent the material. Directional
dependency can be included for materials other than isotropic materials. Data for the materials can be
entered into MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear either directly through the input file or by user subroutines,
or material models may be defined in the Patran Materials Application. Each section of this chapter
discusses various options for organizing material data for input. Each section also discusses the
constitutive (stress-strain) relation and graphic representation of the models and includes
recommendations and cautions concerning the use of the models.
MATTORT Specifies temperature-dependent properties of elastic orthotropic materials for
linear and nonlinear analyses used in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
MATVE Specifies isotropic visco-elastic material properties in MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear.
MATTVE Specifies temperature-dependent visco-elastic material properties in terms of
Thermo-Rheologically Simple behavior in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
MATVP Specifies viscoplastic or creep material properties to be used for quasi-static
analysis in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
Bulk Data Entry Description
Main Index
Linear Elastic
268
Linear Elastic
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is capable of handling problems with any combination of isotropic,
orthrotropic, or anisotropic linear elastic material behavior.
The linear elastic model is the model most commonly used to represent engineering materials. This
model, which has a linear relationship between stresses and strains, is represented by Hookes Law.
Figure 10-1 shows that stress is proportional to strain in a uniaxial tension test. The ratio of stress to strain
is the familiar definition of modulus of elasticity (Youngs modulus) of the material.
E (modulus of elasticity) = (axial stress)/(axial strain) (10-1)
Figure 10-1 Uniaxial Stress-Strain Relation of Linear Elastic Material
Experiments show that axial elongation is always accompanied by lateral contraction of the bar. The ratio
for a linear elastic material is:
= (lateral contraction)/(axial elongation) (10-2)
This is known as Poissons ratio. Similarly, the shear modulus (modulus of rigidity) is defined as:
(shear modulus) = (shear stress)/(shear strain) (10-3)
A Poissons ratio of 0.5, which would be appropriate for an incompressible material, can be used for the
following elements: Herrmann, plane stress, shell, truss, or beam. A Poissons ratio which is close (but
not equal) to 0.5 can be used for constant dilation elements and reduced integration elements in situations
which do not include other severe kinematic constraints. Using a Poissons ratio close to 0.5 for all other
elements usually leads to behavior that is too stiff. A Poissons ratio of 0.5 can also be used with the
updated Lagrangian formulation in the multiplicative decomposition framework using the standard
displacement elements. In these elements, the treatment for incompressibility is transparent.
S
t
r
e
s
s
Strain
E
1
v
G
Main Index
269
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Isotropic Materials
Most linear elastic materials are assumed to be isotropic (their elastic properties are the same in all
directions). For an isotropic material, every plane is a plane of symmetry and every direction is an axis
of symmetry. It can be shown that for an isotropic material:
(10-4)
The shear modulus can be easily calculated if the modulus of elasticity and Poissons ratio
are known.
Specifying Isotropic Material Entries
Isotropic material models are designated with the MAT1 Bulk Data entry in the MSC Nastran Input File.
Patran Materials Application Input Data
To define an isotropic material in Patran:
1. From the Materials Application form, set the Action>Object>Method combination to
Create>Isotropic>Manual Input.
2. Click Input Properties...
Isotropic linear elastic material models require the following material data via the Input Options subform
on the Materials Application form.
The material density, used to define the mass of the structure, and the damping value are used in dynamic
loadings, while the expansion coefficient is used to identify the thermal strains.
Entry Description
MAT1 Defines the material properties for linear isotropic materials.
Isotropic-Linear Elastic Description
Elastic Modulus Defines the elastic modulus. This property is generally required. May vary
with temperature via a defined material field.
Poissons Ratio Defines the Poissons ratio. This property is generally required. May vary
with temperature via a defined material field.
Density Defines the mass density. This property is optional.
Coefficient of Thermal
Expansion
Defines the coefficient of thermal expansion. This property is optional.
May vary with temperature via a defined material field.
Reference Temperature Defines the stress free temperature. This property is optional. When
defining temperature dependent properties, this is the reference
temperature from which values will be extracted or interpolated.
G E 2 1 v + ( ) ( ) =
G E v
Main Index
Linear Elastic
270
Orthotropic Materials
An orthotropic material has three mutually orthogonal planes of symmetry. With respect to a coordinate
system parallel to these planes, the constitutive law for this material is given by the following more
general form of Hookes Law:
3-D Orthotropic
Due to symmetry of the compliance matrix, = , = , and = .
Using these relations, a general orthotropic material has nine independent constants:
, , , , , , , ,
These nine constants must be specified in constructing the material model.
2-D Orthotropic
Orthotropic material models can be used with 2-D elements, such as plane stress, plane strain, and
axisymmetric elements. For example, the orthotropic stress-strain relationship for a plane stress
element is:
(10-5)
Specifying Orthotropic Material Entries
2-D and 3-D othrotropic materials are characterized in MSC Nastran using the following bulk
data entries.
c
11
c
22
c
33
12
23
13
1 E
1
( ) u
12
( ) E
1
( ) u
13
( ) E
1
( ) 0 0 0
u
12
( ) E
1
( ) 1 E
2
( ) u
23
( ) E
2
( ) 0 0 0
u
13
( ) E
1
( ) u
23
( ) E
2
( ) 1 E
3
( ) 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 G
12
( ) 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 G
23
( ) 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 G
13
( )
o
11
o
22
o
33
t
12
t
23
t
13
=
c
11
v
21
c
22
v
12
c
22
v
32
c
33
v
23
c
33
v
13
c
11
v
31
c
11
c
22
c
33
v
12
v
23
v
31
G
12
G
23
G
31
Note: The inequalities E22 > E33, E11 > E22, and E33 > E11 must be satisfied in
order for the orthotropic material to be stable. This is checked by MSC Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear.
v
23
v
12
v
31
C
1
1 v
12
v
21
( )
-------------------------------
E
1
v
21
E
1
0
v
12
E
2
E
2
0
0 0 1 v
12
v
21
( )G
=
Main Index
271
CHAPTER 10
Materials
To define an orthotropic material in Patran:
1. From the Materials Application form, set the Action>Object>Method combination to Create>2D
or 3D Orthotropic>Manual Input.
The required properties for orthotropic linear elastic material models vary based on dimension, element
type, and thermal dependencies. 3-D orthotropic material models require the following material data
(2-D requires a reduced set) via the Input Properties subform on the Materials Application form.
Entry Description
MAT3 Defines the material properties for linear orthotropic materials used by the
CTRIAX6 element entry.
MAT2
MAT8
Defines the material property for an orthotropic material for solids and
isoparametric shell elements.
MATORT Specifies elastic orthotropic material properties for three-dimensional and
plane strain behavior for linear and nonlinear analyses in MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear in a more general way than MAT2 or MAT8.
Orthotropic-Linear Elastic Description
Elastic Modulus 11/22/33 Defines the elastic moduli in the elements coordinate system. This is
required data. May vary with temperature via a defined material field.
Poissons Ratio 12/23/31 Defines the Poissons ratios relative to the elements coordinate
system. This is required data. May vary with temperature via a defined
material field.
Shear Modulus 12/23/31 Defines the shear moduli relative to the elements coordinate system.
This is required data. May vary with temperature via a defined
material field.
Expansion 11/22/33
Defines the coefficients of thermal expansion relative to the elements
coordinate system. These properties are optional. May vary with
temperature via a defined material field.
Reference Temperature Defines the stress free temperature which is an optional property.
When defining temperature dependent properties, this is the reference
Density Defines the mass density which is an optional property.
Main Index
Linear Elastic
272
Anisotropic Materials
Anisotropic material exhibits different elastic properties in different directions. The significant directions
of the material are labeled as preferred directions, and it is easiest to express the material behavior with
respect to these directions.
The stress-strain relationship for an anisotropic linear elastic material can be expressed as
(10-6)
The values of

(the stress-strain relation) and the preferred directions (if necessary) must be defined
for an anisotropic material.
Specifying Anisotropic Material Entries
Anisotropic materials are characterized in MSC Nastran using the following bulk data entries.
To define anisotropic material in Patran:
1. From the Materials Application form, set the Action>Object>Method combination to Create>2D
or 3D Anisotropic>Manual Input.
Anisotropic linear elastic material models require the following material data via the Input Properties
subform on the Materials Application form.
Entry Description
MAT2 Defines the material properties for linear anisotropic materials for two-
dimensional elements.
Anisotropic-Linear Elastic Description
Stress-Strain Matrix, Cij Defines the upper right portion of the symmetric stress-strain matrix
relative to the elements coordinate system.
Expansion
Defines the coefficients of thermal expansion relative to the elements
coordinate system. They are optional properties.
Reference Temperature Defines the stress free temperature which is an optional property.
When defining temperature dependent properties, this is the reference
o
i j
C
i j kl
c
kl
=
C
i j kl
Main Index
273
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Nonlinear Elastic
Hypoelastic - Isotropic
The hypoelastic model is able to represent a nonlinear elastic (reversible) material behavior. For this
constitutive theory, MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear assumes that
(10-7)
where is a function of the mechanical strain and is a function of the temperature.
The stress and strains are true stresses and logarithmic strains, respectively, when used in conjunction
with the updated Lagrange and large displacement options.
When used in conjunction with the large displacement option only, Equation (10-7) is expressed as
(10-8)
where are the Green-Lagrangian strain and second Piola-Kirchhoff stress, respectively.
This model can be used with any stress element, including Herrmann formulation elements.
The tensors and may be defined by user subroutine HYPELA. In order to provide an accurate
solution, should be a tangent stiffness evaluated at the beginning of the iteration. In addition, the total
stress should be defined as its exact value at the end of the increment. This allows the residual load
correction to work effectively.
In user subroutine HYPELA2, besides the functionality of HYPELA, additional information is available
regarding the kinematics of deformation. In particular, the deformation gradient ( ), rotation tensor ( ),
and the eigenvalues ( ) and eigenvectors ( ) to form the stretch tensor ( ) are also provided. This
information is available only for the continuum elements namely: plane strain, generalized plane strain,
plane stress, axisymmetric, axisymmetric with twist, and three-dimensional cases.
Hyperelastic - Isotropic
Hyperelastic models are specified using either the MATHP or MATHE Bulk Data entries and are used to
describe the behavior of materials that exhibit elastic response up to large strains, such as rubber, solid
propellant, and other elastomeric materials. These materials are described in terms of a strain energy
potential, U, which defines the strain energy stored in the material per unit of volume in the initial
configuration as a function of the strain at that point in the material.
Elastomeric materials are elastic in the classical sense. Upon unloading, the stress-strain curve is retraced
and there is no permanent deformation. Elastomeric materials are initially isotropic. Figure 10-2 shows
a typical stress-strain curve for an elastomeric material.
o
i j
L
i j kl
c
kl
g
i j
+ =
L g
S
i j
L
i j kl
E
kl
g
i j
+ =
E S ,
L g
L
F R
N U
Main Index
Nonlinear Elastic
274
Figure 10-2 A Typical Stress-Strain Curve for an Elastomeric Material
Calculations of stresses in an elastomeric material requires an existence of a strain energy function which
is usually defined in terms of invariants or stretch ratios. Significance and calculation of these kinematic
quantities is discussed next.
Characteristics of Elastomeric Materials
Most solid rubberlike materials are nearly incompressible: their bulk modulus is several orders of
magnitude larger than their shear modulus. For applications where the material is not highly confined,
the assumption that the material is fully incompressible is usually a good approximation. In cases where
the material is highly confined (such as in an O-ring), modeling the compressibility can be important for
obtaining accurate results. In either case, the use of hybrid (mixed formulation) elements is
recommended for this type of material in all but plane stress cases.
Elastomeric foams on the other hand are elastic but very compressible.
Elastomeric materials are considered to be isotropic in nature with random orientation of the long
chain molecules.
Strain Energy Potential and Representative Models
Calculations of stresses in an elastomeric material requires an existence of a strain energy function which
is usually defined in terms of invariants or stretch ratios.
In the rectangular block in Figure 10-3, , , and are the principal stretch ratios along the edges of
the block defined by
(10-9)
o
,

S
t
r
e
s
s
c, Strain
100%
1

2

3
i
L
i
u
i
+ ( ) L
i
=
Main Index
275
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Figure 10-3 Rectangular Rubber Block
In practice, the material behavior is (approximately) incompressible, leading to the constraint equation
the strain invariants are defined as
(10-10)
Depending on the choice of configurations, for example, reference (at ) or current ( ),
you obtain total or updated Lagrange formulations for elasticity. The kinematic measures for the two
formulations are discussed next.
Total Lagrangian Formulation
The strain measure is the Green-Lagrange strain defined as:
(10-11)
where is the right Cauchy-Green deformation tensor defined as:
(10-12)
in which is the deformation gradient (a two-point tensor) written as:
(10-13)
L3
2L2
L2
L1
1
L
1
Undeformed
Deformed
3L3
3
1 =
I
1

1
2
2
2
3
2
+ + =
I
2

1
2
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
2
1
2
+ + =
I
3

1
2
2
2
3
2
=
t 0 = t n 1 + =
E
i j
1
2
--- C
i j
o
i j
( ) =
C
i j
C
i j
F
ki
F
kj
=
F
kj
F
kj
cx
k
cX
j
-------- =
Main Index
Nonlinear Elastic
276
The Jacobian is defined as:
(10-14)
Thus, the invariants can be written as:
(10-15)
in which is the permutation tensor. Also, using spectral decomposition theorem,
(10-16)
in which the stretches are the eigenvalues of the right Cauchy-Green deformation tensor, and the
eigenvectors are .
Updated Lagrange Formulation
The strain measure is the true or logarithmic measure defined as:
(10-17)
where the left Cauchy-Green or finger tensor is defined as:
(10-18)
Thus, using the spectral decomposition theorem, the true strains are written as:
(10-19)
where is the eigenvectors in the current configuration. It is noted that the true strains can also be
approximated using first Pad approximation, which is a rational expansion of the tensor, as:
(10-20)
where a polar decomposition of the deformation gradient is done into the left stretch tensor and
rotation tensor as:
J
J
1
3
det C
i j
( )
1
2
---
= =
I
1
C
i i
=
I
2
C
i j
C
i j
C
i i
( )
2
( )
2
------------------------------------------ =
I
3
1
6
--- e
i j k
e
pqr
C
i p
C
j q
C
kr
det C
i j
( ) = =
(implied sum on i)
e
i j k
C
i j

A
2
N
i
A
N
j
A
=
A
2
C
i j
N
i
A
c
i j
1
2
--- ln b
i j
=
b
i j
b
i j
F
i k
F
j k
=
c
i j
1
2
---
A
ln ( )n
i
A
n
j
A
=
n
i
A
c
i j
2 V
i j
o
i j
( ) V
i j
o
i j
+ ( )
1
=
F
i j
V
i j
R
i j
Main Index
277
CHAPTER 10
Materials
The Jacobian is defined as:
(10-21)
and the invariants are now defined as:
(10-22)
It is noted that either Equation (10-15) or Equation (10-22) gives the same strain energy since it is scalar
and invariant. Also, to account for the incompressibility condition, in both formulations, the strain
energy is split into deviatoric and volumertic parts as:
(10-23)
Mooney-Rivlin Model
The generalized Mooney-Rivlin model for nearly-incompressible elastomeric materials is written as:
(10-24)
where and are the first and second deviatoric invariants.
Jamus-Green-Simpson Model
A particular form of the generalized Mooney-Rivlin model, namely the third order deformation (tod)
model, is implemented in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600). This is one of the few places
where the formulation for SOLs 106 and 129 may be more appropriate because they can use up to fifth
order terms. However, the Ogden formulation (below) is usually better for large strain behavior than even
the fifth order Mooney-Rivlin.
(10-25)
where is the deviatoric third order deformation form strain energy function,
F
i j
V
i k
R
kj
=
J
J
1
3
det b
i j
( )
1
2
---
= =
I
1
b
i i
=
I
2
1
2
--- b
i j
b
i j
b
i i
( )
2
( ) =
I
3
1
6
--- e
i j k
e
pqr
b
i p
b
j q
b
kr
det b
i j
( ) = = and
W W
deviatoric
W
volumetric
+ =
W
devi at ori c
gmr
C
mn
I
1
3 ( )
m
I
2
3 ( )
n
n 1 =
N
m 1 =
N
=
I
1
I
2
W
devratoric
tod
C
10
I
1
3 ( ) C
01
I
2
3 ( ) C
11
I
1
3 ( ) I
2
3 ( ) C
20
I
1
3 ( )
2
C
30
I
1
3 ( )
3
+ + + + =
W
deviatoric
tod
Main Index
Nonlinear Elastic
278
are material constants obtained from experimental data.
Simpler and popular forms of the above strain energy function are obtained as:
(10-26)
Ogden Model
The form of strain energy for the Ogden model in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is,
(10-27)
where are the deviatoric stretch ratios while , , and are the material constants
obtained from the curve fitting of experimental data.
The Ogden model is usually applied to slightly compressible materials. If no bulk modulus is given, it is
taken to be virtually incompressible. This model is different from the Mooney model in several respects.
The Mooney material model is with respect to the invariants of the right or left Cauchy-Green strain
tensor and implicitly assumes that the material is incompressible. The Ogden formulation is with respect
to the eigenvalues of the right or left Cauchy-Green strain, and the presence of the bulk modulus implies
some compressibility. Using a two-term series results in identical behavior as the Mooney mode if:
, , , and
Arruda-Boyce Model
In the Arruda-Boyce strain energy model, the underlying molecular structure of elastomer is represented
by an eight-chain model to simulate the non-Gaussian behavior of individual chains in the network. The
two parameters, and ( is the chain density, is the Botzmann constant, is the temperature,
and is the number of statistical links of length l in the chain between chemical crosslinks) representing
initial modules and limiting chain extensibility and are related to the molecular chain orientation thus
representing the physics of network deformation.
As evident in most models describing rubber deformation, the strain energy function constructed by
fitting experiment data obtained from one state of deformation to another fails to accurately describe that
deformation mode. The Arruda-Boyce model ameliorates this defect and is unique since the standard
tensile test data provides sufficient accuracy for multiple modes of deformation.
C
10
C
01
C
11
C
20
C
30
, , , ,
W
deviatoric
mr
C
10
I
1
3 ( ) C
01
I
2
3 ( ) + = Mooney-Rivlin
W
deviatoric
nh
C
10
I
1
3 ( ) =
Neo-Hookean
W
devi at ori c
ogden

k
o
k
------
1
o
k
2
o
k
3
o
k
3 + +
\ .
| |
k 1 =
N
i
o
k
J

o
k
3
------
i
o
k
= C
mn

k
o
k
1
2C
10
= o
1
2 =
2
2C
01
= o
2
2 =
nkO N n k O
N
Main Index
279
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Figure 10-4 Eight Chain Network in Stretched Configuration
The model is constructed using the eight chain network as follows:
Consider a cube of dimension with an unstretched network including eight chains of length ,
where the fully extended chain has an approximate length of Nl. A chain vector from the center of the
cube to a corner can be expressed as:
(10-28)
Using geometrical considerations, the chain vector length can be written as:
(10-29)
and
(10-30)
Using statistical mechanics considerations, the work of deformation is proportional to the entropy
change on stretching the chains from the unstretched state and may be written in terms of the chain length
as:
(10-31)
where is the chain density and is a constant. is an inverse Langevin function correctly accounts
for the limiting chain extensibility and is defined as:
2
o
0
3
o
0
1
o
0
C
1
k
j
i
o
0
r
0
Nl =
C
1
o
0
2
------
1
i
o
0
2
------
2
j
o
0
2
------
3
k + + =
r
chain
1
3
------- Nl
1
2

2
2

3
2
+ + ( )
1 2
=
chain
r
chain
r
0
-------------
1
3
------- I
1
( )
1 2
= =
W nkON
r
chain
Nl
-------------
\
|
| ln
|
| sinh
--------------
.
|
OC
+ =
n C
|
Main Index
Nonlinear Elastic
280
(10-32)
where Langevin is defined as:
(10-33)
With Equation (10-30) through Equation (10-33), the Arruda-Boyce model can be written
(10-34)
Gent Model
Also, using the notion of limiting chain extensibility, Gent proposed the following constitutive relation:
(10-35)
where
(10-36)
The constant is independent of molecular length and, hence, of degree of crosslinking. The model is
attractive due to its simplicity, but yet captures the main behavior of a network of extensible molecules
over the entire range of possible strains.
The volumetric part of the strain energy is for all the rubber models in MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear is:
(10-37)
when is the bulk modulus. It can be noted that the particular form of volumetric strain energy is chosen
such that:
1. The constraint condition is satisfied for incompressible deformations only; for example:
| L
1
r
chain
Nl
-------------
\ .
| |
=
| ( ) |
1
|
--- coth =
W
dev
Arruda-Boyce
nkO
1
2
--- I
1
3 ( )
1
20N
---------- I
1
2
9 ( )
11
1050N
2
------------------- I
1
3
27 ( ) + + =
19
7000N
3
------------------- I
1
4
81 ( )
519
673750N
4
------------------------- I
1
5
243 ( ) | + +
W
dev
Gent
EI
m
6
-------------
I
m
I
m
I
1
*
----------------- log =
I
1
*
I
1
3 =
EI
m
W
volumetric
9K
2
------- J
1
3
---
1
\ .
|
| |
2
=
K
Main Index
281
CHAPTER 10
Materials
(10-38)
2. The constraint condition does not contribute to the dilatational stiffness.
This yields the constraint function as:
(10-39)
upon substitution of Equation (10-39) in Equation (10-35) and taking the first variation of the variational
principle, you obtain the pressure variable as:
(10-40)
The equation has a physical significance in that for small deformations, the pressure is linearly related
to the volumetric strains by the bulk modulus .
The discontinuous or continuous damage models discussed in the models section on damage can be
included with the generalized Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, Arruda-Boyce, and Gent models to simulate
Mullins effect or fatigue of elastomers when using the updated Lagrangian approach. In the total
Lagrangian framework however, this is available for the Ogden model only.
Foam Model
Sometimes elastomeric materials show large volumetric deformations. For this type of behavior, the
models discussed above are not appropriate. Instead, the foam model expressed by:
(10-41)
should be used. In contrast to the Ogden model, the first part of the foam strain energy function is not
purely deviatoric. The material constants provide additional flexibility to describe the material
behavior also for a large amount of compressibility.
Updated Lagrange Formulation for Nonlinear Elasticity
The Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, Arruda-Boyce, Gent and Foam models may be used either in the total
Lagrange or updated Lagrange framework. This is selected using the PARAM,MARUPDAT. For plane
stress analysis the total Lagrange procedure will always be used.
f I
3
( )
> 0 if I
3
0 >
0 = if I
3
1 =
< 0 if I
3
0 <
f I
3
( ) 3 I
3
1
6
---
1
\ .
|
| |
=
p 3K J
1
3
---
1
\ .
|
| |
=
K
W

n
o
n
------
1
o
n
2
o
n
3
o
n
3 + +
\ .
| |

n
|
n
------ 1 J
|
n
\ .
| |
n 1 =
N
+
n 1 =
N
=
|
n
Main Index
Nonlinear Elastic
282
The updated Lagrangian rubber elasticity capability can be used in conjunction with both continuous as
well as discontinuous damage models. Thermal, as well as viscoelastic, effects can be modeled with the
current formulation. While the Mooney model can account for the temperature dependent material
properties, the Ogden model does not support the temperature dependence at this time. The singularity
ratio of the system is inversely proportional to the order of bulk modulus of the material due to the
condensation procedure.
A consistent linearization has been carried out to obtain the tangent modulus. The singularity for the case
of two- or three-equal stretch ratios is analytically removed by application of LHospitals rule. The
current framework with an exact implementation of the finite strain kinematics along with the split of
strain energy to handle compressible and nearly incompressible response is eminently suitable for
implementation of any nonlinear elastic as well as inelastic material models. In fact, the finite
deformation plasticity model based on the multiplicative decomposition, is implemented in
the same framework.
To simulate elastomeric materials, incompressible element(s) are used for plane strain, axisymmetric,
and three-dimensional problems for elasticity in total Lagrangian framework. These elements can be used
with each other or in combination with other elements. For plane stress, beam, plate or shell analysis,
conventional elements can be used. For updated Lagrangian elasticity, both conventional elements (as
well as Herrmann elements) can be used for plane strain, axisymmetric, and three-dimensional problems.
Experimental Determination of Hyperelastic Material Parameters
In order to determine the material parameters to be used, like Mooney coefficients, Ogden moduli,
relaxation times, etc., experiments must be carried out. In this section, the laboratory tests of which data
can be used to fit the material parameters will be described. Once the test data is available the
Experimental Data Fitting module in Patran can be used to calculate appropriate coefficient values.
For a homogeneous material, homogeneous deformation modes suffice to characterize the material
constants. MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear accepts test data from the following deformation modes:
Uniaxial tension and compression.
Biaxial tension and compression.
Planar tension and compression (also known as pure shear).
Simple Shear
Volumetric tension and compression
F F
e
F
u
F
p
=
Main Index
283
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Figure 10-5 Test Data
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Uniaxial Test Data
Biaxial Test Data
Planar Test Data
Volumetric Test Data
Main Index
Nonlinear Elastic
284
Uniaxial Test
Probably the most popular test is the uniaxial test (see Figure 10-6). This test can be used in tension as
well as in compression, both for incompressible and (slightly) compressible elastomeric materials. The
shape of the specimen used in compression will usually be less slender than the shape used in tension.
Within the region indicated by the dashed line, the state of deformation will be homogeneous, where the
deformation can be described by:
, (10-42)
while the corresponding engineering stresses are given by:
, (10-43)
in which is the applied force and is the cross sectional area of the undeformed specimen in the -
-plane, within the region indicated by the dashed line.
Figure 10-6 Uniaxial (Tensile) Test
Necessary input for the curve fitting program in Patran consists of at least engineering strain ( ) versus
engineering stress ( ) data points. In case of (slightly) compressible materials, information about the
volume changes is also needed. This data can be given either in terms of the area ratio or the volume ratio.
The area ratio is defined by the current cross sectional area over the original cross sectional area .
Similarly, the volume ratio is defined by the current volume over the undeformed volume . Notice
that the volume ratio and the area ratio are related by:
If, for a particular elastomeric material, both a tensile and a compression test have been performed, all
the data points should be collected into one data file. The layout of a data file containing uniaxial test data
is given in the figure below. The columns may be separated by either spaces or commas. For (nearly)
incompressible material behavior, the third column can be omitted.
1
1 e
11
+ = =
2

3
J = =
o
11
o
F
A
0
------ = = o
22
o
33
0 = =
F A
0
E
2
E
3
E
1
E
3
E
2
F F
e
11
o
11
A A
0
V V
0
V
V
0
------ J
A
A
0
------ 1 e
11
+ ( ) = =
Main Index
285
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Figure 10-7 Layout of Data File for a Uniaxial Test
Equi-Biaxial Test
The equi-biaxial tensile test outlined in Figure 10-8 can be used to obtain, within the region indicated by
the dashed line, a homogeneous state of deformation defined by:
Figure 10-8 Equi-biaxial (Tensile) Test
, (10-44)
with corresponding engineering stresses:
, (10-45)
e
11
o
11
A A
0
e
11
o
11
V V
0
or
F
F
F F
E
1
E
3
E
2
1

2
1 e
11
+ 1 e
22
+ = = = =
3
J
2
=
o
11
o
22
o
F
A
0
------ = = = o
33
0 =
Main Index
Nonlinear Elastic
286
with being the original cross sectional area of the elastomeric sheet in the direction perpendicular to
the applied forces, which is assumed to be the same in the - -plane and the - -plane.
For compressible elastomers, volumetric information is needed. For the equi-biaxial test, this can be
given in terms of a thickness ratio or, similar to the uniaxial test, a volume ratio. The thickness ratio is
defined as the current sheet thickness over the original sheet thickness . The relation between the
thickness ratio and the volume ratio is:
(10-46)
The layout of a data file for an equi-biaxial tensile test is given in Figure 10-8.
Planar Shear Test
A state of planar shear, also sometimes called pure shear, can be obtained by clamping and stretching an
elastomeric rectangular sheet of material, as indicated in Figure 10-9.
Figure 10-9 Planar Shear Test
Except for the vicinity of the free edges and the clamps, the state of strain can be found to be substantially
uniform, according to:
, , (10-47)
where the known stress components are given by:
, (10-48)
A
0
E
1
E
3
E
2
E
3
t t
0
V
V
0
------ J
t
t
0
---- 1 e
11
+ ( )
2
= =
F F
E
1
E
3
E
2
1
1 e
11
+ = =
2
1 =
3
J
--- =
o
11
o
F
A
0
------ = = o
33
0 =
Main Index
287
CHAPTER 10
Materials
in which is the cross sectional area of the undeformed specimen in the - -plane. Notice that the
engineering strain is zero, but that the corresponding engineering stress depends on the material
behavior.
(10-49)
(10-50)
Simple Shear Test
A test which, compared to the above mentioned tests, leads to a more complex kinematic description, is
the simple shear test (see Figure 10-10).Upon introducing the shear strain , the coordinates in the
deformed configuration are given by:
, , (10-51)
which yields for the deformation gradient:
(10-52)
Figure 10-10 Simple Shear Test
Notice that , irrespective of the value of , from which it can be concluded that a simple
shear test is a constant volume test.
Based on Equation (10-51), Equation (10-52) and Figure 10-10, the engineering strain tensor and the
right Cauchy-Green strain tensor can be evaluated as:
A
0
E
1
E
3
e
22
o
22
oU T
S
o
S
=
T
S

S
c
c
U 2
S

S
3
\ .
| |
I
1
c
cU
I
2
c
cU
+
\ .
|
| |
= =
x
1
X
1
X
2
+ = x
2
X
2
= x
3
X
3
=
F
1 0
0 1 0
0 0 1
=
2F
E
1
E
3
E
2
atan
det F ( ) 1 =
Main Index
Nonlinear Elastic
288
(10-53)
(10-54)
According to Equation (10-54), the principal stretch ratios follow from the principal values of
and read:
, (10-55)
It can easily be verified that , which again shows that the simple shear test is a constant
volume test. The relevant engineering stress is given by:
(10-56)
with being the cross sectional area of the undeformed specimen in the - -plane.
The layout of a data file containing measurements of a simple shear test is given in Figure 10-11.
Figure 10-11 Layout of Data File for a Simple Shear Test
Volumetric Test
Although a uniaxial, equi-biaxial and planar shear test can be used to obtain information about the
volumetric behavior, for compressible materials an additional volumetric test may be preferable. This is
especially true for slightly compressible materials, since volumetric data from other tests other than a
volumetric one may easily be inaccurate (because most of the deformation is deviatoric). Two commonly
used volumetric tests are outlined in Figure 10-12. In Figure 10-12a, a cylindrical specimen is
compressed in a cylindrical hole. This test can be successfully applied for slightly compressible
materials. In Figure 10-12b, a specimen is deformed by compressing the surrounding fluid. This
volumetric test can also be used for highly compressible materials.
e
0 2 0
2 0 0
0 0 0
=
C
1 0
1
2
+ 0
0 0 1
=
C
1 2 ,
1

2
2
----- 1

2
4
----- + + =
3
1 =
3
1 =
o
12
F
A
0
------ =
A
0
E
1
E
3
2e
12
= o
12
Main Index
289
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Figure 10-12 Volumetric Tests
For a volumetric test, the direct true stress components are assumed to be equal to the hydrostatic
pressure and given by:
(10-57)
in which denotes the area of the piston in the - -plane. The deformation can be expressed in terms
of an engineering strain and corresponding stretch ratio , which can be determined from the
measured volume change according to:
(10-58)
Based on according to Figure 10-12b, the engineering stress follows from:
(10-59)
Notice that only in the case of Figure 10-12b the engineering strain and the engineering stress are
equal to the direct components of the engineering strain and the engineering stress tensor.
The layout of the data file corresponding to a volumetric test is given in Figure 10-13. Notice that because
of Figure 10-12b, the entries of the first and the third column are not independent.
F
F
F
(a) (b)
E
2
E
3
E
1
p
T
11
T
22
T
33
F
A
p
------ = = =
A
p
E
2
E
3
e
e 1
V
V
0
------
3
1 J
3
1 = = =
o
o T
11
2
=
e o
Main Index
Nonlinear Elastic
290
Figure 10-13 Layout of Data File for a Volumetri Test
Relaxation Test
The basic feature of a relaxation test is that the force or stress response to a prescribed fixed displacement
or deformation is measured as a function of time. A relaxation test for a large strain elastomeric material
is indicated in Figure 10-14. By measuring the force needed for a displacement at different time
intervals, the decay of the strain energy as a function of time can be determined. For linear elastic
isotropic material, similar tests can be performed to get information about the shear modulus and/or the
bulk modulus as a function of time. In order to properly measure the instantaneous values, application of
the prescribed displacement should occur sufficiently fast. It should be noted, due to the assumption
introduced in equation Equation (10-94), that for large strain visco-elastic materials the magnitude of (the
instantaneous value of) the strain energy is not important, since every energy term in the Prony series
expansion is related to the instantaneous strain energy using a scalar multiplier. The data does not need
to be equispaced in time. Usually, at the beginning of the relaxation experiment the measurements are
done at smaller time intervals than at the end of the experiment.
Figure 10-14 Relaxation Test
If, for linear visco-elastic materials, instead of a relaxation test only a creep test can be performed, the
creep data must be transformed into relaxation data. Converting creep data into relaxation data can be
done using a numerical integration scheme, but is not part of MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
Hyperelastic Foam Properties
Elastomeric foams are cellular solids that have the following primary mechanical characteristics:
e o
V V
0
Au
Au
Main Index
291
CHAPTER 10
Materials
They can deform elastically up to large strain: up to 90% strain in compression. In most
applications, this is the dominant mode of deformation.
Their porosity permits very large volumetric changes. This is in contrast to solid rubbers, which
are approximately incompressible.
Cellular solids are made up of interconnected networks of solid struts or plates which form the
edges and faces of cells. Foams are made up of polyhedral cells that pack in three dimensions.
The foam cells can either be open (e.g., sponge) or closed (e.g., flotation foam). Common
examples of elastomeric foam materials are cellular polymers such as cushions, padding, and
packaging materials which utilize the excellent energy absorption properties of foams - for a
certain stress level, the energy absorbed by foams is substantially greater than by ordinary stiff
elastic materials.
Figure 10-15 shows a typical compressive stress-strain curve for elastomeric foam.
Figure 10-15 Typical Compressive Stress-Strain Curve
Three stages can be distinguished during compression:
At small strains (< 5%) the foam deforms in a linear elastic manner, due to cell wall bending.
This is followed by a plateau of deformation at almost constant stress, caused by the elastic buckling of
the columns or plates which make up the cell edges or walls. In closed cells, the enclosed gas pressure
and membrane stretching increase the level and slope of the plateau.
Finally, a region of densification occurs, where the cell walls crush together, resulting in a rapid increase
of compressive stress. Ultimate compressive nominal strains of 0.7 to 0.9 are typical.
The tensile deformation mechanisms for small strains are similar to the compression mechanisms but
differ for large strains. The figure shows a typical tensile stress-strain curve.
STRAIN
S
T
R
E
S
S

Densification
Plateau: Elastic buckling
of cell walls
Cell wall bending
Main Index
Nonlinear Elastic
292
Figure 10-16 Typical Tensile Stress-Strain Curve
There are two stages during tension:
At small strains the foam deforms in a linear, elastic manner, due to cell wall bending, similar to that
in compression.
The cell walls rotate and align, resulting in rising stiffness. The walls are substantially aligned at a tensile
strain of about 1/3. Further stretching results in increased axial strains in the walls.
At small strains for both compression and tension, the average experimentally observed Poisson's ratio,
v, of foams is 1/3. At larger strains it is commonly observed that Poisson's ratio is effectively zero during
compression - the buckling of the cell walls does not result in any significant lateral deformation.
However, during tension, v is nonzero, which is a result of the alignment and stretching of the cell walls.
The manufacture of foams often results in cells with different principal dimensions. This shape
anisotropy results in different loading responses in different directions. However, the foam model does
not take this kind of initial anisotropy into account.
Determination of Foam Material Parameters
The response of the material is defined by the parameters in the strain energy function, U, so that it is
necessary to determine these parameters to use the foam model. Patran contains a capability for obtaining
the
i
, o
i
and |
i
for the foam model with up to six terms (N=6) directly from test data. It is usually best
to obtain data from several experiments involving different kinds of deformation, over the range of
strains of interest in the actual application, and to use all of these data to determine the parameters.
Since the properties of foam materials can vary significantly from one batch to another, all of the
experiments should be performed on specimens taken from the same batch of material or to use
MSC.Stocastics in combination with SOL 600.
Uniaxial, Equibiaxial and Planar Deformations
The deformation modes are characterized in terms of the principal stretches,
i
, and the volume ratio, J.
The elastomeric foams are not incompressible, so that J =
1
3
!= 1. The transverse stretches,
2
and/or
STRAIN
S
T
R
E
S
S

Cell wall bending
Cell wall alignment
Main Index
293
CHAPTER 10
Materials
3
, are independently specified in the test data either as individual values from the measured lateral
deformations or through the definition of an effective Poissons ratio.
Uniaxial mode:
1
=
U
,
2
=
3
, J=
U
2
2
Equibiaxial mode:
1
=
2
=
B
, J=
B
2
3
Planar mode:
1
=
P
,
2
=1, J=
P
3

The three deformation modes above use a single form of the nominal stress-stretch relation,
(10-60)
where T
L
is the nominal stress and L
L
is the stretch in the direction of loading. Because of the
compressible behavior, the planar mode does not result in a state of pure shear. In fact, if the effective
Poissons ratio is zero, planar deformation is identical to uniaxial deformation.
Simple Shear Deformation
Simple shear is described by the deformation gradient
(10-61)
where is the shear strain. For this deformation, J=det F =1. A schematic illustration of simple shear
deformation is shown in Figure 10-17.
The nominal shear stress is:
(10-62)
where = are the principal stretches in the plane of shearing, related to the shear strain, , by:
(10-63)
T
L

L
c
cU 2
L
-------

i
o
i
-----
L
o
i
J
o
i
|
i
\ .
| |
i 1 =
N
= =
F
1 0
0 1 0
0 0 1
=
T
S
T
S
c
cU 2
2
j
2
1
\ .
| |

2
--------------------------------------

i
o
i
-----
j
o
i
1
\ .
| |
i 1 =
N
)

`

j 1 =
2
= =
1 2 ,
1

2
2
----- 1

2
4
----- + + =
Main Index
Nonlinear Elastic
294
.
Figure 10-17 Simple Shear Test
The stretch in the direction perpendicular to the shear plane is . The transverse (tensile) stress, ,
developed during simple shear deformation due to the Poynting effect, is
(10-64)
Volumetric Deformation
The volumetric deformation mode consists of all principal stretches being equal,

1
=
2
=
3
=
V
, J=
V
3
.
The pressure-volumetric ratio relation is
(10-65)
A volumetric compression test is illustrated Figure 10-18.
The pressure exerted on the foam specimen is the hydrostatic pressure of the fluid and the decrease in the
specimen volume is equal to the additional fluid entering the pressure chamber. The specimen is sealed
against fluid penetration.
2F
E
1
E
3
E
2 atan
L
3
1 = T
T
T
T
c c
cU
2
j
2
1
\ .
| |
2
j
4
j
2
2
2 + ( )
---------------------------------------------

i
o
i
-----
j
o
i
1
\ .
| |
i 1 =
N
)

`

j 1 =
2
= =
p
J c
cU 2
J
---

i
o
i
----- J
o
i
3
-----
J
o
i
|
i
\ .
|
|
|
| |
i 1 =
N
= =
Main Index
295
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Figure 10-18 Volumetric Compression Test Setup
Difference in Compression and Tension Deformation
For small strains (< 5%), foams behave similarly for both compression and tension. However, we have
seen that at large strains, the deformation mechanisms differ for compression (buckling and crushing)
and tension (alignment and stretching). Accurate modeling with the FOAM option therefore requires that
the experimental data used to define the material parameters correspond to the dominant deformation
modes of the actual problem being analyzed.
If compression dominates in the problem, the pertinent tests are:
Uniaxial compression.
Simple shear.
Planar compression (if Poissons ratio ).
Volumetric compression (if Poissons ratio ).
If tension dominates, the pertinent tests are:
Uniaxial tension.
Simple shear.
Biaxial tension (if Poissons ratio ).
Planar tension (if Poissons ratio ).
Lateral strain data can also be used to define the compressibility of the foam. Measurement of the lateral
strains may make other tests redundant, e.g., providing lateral strains for a uniaxial test eliminates the
need for a volumetric test. The foam model may not accurately fit Poisson's ratio if it varies significantly
between compression and tension.
F
F
F
(a) (b)
E
2
E
3
E
1
v 0 =
v 0 =
v 0 =
v 0 =
Main Index
Nonlinear Elastic
296
Least Squares Fit
The equations derived above for T
U
, T
B
, and T
S
, with the assumption of material incompressibility, allow
the material parameters C
ij
and
i
, o
i
to be determined from the experimentally measured stress-strain
relationships in the uniaxial, equibiaxial, and planar loading tests. A least squares fit, which minimizes
the relative error in stress, is used for this purpose. The equation for T
S
alone will not determine the
constants uniquely. The planar test data input must be augmented by either or both of the other two types
of test data to determine the material parameters.
The Ogden potential is linear in the coefficients
i
but strongly nonlinear in terms of the exponents o
i
,
thus necessitating use of a nonlinear least squares procedure. For the nominal stress-nominal strain data
pairs, the error measure, E, is minimized by E = sum(i=1to n)(1-T
i
th
/T
i
test2
), where T
i
test
is a stress value
from the test data and T
i
th
comes from one of the nominal stress expressions derived above.
The foam parameters
i
, o
i
, |
i
are determined from the experimentally measured stress-strain
relationships in the various loading tests described above. A least squares fit, which minimizes the
relative error in stress, is used for this purpose.
The foam potential is linear in the coefficients
i
but strongly nonlinear in terms of the exponents o
i
and
|
i
thus necessitating use of a nonlinear least squares procedure. For the n nominal stress-nominal strain
data pairs, the error measure E is minimized by E = sum(i=1to n)(1-T
i
th
/T
i
test2
, where T
i
test
is a stress
value from the test data and T
i
th
comes from one of the nominal stress expressions derived above.
Minimizing the relative error in stress implies that the error in slope (modulus) is minimized;
minimization of the absolute error would decrease the error at larger strains, at the expense of the
accuracy at small strains.
Alternative Method for Determination of Constants for Moderate Strains
Since the polynomial form with N=1 is very commonly used for cases where the nominal strain is not
too large, an alternative method of finding the material constants, assuming incompressibility, is to use
the uniaxial test data as follows. The nominal strain in the direction of loading in the uniaxial test is
c
U
=
U
-1. Expanding the equation for T
B
in terms of c
U
, using the Mooney-Rivlin form, and neglecting
terms of higher than second-order in c
U
, gives
T
U
=6c
U
(C
10
+C
01
-(C
10
+2C
01
)c
U
).
This is a parabola: the slope of this curve at the origin (the effective Youngs modulus at zero strain) is
6(C
10
+C
01
); this slope, together with the second-order term -6(C
10
+2C
01
)c
U
2
, defines the constants C
10

and C
01
.
If compressibility should be modeled, then, under pure pressure loading, the compressible model with
N=1 gives, to first-order in the volumetric strain c
V
=3c
11
,
Main Index
297
CHAPTER 10
Materials
p=-(2 / D
1
)c
V
,
so that, at small nominal strains, the bulk modulus is defined as:
K=(2 / D
1
)
Hyperelastic Models in MSC Nastran
Various options are provided for defining the material properties. The first (available in both Patran and
MSC Nastran) is to give the parameters of the polynomial form and , or the parameters of the
Ogden form and as functions of the temperature. The second is to give the value of N, and
give experimental stress-data for up to four simple tests: uniaxial, equilibrium, planar and, if the material
is compressible for volumetric compression test. MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear will then compute the
or and the . This method is available for N = 1 and N=2 for the polynomial form and up to
N = 6 for the Ogden form, and does not allow the properties to be temperature dependent.
In either case, you should be careful about defining the or : especially when N > 1, the
behavior at higher strains is strongly sensitive to the values of the or , and unstable material
behavior may result if these values are not correctly defined. When some of the coefficients are strongly
negative, instability at higher strain levels is likely to occur.
Because the properties of rubber-like materials can vary significantly from one sample to another, it is
important that test data are taken from experiments on the same sample (or samples cut from the same
sheet), regardless whether the or are computed by the user or by the built-in method.
This material option can be used by itself, or can be combined with viscoelasticity to define time
dependent hyperelastic behavior. It cannot be combined with other material options such as plasticity or
creep. It may be used with the pure displacement formulation elements or with the hybrid (mixed
formulation) elements. Because elastomeric materials are usually almost completely incompressible,
fully integrated pure displacement method elements are not recommended for use with this material,
except for plane stress cases. If fully or selectively reduced integration displacement method elements
are used with the almost incompressible form of this material model in anything except plane stress
analysis, a penalty method is used to impose the incompressibility constraint. This can sometimes lead
to numerical difficulties, and the fully or selectively reduced integrated hybrid formulation elements
are therefore recommended.
Specifying Hyperelastic Material Entries
Nonlinear hyperelastic materials are characterized in MSC Nastran with the following Bulk Data entries:
.
Entry Description
MATHP Specifies material properties for use in fully nonlinear (i.e., large strain and
large rotation) hyperelastic analysis of rubber-like materials (elastomers).
MATHE Specifies hyperelastic (rubber-like) material properties for nonlinear (large
strain and large rotation) analysis in Nonlinear Analysis.
N A
i j
, D
i
N
i
o
i
, , D
i
A
i j

i
o
i
, | | D
i
A
i j

i
o
i
, | |
A
i j

i
o
i
, | |
A
i j

i
o
i
, | |
Main Index
Nonlinear Elastic
298
To define a hyperelastic material in Patran:
2. Click Input Properties..., and select Hyperelastic from the Constitutive Model pull-down menu.
3. Select Test Data or Coefficients as the Data Type.
4. From the Strain Energy Potential pull-down menu, select a model and enter properties as
described below.
Hyperelastic material models require the following material data via the Input Properties subform on the
Materials Application form.
Mooney-Rivlin and James-Green-Simpson
Ogden
Hyperelastic -Mooney/ James Description
Strain Energy Function, C10,
C01, C11, C20, C30
Strain energy densities as a function of the strain invariants in the
material. May vary with temperature via a defined material field.
This option consolidates several of the Marc hyperelastic material
models.
Expansion
Defines the instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion. This
property is optional. May vary with temperature via a defined
material field.
Bulk Modulus Defines the Bulk Modulus.
Reference Temperature Defines the reference temperature for the thermal
expansion coefficient.
Hyperelastic-Ogden Description
Bulk Modulus K Defines the Bulk Modulus.
Density Defines the material mass density.
Expansion
material field
Reference Temperature Defines the reference temperature for the thermal expansion
coefficient.
Modulus k in the Ogden equation.
Exponent k in the Ogden equation.
k
o
k
Main Index
299
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Foam
Arruda-Boyce
Gent
Hyperelastic-Foam Description
Density Defines the material mass density.
Expansion
material field
Modulus n in the Foam equation.
Deviatoric Exponent n in the Foam equation.
Volumetric Exponent n in the Foam equation.
Hyperelastic-Arruda- Boyce Description
NKT Chain density times Boltzmann constant times temperature.
Chain Length Average chemical chain cross length.
Density This defines the material mass density.
Expansion
material field
Hyperelastic-Gent Description
Tensile Modulus Defines standard tension modulus (E).
Maximum 1st Invariant Defines .
Density This defines the material mass density.
Expansion
Defines the coefficient of thermal expansion.
u
n
o
n
|
n
I
1
*
I
1
*
I
1
3 =
Main Index
Nonlinear Elastic
300
Viscoelastic
The material models discussed in previous sections are considered to be time independent. However,
rubber materials often show a rate-dependent behavior and can be modeled as viscoelastic materials.
Viscoelasticity can be applied:
To determine the current state of deformation based on the entire time history of loading.
To characterize small strain and large strain problems.
With other material options for linear elastic response (small strain) and hyperelastic response
(large strain).
To include temperature dependencies.
For isotropic, anisotropic, and incompressible materials.
Small Strain Viscoelasticity
In the stress relaxation form, the constitutive relation can be written as a hereditary integral formulation
(10-66)
The functions are called stress relaxation functions. They represent the response to a unit applied
strain and have characteristic relaxation times associated with them. The relaxation functions for
materials with a fading memory can be expressed in terms of Prony or exponential series.
(10-67)
in which is a tensor of amplitudes and is a positive time constant (relaxation time). In the current
implementation, it is assumed that the time constant is isotropic. In Equation (10-67), represents the
long term modulus of the material.
The short term moduli (describing the instantaneous elastic effect) are then given by
(10-68)
The stress can now be considered as the summation of the stresses in a generalized Maxwell model
(Figure 10-19)
o
ij
t ( ) G
ijkl
t t ( )
dc
kl
t ( )
dt
------------------- dt
0
t
}
G
ij kl
t ( )c
kl
0 ( ) + =
G
i j kl
G
ijkl
t ( ) G
ijkl
G
ijkl
n
exp t
n
( )
n 1 =
N
+ =
G
i j kl
n
n
G
i j kl
G
ijkl
0
G
i jkl
0 ( ) G
ijkl
G
ijkl
n
n 1 =
N
+ = =
Main Index
301
CHAPTER 10
Materials
(10-69)
where
(10-70)
(10-71)
Figure 10-19 The Generalized Maxwell or Stress Relaxation Form
For integration of the constitutive equation, the total time interval is subdivided into a number of
subintervals ( ) with time-step . A recursive relation can now be derived expressing
the stress increment in terms of the values of the internal stresses at the start of the interval. With the
assumption that the strain varies linearly during the time interval h, we obtain the increment stress-strain
relation as
(10-72)
where
(10-73)
and
(10-74)
o
ij
t ( ) o
ij
t ( ) o
ij
n
t ( )
n 1 =
N
+ =
o
ij
G
ijkl
c
kl
t ( ) =
o
ij
n
G
ijkl
n
exp t t ( )
n
| |
dc
kl
t ( )
dt
------------------- dt
0
t
}
=
E
1
q
1
q
1
c
E
0
t
i
= q
i
/E
i
E
2
q
2
q
2
E
i
q
i
q
i
q
E
t
m 1
t
m
, h t
m
t
m 1
=
o
i j
n
Ao
ij
t
m
( ) G
ijkl
|
n
h ( )G
ijkl
n
n 1 =
N
+ Ac
kl
o
n
h ( )o
ij
n
t
m
h ( )
n 1 =
N
=
o
n
h ( ) 1 exp h
n
( ) =
|
n
h ( ) o
n
h ( )
n
h =
Main Index
Nonlinear Elastic
302
In MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, the incremental equation for the total stress is expressed in terms of
the short term moduli (See Equation (10-68)).
(10-75)
Note that the set of equations given by Equation (10-75) can directly be used for both anisotropic and
isotropic materials.
Isotropic Viscoelastic Material
For an isotropic viscoelastic material, MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear assumes that the deviatoric and
volumetric behavior are fully uncoupled and that the behavior can be described by a time dependent shear
and bulk modules. The bulk moduli is generally assumed to be time independent; however, this is an
unnecessary restriction of the general theory.
Both the shear and bulk moduli can be expressed in a series
(10-76)
(10-77)
with short term values given by
(10-78)
(10-79)
Let the deviatoric and volumetric component matrices and be given by
Ao
ij
t
m
( ) G
ij kl
0
1 |
n
h ( ) { }G
ijkl
n
n 1 =
N
Ac
kl
t
m
( ) o
n
h ( )o
ij
n
n 1 =
N
= t
m
h ( )
G t ( ) G
G
n
exp t
d
n

\ .
| |
n 1 =
N
+ =
K t ( ) K
K
n
exp t
v
n

\ .
| |
n 1 =
N
+ =
G
0
G
G
n
n 1 =
N
+ =
K
0
K
K
n
n 1 =
N
+ =
t
d
t
v
Main Index
303
CHAPTER 10
Materials
The increment set of equations is then given by
(10-80)
and
(10-81)
Note that the deviatoric and volumetric response are fully decoupled.
Note that the algorithm is exact for linear variations of the strain during the increment. The algorithm is
implicit; hence, for each change in time-step, a new assembly of the stiffness matrix is required.
t
d
4 3 2 3 2 3 0 0 0
2 3 4 3 2 3 0 0 0
2 3 2 3 4 3 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 1
=
t
v
1 1 1 0 0 0
1 1 1 0 0 0
1 1 1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
=
Ao t
m
( ) G
0
1 |
d
n
h ( ) | |G
n
n 1 =
N
d
)

`

t
d
Ac t
m
( ) =
o
d
n
h ( )o
d
n
t
m
h ( )
n 1 =
N
d
o
v
n
h ( )o
v
n
t
m
h ( )
n 1 =
N
v

K
0
1 |
v
n
h ( ) | |K
n
n 1 =
N
v
)

`

t
v
Ac t
m
( )
Ao
d
n
t
m
( ) |
d
n
h ( )G
n
t
d
Ac t
m
( ) o
d
n
h ( )o
d
n
t
m
h ( ) =
Ao
v
n
t
m
( ) |
v
n
h ( )K
n
t
v
Ac t
m
( ) o
v
n
h ( )o
v
n
t
m
h ( ) =
Main Index
Nonlinear Elastic
304
Anisotropic Viscoelastic Material
Equation (10-75) can be used for the analysis of anisotropic viscoelastic materials. Also, a complete set
of moduli (21 components) can be specified in the HOOKVI user subroutine. Referencing a local
coordinate system or use of the ORIENT user subroutine can be used to define a preferred orientation
both for the short time moduli and the amplitude functions .
Incompressible Isotropic Viscoelastic Materials
Incompressible elements in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear allow the analysis of incompressible and
nearly incompressible materials in plane strain, axisymmetric and three-dimensional problems. The
incompressibility of the element is simulated through the use of an perturbed Lagrangian variational
principle based on the Herrmann formulation.
The constitutive equation for a material with no time dependence in the volumetric behavior can be
expressed as
(10-82)
(10-83)
The hydrostatic pressure term is used as an independent variable in the variational principle. The
Herrmann pressure variable is now defined in the same way as in the formulation for time independent
elastic materials.
(10-84)
The constitutive Equation (10-82) and Equation (10-83) can then be rewritten
(10-85)
where
(10-86)
G
i j kl
0
G
i j kl
n
Ao
i j
t
m
( ) 2 G
ijkl
0
1 |
n
h ( ) | |G
ijkl
n
n 1 =
N
)

`

Ac
kl
t
m
( )
1
3
--- Ac
pp
t
m
( )o
kl
=
o
n
h ( ) o'
ij
( )
n
t
m
( )
n 1 =
N
1
3
--- o
kk
o
ij
+
Ao
pp
t
m
( ) 3K
0
Ac
pp
t
m
( ) =
H
o
pp
2G
0
1 v
0
+ ( )
-------------------------------- =
Ao
ij
t
m
( ) 2G
e
Ac
ij
v
-
Ho
ij
+ ( ) o
n
h ( ) o'
ij
( )
n
t
m
h ( )
n 1 =
N
=
G
e
G
0
1 |
n
h ( )G
n
| |
n 1 =
N
=
Main Index
305
CHAPTER 10
Materials
(10-87)
Large Strain Viscoelasticity
For an elastomeric time independent material, the constitutive equation is expressed in terms of an
energy function . For a large strain viscoelastic material, Simo generalized the small strain
viscoelasticity material behavior to a large strain viscoelastic material. The energy functional then
becomes
(10-88)
where are the components of the Green-Lagrange strain tensor, internal variables and the
elastic strain energy density for instantaneous deformations. In MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, it is
assumed that , meaning that the energy density for instantaneous deformations is given by the
third order James Green and Simpson form or the Ogden form.
The components of the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress then follow from
(10-89)
The energy function can also be written in terms of the long term moduli resulting in a different set of
internal variables
(10-90)
where is the elastic strain energy for long term deformations. Using this energy definition, the
stresses are obtained from
(10-91)
Observing the similarity with the equations for small strain viscoelasticity the internal variables can be
obtained from a convolution expression
(10-92)
v
-
G
0
1 v
0
+ ( ) G
e
1 2v
0
( )
3G
e
-------------------------------------------------------------------- =
W
E
i j
Q
i j
n
( )
0
E
i j
( ) Q
i j
n
E
i j
n 1 =
N

I
n
Q
i j
n
( )
n 1 =
N
+ =
E
i j
Q
i j
n
0
W =
S
i j
c
cE
i j
----------
c
0
cE
i j
---------- Q
i j
n
n 1 =
N
= =
T
i j
n
E
i j
T
i j
n
, ( )
E
i j
( ) T
i j
n
E
i j
n 1 =
N
+ =
S
i j
c
E ( )
cE
i j
-------------------- T
i j
n
n 1 =
N
+ =
T
i j
n
S
i j
n
0
t
}
t ( )exp t t ( )
n
| |dt =
Main Index
Nonlinear Elastic
306
where are internal stresses obtained from energy functions.
(10-93)
Let the total strain energy be expressed as a Prony series expansion
(10-94)
If, in the energy function, each term in the series expansion has a similar form, Equation (10-94) can
be rewritten
(10-95)
where is a scalar multiplier for the energy function based on the short term values.
The stress-strain relation is now given by
(10-96)
(10-97)
(10-98)
Analogue to the derivation for small strain viscoelasticity, a recursive relation can be derived expressing
the stress increment in terms of values of the internal stresses at the start of the increment.
The equations are reformulated in terms of the short time values of the energy function
(10-99)
S
i j
n
S
i j
n
c
n
cE
i j
---------- =

n
exp t
n
( )
n 1 =
N
+ =

o
n
0
exp t
n
( )
n 1 =
N
+ =
o
n
S
i j
t ( ) S
i j
t ( ) T
i j
n
n 1 =
N
t ( ) + =
S
i j
c
cE
i j
----------- 1 o
n
n 1 =
N
\ .
|
|
| |

c
0
cE
i j
---------- = =
T
i j
n
o
n
S
i j
0
t ( )exp t t ( )
n
| |dt
0
t
}
=
AS
i j
t
m
( ) 1 1 |
n
h ( )
n 1 =
N
o
n
\ .
|
|
| |
S
i j
0
t
m
( ) S
i j
0
t
m
h ( ) { } =
o
n
S
i j
n
t
m
h ( )
n 1 =
N
Main Index
307
CHAPTER 10
Materials
(10-100)
It is assumed that the viscoelastic behavior in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear acts only on the
deviatoric behavior.
Viscoelastic Models in MSC Nastran
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear has two models that represent viscoelastic materials. The first can be
defined as a Kelvin-Voigt model. The latter is a general hereditary integral approach.
Kelvin-Voigt Model
The Kelvin model allows the rate of change of the inelastic strain to be a function of the total stress and
previous strain.
The Kelvin material behavior (viscoelasticity) is modeled by assuming an additional creep strain ,
governed by
(10-101)
where and may be defined in the user subroutine CRPVIS and the total strain is
(10-102)
(10-103)
(10-104)
(10-105)
(10-106)
(10-107)
The CRPVIS user subroutine is called at each integration point of each element when the Kelvin model
is used.
Use the NLPARM option and set a nonzero time increment to define the time step and to set the tolerance
control for the maximum strain in any increment.
This option allows Maxwell models to be included in series with the Kelvin model.
AS
i j
t
m
( ) |
n
h ( )o
n
S
i j
0
t
m
( ) S
i j
n
t
m
h ( ) | | o
n
h ( )S
i j
n
t
m
h ( ) =
c
i j
k
d
dt
----- c
i j
k
A
i j kl
o'
kl
B
i j kl
c
kl
k
=
A B
c
i j
c
i j
e
c
i j
p
c
i j
c
c
i j
k
c
i j
t h
+ + + + =
c
i j
t h
= thermal strain components
c
i j
e
= elastic strain components (instantaneous response)
c
i j
p
= plastic strain components
c
i j
c
=
creep strains defined via the CRPLAW and VSWELL user subroutines
c
i j
k
= Kelvin model strain components as defined above
Main Index
Nonlinear Elastic
308
Hereditary Integral Model
The stress-strain equations in viscoelasticity are not only dependent on the current stress and strain state
(as represented in the Kelvin model), but also on the entire history of development of these states. This
constitutive behavior is most readily expressed in terms of hereditary or Duhamel integrals. These
integrals are formed by considering the stress or strain build-up at successive times. Two equivalent
integral forms exist: the stress relaxation form and the creep function form. In MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear, the stress relaxation form is used.
The viscoelasticity option in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear can be used for both the small strain and
large strain Mooney, Ogden, Arruda Boyce, and Gent material stress-relaxation problems. A description
of these models is as follows:
Experimental Determination of Viscoelastic Material Parameters
The free energy function versus time data being used for large strain viscoelasticity can be generated by
fitting experimental data provided the following two tests are done:
1. Standard quasi-static tests (tensile, planar-shear, simple-shear, equi-biaxial tension, volumertic)
to determine the elastomer free energy constants.
2. Standard relaxation tests to obtain stress versus time.
Temperature Dependence of Viscoelastic Materials
The rate processes in many viscoelastic materials is known to be highly sensitive to temperature changes.
Such temperature-dependent properties cannot be neglected in the presence of any appreciable
temperature variation. For example, there is a large class of polymers which are adequately represented
by linear viscoelastic laws at uniform temperature. These polymers exhibit an approximate translational
shift of all the characteristic response functions with a change of temperature, along a logarithmic time
axis. This shift occurs without a change of shape. These temperature-sensitive viscoelastic materials are
characterized as Thermo-Rheologically Simple.
A reduced or pseudo time can be defined for the materials of this type and for a given temperature
field. This new parameter is a function of both time and space variables. The viscoelastic law has the
same form as one at constant temperature in real time. If the shifted time is used, however, the
transformed viscoelastic equilibrium and compatibility equations are not equivalent to the corresponding
elastic equations.
In the case where the temperature varies with time, the extended constitutive law implies a nonlinear
dependence of the instantaneous stress state at each material point of the body upon the entire local
temperature history. In other words, the functionals are linear in the strains but nonlinear in
the temperature.
The time scale of experimental data is extended for Thermo-Rheologically Simple materials. All
characteristic functions of the material must obey the same property. The shift function is a basic property
of the material and must be determined experimentally. As a consequence of the shifting of the
mechanical properties data parallel to the time axis, the values of the zero and infinite frequency complex
moduli do not change due to shifting. Hence, elastic materials with temperature-dependent
W
0
Main Index
309
CHAPTER 10
Materials
characteristics neither belong to nor are consistent with the above hypothesis for the class of
Thermo-Rheologically Simple viscoelastic solids.
In addition to the Thermo-Rheologically Simple material behavior variations of initial stress-strain
moduli , the temperature of the other mechanical properties (coefficient of thermal expansion, etc.)
due to changes in temperature can be specified.
Note, however, that only the instantaneous moduli are effected. Hence, the long term moduli given by
(10-108)
can easily become negative if the temperature effects are not defined properly.
The effect of temperature, u, on the material behavior is introduced through the dependence of the elastic
modulus, G, on temperature, and through a reduced time concept:
(10-109)
where G=G(u), and xi(t) is the reduced time, defined by
(10-110)
where A(u(t)) is the shift function at time t. Often the shift function is approximated by the Williams
Landell Ferry (WLF) form:
(10-111)
where C
1
, C
2
and u
0
are constants (u
0
is the glassy transition temperature).
Narayanaswamy Model
The annealing of flat glass requires that the residual stresses be of an acceptable magnitude, while the
specification for optical glass components usually includes a homogenous refractive index. The design
of heat treated processes can be accomplished using the Narayanaswamy model. This allows you to
study the time dependence of physical properties (for example, volumes) of glass subjected to a change
in temperature.
For more information pertaining to the Narayanaswamy Model, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User
Information, Chapter 7 Material Library.
G
i j kl
0
G
i j kl
G
i j kl
0
t ( ) G
i j kl
n
n 1 =
N
=
t G g t ( ) s ( ) ( )
s ( )ds
0
t
}
+
\ .
|
|
| |
=
t ( )
ds
A u s ( ) ( )
--------------------
0
t
}
=
A ( ) log
C
1
u u
0
( )
C
2
u u
0
( ) +
---------------------------------- =
Main Index
Nonlinear Elastic
310
Specifying Viscoelastic Material Entries
The viscoelastic MATVE and MATTVE material options are provided for cases where dissipative losses
caused by viscous (internal friction) effects in materials must be modeled. For time domain analysis,
this option is used with an elastic model to define classical linear, small strain, viscoelastic behavior, or
with hyperelastic or foam models to define finite linear, large deformation, viscoelastic behavior. As
described in the previous section, viscoelastic relaxation data can be fit using the experimental data fitting
(EDF) capability available in Patran. See Experimental Data Fitting, 381.
To define a viscoelastic material in Patran:
2. Click Input Properties..., and select Viscoelastic from the Constitutive Model pull-down menu.
This input data creates the viscoelastic options. All inputs must have the same number of time points (at
the same times) in the referenced fields. The following equations may be useful when creating the Prony
series for the bulk and shear moduli: .
Viscoelastic material models require the following material data via the Input Properties subform on the
Entry Description
MATVE Specifies isotropic visco-elastic material properties to be used for quasi-static
or dynamic analysis in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
MATTVE Specifies temperature-dependent visco-elastic material properties in terms of
Thermo-Rheologically Simple behavior to be used for quasi-static or transient
dynamic analysis in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
Isotropic Description
Shear Constant If a material field of time vs. value is supplied, will create a
MATVE option. This is valid when MAT1/MATS1 are used.
Energy Function Multiplier Defines the duration effect on the hyperelastic model as a
multiplier to the strain energy density function. This is valid when
a Hyperelastic constitutive model for Neo-Hookean,
Mooney-Rivlin, Jamus-Green-Simpson, Arruda-Boyce, or
Gent is present.
Deviatoric Multiplier If a material field of time vs. value is supplied, will create a
MATVE option.
K E 3 1 2v ( ) ( ) G E 2 1 v + ( ) ( ) = =
Main Index
311
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Dilatational Multiplier Creates a dilatational multiplier.
Solid Coeff. of Thermal
Exp
Creates coefficient of thermal expansion for solids.
Liquid Coeff of Thermal Exp Creates coefficient of thermal expansion for liquids.
Orthotropic Description
Youngs Modulus, E11/E22/E33 Defines the duration effects on the elastic moduli. This
information is optional. This is only valid when an elastic and/or
plastic constitutive model is present.
Poissons Ratio 12/23/31 Defines the duration effects on the Poissons ratios. This
information is optional.
Shear Modulus G12/G23/G31 Defines the duration effects on the shear moduli. This information
is optional.
Solid Coeff of Thermal
Exp
Same as for Isotropic
Liquid Coeff of Thermal Exp Same as for Isotropic
Main Index
Inelastic
312
Inelastic
Most materials of engineering interest initially respond elastically. Elastic behavior means that the
deformation is fully recoverable, so that, when the load is removed, the specimen returns to its original
shape. If the load exceeds some limit (the yield load), the deformation is no longer fully recoverable.
Some parts of the deformation will remain when the load is removed as, for example, when a paper clip
is bent too much, or when a billet of metal is rolled or forged in a manufacturing process. Plasticity
theories model the materials mechanical response as it undergoes such nonrecoverable deformation in a
ductile fashion. The theories have been developed most intensively for metals, but they are applied to
soils, concrete, rock, ice, and so on. These materials behave in very different ways (for example, even
large values of pure hydrostatic pressure cause very little inelastic deformation in metals, but quite small
hydrostatic pressure may cause a significant, non-recoverable volume change in a soil sample), but the
fundamental concepts of plasticity theories are sufficiently general that models based on these concepts
have been successfully developed for a wide range of materials. A number of these plasticity modes are
available in the MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear material library.
In nonlinear material behavior, the material parameters depend on the state of stress. Up to the
proportional limit, i.e., the point at which linearity in material behavior ceases, the linear elastic
formulation for the behavior can be used. Beyond that point, and especially after the onset of
yield, nonlinear formulations are required. In general, two ingredients are required to ascertain
material behavior:
1. an initial yield criterion to determine the state of stress at which yielding is considered to begin
2. mathematical rules to explain the post-yielding behavior.
There are two major theories of plastic behavior that address these criterion differently. In the first, called
deformation theory, the plastic strains are uniquely defined by the state of stress. The second theory,
called flow or incremental theory, expresses the increments of plastic strain (irrecoverable strains) as
functions of the current stress, the strain increments, and the stress increments. Incremental theory is
more general and can be adapted in its particulars to fit a variety of material behaviors. The plasticity
models in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear are incremental theories, in which the mechanical strain
rate is decomposed into an elastic part and a plastic (inelastic) part through various assumed flow rules.
The incremental plasticity models are formulated in terms of:
A yield surface, which generalizes the concept of yield load into a test function which can be
used to determine if the material will respond purely elastically at a particular state of stress,
temperature, etc.;
A flow rule that defines the inelastic deformation that must occur if the material point is no
longer responding purely elastically;
and some evolution laws that define the hardening - the way in which the yield and/or flow
definitions change as inelastic deformation occurs.
The models also need an elasticity definition, to deal with the recoverable part of the strain models divide
into those that are rate-dependent and those that are rate-independent.
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear includes the following models of inelastic behavior.
Main Index
313
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Metal Plasticity (von Mises or Hill)
ORNL (Oak Ridge National Laboratory) - characterizes creep behavior and cyclic loading
effects on stainless steel materials.
Porous Metal Plasticity (Gurson) - includes effects of hydrostatic pressure and failure processes
in ductile materials.
Pressure-Dependent models - models the behavior of granular (soil and rock) materials or
polymers, in which the yield behavior depends on the equivalent pressure stress.
Linear Mohr-Coulomb
Parabolic Morh-Coulomb
Buyukozturk Concrete
Yield Conditions
The yield stress of a material is a measured stress level that separates the elastic and inelastic behavior
of the material. The magnitude of the yield stress is generally obtained from a uniaxial test. However,
the stresses in a structure are usually multiaxial. A measurement of yielding for the multiaxial state of
stress is called the yield condition. Depending on how the multiaxial state of stress is represented, there
can be many forms of yield conditions. For example, the yield condition can be dependent on all stress
components, on shear components only, or on hydrostatic stress. A number of yield conditions are
available in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, and are discussed in this section.
Metal Plasticity
The von Mises yield surface is widely used for plasticity in isotropic metals. It is assumed that the yield
and plastic flow describe isotropic metals at low temperatures where creep effects can be ignored.
Anisotropic metals and composite materials, can be treated by extensions of von Mises yield function,
as described in Hills yield function.
von Mises
The success of the von Mises criterion is due to the continuous nature of the function that defines this
criterion and its agreement with observed behavior for the commonly encountered ductile materials.
The von Mises criterion states that yield occurs when the effective (or equivalent) stress (o) equals
the yield stress (o
y
) as measured in a uniaxial test. Figure 10-20 shows the von Mises yield surface in
two-dimensional and three-dimensional stress space.
Main Index
Inelastic
314
Figure 10-20 von Mises Yield Surface
For an isotropic material
(10-112)
where o
1
, o
2
, and o
3
are the principal Cauchy stresses.
o can also be expressed in terms of nonprincipal Cauchy stresses.
(10-113)
The yield condition can also be expressed in terms of the deviatoric stresses as:
(10-114)
where is the deviatoric Cauchy stress expressed as
(10-115)
For isotropic material, the von Mises yield condition is the default condition in MSC Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear.
Yield
Surface
Elastic
Region
(b) t-Plane
Yield
Surface
Elastic
Region
(a) Two-dimensional Stress Space
o'
3
o'
2
o'
1
o
1
o
2
o o
1
o
2
( )
2
o
2
o
3
( )
2
o
3
o
1
( )
2
+ + | |
1 2
2 =
o o
x
o
y
( )
2
o
y
o
z
( )
2
o
z
o
x
( )
2
6 t
xy
2
t
yz
2
t
zx
2
+ + ( ) + + + | |
1 2
= ( ) 2
o
3
2
--- o'
i j
o'
i j
=
o'
i j
o'
i j
o
i j
1
3
--- o
kk
o
i j
=
Main Index
315
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Hills Yield Function
Hills yield surface has been widely used both as a yield surface and as a failure surface for anisotropic
and composite materials. Hills yield function is a generalization of von Mises as expressed below.
(10-116)
Note the following points about Hills surface:
1. It degenerates into von Mises surface when all three direct yield stresses are equal
(Fx = Fy = Fz) and all three shear yield stresses are equal.
2. It is invariant with respect to hydrostatic stress, as is von Mises.
3. Hill's surface, unlike von Mises, is not always an ellipsoid in stress space. When it is not an
ellipsoid, it is not appropriate for use as a yield function (since it does not have an inside and an
outside, thereby dividing stress space into elastic and plastic regions).
Mohr-Coulomb Material (Hydrostatic Stress Dependence)
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear includes options for elastic-plastic behavior based on a yield surface
that exhibits hydrostatic stress dependence. Such behavior is observed in a wide class of soil and
rock-like materials. These materials are generally classified as Mohr-Coulomb materials (generalized
von Mises materials). Ice is also thought to be a Mohr-Coulomb material. The generalized
Mohr-Coulomb model developed by Drucker and Prager is implemented in MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear. There are two types of Mohr-Coulomb materials: linear and parabolic. Each is discussed on
the following pages.
o
xx
Fx
--------
\ .
| |
2
o
yy
Fy
--------
\ .
| |
2
o
zz
Fz
--------
\ .
| |
2
+ +
1
F
x
2
------
1
F
y
2
------
1
F
z
2
------ +
\ .
|
| |
o
xx
o
yy
1
F
x
2
------
1
F
y
2
------
1
F
z
2
------ +
\ .
|
| |
o
xx
o
zz
1
F
x
2
------
1
F
y
2
------
1
F
z
2
------ + +
\ .
|
| |
o
yy
o
zz
+
t
xy
F
xy
--------
\ .
| |
2
t
yz
F
yz
--------
\ .
| |
2
t
zx
F
zx
--------
\ .
| |
2
+ + 1 =
Main Index
Inelastic
316
Linear Mohr-Coulomb Material
The deviatoric yield function, as shown in Figure 10-21, is assumed to be a linear function of the
hydrostatic stress.
(10-117)
where
(10-118)
(10-119)
The constants and can be related to and by
(10-120)
where is the cohesion and is the angle of friction.
Figure 10-21 Yield Envelope of Plane Strain (Linear Mohr-Coulomb Material)
Parabolic Mohr-Coulomb Material
The hydrostatic dependence is generalized to give a yield envelope which is parabolic in the case of plane
strain (see Figure 10-22).
(10-121)
f oJ
1
J
2
1 2
o
3
------- + 0 = =
J
1
o
i i
=
J
2
1
2
--- o'
i j
o'
i j
=
o o c |
c
o
3 1 12o
2
( ) | |
1 2
----------------------------------------------
3o
1 3o
2
( )
1 2
---------------------------------- ; | sin = =
c |
Yield Envelope
c
o
|
R
o
x
+ o
y
2
t
f 3J
2
3|oJ
1
+ ( )
1 2
o 0 = =
Main Index
317
CHAPTER 10
Materials
(10-122)
where is the cohesion.
Figure 10-22 Resultant Yield Condition of Plane Strain (Parabolic Mohr-Coulomb Material
Buyukozturk Criterion (Hydrostatic Stress Dependence)
The Buyukozturk concrete plasticity model is a particular form of the generalized Drucker-Prager
plasticity model, which is developed specifically for plane stress cases by Buyukozturk. This yield
criterion, which originally has been proposed as a failure criterion, has the general form:
(10-123)
The Buyukozturk criterion reduces to the parabolic Mohr-Coulomb criterion if .
Oak Ridge National Laboratory Options
Oak Ridge National Laboratory (ORNL) has performed a large number of creep tests on stainless and
other alloy steels. It has also set certain rules that characterize creep behavior for application in the
nuclear structures. A summary of the ORNL rules on creep is discussed in Marc Volume A, Theory and
User Information. In MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, the ORNL options are based on the definitions
of ORNL-TM- 3602 [1] for stainless steels and ORNL recommendations [2] for 2 1/4 Cr-1 Mo steel.
The initial yield stress should be used for the initial inelastic loading calculations for both the stainless
steels and 2 1/4 Cr-1 Mo steel. The 10th-cycle yield stress should be used for the hardened material. The
100th-cycle yield stress must be used in the following circumstances:
1. To accommodate cyclic softening of 2 1/4 Cr-1 Mo steel after many load cycles.
2. After a long period of high temperature exposure.
3. After the occurrence of creep strain.
|
o
3 3c
2
o
2
( ) ( )
1 2
--------------------------------------------- =
o
2
3 c
2 o
2
3
------
\ .
| |
=
c
c2
c
o
R
o
x
+ o
y
2
o
t
f | 3oJ
1
J
1
2
3J
2
o
2
+ + =
0 =
Main Index
Inelastic
318
Work Hardening Rules
The work-hardening rule defines the way the yield surface changes with plastic straining. A material is
said to be perfectly plastic if, upon the stress state touching the yield surface, an infinitesimal increase
in stress causes an arbitrarily large plastic strain. MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear models all materials
as work hardening, and treats perfectly plastic materials as a special case. Because the tangent stiffness
method is used, no difficulties arise in setting the work hardening slope equal to zero. Besides perfect
plasticity, three possibilities are provided: isotropic hardening and kinematic hardening.
The isotropic workhardening rule assumes that the center of the yield surface remains stationary in the
stress space, but that the size (radius) of the yield surface expands, due to workhardening. This type of
hardening is appropriate when the straining is the same in all directions.
For many materials, the isotropic workhardening model is inaccurate if unloading occurs (as in cyclic
loading problems). For these problems, the kinematic hardening model or the combined hardening model
represents the material better.
Isotropic, Kinematic, and Combined Hardening
The isotropic workhardening rule assumes that the center of the yield surface remains stationary in the
stress space, but that the size (radius) of the yield surface expands, due to workhardening. The change of
the von Mises yield surface is plotted in Figure 10-23b.
A review of the load path of a uniaxial test that involves both the loading and unloading of a specimen
will assist in describing the isotropic workhardening rule. The specimen is first loaded from stress free
(point 0) to initial yield at point 1, as shown in Figure 10-23a. It is then continuously loaded to point 2.
Then, unloading from 2 to 3 following the elastic slope E (Youngs modulus) and then elastic reloading
from 3 to 2 takes place. Finally, the specimen is plastically loaded again from 2 to 4 and elastically
unloaded from 4 to 5. Reverse plastic loading occurs between 5 and 6.
It is obvious that the stress at 1 is equal to the initial yield stress and stresses at points 2 and 4 are larger
than , due to workhardening. During unloading, the stress state can remain elastic (for example, point
3), or it can reach a subsequent (reversed) yield point (for example, point 5). The isotropic workhardening
rule states that the reverse yield occurs at current stress level in the reversed direction.
Original
Hardened
Isotropic Hardening Kinematic Hardening
o
y
o
y
Main Index
319
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Figure 10-23 Schematic of Isotropic Hardening Rule (Uniaxial Test)
Let be the stress level at point 4. Then, the reverse yield can only take place at a stress level of
(point 5).
For many materials, the isotropic workhardening model is inaccurate if unloading occurs (as in cyclic
loading problems). For these problems, the kinematic hardening model or the combined hardening
model represents the material better.
6
5
1
2
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
E
E
E
+o4
o
o
y
o4
4
3
0
(a) Loading Path
(b) von Mises Yield Surface
o'
3
o'
2
o'
1
o
4
o
4
Main Index
Inelastic
320
Kinematic Hardening
Under the kinematic hardening rule, the von Mises yield surface does not change in size or shape, but the
center of the yield surface can move in stress space. Figure 10-23d illustrates this condition. Zieglers law
is used to define the translation of the yield surface in the stress space.
The loading path of a uniaxial test is shown in Figure 10-23c. The specimen is loaded in the following
order: from stress free (point 0) to initial yield (point 1), 2 (loading), 3 (unloading), 2 (reloading), 4
(loading), 5 and 6 (unloading). As in isotropic hardening, stress at 1 is equal to the initial yield stress ,
and stresses at 2 and 4 are higher than , due to workhardening. Point 3 is elastic, and reverse yield takes
place at point 5. Under the kinematic hardening rule, the reverse yield occurs at the level of
, rather than at the stress level of . Similarly, if the specimen is loaded to a higher stress
level (point 7), and then unloaded to the subsequent yield point 8, the stress at point 8 is
. If the specimen is unloaded from a (tensile) stress state (such as point 4 and 7), the
reverse yield can occur at a stress state in either the reverse (point 5) or the same (point 8) direction.
For many materials, the kinematic hardening model gives a better representation of loading/unloading
behavior than the isotropic hardening model. For cyclic loading, however, the kinematic hardening
model can represent neither cyclic hardening nor cyclic softening.
Combined Hardening
Figure 10-25 shows a material with highly nonlinear hardening. Here, the initial hardening is assumed to
be almost entirely isotropic, but after some plastic straining, the elastic range attains an essentially
constant value (that is, pure kinematic hardening). The basic assumption of the combined hardening
model is that such behavior is reasonably approximated by a classical constant kinematic hardening
constraint, with the superposition of initial isotropic hardening. The isotropic hardening rate eventually
decays to zero as a function of the equivalent plastic strain measured by
(10-124)
Figure 10-24 Basic Uniaxial Tension Behavior of the Combined Hardening Model
o
y
o
y
o
5
o
4
2o
y
( ) = o
4
o
7
o
8
o
7
2o
y
( ) =
c
p
c
p
dt
}
2
3
---
c
i j
p
c
i j
p
\ .
| |
1 2
dt
}
= =
Fully Hardened
Pure Kinematic
Range
Combined
Hardening
Range
Initial
Elastic
Range
Initial
Yield
One-half Current
Elastic Range
o
c
3
2
do
dc
p
Kinematic Slope,
Stress
Strain
Main Index
321
CHAPTER 10
Materials
This implies a constant shift of the center of the elastic domain, with a growth of elastic domain around
this center until pure kinematic hardening is attained. In this model, there is a variable proportion
between the isotropic and kinematic contributions that depends on the extent of plastic deformation (as
measured by ).
The workhardening data at small strains governs the isotropic behavior, and the data at large strains
( ) governs the kinematic hardening behavior. If the last workhardening slope is zero, the
behavior is the same as the isotropic hardening model.
Experimental Determination of Work Hardening Slope
In a uniaxial test, the workhardening slope is defined as the slope of the stress-plastic strain curve. The
workhardening slope relates the incremental stress to incremental plastic strain in the inelastic region and
dictates the conditions of subsequent yielding. A number of workhardening rules (isotropic, kinematic,
and combined) are available in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear. A description of these workhardening
rules is given below. The uniaxial stress-plastic strain curve can be represented by a piecewise linear
function or through the user subroutine WKSLP. This requires the use of MARCIN to specify the MARC
WORKHARD option.
Figure 10-25 Workhardening Slopes
c
p
c
p
1000 >
E E E E
Strain
Stress
Ac
1
p
o
Ao3
Ao2
Ao1
Ac
2
p
Ac
3
p
Main Index
Inelastic
322
You enter a table of yield stress, plastic strain points.
The yield stress and the workhardening data must be compatible with the procedure used in the analysis.
For small strain analyses, the engineering stress and engineering strain are appropriate. If only
PARAM,LGDISP is used, the yield stress should be entered as the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress, and the
workhard data be given with respect to plastic Green-Lagrange strains. If PARAM,LGDISP,1 or 2 are
used, the yield stress must be defined as a true or Cauchy stress, and the workhardening data with respect
to logarithmic plastic strains. Engineering stress and strain may be defined and Bulk Data parameter
MRTABLS1 used to provide the program with rules to convert to the proper stress and strain measures.
Flow Rules
Yield stress and workhardening rules are two experimentally related phenomena that characterize plastic
material behavior. The flow rule is also essential in establishing the incremental stress-strain relations for
plastic material. The flow rule describes the differential changes in the plastic strain components as
a function of the current stress state. So long as a material point is elastic, Hookes law provides a
relationship between total stress and strain. After a material becomes plastic, however, there is no longer
a unique relationship between total stress and strain. The problem then is usually solved incrementally,
following the exact loading path.
For points which are plastic, a flow rule is used to relate increments of stress to plastic strain. MSC
Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses an associated flow rule, which prescribes that increments of plastic strain
are computed as a constant times the gradient of the yield function.
In other words, considering the yield function as a surface in stress space, the plastic strain increment is
a vector in the direction of the outward normal to the surface at the point where it is touched by the
stresses on the loading path.
Ao
1
Ac
1
p
----------
Ao
2
Ac
2
p
----------
Ao
3
Ac
3
p
----------
0.0
Ac
1
p
Ac
1
p
Ac
2
p
+
Slope Breakpoint
Note: The data points should be based on a plot of the stress versus plastic strain for a tensile test.
The elastic strain components should not be included.
dc
p
Main Index
323
CHAPTER 10
Materials
The equation representing this is:
(10-125)
where is a constant. Writing the six equations explicitly:
(10-126)
These stress vs. plastic strain equations are analogous to the stress vs. total strain equations of elasticity,
where elastic strains can be computed as the gradient of a strain energy potential function, namely;
(10-127)
Thus, the yield function F plays the role of a plastic potential. If a theory of plasticity uses something
other than the yield function as a plastic potential, a so-called nonassociated flow rule results.
Nonassociated flow rules are not available in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
For the von Mises and modified Hill yield functions programmed in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear,
the derivatives in the yield function are obtained simply by differentiating with respect to individual
components of stress. For example, for the modified Hill function, we have:
dc
i j
p

cF
co
i j
---------- =
dc
xx
p
cF
co
xx
------------ =
dc
yy
p
cF
co
yy
------------ =
dc
zz
p
cF
co
zz
----------- =
dc
xy
p
cF
ct
xy
----------- =
dc
yz
p
cF
ct
yz
---------- =
dc
zx
p
cF
ct
xz
---------- =
dc
i j
cU
co
i j
---------- =
Main Index
Inelastic
324
(10-128)
The constant in these flow rule equations is evaluated automatically by MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
on the basis of material stability during plastic flow (i.e., by the requirement that the stress state remain
on the yield surface during plastic straining).
The Prandtl-Reuss representation of the flow rule is available in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear. In
conjunction with the von Mises yield function, this can be represented as:
(10-129)
where and are equivalent plastic strain increment and equivalent stress, respectively.
The significance of this representation is illustrated in Figure 10-26. This figure illustrates the
stress-space for the two-dimensional case. The solid curve gives the yield surface (locus of all stress
states causing yield) as defined by the von Mises criterion.
Equation (10-139) expresses the condition that the direction of inelastic straining is normal to the yield
surface. This condition is called either the normality condition or the associated flow rule.
If the von Mises yield surface is used, then the normal is equal to the deviatoric stress.
dc
xx
p

2o
xx
F
x
2
------------
o
yy
F
x
F
y
------------
o
zz
F
x
F
z
------------ =
dc
yy
p

o
xx
F
x
F
y
------------
2o
yy
F
y
2
------------
o
zz
F
y
F
z
------------ + =
dc
zz
p

o
xx
F
x
F
z
------------
o
yy
F
y
F
z
------------
2o
zz
F
z
2
----------- + =
dc
xy
p

o
xy
F
xy
2
--------- =
dc
yz
2

o
xz
F
yz
2
-------- =
dc
zx
p

o
yz
F
zx
2
-------- =
dc
i j
p
dc
p
co
co
i j
'
------------ =
dc
p
o
Main Index
325
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Figure 10-26 Yield Surface and Normality Criterion 2-D Stress Space
Rate Dependent Yield
Strain rate effects cause the structural response of a body to change because they influence the material
properties of the body. These material changes lead to an instantaneous change in the strength of the
material. Strain rate effects become more pronounced for temperatures greater than half the melting
temperature ( ), but are sometimes present even at room temperature. The following discussion
explains the effect of strain rate on the size of the yield surface.
Using the von Mises yield condition and normality rule, we obtain an expression for the stress rate of
the form
For elastic-plastic response
(10-130)
and
(10-131)
where
(10-132)
Yield Surface
o
2
dc2
dcp
dcp
1
o
1
p
T
m
o
i j
L
i j kl
c
kl
r
i j
c
p
+ =
L
i j kl
C
i j kl
C
i j mn

co
co
mn
-------------
co
co
pq
------------ C
pqkl
\ .
| |
D =
r
i j
C
i j mn

co
co
mn
-------------
2
3
--- o
co
cc
p
-------- D =
D
4
9
--- o
2

co
cc
p
--------
co
co
i j
---------- C
i j kl

co
co
kl
----------- + =
Main Index
Inelastic
326
As strain rates increase, many materials show an increase in yield strength. The model provided in MSC
Nastran Implicit Nonlinear for this purpose is
where:
Yield stress variation with strain rate is given using one of three options:
1. The breakpoints and slopes for a piecewise linear approximation to the yield stress strain rate
curve are given. The strain rate breakpoints should be in ascending order, or
2. The Cowper and Symonds model is used. The yield behavior is assumed to be completely
determined by one stress-strain curve and a scale factor depending on the strain rate.
Perfectly Plastic
A material is said to be perfectly plastic if, upon the stress state touching the yield surface, an
infinitesimal increase in stress causes an arbitrarily large plastic strain. The uniaxial stress-strain diagram
for an elastic-perfectly plastic material is shown in Figure 10-27. Some materials, such as mild steel,
behave in a manner which is close to perfectly plastic.
= the uniaxial equivalent plastic strain rate
= the effective yield stress at a non-zero strain rate
= the static yield stress (which may depend on the equivalent plastic strain,
, via isotropic hardening, or on the temperature, .
= are material parameters that may be functions of temperature. and are
defined on the input forms. This model is effective in both static and
dynamic procedures.
c
D
o
o
0
------ 1
\ .
| |
P
for o o
0
> =
c
pl
o
o
0
c
pl
T , ( )
c
pl
T
D T ( ) p T ( ) ,
D p
Note: If multiple material models are used, they must all be expressed as piecewise linear, or as
Cowper and Symonds model.
Main Index
327
CHAPTER 10
Materials
.
Figure 10-27 Perfectly Plastic Material Stress-Strain Relationship
Experimental Stress-Strain Curves
Metals
In uniaxial tension tests of most metals (and many other materials), the following phenomena can be
observed. If the stress in the specimen is below the yield stress of the material, the material behaves
elastically and the stress in the specimen is proportional to the strain. If the stress in the specimen is
greater than the yield stress, the material no longer exhibits elastic behavior, and the stress-strain
relationship becomes nonlinear. Figure 10-28 shows a typical uniaxial stress-strain curve. Both the
elastic and inelastic regions are indicated.
Figure 10-28 Typical Uniaxial Stress-Strain Curve (Uniaxial Test)
x x
oxx
YS
E
1
Note: Stress and strain are total quantities.
Stress Inelastic
Region
Elastic Region
Yield
Stress
Strain
Main Index
Inelastic
328
Within the elastic region, the stress-strain relationship is unique. As illustrated in , if the stress in the
specimen is increased (loading) from zero (point 0) to (point 1), and then decreased (unloading) to
zero, the strain in the specimen is also increased from zero to , and then returned to zero. The elastic
strain is completely recovered upon the release of stress in the specimen.
The loading-unloading situation in the inelastic region is different from the elastic behavior. If the
specimen is loaded beyond yield to point 2, where the stress in the specimen is and the total strain is
, upon release of the stress in the specimen the elastic strain, , is completely recovered. However,
the inelastic (plastic) strain, , remains in the specimen. Figure 10-29 illustrates this relationship.
Similarly, if the specimen is loaded to point 3 and then unloaded to zero stress state, the plastic strain
remains in the specimen. It is obvious that is not equal to . We can conclude that in the
inelastic region:
Plastic strain permanently remains in the specimen upon removal of stress.
The amount of plastic strain remaining in the specimen is dependent upon the stress level at
which the unloading starts (path-dependent behavior).
The uniaxial stress-strain curve is usually plotted for total quantities (total stress versus total strain). The
total stress-strain curve shown in Figure 10-29 can be replotted as a total stress versus plastic strain curve,
as shown in Figure 10-30. The slope of the total stress versus plastic strain curve is defined as the
workhardening slope (H) of the material. The workhardening slope is a function of plastic strain.

Figure 10-29 Schematic of Simple Loading - Unloading (Uniaxial Test)
o
1
c
1
o
2
c
2
c
2
e
c
2
p
c
3
p
c
2
p
c
3
p
Stress
Total Strain = Strain and Elastic Strain
Yield Stress
Strain
c
2
c
2
p
c
2
e
+ =
c
3
c
3
p
c
3
e
+ =
o
y
o
3
o
2
o
1
c
3
c
2
c
1
c
3
p
c
3
e
c
2
e
c
2
p
0
1
2
3
Main Index
329
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Figure 10-30 Definition of Workhardening Slope (Uniaxial Test)
The stress-strain curve shown in Figure 10-29 is directly plotted from experimental data. It can be
simplified for the purpose of numerical modeling. A few simplifications are shown in Figure 10-31 and
are listed below:
1. Bilinear representation constant workhardening slope.
2. Elastic perfectly-plastic material no workhardening.
3. Perfectly-plastic material no workhardening and no elastic response.
4. Piecewise linear representation multiple constant workhardening slopes.
5. Strain-softening material negative workhardening slope.
In addition to elastic material constants (Youngs modulus and Poissons ratio), it is essential to include
yield stress and workhardening slopes when dealing with inelastic (plastic) material behavior. These
quantities can vary with parameters such as temperature and strain rate. Since the yield stress is generally
measured from uniaxial tests, and the stresses in real structures are usually multiaxial, the yield condition
of a multiaxial stress state must be considered. The conditions of subsequent yield (workhardening rules)
must also be studied.
Plastic Strain
H = tan u (Workhardening Slope)
= do/dc
p
u
c
p
o
Total Stress
Main Index
Inelastic
330
Figure 10-31 Simplified Stress-Strain Curves (Uniaxial Test)
Geological Materials
Data for geological materials are most commonly available from triaxial compression testing. In such a
test, the specimen is confined by pressure and an additional compression stress is superposed in one
direction. Thus, the principal stresses are all negative, with .
Figure 10-32 Triaxial Compression and Tension
o
c
(1) Bilinear Representation
o
c
(3) Perfectly Plastic
o
c
(5) Strain Softening
o
c
(2) Elastic-Perfectly Plastic
o
c
(4) Piecewise Linear Representation
0 o
1
> o
2
o
3
> =
-o
3
o
2
o
1
=o
2
>o
3
-o
1
o
3
o
1
o
1
>o
2
=o
3
o
2
Main Index
331
CHAPTER 10
Materials
The values of the stress invariants in a uniaxial compression experiment are:
p=-{1/3}(2o
1
+o
3
)
q=o
1
-o
3
r
3
=-(o
1
-o
3
)
3

so that t=q=o
1
-o
3

The triaxial results may thus be plotted in the t-p plane shown above. Fitting the best straight line through
the results then provides | and d.
Triaxial tension data are also needed to define K. Under triaxial tension, the specimen is again confined
by pressure, then the pressure in one direction is reduced. In this case, the principal stresses are
.
The stress invariants are now:
p=-{1/3}(o
1
+2o
3
),
q=o
1
-o
3,
r
3
=(o
1
-o
3
)
3
,
so that t={q/K}={1/K}(o
1
-o
3
)
K may thus be found by plotting these test results as q versus p and again fitting the best straight line.
The triaxial compression and tension lines must intercept the p-axis at the same point, and the ratio of
values of q for triaxial tension and compression at the same value of p then gives K as shown in
Figure 10-33.
Figure 10-33 Triaxial Compression and Tension Data
o
1
o
2
> o
3
=
q
p

ht hc
d
Best fit to triaxial
tension data
Best fit to triaxial
compression data
|
Main Index
Inelastic
332
Matching Mohr-Coulomb Parameters
Sometimes, experimental data are not directly available. Instead, the user is provided with the friction
angle and cohesion values for the Mohr-Coulomb model. We, therefore, need to calculate values
for the parameters of the Drucker-Prager model to provide a reasonable match to the
Mohr-Coulomb parameters.
The Mohr-Coulomb failure model is based on plotting Mohrs circle for states of stress at failure in the
plane of the maximum and minimum principal stresses. The failure line is the best straight line that
touches these Mohrs circles.
The Mohr-Coulomb model is thus
s+o
m
sin-c cos=0,
where s={1/2}(o
1
-o
3
)
is half of the difference between the maximum and minimum principal stresses (and is, therefore, the
maximum shear stress), and
o
m
={1/2}(o
1
+o
3
)
is the average of the maximum and minimum principal stresses.
We see that the Mohr-Coulomb model assumes that failure is independent of the value of the intermediate
principal stress. The Drucker-Prager model does not. The failure of typical geotechnical materials
generally includes some small dependence on the intermediate principal stress.
Matching Triaxial Test Response
One approach to matching Mohr-Coulomb and Drucker-Prager model parameters is to make the two
models provide the same failure definition in triaxial compression and tension. For this purpose, we can
rewrite the Mohr-Coulomb model in terms of principal stresses.
(10-133)
Using the results above (for the stress invariants p, q, and r), in triaxial compression and tension, allows
the Drucker-Prager model to be written for triaxial compression as
(10-134)
and, for triaxial tension, as
(10-135)
o
1
o
3
o
1
o
3
+ ( ) | ( ) 2c | cos sin + 0 =
o
1
o
3
| tan
2
1
3
--- | tan +
\ .
| |
------------------------------- o
1
o
3
+ ( )
1
1
3
--- | tan
1
1
6
--- | tan +
------------------------- o
c
0
+ + 0 =
o
1
o
3
| tan
2
K
----
1
3
--- | tan
\ .
| |
----------------------------- o
1
o
3
+ ( )
1
1
3
--- | tan
1
K
--- -
1
6
--- | tan
------------------------- o
c
0
+ + 0 =
Main Index
333
CHAPTER 10
Materials
We wish to make the equations for triaxial compression and biaxial tension identical to the general
Mohr-Coulomb equation for all values of (o
1
,o
3
).
Comparing the equations for triaxial compression and triaxial tension requires that:
(10-136)
so that
(10-137)
Comparing the coefficients of (o
1
+o
3
) in the equation for triaxial compression and that for triaxial
tension provides:
(10-138)
and hence, from the derived equation for K:
(10-139)
Finally, comparing the last terms in the general expression for the Mohr-Coulomb model and the
equation for triaxial compression and using the expression for tan| provides:
(10-140)
The expression for tan|, K, and this last expression and thus provide Drucker-Prager parameters that
match the Mohr-Coulomb model in triaxial compression and tension.
The value of K in the Drucker-Prager model is restricted to for the yield surface to remain
convex. Rewriting the expression for K as:
(10-141)
shows that this implies . Many real materials have a larger Mohr-Coulomb friction angle than
this value. In such circumstances, one approach is to choose K = 0.778 and then to use the expression for
tan | to define | and the expression for to define , ignoring the expression for K. This matches the
models for triaxial compression only, while providing the closest approximation that the model can
provide to failure being independent of the intermediate principal stress. If is significantly larger than
22, this approach may provide a poor Drucker-Prager match of the Mohr-Coulomb parameters. MSC
Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses K=1 by default.
1
1
6
--- | tan +
1
K
----
1
6
--- | tan =
K
1
1
1
3
--- | tan +
------------------------- =
|
6 | sin
3 | sin
--------------------- tan
K
3 | sin
3 u sin +
----------------------- =
o
c
0
2c u cos
1 u sin
---------------------- =
K 0.778 >
u sin 3
1 K
1 k +
--------------
\ .
| |
=
| 22 s
o
c
0
o
c
0
Main Index
Inelastic
334
Matching Plane Strain Response
Plane strain problems are often encountered in geotechnical analysis: examples are long tunnels,
footings, and embankments. For this reason, the constitutive model parameters are often matched to
provide the same flow and failure response in plane strain.
The Drucker-Prager flow potential defines the plastic strain increment as:
(10-142)
where is the equivalent plastic strain increment.
Since we only wish to match the behavior in one plane we can assume K=1, which implies that t=q. Then:
(10-143)
Writing this expression in terms of principal stresses provides:
(10-144)
with similar expressions for and .
Assume plane strain in the 1-direction. Then, at limit load, we must have =0. From the above
expression, this provides the constraint:
(10-145)
so that:
(10-146)
Using this constraint, we can rewrite q and p in terms of the principal stresses in the plane of deformation,
(10-147)
and
dc
pl
dc
pl
1
1
1
3
--- tan
--------------------------
o c
c
t p tan ( )
\ .
|
|
| |
=
dc
pl
dc
pl
dc
pl
1
1
1
3
--- tan
--------------------------
\ .
|
|
| |
o c
c
q
o c
cp
tan
\ .
| |
=
dc
1
pl
dc
pl
1
1
1
3
--- tan
--------------------------
\ .
|
|
| |
1
2q
------ 2o
1
o
2
o
3
( )
1
3
--- tan +
\ .
| |
=
dc
2
pl
dc
3
pl
dc
1
pl
1
2q
------ 2o
1
o
2
o
3
( )
1
3
--- tan + 0 =
o
1
1
2
--- o
2
o
3
+ ( )
1
3
--- q tan =
q
3 3
2 9 tan ( )
2
-------------------------------------- o
2
o
3
( ) =
Main Index
335
CHAPTER 10
Materials
(10-148)
With these expressions, the Drucker-Prager yield surface can be written in terms of o
2
and o
3
as
(10-149)
The Mohr-Coulomb yield surface in the (2,3) plane is:
(10-150)
By comparison,
(10-151)
(10-152)
Now consider the two extreme cases of flow definition: associated flow, =|, and nondilatant flow,
when =0.
Assuming associated flow, the last two equations provide:
(10-153)
and
(10-154)
while for nondilatant flow they give and
In either case, is immediately available as:
p
1
2
--- o
2
o
3
+ ( )
tan
2 3 9 tan ( )
2
( )
----------------------------------------------- o
2
o
3
( ) + =
9 | tan tan
2 3 9 tan ( )
2
( )
----------------------------------------------- o
2
o
3
( )
1
2
--- | o
2
o
3
+ ( ) d tan + 0 =
o
2
o
3
o
2
o
3
+ ( ) 2c cos sin + 0 =
sin
| 3 9 tan ( )
2
( ) tan
9 | tan tan
-------------------------------------------------------- =
c cos
3 9 tan ( )
2
( )
9 | tan tan
------------------------------------------- d =
| tan
3 sin
1
1
3
--- sin ( )
2
+
-------------------------------------- =
d
c
---
3 cos
1
1
3
--- sin ( )
2
+
-------------------------------------- =
| tan 3 sin =
d
c
--- cos =
o
c
0
Main Index
Inelastic
336
(10-155)
The difference between these two approaches increases with the friction angle but, for typical friction
angles, the results are not very different, as illustrated in the table below.
Plane strain matching of Drucker-Prager and Mohr-Coulomb models.
As strain rates increase, many materials show an increase in yield strength. This effect often becomes
important when the strain rates are in the range of -0.1 to 1 per second, and can be very important if the
strain rates are in the range of 10 to 100 per second, as commonly occurs in high energy dynamic events
or in manufacturing processes.
Temperature-Dependent Behavior
This section discusses the effects of temperature-dependent plasticity on the constitutive relation.
The following constitutive relations for thermo-plasticity were developed by Naghdi. Temperature
effects are discussed using the isotropic hardening model and the von Mises yield condition.
The stress rate can be expressed in the form
(10-156)
For elastic-plastic behavior, the moduli are
(10-157)
and for purely elastic response
Mohr-Coulomb
Friction Angle, u Associated Flow Nondilatant Flow
Drucker-Prager
friction angle, |
d/c Drucker-Prager friction
angle, |
d/c
10 16.7
1.70
16.7
1.70
20 30.2
1.60
30.6
1.63
30 39.8
1.44
40.9
1.50
40 46.2
1.24
48.1
1.33
50 50.5
1.02
53.0
1.11
o
c
0 1
1
1
3
--- | tan
-------------------------- d =
o
i j
L
i j kl
c
kl
h
i j
T
+ =
L
i j kl
L
i j kl
C
i j kl
C
i j mn

co
co
mn
-------------
co
co
pq
------------ C
pqkl
\ .
| |
D =
Main Index
337
CHAPTER 10
Materials
(10-158)
The term that relates the stress increment to the increment of temperature for elastic-plastic behavior is
(10-159)
and for purely elastic response
(10-160)
where
(10-161)
and
(10-162)
and are the coefficients of thermal expansion.
Temperature-Dependent Stress Strain Curves
Starting in MSC.Nastran 2005, SOL 600 offers the capability of stress-strain curve dependence as a
function of temperature. The user specifies these stress strain curves at different temperatures and then
specifies the temperature to use for each subcase. Linear interpolation between the supplied curves is
used to determine the appropriate curve at the temperature specified for a particular subcase. Marcs AF-
Flowmat capability is used for this capability; therefore, user subroutines do not have to be supplied. This
capability is best explained with an example. See
Install_dir/doc/pdf_nastran/implicit_nonlinear_examples/example_input_files/mattep20.dat.
SOL 600,NLSTATIC path=1 stop=1
TIME 10000
CEND
ECHO = NONE
DISPLACEMENT(plot) = ALL
SPCFORCE(PLOT) = ALL
Stress(PLOT) = ALL
Strain(PLOT) = ALL
SPC = 1
NLPARM = 2
temp(init)=10
subcase 1
temp(load)=11
LOAD = 100
subcase 2
temp(load)=12
LOAD = 200
L
i j kl
C
i j kl
=
h
i j
X
i j
C
i j kl
o
kl
C
i j kl
co
co
kl
----------- o
pq
X
pq
2
3
--- o
co
cT
-------
\ .
| |
\ .
| |
D =
H
i j
X
i j
C
i j kl
o
kl
=
D
4
9
--- o
2

co
cc
p
--------
co
co
i j
---------- C
i j kl

co
co
kl
----------- + =
X
i j
cC
i j kl
cT
---------------
c
kl
e
=
o
kl
Main Index
Inelastic
338
subcase 3
temp(load)=13
LOAD = 300
BEGIN BULK
param,mrafflow,mymat0
param,mrtabls1,4
param,mrtabls2,1
NLPARM 2 10 AUTO 1 20 P
PARAM,LGDISP,1
tempd, 10, 70.
tempd, 11, 110.
tempd, 12, 700.
tempd, 13, 1100.
$LOAD, 20, 1.0, 2.0, 1, 1.0, 2
load, 100, 1., 1., 1
load, 200, 1., -.5, 1
load, 300, 1., 1.1, 1
PLOAD4 1 1 -15.
.
.
.
$ Constraint Set 1 : Untitled
SPC 1 1 123456 0.
SPC 1 8 123456 0.
SPC 1 15 123456 0.
SPC 1 22 123456 0.
SPC 1 29 123456 0.
$ Property 1 : Untitled
PSHELL 1 1 0.125 1 1 0.
$ Material 1 : AISI 4340 Steel
MATEP, 1,TABLE, 35000., 2,CAUCHY,ISOTROP,ADDMEAN
MAT1 1 2.9E+7 0.327.331E-4 6.6E-6 70. +MT 1
+MT 1 215000. 240000. 156000.
MAT4 14.861E-4 38.647.331E-4
$ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
$2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678
MATTEP 1 21
MATT1 1 7
TABLEM1 7
+ 70.0 6.6E-6 1000. 6.5E-6 1200. 6.4E-6 1500. 6.3E-6
+ 2000. 6.2E-6 ENDT
$2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678
TABLEST 21
+ 70.0 31 1000. 32 1200. 33 1500. 34
+ 2000. 35 ENDT
TABLES1, 31
, 0., 15000., 1.0, 16000., 10., 25000., 100., 30000.,
, 99999., 40000., ENDT
TABLES1, 32
, 0., 13000., 1.0, 14000., 10., 23000., 100., 28000.,
, 99999., 28000., ENDT
TABLES1, 33
, 0., 11000., 1.0, 12000., 10., 21000., 100., 26000.,
, 99999., 25000., ENDT
TABLES1, 34
, 0., 9000., 1.0, 10000., 10., 19000., 100., 22000.,
, 99999., 24000., ENDT
TABLES1, 35
, 0., 5000., 1.0, 7000., 10., 9000., 100., 13000.,
, 99999., 15000., ENDT
Main Index
339
CHAPTER 10
Materials
GRID 1 0 0. 0. 0. 0
.
.
.
CQUAD4
.
.
.
ENDDATA
In this input, the stress strain curves are specified by TABLES1 entries. The collection of stress-strain
curves to be used is specified in the TABLEST entry and the corresponding temperatures at which they
apply is specified in the TABLEM1 entry. The TABLEM1 ID is called out in field 7 of the MATT1 entry
and the TABLEST ID is called out in field 5 of the MATTEP entry. TABLEST must list the stress strain
TABLES1 IDs in order of increasing temperature and the first ID must be at the lowest temperature
specified anywhere in the analysis. In this example, it is a temperature of 70 corresponding to
TEMPERATURE(init)=10 in the Case Control. Similarly, the temperatures in the TABLEM1 entry must be
in increasing order. The stress-strain curves should cover the entire range of temperatures for the analysis
so that no extrapolation is needed. The actual temperatures for each subcase are given by the
TEMPERATURE(load) specifications for each subcase.
There is one parameter that is critical to this analysis:
Specifying Elastoplastic Material Entries
Each of the elastoplastic models described in this section can be selected with the MATEP Bulk
Data entry.
param,MRAFFLOW, Name
,mymat0
Name of the file containing temperature dependent stress versus plastic
strain curves in Marcs AF_flowmat format. This file can be generated
from the current MSC Nastran run using TABLEST and TABLES1 entries
or a pre-existing file can be used depending on the value of
PARAM,MRAFFLOR. The extension .mat will be added to Name. If
this is a new file, it will be saved in the directory from which the MSC
Nastran execution is submitted. If a pre-existing file is to be used, it can
either be located in the directory where the MSC Nastran execution is
submitted and run or in the Marc AF_flowmat directory.
Entry Description
MATEP Specifies elasto-plastic material properties to be used for large
deformation analysis.
MATTEP Specifies temperature-dependent elasto-plastic material properties to be used
for static, quasi-static, or transient dynamic analysis.
Main Index
Inelastic
340
To define an inelastic material in Patran:
Create>Isotropic-or-Orthotropic-or-Anisotropic>Manual Input.
2. Click Input Properties..., and select Elastoplastic from the Constitutive Model pull-down menu.
The required properties for describing elasticplastic behavior vary based on material type, dimension,
type of nonlinear data input, hardening rule, yield criteria, strain rate method, and thermal dependencies.
The table below shows the various input options and criteria available to you for defining
elastoplastic behavior.
Elastoplastic Model Summary
Constitutive
Model
Nonlinear Data
Input
Hardening
Rule Yield Criteria
Strain Rate
Method
Plastic Stress/Strain
Curve
Isotropic
Kinematic
Combined
von Mises
Tresca
Mohr-Coulomb
Drucker-Prager
Parabolic Mohr-
Coulomb
Buyukozturk
Concrete
Oak Ridge
National Lab
2-1/4 Cr-Mo
ORNL
Reversed
Plasticity ORNL
Full Alpha Reset
ORNL
Piecewise
Linear
Cowper-
Symonds
Hardening
Slope
Isotropic
Kinematic
Combined
von Mises
Tresca
Mohr-Coulomb
Drucker-Prager
None
Main Index
341
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Nonlinear Data Input
The type of nonlinear data input you choose to use to define elastoplastic material behavior determines
the input data required for the Input Properties subform on the Materials Application form.
Stress/Strain Curve - All stress-strain curves are input as piecewise linear. Patran transfers the
stress-strain curve input on the material property field directly to the TABLES1 entry.
Constitutive
Model Type
Hardening
Rule Yield Criteria
Strain Rate
Method
Plastic Perfectly
Plastic
None von Mises
Linear Mohr-
Coulomb
Parabolic Mohr-
Coulomb
Buyukozturk
Concrete
Oak Ridge
National Lab
2-1/4 Cr-Mo
ORNL
Reversed
Plasticity ORNL
Full Alpha Reset
ORNL
Piecewise
Linear
Cowper-
Symonds
Power Law
Rate Power Law
Johnson-Cook
Kumar
Piecewise
Linear
None Piecewise
Linear
Cowper-
Symonds
Elastoplastic Model Summary
Main Index
Inelastic
342
The number of linear segments used to define the stress-strain curve may be different from one
material to another. The same strain breakpoints need not be used for all of the different
materials stress-strain curves. It is recommended to define the stress-strain curves throughout
the range of strains which the analysis is likely to predict. If the analysis predicts a plastic strain
greater than the last point defined by the user, MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear continues the
analysis after shifting the last strain breakpoint on that curve to match the predicted value,
thereby changing (reducing) the work hardening slope for the last segment of the curve.
Hardening Slope - The hardening slope and the yield point are required with this Nonlinear Data
Input option.
Perfectly Plastic - Perfect plasticity is described by simply specifying the yield point.
The tables below provide descriptions for the input data for each of the four types of nonlinear input.
Isotropic - Stress/Strain Curve or Perfectly Plastic:
All Yield Functions
Property Name Description
Stress /Strain Curve

or
Yield Stress
Defines the Cauchy stress vs. logarithmic strain (also called equivalent
tensile stress versus total equivalent strain) by reference to a tabular
field. The field is selected from the Field Definition list. The field is
created using the Fields application. See Fields Create (Spatial, Tabular
Input) (p. 210) in the Patran Reference Manual. For Perfectly Plastic
models, only a Yield Stress needs to be entered.
Can also be strain rate dependent if Strain Rate Method is Piecewise
Linear. Accepts field of yield stress vs. strain rate.
10th Cycle Yield Stress vs.
Plastic Strain
or
10th Cycle Yield Stress
When set to ORNL, accepts field of 10th cycle yield stress vs. plastic
strain. Can be temperature dependent also. For Perfectly Plastic
models, only a 10th Cycle Yield Stress needs to be entered.
Coefficient C Visible if Strain Rate Method is Cowper-Symonds.
Inverse Exponent P Visible if Strain Rate Method is Cowper-Symonds.
Alpha When set to Linear Mohr-Coulomb, defines the slope of the yield
surface in square root J2 versus J1 space. This property is required.
Beta When set to Parabolic Mohr-Coulomb, defines the beta parameter in
the equation that defines the parabolic yield surface in square root J2
versus J1 space. This property is required.
Main Index
343
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Hardening Slope - Nonlinear Data Input
Note: 2 1/4 Cr-Mo ORNL, Reversed Plasticity ORNL, Full Alpha Reset ORNL are the same as
Oak Ridge National Labs. Generalized Plasticity is the same as von Mises.
Perfectly Plastic is identical to Stress/Strain except that no hardening rules apply.
Anisotropic/Orthotropic - Stress/Strain Curve or Perfectly Plastic:
All Yield Functions
Description
Stress vs. Strain
or
Tensile Yield Stress
Same as description for Isotropic Elastic-Plastic. If Strain Rate Method
is Piecewise Linear, accepts field of yield stress vs. strain rate.
Or defines an isotropic yield stress. It is a required property when the
plasticity type is Perfectly Plastic.
Stress 11/22/33 Yield Ratios Defines the ratios of direct yield stresses to the isotropic yield stress in
the elements coordinate system.
Stress 12/23/31 Yield Ratios Defines the ratios of shear yield stresses to the isotropic shear yield
stress (yield divided by square root three) in the elements
coordinate system.
Note: Perfectly Plastic is identical to Elastic-Plastic except that no hardening rules apply. Stress
vs Plastic Strain is replaced with Yield Stress data only as is 10th Cycle Yield vs. Strain
replaced with 10th Cycle Yield Stress data. Thus no tabular data is necessary.
Isotropic/Anisotropic/Orthotropic - Hardening Slope
Hardening Slope Slope of the stress-strain curve once yielding has started.
Yield Point Defines the stress level at which plastic strain begins to develop.
Internal Friction Angle When yield function is set to Mohr-Coulomb or Drucker-Prager this
gives the parameter describing the effect of hydrostatic pressure on the
yield stress.
Main Index
344
One of the nonlinear features of a material's behavior is failure. When a certain criterion (failure criterion)
is met, the material fails and no longer sustains its loading and breaks. In a finite-element method, this
means that the element, where the material reaches the failure limit, cannot carry any stresses anymore.
The stress tensor is effectively zero. The element is flagged for failure, and, essentially, is no longer part
of the structure.
Failure criteria can be defined for a range of materials and element types. The failure models are
referenced from the material definition entries.
Isotropic/Orthotropic/Anisotropic Failure Models
For isotropic, 2-D orthotropic, and 2-D anisotropic materials, you can implement one of five failure
models in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600). Failure models are based on maximum stress
criteria, maximum strain criteria, or one of three composite stress/strain failure theories.
Maximum Stress Criterion
At each integration point, MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear calculates six quantities:
(10-163)
(10-164)
Failure Model Applicable Material Type
Maximum Stress Isotropic, 2-D Orthotropic, 2-D Anisotropic
Maximum Strain 2-D Orthotropic
Hill Isotropic, 2-D Orthotropic (stress or strain based), 2-D Anisotropic
Hoffman Isotropic, 2-D Orthotropic (stress or strain based), 2-D Anisotropic
Tsai-Wu Isotropic, 2-D Orthotropic (stress or strain based), 2-D Anisotropic
o
1
X
t
-------
\ .
|
| |
F
o
1
X
c
------
\ .
|
| |
F
o
1
0 >
o
1
0 <
if
if
1.
o
2
Y
t
------
\ .
|
| |
F
o
2
Y
c
------
\ .
|
| |
F
o
2
0 >
o
2
0 <
if
if
2.
Main Index
345
CHAPTER 10
Materials
(10-165)
(10-166)
(10-167)
(10-168)
where
Maximum Strain Failure Criterion
At each integration point, calculates six quantities:
(10-169)
is the failure index (F =1.0).
are the maximum allowable stresses in the 1-direction in tension and compression.
are maximum allowable stresses in the 2-direction in tension and compression.
are maximum allowed stresses in the 3-direction in tension and compression.
is the maximum allowable in-plane shear stress.
is the maximum allowable 23 shear stress.
is the maximum allowable 31 shear stress.
o
3
Z
t
------
\ .
| |
F
o
3
Z
c
------
\ .
| |
F
o
3
0 >
o
3
0 <
if
if
3.
o
12
S
12
---------
\ .
| |
F
4.
o
23
S
23
--------
\ .
| |
F
5.
o
31
S
31
--------
\ .
| |
F
6.
F
X
t
X
c
,
Y
t
Y
c
,
Z
t
Z
c
,
S
12
S
23
S
31
c
1
e
1t
-------
\ .
| |
F
c
1
e
1c
-------
\ .
| |
F
c
1
0 >
c
1
0 <
if
if
1.
Main Index
346
(10-170)
(10-171)
(10-172)
(10-173)
(10-174)
where
Hill Failure Criterion
Assumptions:
Orthotropic materials only
Incompressibility during plastic deformation
Tensile and compressive behavior are identical
is the failure index (F=1.0).
are the maximum allowable strains in the 1 direction in tension and compression.
is the maximum allowable shear strain in the 12 plane.
c
2
e
2t
-------
\ .
| |
F
c
2
e
2c
-------
\ .
| |
F
c
2
0 >
c
2
0 <
if
if
2.
c
3
e
3t
-------
\ .
| |
F
c
3
e
3c
-------
\ .
| |
F
c
3
0 >
c
3
0 <
if
if
3.
12
g
12
--------
\ .
| |
F
4.
23
g
23
--------
\ .
| |
F
5.
31
g
31
--------
\ .
| |
F
6.
F
e
1t
e
1c
,
e
2t
e
2c
,
e
3t
e
3c
,
g
12
g
23
g
31
Main Index
347
CHAPTER 10
Materials
At each integration point, MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear calculates:
(10-175)
For plane stress condition, it becomes
(10-176)
where
Hoffman Failure Criterion
At each integration point, MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear calculates:
(10-177)
with
is the maximum allowable stress in the 1 direction
are as before
o
1
2
X
2
------
o
2
2
Y
2
------
o
3
2
Z
2
------
1
X
2
------
1
Y
2
------
1
Z
2
------ +
\ .
| |
o
1
o
2
1
X
2
------
1
Z
2
------
1
Y
2
------ +
\ .
| |
o
1
o
3
+ +
1
Y
2
------
1
Z
2
------
1
X
2
------ +
\ .
| |
o
2
o
3
o
12
2
S
12
2
---------
o
13
2
S
13
2
---------
o
23
2
S
23
2
--------- F + + +
o
1
2
X
2
------
o
1
o
2
X
2
-------------
o
2
2
Y
2
------
o
12
2
S
12
2
--------- + +
\ .
|
| |
F
X
Y
Z
S
12
S
23
S
31
F , , ,
Note: Hoffman criterion is essentially Hill criterion modified to allow unequal maximum
allowable stresses in tension and compression.
C
1
o
2
o
3
( )
2
C
2
o
3
o
1
( )
2
C
3
o
1
o
2
( )
2
C
4
o
1
C
5
o
2
+ + + + |
C
6
o
3
C
7
o
23
2
C
8
o
13
2
C
9
o
12
2
| F + + + +
Main Index
348
(10-178)
(10-179)
where: are as before.
Tsai-Wu Failure Criterion
Tsai-Wu is a tensor polynomial failure criterion. At each integration point, MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear calculates:
(10-180)
where are as before.
C
1
1
2
---
1
Z
t
Z
c
-----------
1
Y
t
Y
c
-----------
1
X
t
X
c
----------- +
\ .
| |
=
C
2
1
2
---
1
X
t
X
c
-----------
1
Z
t
Z
c
-----------
1
Y
t
Y
c
----------- +
\ .
| |
=
C
3
1
2
---
1
X
t
X
c
-----------
1
Y
t
Y
c
-----------
1
Z
t
Z
c
----------- +
\ .
| |
=
C
4
1
X
t
-----
1
X
c
------ =
C
5
1
Y
t
----
1
Y
c
----- =
C
6
1
Z
t
----
1
Z
c
----- =
C
7
1
S
23
2
-------- =
C
8
1
S
13
2
-------- =
C
9
1
S
12
2
-------- =
1
X
t
-----
1
X
c
------
\ .
| |
o
1
1
Y
t
----
1
Y
c
-----
\ .
| |
o
2
o
1
2
X
t
X
c
-----------
o
2
2
Y
t
Y
c
-----------
o
12
2
S
12
2
---------
o
1
o
2
X
t
X
c
------------- + + + +
)
`

F
X
t
X
c
Y
t
Y
c
Z
t
Z
c
S
12
S
23
S
31
F , , , , , , , , ,
Note: For small ratios of, for example, , the Hoffman criteria can become negative due to the
presence of the linear terms.
o
1
X
t
------
1
X
t
-----
1
X
c
------
\ .
| |
o
1
1
Y
t
----
1
Y
c
-----
\ .
| |
o
2
1
Z
t
----
1
Z
c
-----
\ .
| |
o
3
o
1
2
X
t
X
c
-----------
o
2
2
Y
t
Y
c
-----------
o
3
2
Z
t
Z
c
----------- + + + + +
t
12
2
S
12
2
--------
t
23
2
S
23
2
--------
t
13
2
S
13
2
-------- 2F
12
o
1
o
2
2F
23
o
2
o
3
2F
13
o
1
o
3
| F + + + + + +
X
t
X
c
Y
t
Y
c
Z
t
Z
c
S
12
S
23
S
31
F , , , , , , , , ,
Main Index
349
CHAPTER 10
Materials
(10-181)
See Wu, R.Y. and Stachurski, 2, Evaluation of the Normal Stress Interaction Parameter in the Tensor
Polynomial Strength Theory for Anisotropic Materials, Journal of Composite Materials, Vol. 18, Sept.
1984, pp. 456-463.
Interlaminar Shear for Thick Shell and Beam Elements
Calculation of interlaminar shear stress (a parabolic distribution through the thickness direction) for
thick shells and beams is available. These interlaminar shears are printed in the local coordinate system
above and below each layer selected for printing. These values are also available for postprocessing.
PARAM,MRTSHEAR,1 must be used for activating the parabolic shear distribution calculations.
In MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, the distribution of transverse shear strains through the thickness for
thick shell and beam elements was assumed to be constant. From basic strength of materials and the
equilibrium of a beam cross section, it is known that the actual distribution is more parabolic in nature.
As an additional option, the formulations for certain beam and shell elements have been modified to
include a parabolic distribution of transverse shear strain. The formulation is exact for Marc beam
element 45, but is approximate for Marc thick shell elements 22, 75, and 140. Nevertheless, the
approximation is expected to give improved results from the previous constant shear distribution.
Furthermore, interlaminar shear stresses for composite beams and shells can be easily calculated.
With the assumption that the stresses in the and direction are uncoupled, the equilibrium condition
through the thickness is given by
(10-182)
where is the layer axial stress; is the layer shear stress. From beam theory, we have
(10-183)
Interactive strength constant for the 12 plane
F
12
F
23
F
13
1
X
t
-----
1
X
c
------
\ .
| |
o
1
1
Y
2
------
1
Y
c
-----
\ .
| |
o
2
o
1
2
X
t
X
c
-----------
o
2
2
Y
t
Y
c
-----------
o
12
2
S
12
--------- 2F
12
o
1
o
2
+ + + + +
)
`

F
Note: In order for the Tsai-Wu failure surface to be closed,
F
12
2
1
X
t
X
c
------------
1
Y
t
Y
c
----------- - < F
23
2
1
Y
t
Y
c
-----------
1
Z
t
Z
c
----------- - < F
31
2
1
X
t
X
c
-----------
1
Z
t
Z
c
----------- - <
V
1
V
2
ct z ( )
cz
-------------
co z ( )
cx
-------------- + 0 =
o z ( ) t t ( )
V
cM
cx
-------- + 0 =
Main Index
350
where is the section bending moment and is the shear force. Assuming that
(10-184)
by taking the derivative of Equation (10-184) with respect to x, substituting the result into Equation
(10-182), using Equation (10-183) and integrating, we obtain
(10-185)
The function is given from beam theory as
(10-186)
where is the layer initial Youngs modulus, is the location of the neutral axis and is the section
bending moment of inertia. Equation (10-186) and Equation (10-184) express the usual bending relation
(10-187)
except that these two equations are written so that the axis is not necessarily the neutral axis of
bending. With respect to this axis, membrane and bending action is, in general, coupled. Note that
(10-188)
and stress at the top and bottom surface of the shell.
Interlaminar Stresses for Continuum Composite Elements
In MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, the interlaminar shear and normal stresses are calculated by
averaging the stresses in the stacked layers. The stresses are transformed into a component tangent to the
interface and a component normal to the interface. The two components, considered as shear stress and
normal stress, respectively, are printed out in the output file.
Progressive Composite Failure
A model has been put into MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear to allow the progressive failure of certain
types of composite materials. The aspects of this model are defined below:
1. Failure occurs when any one of the failure criteria is satisfied.
2. The behavior up to the failure point is linear elastic.
M V
o z ( ) f z ( )M =
t z ( ) f z ( )dz V -
z
}
=
f z ( )
f z ( )
E
0
z ( )
EI
-------------- z z ( ) =
E
0
z ( ) z EI
o z ( )
Mz
I
------- =
z 0 =
z
zE z ( )dz
z
}
E z ( )dz
z
}
----------------------- =
t z ( ) 0 =
Main Index
351
CHAPTER 10
Materials
3. Upon failure, the material moduli for orthotropic materials at the integration points are changed
such that all of the moduli have the lowest moduli entered.
4. Upon failure, for isotropic materials, the failed moduli are taken as 10% of the original moduli.
5. If there is only one modulus, such as in a beam or truss problem, the failed modulus is taken as
10% of the original one.
6. There is no healing of the material.
Specifying the Failure Criteria
Any of the failure models described above can be selected with the MATF Bulk Data entry.
Defining Failure Models in Patran
To define a Failure Model in Patran:
1. From the Materials Application form, set the Action>Object>Method combination to one of the
following:
Create>Isotropic>Manual Input
Create>2D Orthotropic>Manual Input
Create>2D Anisotropic>Manual Input
2. Click on Input Properties.... , and choose Failure from the Constitutive Model pull-down menu.
3. If the failure model applies to a 2-D orthotropic material, you can select Stress or Strain from
the Failure Limit pull-down menu.
Entry Description
MATF Specifies failure model properties for linear elastic materials to be used for
static, quasi static or transient dynamic analysis in MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear.
Main Index
352
Isotropic Material Input Data
Isotropic materials require the following failure model data via the Input Options subform on the
Main Index
353
CHAPTER 10
Materials
2-D Orthotropic Material Input Data
2-D orthotropic materials require the following failure model data via the Input Options subform on the
2-D Anisotropic Material Input Data
2-D anisotropic materials require the following failure model data via the Input Options subform on the
Failure Theory : Hill, Hoffman, Tsai-Wu, Maximum Stress
Tension Stress Limit Defines the tension stress (or strain) limits in the elements
coordinate system.
Compression Stress Limit Defines the compression stress (or strain) limits in the elements
coordinate system. Absolute values are used.
Shear Stress Limit Defines the shear stress (or strain) limits.
Failure Theory : Hill, Hoffman, Tsai-Wu, Maximum Stress, Maximum Strain
Tension Stress (Strain)
Limit 11
Defines the tension stress (or strain) limits in direction 1 of the
elements coordinate system.
Tension Stress (Strain)
Limit 22
Defines the tension stress (or strain) limits in direction 2 of the
elements coordinate system.
Compression Stress (Strain) Limit 11 Defines the compression stress (or strain) limits in direction 1
of the elements coordinate system. Absolute values are used.
Compression Stress (Strain) Limit 22 Defines the compression stress (or strain) limits in direction 2
of the elements coordinate system. Absolute values are used.
Shear Stress (Strain) Limit Defines the shear stress (or strain) limits.
Interaction Term Defines the stress interaction parameter.
Main Index
354
Damage Models
In many structural applications, the finite element method is used to predict failure. This is often
performed by comparing the calculated solution to some failure criteria, or by using classical
fracture mechanics.
Ductile Metals
In ductile materials given the appropriate loading conditions, voids will form in the material, grow, then
coalesce, leading to crack formation and potentially, failure. Experimental studies have shown that these
processes are strongly influenced by hydrostatic stress. Gurson studied microscopic voids in materials
and derived a set of modified constitutive equations for elastic-plastic materials. Tvergaard and
Needleman modified the model with respect to the behavior for small void volume fractions and for
void coalescence.
In the modified Gurson model, the amount of damage is indicated with a scalar parameter called the
void volume fraction f. The yield criterion for the macroscopic assembly of voids and matrix material is
given by:
(10-189)
as seen in Figure 10-34.
Failure Theory : Hill, Hoffman, Tsai-Wu, Maximum Stress
Tension Stress Limit Defines the tension stress (or strain) limits in the elements
coordinate system.
Compression Stress Limit Defines the compression stress (or strain) limits in the elements
coordinate system. Absolute values are used.
Shear Stress Limit Defines the shear stress (or strain) limits.
F
o
o
y
------
\ .
| |
2
2q
1
f
-
q
2
o
kk
2o
y
--------------
\ .
|
| |
1 q
1
f
-
( )
2
+ | | cosh + 0 = =
Main Index
355
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Figure 10-34 Plot of Yield Surfaces in Gurson Model
The parameter was introduced by Tvergaard to improve the Gurson model at small values of the void
volume fraction. For solids with periodically spaced voids, numerical studies [10] showed that the values
of and were quite accurate.
The evolution of damage as measured by the void volume fraction is due to void nucleation and growth.
Void nucleation occurs by debonding of second phase particles. The strain for nucleation depends on the
particle sizes. Assuming a normal distribution of particle sizes, the nucleation of voids is itself modeled
as a normal distribution in the strains, if nucleation is strain controlled. If void nucleation is assumed to
be stress controlled in the matrix, a normal distribution is assumed in the stresses. The original Gurson
model predicts that ultimate failure occurs when the void volume fraction f, reaches unity. This is too
high a value and, hence, the void volume fraction f is replaced by the modified void volume fraction
in the yield function.
The parameter is introduced to model the rapid decrease in load carrying capacity if void
coalescence occurs.
(10-190)
where f
c
is the critical void volume fraction, and is the void volume at failure, and . A safe
choice for would be a value greater than namely, . Hence, you can control the void
volume fraction, , at which the solid loses all stress carrying capability.
Numerical studies show that plasticity starts to localize between voids at void volume fractions as low
as 0.1 to 0.2. You can control the void volume fraction , beyond which void-void interaction is modeled
by MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear. Based on the classical studies, a value of can be chosen.
The existing value of the void volume fraction changes due to the growth of existing voids and due to
the nucleation of new voids.
1.0
0.5
0
0 1 2 3 4
o
e
o
M
f
*
0 =
f
*
f
u
*
0.01 =
o
kk
3o
M
0.9
0.6
0.3
0.1
q
1
q
1
1.5 = q
2
1 =
f
-
f
-
f
-
f =
if f s f
c
f
-
f
c
f
u
*
f
c
f
F
f
c
---------------
\ .
|
| |
f f
c
( ) + = if f > f
c
f
F
f
u
*
1 q
1
=
f
F
1 q
1
( ) f
F
1.1 q
1
=
f
F
f
c
f
c
0.2 =
Main Index
356
(10-191)
The growth of voids can be determined based upon compressibility of the matrix material surrounding
the void.
(10-192)
As mentioned earlier, the nucleation of new voids can be defined as either strain or stress controlled. Both
follow a normal distribution about a mean value.
In the case of strain controlled nucleation, this is given by
(10-193)
where is the volume fraction of void forming particles, the mean strain for void nucleation and
the standard deviation.
In the case of stress controlled nucleation, the rate of nucleation is given by:
(10-194)
If the second phase particle sizes in the solid are widely varied in size, the standard deviation would be
larger than in the case when the particle sizes are more uniform. The MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
user can also input the volume fraction of the nucleating second phase void nucleating particles in the
input deck, as the variable .
A typical set of values for an engineering alloy is given by Tvergaard for strain controlled nucleation as
(10-195)
It must be remarked that the determination of the three above constants from experiments is extremely
difficult. The modeling of the debonding process must itself be studied including the effect of differing
particle sizes in a matrix. It is safe to say that such an experimental study is not possible. The above three
constants must necessarily be obtained by intuition keeping in mind the meaning of the terms.
When the material reaches 90 percent of , the material is considered to be failed. At this point, the
stiffness and the stress at this element are reduced to zero.
Elastomers
Under repeated application of loads, elastomers undergo damage by mechanisms involving chain
breakage, multi-chain damage, micro-void formation, and micro-structural degradation due to
detachment of filler particles from the network entanglement. Two types of phenomenological models
namely, discontinuous and continuous, exists to simulate the phenomenon of damage.
f
growt h
f
nucl eat i on
+ =
f
growt h
1 f ( )
c
kk
p
=
f
nucl eat i on
f
N
S 2t
-------------- exp
1
2
---
c
m
p
c
n
S
------------------ -
\ .
| |
2
m
p
=
f
N
c
n
S
f
nucl eat i on
f
N
S 2t
-------------- exp
1
2
---
o
1
3
--- o
kk
o
n
+
S
------------------------------------
\ .
|
|
| |
2
* o
1
3
--- o
kk + =
f
N
c
n
0.30 ; f
N
0.04 ; S 0.01 = = =
f
F
Main Index
357
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Discontinuous Damage
The discontinuous damage model simulates the Mullins effect as shown in Figure 10-35.
Figure 10-35 Discontinuous Damage
This involves a loss of stiffness below the previously attained maximum strain. The higher the maximum
attained strain, the larger is the loss of stiffness. Upon reloading, the uniaxial stress-strain curve remains
insensitive to prior behavior at strains above the previously attained maximum in a cyclic test. Hence,
there is a progressive stiffness loss with increasing maximum strain amplitude. Also, most of the stiffness
loss takes place in the few earliest cycles provided the maximum strain level is not increased. This
phenomenon is found in both filled as well as natural rubber although the higher levels of carbon black
particles increase the hysteresis and the loss of stiffness. The free energy, W, can be written as:
(10-196)
where is the nominal strain energy function, and
(10-197)
determines the evolution of the discontinuous damage. The reduced form of Clausius-Duhem dissipation
inequality yields the stress as:
(10-198)
Mathematically, the discontinuous damage model has a structure very similar to that of strain space
plasticity. Hence, if a damage surface is defined as:
(10-199)
The loading condition for damage can be expressed in terms of the Kuhn-Tucker conditions:
(10-200)
W K o | , ( )W
0
=
W
0
o max W
0
( ) =
S 2K o | , ( )
cW
0
cC
----------- =
u W o 0 s =
u 0 s o
0 > o
u 0 =
Main Index
358
The consistent tangent can be derived as:
(10-201)
Continuous Damage
The continuous damage model can simulate the damage accumulation for strain cycles for which the
values of effective energy is below the maximum attained value of the past history as shown in
Figure 10-36.
Figure 10-36 Continuous Damage
This model can be used to simulate fatigue behavior. More realistic modeling of fatigue would require a
departure from the phenomenological approach to damage. The evolution of continuous damage
parameter is governed by the arc length of the effective strain energy as:
(10-202)
Hence, | accumulates continuously within the deformation process.
The Kachanov factor is implemented in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear through both an
additive as well as a multiplicative decomposition of these two effects as:
(10-203)
C 4 K
c
2
W
0
cCcC
---------------
cK
cW
0
-----------
cW
0
cC
-----------
cW
0
cC
----------- + =
|
c
cs'
------- W
0
s' ( ) s' d
0
t
}
=
K o | , ( )
K o | , ( ) d
d
n
o

o
q
n
------
\ .
| |
d
n
|

|
n
-----
\ .
| |
exp
n 1 =
2
+ exp
n 1 =
2
+ =
Main Index
359
CHAPTER 10
Materials
(10-204)
You specify the phenomenological parameters and . If is not defined, it is
automatically determined such that, at zero values of and , the Kachanov factor . If,
according to Equation (10-203) or Equation (10-204) the value of exceeds 1, is set back to 1.
The above damage model is available for deviatoric behavior. In addition, viscoelastic behavior can be
included. Finally, the user subroutine, UELDAM available starting in version 2005, can be used to define
damage functions different from Equation (10-211) to Equation (10-214).
The parameters required for the continuous or discontinuous damage model can be obtained using the
experimental data fitting option in Mentat.
Specifying Hyperelastic Damage Model Entries
The hyperelastic damage model described above can be selected with the MATHED Bulk Data entry.
Patran does not support this option in the current release.
Fracture Mechanics
Capabilities include; calculation of Energy Release Rates and Stress Intensity Factors using VCCT or
Lorenzi; Crack Propagation, Delamination, more failure criteria and Birth and Death of Elements.
Virtual Crack Closure Technique (VCCT)
The Marcs VCCT capability is fully supported by using the VCCT Case Control entry and the VCCT
Bulk Data entry. This option defines that the virtual crack closure technique is to be used for evaluating
energy release rates. The user defines the node (in 2-D or for shells) or nodes (in 3-D) that define each
crack tip. The supported elements are lower- and higher-order 2-D solids and 3-D shells, lower- and
higher-order 3-D hexahedral solids and lower order 3-D tetrahedral solids. For 3-D solids it is important
that a regular mesh around the crack front is used.
Multiple cracks can be defined and results obtained for each crack separately. Each crack consists of a
crack tip node in 2-D and for shells and a list of nodes along the crack front for 3-D solids. Shell elements
Entry Description
MATHED Specifies damage model properties for hyperelastic materials to be used for
static, quasi static or transient dynamic analysis in MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear.
K o | , ( ) d
d
n

o o
n
| +
q
n
--------------------
\ .
| |
exp
n 1 =
2
+ =
d
n
o
d
n
|
q
n

n
d
n
o
n
, , , , , d
o | K 1 =
K K
Main Index
360
can be used for defining a 2-D style line crack and also be connected to the face of another shell or 3-D
solid to form a 3-D style surface crack. The different cases are automatically identified.
The VCCT method is advantageous because it may be used with any material model including
orthotropic or anisotropic behavior, and because it automatically obtains the mode I, II, and III stress
intensity factors. This makes is applicable to composite structures.
For crack propagation, there are two modes of growth: fatigue and direct growth. For fatigue style, the
user specifies a load sequence time period. During the load sequence, the largest energy release rate and
the corresponding estimated crack growth direction is recorded. At the end of the load sequence, the
crack is grown using the specified method. For direct growth, the crack grows as soon as the calculated
energy release rate is larger than the user-specified Gc. Note that Gc can be made a function of the
accumulated crack growth length to model a crack growth resistance behavior. This release does not
support large crack propagation which requires remeshing.
Fracture Mechanics J-Integral (LORENZI)
This option gives an estimation of the J-Integral for a crack configuration using the domain integration
method. The domain integration method has the advantage that it can also be used for problems with
thermal behavior and for dynamic analysis. This procedure is only available for continuum elements.
Only the nodes defining the crack front (crack tip in two dimensions) need to be defined. The program
automatically finds integrations paths according to the format below. The complete J-Integral is
evaluated and output. For the case of linear elastic material with no external loads on the crack faces, the
program automatically separates mode I, mode II, and mode III (3-D only) stress intensity factors from
the J-Integral. for isotropic materials.
The Bulk Data entry, LORENZI, is necessary to activate this capability and if entered applies to all
subcases in the analysis.
Delamination
An alternative method to model failure is to use the COHESIV bulk data option in conjunction with
special delamination or interface elements. Three different models are available along with a user
subroutine. The user defines the traction versus the relative separation. The area under the curve is the
cohesive energy, often known as the critical energy release rate.
Main Index
361
CHAPTER 10
Materials
MATEP Extensions
Material description MATEP was extended to add Chaboche, Power Law, Kumar, Johnson Cook and
other options.
SOL 600 Failure Description MATF
For SOL 600 failure indices or actual material failure is only described using the MATF entry. For the R2
and later releases, MATF has been revised to accommodate additional types of failure and improve the
input and user understanding of the input. The user should be aware that other Nastran solutions can
specify failure index calculation on various MAT entries. These specifications are not available in SOL
600 only MATF may be used. To activate the MATF entries, the PARAM, MRMATFSB, 1 must also be
included.
Bilinear model
Exponential Model
Linear-Exponential Model
Element Type Number of Nodes Characteristic
186 4 Planar
187 8 Planar
188 8 3-D
189 20 3-D
190 4 Axisymmetric
191 8 Axisymmetric
192 6 3-D
193 15 3-D
Main Index
362
See Format for MATF - Sol 600.
Element Birth and Death
You can deactivate and re-activate elements in the model that have failed or for some other reason needs
to be deactivated or re-activated. This is accomplished using Case Control commands DEACTEL and
ACTIVAT as well as matching Bulk Data entries DEACTEL and ACTIVAT. Once an element is deactivated
or activated it stays that way during the entire subcase case unless it fails due to a MATF criteria.
Unglue
Frequently in contact analysis it is known beforehand that two surfaces will never separate once they
contact. To prevent numerical chattering contact between these surfaces is frequently described using
glued contact. In order to perform VCCT analysis of such surfaces it might be necessary to unglue those
nodes near a crack. The Bulk Data entry, UNGLUE, is available for such purposes.
Main Index
363
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Creep
Creep is an important factor in elevated-temperature stress analysis. In MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear,
creep is represented by a Maxwell model. Creep is a time-dependent, inelastic behavior, and can occur
at any stress level (that is, either below or above the yield stress of a material). The creep behavior can
be characterized as primary, secondary, and tertiary creep, as shown in Figure 10-39. Engineering
analysis is often limited to the primary and secondary creep regions. Tertiary creep in a uniaxial
specimen is usually associated with geometric instabilities, such as necking. The major difference
between the primary and secondary creep is that the creep strain rate is much larger in the primary creep
region than it is in the secondary creep region. The creep strain rate is the slope of the creep strain-time
curve. The creep strain rate is generally dependent on stress, temperature, and time.
The creep data can be specified in either an exponent form or in a piecewise linear curve.
(10-205)
Figure 10-37 Creep Strain Versus Time (Uniaxial Test at Constant Stress and Temperature)
Forms of Creep Material Law
There are three possible modes of input for creep constitutive data.
1. Express the dependence of equivalent creep strain rate on any independent parameter through a
piecewise linear relationship. The equivalent creep strain rate is then assumed to be a piecewise
linear approximation to
(10-206)
c
c
dc
c
dt
-------- =
Note: Primary Creep: Fast decrease in creep strain rate
Secondary Creep: Slow decrease in creep strain rate
Tertiary Creep: Fast increase in creep strain rate
Secondary
Creep
Primary
Creep
Tertiary
Creep
Creep Strain
cC
Time (t)
c
c
A f o ( ) g c
c
( ) h T ( )
dk t ( )
dt
------------- - - - - =
Main Index
Creep
364
where A is a constant; is equivalent creep strain rate; and , , , and are equivalent stress,
equivalent creep strain, temperature and time, respectively. The functions , , , and are
piecewise linear. This representation is shown in Figure 10-40. (Any of the functions ( , , , or
) can be set to unity by setting the number of piecewise linear slopes for that relation to zero on
the input data.)
2. The dependence of equivalent creep strain rate on any independent parameter can be given
directly in power law form by the appropriate exponent. The equivalent creep strain rate is
(10-207)
This is often adequate for engineering metals at constant temperature where Nortons rule is a
good approximation.
(10-208)
3. Use the MATEP material to activate the ORNL (Oak Ridge National Laboratory rules) capability
of the program.
Isotropic creep behavior is based on a von Mises creep potential described by the equivalent
creep law
(10-209)
Figure 10-38 Piecewise Linear Representation of Creep Data
c
c
o c
c
T t
f g h k
f g h
k
c
c
Ao
m
c
c
( )
n
T
p
qt
q 1
( ) - - - =
c
c
A = o
n
c
f o
c
c
T t , , , ( ) =
(1) Slope-Break Point Data S
1
X
1
S
2
X
2
S
3
X
3

(2) Function-Variable Data F
1
X
1
F
2
X
2
F
3
X
3
F
4
X
4

Function F (X)
[Such as t ,
g , h (T),

k (t)]
o ( )
c
c
( )
X
1
F
1
X
2
F
2
X
3
F
3
X
4
F
4
S
1
S
2
S
3
Variable X (Such as o, cC, T, t)
Main Index
365
CHAPTER 10
Materials
The material creep behavior is described by
(10-210)
During creep, the creep strain rate usually decreases. This effect is called creep hardening and can be a
function of time or creep strain. The following section discusses the difference between these two types
of hardening.
Consider a simple power law that illustrates the difference between time and strain-hardening rules for
the calculation of the creep strain rate.
(10-211)
where

is the creep strain, and are values obtained from experiments and is time. The creep rate
can be obtained by taking the derivative with respect to time
(10-212)
However, being greater than 0, we can compute the time as
(10-213)
Substituting Equation (10-209) into Equation (10-212) we have
(10-214)
Equation (10-213) shows that the creep strain rate is a function of time (time hardening). Equation
(10-214) indicates that the creep strain rate is dependent on the creep strain (strain hardening). The creep
strain rates calculated from these two hardening rules generally are different. The selection of a
hardening rule in creep analysis must be based on data obtained from experimental results. Figure 10-41
and Figure 10-42 show time and strain hardening rules in a variable state of stress. It is assumed that the
stress in a structure varies from to to ; depending upon the model chosen, different creep strain
rates are calculated accordingly at points 1, 2, 3, and 4. Obviously, creep strain rates obtained from the
time hardening rule are quite different from those obtained by the strain hardening rule.
c
c
i j c
c
co
co
i j
----------
)
`

=
c
c
|t
n
=
c
c
| n t
c
c
c
c
dc
c
dt
-------- n|t
n 1
= =
t t
t
c
c
|
-----
\ .
| |
1 n /
=
c
c
n|t
n 1
n |
1 n
c
c
( )
n 1 ( ) n ( )
( ) = =
o
1
o
2
o
3
Main Index
Creep
366
Figure 10-39 Time Hardening
Figure 10-40 Strain Hardening
Oak Ridge National Laboratory Laws
Oak Ridge National Laboratory (ORNL) has performed a large number of creep tests on stainless and
other alloy steels. It has also set certain rules that characterize creep behavior for application in the
nuclear structures. A summary of the ORNL rules on creep is discussed in Marc Volume A, Theory and
User Information. The references listed at the end of this section offer a more detailed discussion of the
ORNL rules.
cc
o1
0
1
2
3
4
t
o2
o3
c
c
o1
0
1
2
3
4
t
o2
o3
Main Index
367
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Viscoplasticity (Explicit Formulation)
The creep (Maxwell) model can be modified to include a plastic element (as shown in Figure 10-43).
This plastic element is inactive when the stress ( ) is less than the yield stress ( ) of the material. The
modified model is an elasto-viscoplasticity model and is capable of producing some observed effects of
creep and plasticity. In addition, the viscoplastic model can be used to generate time-independent
plasticity solutions when stationary conditions are reached. At the other extreme, the viscoplastic model
can reproduce standard creep phenomena. The model allows the treatment of nonassociated flow rules
and strain softening which present difficulties in conventional (tangent modulus) plasticity analyses.
It is recommended that you use the implicit formulation described in the following paragraphs to model
general viscoplastic materials.
Figure 10-41 Uniaxial Representation of Viscoplastic Material
Creep (Implicit Formulation)
This formulation, as opposed to that described in the previous section, is fully implicit. A fully implicit
formulation is unconditionally stable for any choice of time step size; hence, allowing a larger time step
than permissible using the explicit method. Additionally, this is more accurate than the explicit method.
The disadvantage is that each increment may be more computationally expensive. There are two methods
for defining the inelastic strain rate. The creep model definition option can be used to define a Maxwell
creep model. The back stress must be specified through the field reserved for the yield stress in the MAT1
or other material definitions. There is no creep strain when the stress is less than the back stress. The
equivalent creep strain increment is expressed as
(10-215)
o o
y
e
e
e
vp
o
Plastic Element
Inactive if o < o
y
c
p
c
vp
=
c
c
Ao
m
c
c
( )
n
- T
P
- qt
q 1
- =
Main Index
Creep
368
and the inelastic deviatoric strain components are
where is the deviatoric stress at the end of the increment and is the back stress. is a function of
temperature, time, etc. Creep only occurs if sigma is greater .
One of three tangent matrices may be formed. The first uses an elastic tangent, which requires more
iterations, but can be computationally efficient because re-assembly might not be required. The second
uses an algorithmic tangent that provides the best behavior for small strain power law creep. The third
uses a secant (approximate) tangent that gives the best behavior for general viscoplastic models.
Specifying Creep Material Entries
Each of the creep models described in this section can be selected with the MATVP Bulk Data entry.
MATVP is the only form of creep data material input supported by SOL 600, ie.e., no other MSC Nastran
creep data formats are supported by SOL 600.
To define creep behavior in Patran:
Create>Isotropic-or-Orthotropic-or-Anisotropic>Manual Input.
2. Click Input Properties..., and select Creep from the Constitutive Model pull-down menu and
MATVP from the Creep Data Input pull-down menu.
Creep material models require the following MATVP material data via the Input Properties subform on
the Materials Application form.
Entry Description
MATVP Specifies viscoplastic or creep material properties to be used for quasi-static
analysis in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
Isotropic-Anisotropic-Orthotropic Description
Coefficient Specifies the coefficient, A.
Exponent of Temperature Defines temperature exponent.
Temperature vs. Creep Strain References a material field of temperature vs. value. Overrides
Exponent of Temperature if present.
Exponent of Stress Defines stress exponent
Ac
i j
i
3
2
--- Ac
i
o'
i j
o
--------- =
o'
i j
o
y
A
o o
y
Main Index
369
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Creep Strain vs. Stress References a material field of stress vs. value. Overrides
Exponent of Stress if present.
Exponent of Creep Strain Defines creep strain exponent.
Strain Rate vs. Creep Strain References a material field of strain rate vs. value. Overrides
Exponent of Creep Strain if present.
Exponent of Time Defines time exponent.
Time vs. Creep Strain References a material field of time vs. value. Overrides
Exponent of Time if present.
Back Stress Defines the back stress for implicit creep
Isotropic-Anisotropic-Orthotropic Description
Main Index
Composite
370
Composite
Composite materials are composed of a mixture of two or more constituents, giving them mechanical and
thermal properties which can be significantly better than those of homogeneous metals, polymers and
ceramics.
Laminate composite materials are based on layering homogeneous materials using one of several
methods. In order to define a laminate composite material, you must define the homogeneous materials
that form the layers, the thickness of each layer, and the orientation angle of the layers relative to the
standard coordinate axis being used for the model. The orientation is particularly important for
orthotropic and anisotropic materials, whose properties vary in different directions. The material in each
layer may be either linear or nonlinear. Tightly bonded layers (layered materials) are often stacked in the
thickness direction of beam, plate, shell structures, or solids.
Figure 10-42 identifies the locations of integration points through the thickness of beam and shell
elements with and without a composite formulation.
Note that when the COMPOSITE option is used, as shown in Figure 10-42, the layer points are positioned
midway through each layer. When the COMPOSITE option is not used, the layer points are equidistantly
spaced between the top and bottom surfaces. MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear performs a numerical
integration through the thickness. If the COMPOSITE option is used, the trapezoidal method is
employed; otherwise, Simpsons rule is used.
Each layer is a ply, and each ply can
have a different material, thickness, or
material orientation (angle).
Main Index
371
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Figure 10-42 Integration Points through the Thickness of Beam and Shell Elements
Figure 10-43 shows the location of integration points through the thickness of continuum elements. MSC
Nastran Implicit Nonlinear forms the element stiffness matrix by performing numerical integration based
on the standard isoparametric concept.
Figure 10-43 Integration Points through the Thickness of Continuum Elements
Specifying Composite Material Entries
MSC Nastran provides a property definition specifically for performing composite analysis. You specify
the material properties and orientation for each of the layers and MSC Nastran produces the equivalent
PSHELL and MAT2 entries for shells. This is extended to PSOLID and MATORTH for SOL 600 only.
The stacking direction for 3-D composite solids was added with a new entry, MSTACK.
SOL 600 provids two options for composite analyses:
Entry Description
PCOMP Defines the properties of an n-ply composite material laminate.
PCOMPG Defines global (external) ply IDs and properties for a composite material
laminate
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Beams or Shells with
Composite Option
Beams or Shells without
Composite Option
*
*
*
* *
*
*
*
Main Index
Composite
372
1. Complete through the thickness integration at every iteration
2. The smeared approach as used in other Nastran solution sequences.
The first approach is more accurate particularly for nonlinear analyses where local buckling takes place
and the analysis needs to extend well into the post-bucking regime. The second approach is usually
satisfactory for small deformation linear static and dynamic analyses. Method 1 has what is known as
fast integration techniques and are described by the Bulk Data entry PCOMPF. The limitation is that
using these fast integration procedures the material may not exhibit any nonlinear behavior. Large
deformation and buckling is supported using these procedures.
Main Index
373
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Gasket
Engine gaskets are used to seal the metal parts of the engine to prevent steam or gas from escaping. They
are complex (often multi-layer) components, usually rather thin and typically made of several different
materials of varying thickness. The gaskets are carefully designed to have a specific behavior in the
thickness direction. This is to ensure that the joints remain sealed when the metal parts are loaded by
thermal or mechanical loads. The through-thickness behavior, usually expressed as a relation between
the pressure on the gasket and the closure distance of the gasket, is highly nonlinear, often involves large
plastic deformations, and is difficult to capture with a standard material model. The alternative of
modeling the gasket in detail by taking every individual material into account in the finite element model
of the engine is not feasible. It requires a lot of elements which makes the model unacceptably large.
Also, determining the material properties of the individual materials might be cumbersome.
The gasket material model addresses these problems by allowing gaskets to be modeled with only one
element through the thickness, while the experimentally or analytically determined complex
pressure-closure relationship in that direction can be used directly as input for the material model. The
material must be used together with 2-D or 3-D first-order solid composite element types or 2-D
axi-symmetric elements. In that case, these elements consists of one layer and have only one integration
point in the thickness direction of the element.
Constitutive Model
The behavior in the thickness direction, the transverse shear behavior, and the membrane behavior are
fully uncoupled in the gasket material model. In subsequent sections, these three deformation modes
are discussed.
Local Coordinate System
The material model is most conveniently described in terms of a local coordinate system for the
integration points of the element (see Figure 10-44). For three-dimensional elements, the first and second
directions of the coordinate system are tangential to the midsurface of the element at the integration
point. The third direction is the thickness direction of the gasket and is perpendicular to the midsurface.
For two-dimensional elements, the first direction of the coordinate system is the direction of the
midsurface at the integration point, the second direction is the thickness direction of the gasket and is
perpendicular to the midsurface, and the third direction coincides with the global 3-direction.
In a total Lagrange formulation, the orientation of the local coordinate system is determined in the
undeformed configuration and is fixed. In an updated Lagrange formulation, the orientation is
determined in the current configuration and is updated during the analysis.
Main Index
Gasket
374
Figure 10-44 The Location of the Integration Points and the Local Coordinate Systems in
Two- and Three-dimensional Gasket Elements
Thickness Direction - Compression
In the thickness direction, the material exhibits the typical gasket behavior in compression, as depicted
in Figure 10-45. After an initial nonlinear elastic response (section AB), the gasket starts to yield if the
pressure p on the gasket exceeds the initial yield pressure p
y0
. Upon further loading, plastic deformation
increases, accompanied by (possibly nonlinear) hardening, until the gasket is fully compressed (section
BD). Unloading occurs in this stage along nonlinear elastic paths (section FG, for example). When the
gasket is fully compressed, loading and unloading occurs along a new nonlinear elastic path (section
CDE), while retaining the permanent deformation built up during compression. No additional plastic
deformation is developed once the gasket is fully compressed.
The loading and unloading paths of the gasket are usually established experimentally by compressing the
gasket, unloading it again, and repeating this cycle a number of times for increasing pressures. The
resulting pressure-closure data can be used as input for the material model. The user must supply the
loading path and may specify up to ten unloading paths. In addition, the initial yield pressure p
y0
must
be given. The loading path should consist of both the elastic part of the loading path and the hardening
part, if present. If no unloading paths are supplied or if the yield pressure is not reached by the loading
path, the gasket is assumed to be elastic. In that case, loading and unloading occurs along the
loading path.
The loading and unloading paths must be defined using the TABLES1 bulk data entries and must relate
the pressure on the gasket to the gasket closure. The unloading paths specify the elastic unloading of the
gasket at different amounts of plastic deformation; the closure at zero pressure is taken as the plastic
closure on the unloading path. If unloading occurs at an amount of plastic deformation for which no path
has been specified, the unloading path is constructed automatically by linear interpolation between the
two nearest user supplied paths. The unloading path, supplied by the user, with the largest amount of
plastic deformation is taken as the elastic path at full compression of the gasket.
For example, in Figure 10-45, the loading path is given by the sections AB (elastic part) and BD
(hardening part) and the initial yield pressure is the pressure at point B. The (single) unloading path is
curve CDE. The latter is also the elastic path at full compression of the gasket. The amount of plastic
closure on the unloading path is c
p1
. The dashed curve FG is the unloading path at a certain plastic
closure c
p
that is constructed by interpolation from the elastic part of the loading path (section AB) and
the unloading path CD.
1
2
Midsurface
Integration Point
1
2
3
Midsurface Integration Point
Main Index
375
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Figure 10-45 Pressure-closure Relation of a Gasket
The compressive behavior in the thickness direction is implemented by decomposing the gasket closure
rate into an elastic and a plastic part:
(10-216)
Of these two parts, only the elastic part contributes to the pressure. The constitutive equation is given by
the following rate equation:
(10-217)
Here, D
c
is the consistent tangent to the pressure-closure curve.
Plastic deformation develops when the pressure p equals the current yield pressure p
y
. The latter is a
function of the amount of plastic deformation developed so far and is given by the hardening part of the
loading path (section BD in Figure 10-45).
Initial Gap
The thickness of a gasket can vary considerably throughout the sealing region. Since the gasket is
modeled with only one element through the thickness, this can lead to meshing difficulties at the
boundaries between thick regions and thin regions. The initial gap parameter can be used to solve this.
The parameter basically shifts the loading and unloading curves in the positive closure direction. As long
py0
py1
py
cp0 cp1 cp cy0 cy1 cy
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Gasket Closure Distance c
G
a
s
k
e
t

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
p
loading path
unloading path
c
c
e
c
p
+ =
p
D
c
c
e
D
c
c
c
p
( ) = =
Main Index
Gasket
376
as the closure distance of the gasket elements is smaller than the initial gap, no pressure is built up in the
gasket. The sealing region can thus be modeled as a flat sheet of uniform thickness and the initial gap
parameter can be set for those regions where the gasket is actually thinner than the elements of the finite
element mesh used to model it.
Thickness Direction - Tension
The tensile behavior of the gasket in the thickness direction is linear elastic and is governed by a tensile
modulus D
t
. The latter is defined as a pressure per unit closure distance (that is, length).
Transverse Shear and Membrane Behavior
The transverse shear is defined in the 2-3 and 3-1 planes of the local coordinate system (for three-
dimensional elements) or the 1-2 plane (for two-dimensional elements). It is linear elastic and
characterized by a transverse shear modulus G
t
.
The membrane behavior is defined in the local 1-2 plane (for three-dimensional elements) or the local
3-1 plane (for two-dimensional elements) and is linear elastic and isotropic. Youngs modulus E
m
and
Poissons ratio v
m
that govern the membrane behavior are taken from an existing material that must be
defined using the MAT1 Bulk Data entry. Multiple gasket material can refer to the same isotropic material
for their membrane properties (see also the GASKET model definition option in Marc Volume C:
Program Input).
Thermal Expansion
The thermal expansion of the gasket material is isotropic and the thermal expansion coefficient are taken
from the isotropic material that also describes the membrane behavior.
Constitutive Equations
As mentioned above, the behavior in the thickness direction of the gasket is formulated as a relation
between the pressure p on the gasket and the gasket closure distance c. In order to formulate the
constitutive equations of the gasket material, this relation must first be written in terms of stresses and
strains. This depends heavily on the stress and strain tensor employed in the analysis. For small strain
analyses, for example, the engineering stress and strain are used. In that case, the gasket closure rate and
the pressure rate are related to the strain rate and the stress rate by
and (10-218)
in which h is the thickness of the gasket.
The resulting constitutive equation for three-dimensional elements, expressed in the local coordinate
system of the integration, now reads
c hc = Ap Ao =
Main Index
377
CHAPTER 10
Materials
(10-219)
in which C = hD
c
. For two-dimensional elements, the equation is given by
(10-220)
For large deformations in a total Lagrange formulation, in which the Green-Lagrange strains and the
second Piola-Kirchhoff stresses are employed (as well as in an updated Lagrange environment) in
which the logarithmic strains and Cauchy stresses are being used, similar but more complex relations
can be derived.
Specifying Gasket Material Entries
The MATG provides specifically for modeling gasket materials.
Entry Description
MATG Specifies gasket material properties to be used in MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear.
MATTG Specifies gasket material property temperature variation to be used in MSC
o
11
o
22
o
33
o
12
o
23
o
31
E
m
1 v
m
2
-----------------
v
m
E
m
1 v
m
2
----------------- 0 0 0 0
v
m
E
m
1 v
m
2
-----------------
E
m
1 v
m
2
----------------- 0 0 0 0
0 0 C 0 0 0
0 0 0
E
m
2 1 v
m
+ ( )
-------------------------- 0 0
0 0 0 0 G
t
0
0 0 0 0 0 G
t
c
11
c
22
c
33
Ac
33
p
12
23
31
=
o
11
o
22
o
33
o
12
E
m
1 v
m
2
----------------- 0
v
m
E
m
1 v
m
2
----------------- 0
0 C 0 0
v
m
E
m
1 v
m
2
----------------- 0
E
m
1 v
m
2
----------------- 0
0 0 0 G
t
c
11
c
22
Ac
22
p
c
33
12
=
Main Index
Gasket
378
References
MATG (p. 2438) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide
MATTG (p. 2501) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide
Patran 2005 support this option.
Main Index
379
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Material Damping
In direct integration analysis, the user very often defines energy dissipation mechanisms as part of the
basic model - dashpots, inelastic material behavior, etc. In such cases, there is usually no need to
introduce additional structural or general damping: it is unimportant compared to these other
dissipative effects. However, some models do not have such dissipation sources (an example is a linear
system with chattering contact, such as a pipeline in a seismic event). In such cases, it is usually desirable
to introduce some general low level of damping. MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear provides Rayleigh
damping for this purpose. The user includes the two Rayleigh damping factors, o
R
for mass proportional
damping and |
R
for stiffness proportional damping on the NLSTRAT Bulk Data entry. In the case of
elements the damping values must be used in conjunction with these property references. For a linear
problem, these provide a damping matrix [C] as described above:
[C]=o
R
[M]+|
R
[K].
Since the model may have quite general nonlinear response, the concept of stiffness proportional
damping must be generalized, since it is possible for the tangent stiffness matrix to have negative
eigenvalues (which would imply negative damping). To overcome this problem, |
R
is interpreted as
defining viscous material damping which creates an additional damping stress, o
d
, proportional to the
total strain rate:
(10-221)
Here D
0
el
is the materials initial (virgin) elastic stiffness. This damping stress is added to the stress
caused by the constitutive response at the integration point when the dynamic equilibrium equations are
formed, but it is not included in the stress output. This allows damping to be introduced for any nonlinear
case, and provides standard Rayleigh damping for linear cases.
Since the |
R
factor introduces damping proportional to the strain rate, this may be thought of as damping
associated with the material itself, while the o
R
factor introduces damping forces caused by the absolute
velocities of the model, and so simulates the idea of the model moving through a viscous ether (a
permeating, still fluid, so that any motion of any point in the model causes damping).
The o
R
factor is applied to all elements that have mass. The |
R
factor applies to all elastic elements and
to beam and shell elements. The |
R
factor is not applied to spring elements. Discrete dashpot elements
should be used as needed for springs.
Specifying Material Damping Entries
Parameters for material damping are input through the NLSTRAT entry.
o
d
|D
0
el
c
=
Main Index
Material Damping
380
MSC.Patran 2005 does not yet support material damping specified by the NLDAMP entry, but you can
specify the transient analysis damping parameters on the NLSTRAT entry under the Load Increment
Parameters subform.
Entry Description
NLSTRAT Defines transient analysis damping parameters BETA, GAMMA,
GAMMA1, GAMMA2.
NLDAMP Defines damping constants for nonlinear analysis when Marc is executed from
MSC Nastran used in SOL 600 only (Not supported in MSC.Patran 2004).
Gamma (Newmark) Mass proportional damping coefficient.
Beta (Newmark) Stiffness proportional damping coefficient.
Main Index
381
CHAPTER 10
Materials
This is a very useful tool available under the Tools pull-down menu from the main MSC.Patran form and
is available if the Analysis Preference is set to MSC Nastran.
The tool is used to curve fit experimentally
derived, raw elastomeric material data and fit a
number of material models to the data. The data
can then be saved as constitutive hyperelastic
and/or viscoelastic models for use in anMSC
NastranImplicit Nonlinear or MSC.Marc analysis.
The operation of curve fitting is done in three basic
steps corresponding to the actions in the Action
pull-down menu.
1. Import the Raw Data - data is read from
standard ASCII files and stored in
MSC.Patran in the form a field (table).
2. Select the Test Data - the fields from the
raw data are associated to a test type.
3. Calculate the Properties - the curve fit is
done to the selected test data; coefficients
are calculated based on the selected
material model; curve fit is graphically
displayed and the properties can be saved as
a constitutive model for a later analysis.
Import Raw Data
Importing the data is done by following these
steps:
1. Enter a New Field Name - this is the name of the raw data table as it will be stored in MSC.Patran
as a material field.
2. Select the Independent Variable - this is defaulted to Strain but could be any of Strain, Time,
Frequency, Temperature, or Strain Rate.
3. Select the File and press the Apply button.
The following notes are made:
You can skip any number of header lines in the raw data file by setting the Header Lines to
Skip widget.
Main Index
382
You may edit the raw data file after selecting it by using the Edit File... button. The editor is
Notepad on Windows platforms and vi on UNIX platforms unless you change the
environment variable P3_EDITOR to reference a different editor. The editor must be in the
users path or the entire pathname must be referenced.
Raw data files may have up to three columns of data. By default the first column of data is the
independent variable value. The second column is the measured data, and the last column can
be the area reduction or volumetric data. More than three columns is not accepted. If the third
column is blank, the material is considered incompressible.
The data may be space, tab, or comma delimited.
If you have cross sectional area reduction data in the third column, you can give it an optional
field name also. If you do not specify that you have this data and a third column is detected,
two fields will still be created and a _C1 and _C2 will be appended to the given field name.
If for some reason the independent and dependent columns need to be interchanged, you can
turn this toggle on. Check your imported fields before proceeding to ensure they are correct.
This is done in the Fields application.
When you press the Apply button, you will be taken to the second step. If you need to import
more than one file, you will have to reset the Action pull-down.
Import Raw Data Description
New Field The field name under which the raw data will be saved. For an explanation of
what the raw data files should contain, see the description on each mode
(Uniaxial, Biaxial, etc.) in the table for Select Test Data.
Area Data If volumetric data or cross sectional area reduction data is stored in the third
column of a raw data file it will be imported automatically and two field will
be created, one with a _C1 and the other with a _C1 appended to the name.
Optionally, you can give it its own name by turning this toggle ON.
Area Field Name If the Area Data toggle is on, you supply the name to the field of volumetric
or area data here.
Independent
Variable
This defines the independent variable. The material field created from reading
the raw data will be tagged with this independent variable. This is simply a
label and has no effect on the actual curve fits.
Header Lines to
Skip
If any header lines in the data file are to be skipped before the raw data is
processed, you can specify this with this databox.
Select File Select a raw data file. The .dat and .csv file types are filtered by default. csv
files are comma separated and created by Microsoft Excel.
Main Index
383
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Edit File Once a file has been selected you may edit it with Notepad on Windows and
vi on UNIX. The editor can be changed by setting the environment variable
P3_EDITOR to the editor or choice. The editor command must be in the
users path or the full path must be provided as part of the P3_EDITOR
environment variable.
Apply This command will import the raw data and save it as a field(s) in the name(s)
given in New Field (and/or Area Field Name) databoxes. You will also be
taken to automatically to the Select Test Data action which is the next step.
If you need to import multiple raw data files, you will have to set the Action
back to Import Raw Data.
Cancel Closes the Experimental Data Fitting tool.
Import Raw Data Description
Main Index
384
Select Test Data
Once the raw test data is imported, you must
associate with a particular test type or mode by
following these steps:
1. Put the cursor in the data field of the
appropriate type of test.
2. Select associated field from the Select
Material Test Data listbox which should
have a list of the imported raw data fields.
3. Repeat this for each test you wish to include
in the calculations (curve fit).
Typical stress-strain data for
Deformation Mode tests are
referenced in the Primary column. If
you have volumetric data, these are
entered in the Secondary column
databoxes and are optional.
For Viscoelastic (time relaxation data),
you must turn ON the ViscoElastic
toggle. Only viscoelastic curve fitting
will be done in this case. To return to
Deformation Mode, turn this toggle
OFF.
Damage models are not yet supported.
When you press the Apply button, you
will be taken to the third step.
Main Index
385
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Select Test Data Description
Uniaxial
Biaxial
Planar Shear
Simple Shear
Volumetric
Select the field of raw test data corresponding to each of these tests if they
exist. You need to supply at least one. The stress-strain data field is
referenced in the Primary column. If you have volumetric or area data
fields, they are referenced in the Secondary column. If no Secondary field
is supplied, the material models are assumed incompressible.
For time independent elastomeric materials (uniaxial, biaxial, planar
shear, simple shear and volumetric tests) the data should be as such in the
raw data file:
eng. strain_1, eng. stress_1, volumetric data_1
eng. strain_2, eng. stress_2, volumetric data_2
. . .
eng. strain_n, eng. stress_n, volumetric data_n
If, for uniaxial, biaxial or planar shear data, the third column is left empty,
the material is assumed to be incompressible.
Viscoelastic Turn this toggle ON if you wish to do a data fit on viscoelastic relaxation
data.
For visco-elastic material behavior (shear relaxation, bulk relaxation and
energy relaxation tests) the data should be as such in the raw data file:
time_1, value_1 (shear modulus, bulk modulus or strain energy)
time_2, value_2 (shear modulus, bulk modulus or strain energy)
. . .
time_n, value_n (shear modulus, bulk modulus or strain energy)
Main Index
386
Damage Not yet supported. Turn this toggle ON if you wish to do a data fit on
damage models. For continuous damage (resulting from a constant strain
amplitude test) the data in the raw input file should be:
cycle_1, str_energy_d_1
cycle_2, str_energy_d_2
. .
cycle_n, str_energy_d_n
In addition, before fitting the data, the free energy (which is the strain
energy density corresponding to the undamaged state) is required. Notice
that the data points should not include the range of cycles at which
damage did not start to evaluate.
For discontinuous damage (resulting from an increasing strain amplitude
test):
str_energy_d_1, strain_energy_d_1/str_energy_d_1_undamaged
str_energy_d_2, strain_energy_d_2/str_energy_d_2_undamaged
. . .
str_energy_d_n, strain_energy_d_n/str_energy_d_n_undamaged
Notice that the data points should not include the range of cycles at which
damage did not start to evaluate.
Viscoelastic/Damage In this field, select the Viscoelastic or Damage raw test data field.
Select Material Test
Data
From this listbox you select the field corresponding to the Deformation
Mode or the Viscoelastic/Damage data.
Apply Once the test data is associated to the respective modes, the Apply button
will take you to the Calculate Properties action.
Select Test Data Description
Main Index
387
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Calculate Properties
Once test data has been associated to a test
type or mode, the curve fit is done by following
these steps:
1. Select the material Model you wish to do
a curve fit for. The available models will
depend on the test data selected in the
previous step. Hyperelastic models will
be available for deformation mode test
data. Viscoelastic models will be
available for relaxation test data.
2. In general you will leave Use Test Data
to All for hyperelastic models. If
however you only want the curve fit to
use one of the deformation modes, you
may set it here.
3. Press the Compute button. The
coefficient values will be displayed in the
Coefficients spreadsheet.
4. To visually see the curve fit, press the
Plot button.
You may repeat the above four steps for
as many material models as you wish to
curve fit.
5. Select an existing material or type in a
New Material Name and press the
Apply button to save the material model
as either a Hyperelastic or Viscoelastic
constitutive model for use in a
subsequent analysis.
The plots are appended to the existing
XY Window until you press the
Unpost Plot button. You can turn the
Append function ON/OFF under the
Plot Parameters... form.
By default, all the deformation modes
are plotted along with the raw data
even if raw data has not been
supplied for those mode. This is very
Main Index
388
important. These additional modes are predicted for you. You should always know your
models response to each mode of deformation due to the different types of stress states. For
example, a rule of thumb for natural rubber and some other elastomers is that the tensile
tension biaxial response should be about 1.5 to 2.5 times the uniaxial tension response.
You can turn ON/OFF these additional modes or any of the curves under the Plot
Parameters button as well as change the appearance of plot. More control and formatting of
the plot can be done under the XY Plot application on the MSC.Patran application switch on
the main form.
Viscoelastic constitutive models are useless without a Hyperelastic constitutive model
also. Be sure your model has both defined under the same material name if you use
viscoelastic properties.
You may actually change the coefficient values in the Coefficients spread sheet if you wish
to see the effect they have on the curve fit. Select one of the cells with the coefficient you wish
to change, then type in a new coefficient value in the Coefficient Value data box and press
the Return or Enter key. Then press the Plot button again. If you press the Apply button, the
new values will be saved in the supplied material name.
For viscoelastic relaxation data, the Number of Terms used in the data fit should, as a rule of
thumb, be as many as there are decades of data.
A number of optional parameters are available to message the data and control the curve
fitting. See the table below for more detailed descriptions.
Main Index
389
CHAPTER 10
Materials
The following tables more fully describes each widget in the Experimental Data Fitting tool:
Calculate Properties Description
Model:Neo-Hookean* This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using the Neo-
Hookean strain energy function W, which is given by:
W = C10*(I1 - 3)
where I1 is the first invariant of the right Cauchy-Green strain tensor and
C10 is the material parameter to be determined. For this model, a
volumetric test can not be supplied. The user may enter a bulk modulus.
If no bulk modulus is given, nearly incompressible material behavior
is assumed.
Model:Mooney(2)* This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using the two
term Mooney-Rivlin strain energy function W, which is given by:
W = C10*(I1 - 3) + C01*(I2 - 3)
where I1 and I2 are the first and second invariant of the right Cauchy-
Green strain tensor and C10 and C01 are the material parameters to be
determined. For this model, a volumetric test can not be supplied. The user
may enter a bulk modulus. If no bulk modulus is given, nearly
incompressible material behavior is assumed.
Model:Mooney(3)* This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using the three
term Mooney-Rivlin strain energy function W, which is given by:
W = C10*(I1 - 3) + C01*(I2 - 3) + C11*(I1 - 3)*(I2 - 3)
Green strain tensor and C10, C01 and C11 are the material parameters to
be determined. For this model, a volumetric test can not be supplied. The
user may enter a bulk modulus. If no bulk modulus is given nearly
Model:Signiorini* This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using the
Signiorini strain energy function W, which is given by:
W = C10*(I1 - 3) + C01*(I2 - 3) + C20*(I1 - 3)^2
Green strain tensor and C10, C01 and C20 are the material parameters to
be determined. For this model, a volumetric test can not be supplied. The
user may enter a bulk modulus. If no bulk modulus is given, nearly
Main Index
390
Model:2nd Order
Invariant*
This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using the second
order invariant strain energy function W, which is given by:
W = C10*(I1 - 3) + C01*(I2 - 3) + C11*(I1 - 3)*(I2-3) +
C20*(I1 - 3)^2
Green strain tensor and C10, C01, C11 and C20 are the material parameters
to be determined. For this model, a volumetric test can not be supplied. The
user may enter a bulk modulus. If no bulk modulus is given, nearly
Model:3rd Order
Deform*
This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using the third
order deformation strain energy function W, which is given by:
W = C10*(I1 - 3) + C01*(I2 - 3)+ C11*(I1 - 3)*(I2 - 3) +
C20*(I1 - 3)^2 + C30*(I1 - 3)^3
Green strain tensor and C10, C01, C11, C20 and C30 are the material
parameters to be determined. For this model, a volumetric test can not be
supplied. The user may enter a bulk modulus. If no bulk modulus is given,
nearly incompressible material behavior is assumed.
Note: The data input for all of these options has been consolidated under the Jamus-Green-
Simpson option of the Patran Materials-Input-Data-Hyperelastic form.
Model:Yeoh This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using the Yeoh
strain energy function W, which is given by:
W = C10*(I1 - 3) + C20*(I1 - 3)^2 + C30*(I1 - 3)^3
where I1 is the first invariant of the right Cauchy-Green strain tensor and
C10, C20 and C30 are the material parameters to be determined. For this
model, a volumetric test can not be supplied. The user may enter a bulk
modulus. If no bulk modulus is given, nearly incompressible material
behavior is assumed.
Main Index
391
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Model:Ogden This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using the Ogden
where lam1, lam2 and lam3 are the principal stretch ratios, J is the
determinant of the deformation gradient, N is the number of terms and
mu_n, alpha_n and K are the material parameters to be determined. The
maximum number of terms is 10, but it is recommended to use no more
terms than necessary to get a sufficiently good fit. This model can be used
for incompressible as well as for slightly compressible elastic materials.
Compressibility is included based on a constant bulk modulus. In case of
compressibility, volumetric information is needed, preferably using a
volumetric test, but volumetric data can also be included for uniaxial,
biaxial and planar shear tests. In order to perform a plausible extrapolation
for the compressible Ogden model, dilatational information is needed
beyond the data set. This is achieved using linear extrapolation based on
the two start and/or end points of the measured data. This linear
extrapolation may restrict the validity of the response outside the range of
the measured data. For dual mode plotting (except for simple shear),
dilatational information is needed for the compressible Ogden model. For
a volumetric test, this readily follows from the strain, but for uniaxial,
biaxial and planar shear tests this must be calculated. This calculation is
based on the requirement that the stress in perpendicular direction must be
zero. If the fitted coefficients do not fulfil this requirement, zero stresses
are returned for such a dual mode.
Note: Ogden hyperelastic coefficients are different in MSC.Marc and
MSC Nastran. For information on experimental data fitting for
the MSC Nastran MATHP and MATHE entries, see
Experimental Data Fitting, 296.
{(mu_n/alpha_n) * (J^(-alpha_n/3)) *
(lam1âlpha_n + lam2âlpha_n + lam2âlpha_n
- 3)} + 4.5 * K * (J^(1/3) - 1)^2
W
N
E
n 1 =
=
Main Index
392
Model:Foam This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using the foam
where lam1, lam2 and lam3 are the principal stretch ratios, J is the
determinant of the deformation gradient, N is the number of terms and
mu_n, alpha_n and beta_n are the material parameters to be determined.
The maximum number of terms is 10, but it is recommended to use no
more terms than necessary to get a sufficiently good fit. This model should
be used for highly compressible elastic materials. Except for the simple
shear test, volumetric information must be available. In order to perform a
plausible extrapolation for the foam model, dilatational information is
needed beyond the data set. This is achieved using linear extrapolation
based on the two start and/or end points of the measured data. This linear
extrapolation may restrict the validity of the response outside the range of
the measured data. For dual mode plotting (except for simple shear),
dilatational information is needed for the foam model. For a volumetric
test, this readily follows from the strain, but for uniaxial, biaxial and planar
shear tests this must be calculated. This calculation is based on the
requirement that the stress in perpendicular direction must be zero. If the
fitted coefficients do not fulfil this requirement, zero stresses are returned
for such a dual mode.
{(mu_n/alpha_n)*(lam1âlpha_n +
lam2âlpha_n + lam2âlpha_n - 3)
+(mu_n/beta_n)*(1 - J^beta_n)}
W
N
E
n 1 =
=
Main Index
393
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Model:Arruda-Boyce Elastomer Free Energy Function; Number of coefficients 1
Ref: "A Three-Dimensional Constitutive Model For the Large Stretch
Behavior of Rubber Elastic Materials"
by: Ellen M. Arruda and Mary C. Boyce
J.Mech.Phys.Solids Vol.41, No.2, pp.389-412
Parameter: N -- The number of mers in a typical polymer chain - Specified
by the user.
Coefficient: n,k,T -- Determined by the fitter
n : Number of Polymer chains per unit volume
k : Boltzmann constant
T : Temperature
For this model, the calculation of the Bulk Modulus is not required. A
volumetric test need not be supplied.
Main Index
394
Model:Gent Elastomer Free Energy Function; Number of coefficients 2
Ref: "A new constitutive relation for rubber"
by: A.N. Gent
Rubber Chemistry and Technology,
Vol.79, pp.59-61, 1996
Coefficient: E, I_m -- Determined by the fitter
E : small strain tensile modulus
I_m : maximum value for the first
invariant of deformation (I1)
WARNING: This phenomenological model is designed to exhibit finite
extensibility of polymer chains and forces the stresses and tangent to
assymptote to infinity as I1 approaches Im. It is conceivable that during the
solution stage, a set of trial displacements is evaluated such that I1 > Im.
In which case, the convergence ratios can be expected to oscillate, or even
worse, the solution may not converge at all. Therefor, if Im < 4, it is
recommended that loads be applied in very small increments.
For this model, the calculation of the Bulk Modulus is not required and a
volumetric test need not be supplied.
Main Index
395
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Model:Visco
Shear Relax
This command is used if experimental shear relaxation data must be fitted
using the following Prony series expansion for the shear modulus G:

where t is the time, N is the number of terms and G_infinity, G_n and tau_n
are material parameters to be determined. The data points provided by the
user must give the value of the shear modulus at different time stations,
which do not need to be equi-spaced.
Model:Visco
Bulk Relax
This command is used if experimental bulk relaxation data must be fitted
using the following Prony series expansion for the bulk modulus K:

where t is the time, N is the number of terms and K_infinity, K_n and tau_n
are material parameters to be determined. The data points provided by the
user must give the value of the bulk modulus at different time stations,
which do not need to be equi-spaced.
Model:Visco Energy
Relax
This command is used if experimental strain energy relaxation data must
be fitted using the following Prony series expansion for the strain energy W
:

where t is the time, N is the number of terms, W0 is the instantaneous strain
energy and W_infinity, delta_n and tau_n are material parameters to be
determined. The data points provided by the user must give the value of the
strain energy at different time stations, which do not need to be equi-
spaced.
Model:Cont. Damage Not yet supported.
Model:Disc. Damage Not yet supported.
G(t) = G_infinity {G_n*exp(-t/tau_n)} W
N
E
n 1 =
=
K(t) = K_infinity {K_n*exp(-t/tau_n)}
N
E
n 1 =
K(t) = K_infinity {delta_n*W0*exp(-t/tau_n)}
N
E
n 1 =
Main Index
396
Compute This command starts the data fitting program with the selected data. After
fitting, the measured and fitted curves can be displayed and the
corresponding material model coefficients and the least squares error are
reported. For the Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, Foam, Arruda-Boyce and Gent
models, the response in the modes for which no data is measured, is
predicted. Notice that if volumetric data is relevant in order to predict a
uniaxial, biaxial or planar shear mode, this is calculated using the
constraint of a zero stress component in a direction perpendicular to the
direction of the measured stress component. If this calculation fails, the
predicted mode will contain zero stresses.
If the data set contains a large number of entries, or if the model is highly
non-linear and/or contains many coefficients, then the fitting procedure
may take some time.
Since the curve fitting procedure does not use weighting factors per data
point, it might be useful to have many data points near regions where an
accurate response is desired.
Coefficient Value This option allows the user to manually enter the coefficients of the
material model and updates the response curves. You must select the
coefficient to be modified from the spread sheet and then enter the value
by pressing the Return or Enter key after putting in the new coefficient.
Notice that, although no fit is performed, at least one set of test data must
be selected. This feature is available for the Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, Foam,
Arruda-Boyce and Gent material models.
Plot This plots the current curve fit. The raw data and the calculated curve
fits for the supplied experimental data and the other predicted modes
are plotted.
Unpost Plot This clears the plot of all curves. By default additional data fit curves are
appended the XY Window.
New Material Name If a new name is supplied here and this material name does not yet exist, it
will be created with the appropriate constitutive models when the Apply
button is pressed.
Select Material If you want the hyperelastic or viscoelastic data to be saved into an existing
material set, select it from this listbox.
Apply This command copies the computed material model coefficients into a
material model: it either creates a new one as indicated by the New
Material Name or changes an existing one as selected from Select
Material.
Main Index
397
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Optional Parameters Description
Uniaxial Test: A/Ao V/Vo Volumetric data of a uniaxial test can be given as: the ratio of the current
cross sectional area and the original cross sectional area (A/A0) or: the
ratio of the current volume and the original volume (V/V0). By default,
the volumetric data is expected to be in terms of A/A0. If the actual data
is in terms of V/V0, use this switch to change the type of input. Not all
material models need this information and therefore these widgets may
appear dimmed.
Biaxial Test: t/to V/Vo Volumetric data of an equibiaxial test can be given as: the ratio of the
current thickness and the original thickness (t/t0) or: the ratio of the
current volume and the original volume (V/V0). By default, the
volumetric data is expected to be in terms of t/t0. If the actual data is in
terms of V/V0, use this switch to change the type of input. Not all
appear dimmed.
Planar Shear t/to V/Vo Volumetric data of a planar shear test can be given as: the ratio of the
current thickness and the original thickness (t/t0) or: the ratio of the
current volume and the original volume (V/V0) If the actual data is in
terms of V/V0, use this switch to change the type of input. Not all
appear dimmed.
Mathematical Checks This command activates mathematical checks for Ogden and Foam
materials and causes the data fitter to discard the coefficients when one
of the mathematical conditions on them is not satisfied. These conditions
are considered to be very strict and at times no set of coefficients may be
found, or the fit may be very poor.
Positive Coefficients Since curve fitting is a mathematical operation, the fitted material model
coefficients may be physically non-realistic. This command forces the
fitting procedure to return coefficients which are all positive. The quality
of the fit may be worse than that without this restriction. For example
Ogden coefficients come in pairs. If each pair of modulus and exponent
have the same sign, stability is guaranteed. If one is positive and the other
negative, the material might be unstable. Thus you must visually
determine the stability range of the model.
Main Index
398
Extrapolate For Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, Foam, Arruda-Boyce and Gent models, this
command gives the possibility to get the response of the material outside
the range of measurements. This might be important if the deformations
of the structure to be analyzed exceed those of the experiments. One
needs to set the new left and right bounds up to which the extrapolation
will be performed. Notice that when volumetric information is provided,
outside the range of measurements the volumetric data is calculated
based on linear extrapolation using the two closest measured data points.
Error The least squares error to be minimized during data fitting can be based
on absolute or relative errors:
Err_Abs = sum {[data_measured(i) -
data_calculated(i)]^2}
i
Err_Rel = sum {[1 -
data_calculated(i)/data_measured(i)]^2}
i
This command can be used to switch between relative (default) and
absolute errors.
Error Limit During curve fitting, an optimal set of material coefficients is searched
for using the Downhill Simplex method. If the least squares error
corresponding to a set of material coefficients is larger than the error
limit, a new minimum will be searched for, unless the maximum number
of iterations has been reached. This command sets the error limit. If,
upon fitting, the reported error is larger than the error limit, searching for
a new minimum has been terminated due to reaching the maximum
number of iterations.
Number of Iterations At times, the data fitter may arrive at coefficients which correspond to a
minimum in the objective function, not fulfilling the least squares error
limit. This command defines how many attempts the program will make
to exit the minimum. The maximum number of iterations is 500.
Convergence Tolerance The data fitter uses the Downhill Simplex method to find a (local)
minimum. This method uses several sets of material coefficients and
calculates the corresponding objective functions. Based on the values of
the objective functions, the sets of material coefficients are modified.
This process is terminated when:
2*abs{(fh-fl)/(abs(fh)+abs(fl))} < convergence
tolerance
in which fh is the highest and fl is the lowest objective function
found so far. The process is also terminated after 2000 trials if the
convergence tolerance has not been reached. This command sets the
convergence tolerance.
Main Index
399
CHAPTER 10
Materials
Use Fictive Coefficient For Foam models, toggle this value to ON in order to use the fictive
Poisson's ratio to create volumetric information.
Fictive Coefficient Supply the fictive Poissons ratio here.
OK Closes the Optional Parameters form.
Plot Parameters Description
Append Curves If this toggle is ON, curves keep accumulating on the XY Window. If it
is OFF, the curves are cleared each time a new data fit is done and plotted.
X-Axis Options
Y-Axis Options
You can plot the curves in linear or log scales.
Deformation Modes If any of these toggles is OFF, that particular deformation mode will be
removed from the XY Window.
OK Closes the Plot Parameters form.
Note: The plotting and deleting of plots in this utility tool is fairly self contained and little, if any,
need to use the XY Plot application is necessary. If however, you find it necessary to use
the XY Plot application and post/unpost curves, the naming convention is as such:
Main Index
400
Raw Data Curve Name = R_"mode type"_"field id"_"color"_"marker type
Data Fit Curve Name = "model"_"mode type"_"field id"_"color"_"line type
where:
mode type (string) = "U" : Uniaxial
"B" : Biaxial
"P" : Planar Shear
"S" : Simple Shear
"V" : Volumetric
"C" : VisCoelastic
model (string)= "N" : Neo-Hookean
"M2" : Mooney 2
"M3" : Mooney 3
"S" : Signiorini
"2O" : Second Order Invariant
"3O" : Third Order Deformation
"Y" : Yeoh
"O#" : Ogden # where # is the number of terms, e.g., O2
"F#" : Foam # where # is the number of terms, e.g., F3
"B" : Boyce
"G" : Gent
"CD" : Continuous damage
"DD" : Discontinuous Damange
"SV" : Shear Relaxation Visco
"BV" : Bulk Relaxation Visco
"EV" : Energy Relaxation Visco
Main Index
Chapter 11: Element Library
11
Element Library
Overview
Element Selection
Global Element Controls
Mass Elements, Springs, Dampers, and Connector Elements
Gap Elements
Line Elements
Membranes, Panels, and Shells
Solid Elements
Beam/Bar and Shell Offsets

Main Index
Overview
402
Overview
The heart of a finite element program lies in its element library which allows you to model a structure for
analysis. MSC Nastran has a very comprehensive element library which lets you model 1-D, 2-D, or 3-D
structures. This section gives some basic definitions of the element types available in MSC Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear. Please note, these elements differ from those used in other portions of MSC Nastran.
Element Types
Each element has five definitive characteristics that determine its behavior:
Class
Number of Nodes
Interpolation
Degrees of Freedom
Integration Method
Class
The type of geometric domain that an element represents determines the class of the element. Listed
below are the classes of elements in the MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear element library.
Beam Elements - is a 3-D bar with axial, bending, and torsional stiffness.
Shell Elements - is a curved, thin or thick structure with membrane/bending capabilities.
Plate Elements - is a flat thin structure carrying in-plane and out-of-plane loads.
Continuum Elements
Plane stress is a thin plate with in-plane stresses only. All normal and shear stresses associated
with the out-of-plane direction are assumed to be zero. (All plane strain elements lie in the
global x-y plane.)
Generalized plane strain is the same as plane strain except that the normal z-strain can be a
prescribed constant or function of x and y.
Axisymmetric elements are describe in 2D, but represent a full 3D structure where the
geometry and loading are both axisymmetric.
3D solid is a solid structure with only translational degrees of freedom for each node (linear
or quadratic interpolation functions).
Truss Elements- is a 3D rod with axial stiffness only (no bending).
Membrane Elements -is a thin sheet with in-plane stiffness only (no bending resistance).
Gap Elements
Points/Springs/Damper Elements
Rigid Constraints
Main Index
403
CHAPTER 11
Element Library
Number of Nodes
The number of nodes for an element define where the displacements are calculated in the analysis.
Elements with only corner nodes are classified as first order elements and the calculation of
displacements at locations within the element are made by linear interpolation. Elements that
contain midside nodes are second order elements and quadratic interpolations are made for
calculating displacements.
In MSC Nastran the number of nodes is designated at the end of the element name. For example, a
CQUAD4 has 4 nodes.
Interpolation
Interpolation (shape) function is an assumed function relating the displacements at a point inside an
element to the displacements at the nodes of an element. In MSC Nastran, three types of shape functions
are used: linear, quadratic, and cubic. Certain types of enhancements, such as Assumed Strain, shape
functions, may increase the elements ability to capture accurately certain types of deformation states.
Degrees of Freedom
Degrees of freedom is the number of unknowns at a node. In the general case, there are six degrees of
freedom at a node in structural analysis (three translations, three rotations). In special cases, the number
of degrees of freedom is two (translations) for plane stress, plane strain, and axisymmetric elements;
three (translations) for 3-D truss element; six (three translations, three rotations) for a 3-D beam
element).
Integration
Numerical integration is a method used for evaluating integrals over an element. Element quantities
such as stresses, strains, and temperatures are calculated at each integration point of the element. Full
integration (quadrature) requires, for every element, 2d integration points for linear interpolation and 3d
points for quadratic interpolation, where scalar d is the number of geometric dimensions of an element
(that is, d = 2 for a quad; d = 3 for a hexahedron). Reduced integration uses a lower number of integration
points than necessary to integrate exactly. For example, for an 8-node quadrilateral, the number of
integration points is reduced from 9 to 4 and, for a 20-node hexahedron, from 27 to 8. For some elements,
an hourglass control method is used to insure an accurate solution.
Main Index
Element Selection
404
Element Selection
The MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear element library provides a complete finite element modeling
capability. Selecting elements to use for a SOL 600 analysis can be very different than elements you
might use for other solution sequences. In particular, the large strains encountered in nonlinear analysis
have implications for the element formulations.
SOL 600 selects appropriate element formulations based on the analysis type, the elements you use in
constructing your model, element properties, and global parameters. While most of the element
formulation decisions made by SOL 600 require no additional user input, some of the formulation
principles are discussed in this section. Certain analyses may require element types other than the default
which can be specified using
Element Interpolation
All of the elements in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear are formulated in element coordinate systems
described in the Marc Volume B: Element Library. For almost all elements, primary vector quantities
(such as displacements) are defined in terms of nodal values with scalar interpolation functions. When
the interpolation function for these vector quantities are the same interpolation functions used to define
the geometry (i.e., the position vector) the elements are called isoparametric. Such elements are
guaranteed to be able to exactly represent all rigid body modes and homogeneous deformation modes, a
necessary condition for convergence to the exact solution as the mesh is refined (i.e. the patch test).
Element Integration
All elements are integrated numerically. MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear normally uses full
integration elements but reduced integration elements are also available. For full integration, the
number of integration points is sufficient to integrate the governing virtual work expression exactly, at
least for linear material behavior. All triangular and tetrahedral elements in MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear use full integration. Reduced integration can be used for quadrilaterals and hexahedral
elements; in this procedure, the number of integration points is sufficient to exactly integrate the
contributions of the strain field that are one order less then the order of the interpolation. The
(incomplete) higher-order contributions to the strain field present in these elements will not be integrated.
Hourglassing
The advantage of the reduced integration elements is that the strains and stresses are calculated at the
location that provide optimal accuracy, the so-called Barlow points. The reduced integration elements
also tend to underestimate the stiffness of the element which often gives better results in a typically
overly-stiff finite element analysis displacement method. An additional advantage is that the reduced
number of integration points decreases CPU time and storage requirements. The disadvantage is that the
reduced integration procedure may admit deformation modes that cause no straining at the integration
points. These zero-energy modes cause a phenomenon called hourglassing, where the zero energy
mode starts propagating through the mesh, leading to inaccurate solutions. This problem is particularly
severe in first-order quadrilaterals and hexahedrals. To prevent these excessive deformations, an
Main Index
405
CHAPTER 11
Element Library
additional artificial stiffness is added to these elements. In this so-called hourglass control procedure, a
small artificial stiffness is associated with the zero-energy modes. This procedure is used in many of the
alternate solid and shell elements in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear All primary elements translated
from the standard MSC Nastran finite elements are fully integrated. Reduced integration elements may
be selected using PARAM,MRALIAS ID (MALIAS02, MALIAS03, etc.).
.
Figure 11-1 Hourglassing
Incompressible Elements
Sometimes fully integrated solid elements are unsuitable for the analysis of (approximately)
incompressible material behavior. The reason for this is that the material behavior forces the material to
deform (approximately) without volume changes. Fully integrated solid element meshes, and in
particular lower-order element meshes, do not allow such deformations (other than purely homogeneous
deformation). For fully incompressible behavior, another complication occurs: the bulk modulus and
hence the stiffness matrix becomes infinitely large. For this case, a mixed (Herrmann) formulation is
required, where the displacement field is augmented with a hydrostatic pressure field. In this
formulation, only the inverse of the bulk modulus appears, and consequently the contribution of the
operator matrix vanishes. In this formulation, the hydrostatic pressure field play the role of a Lagrange
multiplier enforcing the incompressibility constraints.
Overriding MSC Nastran Element Selections
In most cases MSC Nastran selects an equivalent Marc element to use in the analysis. The selection is
based on the large number of analysis correlations between SOL 600 and SOL 100, SOL 106, or 129
results. In some cases an experienced Marc user may want to use alternate elements and may do so by
adding a Parameter to the MSC.nastran Input File as follows.
PARAM,MRALIAS ID (MALIAS02, MALIAS03, etc.)
Main Index
406
Assumed Strain
Conventional isoparametric four-node plane stress and plane strain, and eight-node brick elements
behave poorly in bending. The reason is that these elements do not capture a linear variation in shear
strain which is present in bending when a single element is used in the bending direction. As a default in
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, the element interpolation functions have been modified such that shear
strain variation can be better represented. For elastic isotropic bending problems, this allows the exact
displacements to be obtained with only a single element through the thickness. Use PARAM,
MARCASUM, 1 to activated this option.
Constant Dilatation
When performing nearly incompressible analysis with displacement based elements, the conventional
isoparametric interpolation methods result in poor behavior for lower order elements. To address this
case, an integration scheme option is included (default) which makes the dilatational strain constant
throughout the element. Constant dilatational element formulation is preferred in approximately
incompressible, inelastic analysis, such as large strain plasticity, because conventional elements can
produce volumetric locking due to overconstraints for nearly incompressible behavior. This option is also
the formulation of choice for elastic-plastic analysis and creep analysis because of the potentially nearly
incompressible behavior. Use PARAM, MARCDILT, 1 to activate this option.
Setting Global Element Parameters in Patran
Assumed strain, constant dilatation, plane stress, and reduced integration options, are turned ON and OFF
for the entire model.
1. On the Analysis Application form, select Solution Type..., then click Solution Parameters...
2. Use the check boxes to turn OFF and ON Assumed Strain and Constant Dilatation.
Main Index
407
CHAPTER 11
Element Library
Mass Elements, Springs, Dampers, and Connector
Elements
The following 0-D and 1-D special purpose elements allow you to model very specific types of behavior.
PBUSHT support has been added for nonlinear springs. TABLED1 can be used to specify the load-
deflection curve. The PBUSHT/TBLED1 data is mapped to Marcs SPRINGS option with table-driven
force-deflection curves.
The connector elements (CBUSH,CFAST, and CWELD) in SOL 600 are truly nonlinear and support
large deformation and rotation, while in the rest of Nastran they are linear, thus the results may differ.
Bolt elements were added to support Marc both outside the USA and within the USA. MSC Nastran Bulk
Data entries, MBOLT and MBOLTUS reflect these additions.
Patran FE Application Input Data
These elements are generated in Patran using the following Object/Type combination on the Element
Properties Application form.
Entry Description
CMASS1i Defines scalar mass elements.
CONM1,
CONM2
Defines a concentrated mass at a grid point.
CELAS1 Defines a scalar spring element.
CDAMP1i Defines a scalar damper element.
CVISC Defines a viscous damper element.
CBUSH Defines a generalized spring-and-damper structural element that may be nonlinear or
frequency dependent.
CBUSH1D Defines the connectivity of a one-dimensional spring and viscous damper element.
CFAST Defines a fastener with material orientation connecting two surface patches.
CWELD Defines a weld or fastener connecting two surface patches or points.
Object Type Options Bulk Data Entries
0D Mass Coupled, Grounded, Lumped CONM1, CONM2
1D Mass CMASSi
0D Grounded Spring CELAS1
1D Spring CELAS1
Main Index
Mass Elements, Springs, Dampers, and Connector Elements
408
0D Grounded Damper
1D Damper Scalar, Viscous CDAMPi, CVISC
OD Grounded Bush CBUSH
1D Bush CBUSH1D
Main Index
409
CHAPTER 11
Element Library
Gap Elements
Gap elements are an obsolete method to model contact problems. These elements allow for gap opening
and closing as well as friction along a surface. Gap elements should normally be replaced with 2D or 3D
contact. Gaps for SOL 600 are only offered for compatibility with other MSC Nastran solution sequences
and cannot be simulated exactly the same in SOL 600 as in the other solution sequences. There use is not
recommended.
Entry Description
CGAP Defines a gap or friction element.
1D Gap Adaptive, Nonadaptive CGAP
Main Index
Line Elements
410
Line Elements
MSC Nastran offers a wide variety of line elements that include beams, bars, rods. Beams can be defined
using standard cross sections supplied in a library or general cross sections that are user defined.
Line elements are generated in Patran using the following Object/Type combination on the Element
Entry Description
CBAR Defines a simple beam element.
CBEAM Defines a beam element.
CBEND Defines a curved beam, curved pipe, or elbow element.
CROD Defines a tension-compression-torsion element.
CONROD Defines a rod element without reference to a property entry.
CTUBE Defines a tension-compression-torsion tube element.
1D Beam General Section CBAR
Curved w/ General Section CBEND
Curved w/Pipe Section CBEND
Lumped Section CBEAM/PBCOMP
Tapered Section CBEAM
General Section (CBEAM) CBEAM
1D Rod General Section CROD/CONROD
Pipe Section CTUBE
Main Index
411
CHAPTER 11
Element Library
MSC Nastran includes standard triangular and quadrilateral elements as well as a special purpose shear
element. By specifying element properties these standard elements can represent anticipated membrane,
bending, and shearing responses.
PSHELL with the same bending-membrane coupling as in other solution sequences has been added into
the 2005 r3 release. This will allow you to analyze composite structures using the smeared approach
(such as done in other MSC Nastran solution sequences) or through-the-thickness integration (which is
more accurate and presently the only way to analyze composite structures) will be offered. If material
nonlinearity occurs in the element, then the PSHELL smeared approach should not be used. The choice
is activated by using PARAM,MRPSHELL,1.
These 2-D elements are generated in Patran using the following Object/Type combination on the
Element Properties Application form.
Entry Description
CTRIA3 Defines an isoparametric membrane-bending or plane strain triangular plate element.
CTRIA6 Defines a curved triangular shell element or plane strain with six grid points.
CQUAD4 Defines an isoparametric membrane-bending or plane strain quadrilateral plate
element.
CQUAD8 Defines a curved quadrilateral shell or plane strain element with eight grid points.
CTRIAR Defines an isoparametric membrane-bending triangular plate element.
CQUADR Defines an isoparametric membrane and bending quadrilateral plate element.
CSHEAR Defines a shear panel element.
Object Type Option 1 Option 2 Bulk Data Entries
2-D Shell Homogeneous Standard CTRIA3, CTRIA6,
CQUAD4, CQUAD8
w/PSHELL
Revised CTRIAR, CQUADR
w/PSHELL
Laminate Standard CTRIA3, CTRIA6,
CQUAD4, CQUAD8
w/PCOMP
Main Index
412
w/PCOMP
Equlvalent Section Standard CTRIA3, CTRIA6,
CQUAD4, CQUAD8
w/PSHELL
w/PSHELL
2-D Bending Panel Standard CTRIA3, CTRIA6,
CQUAD4, CQUAD8
w/PSHELL
w/PSHELL
2-D Membrane Standard CTRIA3, CTRIA6,
CQUAD4, CQUAD8
w/PSHELL
w/PSHELL
2-D Shear Panel CSHEAR w/PSHEAR
Note: For SOL 600 CQUADR and CQUAD4 are the same and CTRIAR is the same as CTRIA3.
Object Type Option 1 Option 2 Bulk Data Entries
Main Index
413
CHAPTER 11
Element Library
Solid Elements
MSC Nastran Advanced Nonlinear (SOL 600) contains continuum elements that can be used to
model plane stress, plane strain, generalized plane strain, axisymmetric and three-dimensional solids.
These elements have only displacement degrees of freedom. As a result, solid elements are not
efficient for modeling thin structures dominated by bending. Either beam or shell elements should be
used in these cases. The CHEXA and CPENTA elemments can be converted to solid shells by using the
CSSHLH or CSSHLP bulk data entries.
The solid elements that are available in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear have either linear or quadratic
interpolation functions.
They include
4-, 6-, and 8-node plane stress elements (create plane stress elements using PARAM,
MRALIAS ID (MALIAS02, MALIAS03, etc.))
3-, 4-, 6-, and 8-node plane strain elements
3-, 4-, 6-, and 8-node axisymmetric ring elements
8-, 10-, and 20-node brick elements
4- and 10-node tetrahedron
6 and 8 node solid shell
In general, the elements in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear use a full-integration procedure. Some
elements use reduced integration. The lower-order reduced integration elements include an hourglass
stabilization procedure to eliminate the singular modes.
Continuum elements are widely used for thermal stress analysis. For each of these elements, there is a
corresponding element available for heat transfer analysis in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear. As a
result, you can use the same mesh for the heat transfer and thermal stress analyses.
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear has no singular element for fracture mechanics analysis. The simulation
of stress singularities can be accomplished by moving the midside nodes of 8-node quadrilateral and 20-
node brick elements to quarter-point locations near the crack tip. Many fracture mechanics analyses have
used this quarter-point technique successfully.
The 4- and 8-node quadrilateral elements can be degenerated into triangles, and the 8-and 20-node solid
brick elements can be degenerated into wedges and tetrahedra by collapsing the appropriate corner and
midside nodes. The number of nodes per element is not reduced for degenerated elements. The same
node number is used repeatedly for collapsed sides or faces. When degenerating incompressible
elements, exercise caution to ensure that a proper number of Lagrange multipliers remain. You are
advised to use the higher-order triangular or tetrahedron elements wherever possible, as opposed to using
collapsed quadrilaterals and hexahedra.
Main Index
Solid Elements
414
Axisymmetric Elements
Solids of revolution (axisymmetric solids) subjected to axially symmetric loading can be modeled using
the elements described in this section. For these problems, the coordinate convention is a cylindrical
system. Because of symmetry, the stress components are independent of the angular coordinate so the
components uq, grq, gqz, trq, and tqz are zero. The nonzero components are sr, sq, sz, and trz.
Axisymmetric elements are generated in Patran using the following Object/Type combination on the
Element Properties Application form.
Plane Strain Elements
Plane strain problems involve a long body whose geometry and loading do not vary significantly in the
longitudinal direction. In these problems, the dependent variables can be assumed to be functions of only
the x and y coordinates, provided we consider a cross section at some distance away from the ends. If it
is further assumed that the displacement component in the z direction is zero at every cross section then
the strain components c
z
,
yz
, and
zx
vanish and the remaining non-zero strain components are c
x
, c
y

and
xy
. Also, since c
z
is assumed zero, the stress o
z
can be expressed in terms of o
x
and o
y
for the linear
elastic case as:
(11-1)
Entry Description
CTRIAX6 Defines an isoparametric and axisymmetric triangular cross section ring element with
midside grid points.
CTRIAX Defines an axisymmetric triangular element with up to 6 grid points.
CQUADX Defines an axisymmetric quadrilateral element with up to nine grid points.
2-D 2-D Solid Axisymmetric
Standard CTRIAX6,
Hyperelastic CTRIAX, CQUADX
PLPLANE CTRIAX, CQUADX
o
z
v o
x
o
y
+ ( ) =
Main Index
415
CHAPTER 11
Element Library
3-D Solid Elements
These are all isoparametric solid elements. These elements may have either a homogeneous material
definition, meaning that the element is made of a single material, or a laminated material definition.
Entry Description
CTRIA3 Defines an isoparametric membrane-bending or plane strain triangular plate element.
CTRIA6 Defines a curved triangular shell element or plane strain with six grid points.
CQUAD4 Defines an isoparametric membrane-bending or plane strain quadrilateral plate
element.
CQUAD8 Defines a curved quadrilateral shell or plane strain element with eight grid points.
CTRIAR Defines an isoparametric membrane-bending triangular plate element.
CQUADR Defines an isoparametric membrane and bending quadrilateral plate element.
2-D 2-D Solid Plane Strain
Standard CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4,
CQUAD8
w/PSHELL
w/PSHELL
Hyperelastic CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4,
CQUAD8
w/PLPLANE
Entry Description
CHEXA Defines the connections of the six-sided solid element with eight to twenty grid points.
Main Index
Solid Elements
416
CTETRA Defines the connections of the four-sided solid element with four to ten grid points.
CPENTA Defines the connections of a five-sided solid element with six to fifteen grid points.
CSSHL Defines a connection for a Solid Shell with 6 or 8 grid points in SOL 600 only.
Object Type Options Options Bulk Data Entries
3-D Solid Homogeneous Standard CHEXA, CTETRA,
CPENTA w/PSOLID
CSSHL w/PSSHL
Hyperelastic w/PLSOLID
Laminate CHEXA, CTETRA,
CPENTA w/PCOMPor
PCOMPG
CSSHL w/PCOMP or
PCOMPG
Entry Description
Main Index
417
CHAPTER 11
Element Library
There are two methods to model beam and shell offsets. The choice is determined using bulk data
parameter, PARAM,MAROFSET with values of zero or 1. Method Zero uses extra grid points and RBE2
elements and method 1 (default) does not. Method 1 can be used with large deformation analysis.
Pin flags have been incorporated within the SOL 600 translator (they are not yet available directly in
Marc). Pin flags are simulated by adding extra grids at the same location and connecting them with
MPCs. Pin flags and offsets cannot both be defined for a particular end of a beam, and if entered will
generate a error.
Main Index
418
Main Index
Chapter 12: Contact
12
Contact
Overview
Contact Methodology
Defining Contact Bodies
Selecting and Controlling Contact Behavior
Heat Transfer and Thermal Contact
References
Main Index
Overview
420
Overview
The simulation of many physical problems requires the ability to model the contact phenomena. This
includes analysis of interference fits, rubber seals, tires, crash, and manufacturing processes among
others. The analysis of contact behavior is complex because of the requirement to accurately track the
motion of multiple geometric bodies, and the motion due to the interaction of these bodies after contact
occurs. This includes representing the friction between surfaces and heat transfer between the bodies if
required. The numerical objective is to detect the motion of the bodies, apply a constraint to avoid
penetration, and apply appropriate boundary conditions to simulate the frictional behavior and heat
transfer. Several procedures have been developed to treat these problems including the use of Perturbed
or Augmented Lagrangian methods, penalty methods, and direct constraints. Furthermore, contact
simulation has often required the use of special contact or gap elements. MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
allows contact analysis to be performed automatically without the use of special contact elements. A
robust numerical procedure to simulate these complex physical problems has been implemented in MSC
Contact problems can be classified as one of the following types of contact.
Deformable-Deformable contact between two- and three-dimensional deformable bodies.
Rigid - Deformable contact between a deformable body and a rigid body, for two- or
three-dimensional cases.
Glued contact in two and three dimensions. This is a general capability for tying (bonding) two
deformable bodies, or a deformable body and a rigid body, to each other.
Contact problems involve a variety of different geometric and kinematic situations. Some contact
problems involve small relative sliding between the contacting surfaces, while others involve large
sliding. Some contact problems involve contact over large areas, while others involve contact between
discrete points. The general Contact Body approach adopted by MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear to
model contact can be used to handle most contact problem definitions.
The contact body approach provides two formulations for modeling the interaction between surfaces of
structures. One formulation is a small-sliding formulation, in which the surfaces can only undergo small
sliding relative to each other, but may undergo arbitrary rotation. An example of this type of application
is the classical Hertz contact problem. The second formulation is a large-sliding formulation, where
separation and sliding of large amplitude, and arbitrary rotation of the surfaces, may arise. An example
is the modeling of a rubber tire rolling on the ground. Currently, the contact pair approach does not
support large-sliding contact between two three-dimensional deformable surfaces.
A special case of the small-sliding formulation is glued contact, in which the surfaces are unable to
penetrate each other, separate from each other, or slide relative to each other. This feature is useful for
mesh refinement purposes.
Main Index
421
CHAPTER 12
Contact
Contact Methodology
This section describes how contact is implemented in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600).
Contact Bodies
There are two types of contact bodies in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear deformable and rigid.
Deformable bodies are simply a collection of finite elements as shown below.
Figure 12-1 Deformable Body
This body has three key aspects to it:
1. The elements which make up the body.
2. The nodes on the external surfaces which might contact another body or itself. These nodes are
treated as potential contact nodes.
3. The edges (2-D) or faces (3-D) which describe the outer surface which a node on another body
(or the same body) might contact. These edges/faces are treated as potential contact segments.
Note that a body can be multiply connected (have holes in itself). It is also possible for a body to be
composed of both triangular elements and quadrilateral elements in 2-D or tetrahedral elements and brick
elements in 3-D. Beam elements and shells are also available for contact.
Each node and element should be in, at most, one body. The elements in a body are defined using the
BCBODY option. It is not necessary to identify the nodes on the exterior surfaces as this is done
automatically. The algorithm used is based on the fact that nodes on the boundary are on element edges
or faces that belong to only one element. Each node on the exterior surface is treated as a potential contact
node. In many problems, it is known that certain nodes never come into contact; in such cases, the
BCHANGE option can be used to identify the relevant nodes. As all nodes on free surfaces are considered
contact nodes, if there is an error in the mesh generation such that internal holes or slits exist, undesirable
results can occur.
The potential segments composed of edges or faces are treated in potentially two ways. The default is
that they are considered as piece-wise linear (PWL). As an alternative, a cubic spline (2-D) or a Coons
Main Index
Contact Methodology
422
surface (3-D) can be placed through them. The BCBODY option is used to activate this procedure. This
improves the accuracy of the calculation of the normal.
Rigid bodies are composed of curves (2-D) or surfaces (3-D) or meshes with only thermal elements in
coupled problems. The most significant aspect of rigid bodies is that they do not distort. Deformable
bodies can contact rigid bodies, but contact between rigid bodies is not considered.
They can be created either in CAD systems and transferred through Patran or some other GUI into MSC
Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, created within Patran, or created directly through the MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear input. There are several different types of curves and surfaces that can be entered including:
Within Patran, all contact curves or surfaces are mathematically treated as NURB surfaces. This allows
the greatest level of generality. Within the analysis, these rigid surfaces can be treated in two ways
discrete piecewise linear lines (2-D) or patches (3-D), or as analytical NURB surfaces. When the discrete
approach is used, all geometric primitives are subdivided into straight segments or flat patches. You have
control over the density of these subdivisions to approximate a curved surface within a desired degree of
accuracy. This subdivision is also relevant when determining the corner conditions ( see Corner
Conditions, 433). The treatment of the rigid bodies as NURB surfaces is advantageous because it leads
to greater accuracy in the representation of the geometry and a more accurate calculation of the surface
normal. Additionally, the variation of the surface normal is continuous over the body which leads to a
better calculation of the friction behavior and a better convergence.
To create a rigid body, you can either read in the curve and surface geometry created from a CAD system
or create the geometry in Patran, or directly enter it into the MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear Bulk Data.
You then use the BCBODY option to select which geometric entities are to be a part of the rigid body.
An important consideration for a rigid body is the definition of the interior side and the exterior side. For
two-dimensional analysis, the interior side is formed by the right-hand rule when moving along the body.
2-D 3-D
line 4-node patch
circular arc ruled surface
spline surface of revolution
NURB Bezier
poly-surface
cylinder
sphere
NURB
trimmed NURB
Main Index
423
CHAPTER 12
Contact
Figure 12-2 Orientation of Rigid Body Segments
For three-dimensional analysis, the interior side is formed by the right-hand rule along a patch. The
interior side is visualized in Patran as the side with markers, the exterior side is visualized in Patran as
the side without markers.
It is not necessary for rigid bodies to define the complete body. Only the bounding surface needs to be
specified. You should take care, however, that the deforming body cannot slide out of the boundary curve
in 2D (Figure 12-3). This means that it must always be possible to decompose the displacement
increment into a component normal and a component tangential to the rigid surface.
Figure 12-3 Deformable Surface Sliding Out of Rigid Surface
Numbering of Contact Bodies
When defining contact bodies for a deformable-to-deformable analysis, it is important to define them in
the proper order. As a general rule, a body with a finer mesh should be defined before a body with a
coarser mesh..
If one has defined a body numbering which violates the general rule, then a BCTABLE definition option
can be used to modify the order in which contact will be established. This order can be directly user-
defined or decided by the program. In the latter case, the order is based on the rule that if two deformable
bodies might come into contact, searching is done for nodes of the body having the smallest element edge
length. It should be noted that this implies single-sided contact for this body combination, as opposed to
the default double-sided contact.
1
2
3
Interior
1
4
3
2
Interior Side
Side
Incorrect Correct
Main Index
Contact Methodology
424
Contact Detection
During the incremental procedure, each potential contact node is first checked to see whether it is near a
contact segment. The contact segments are either edges of other 2-D deformable bodies, faces of 3-D
deformable bodies, or segments from rigid bodies. By default, each node could contact any other segment
including segments on the body that it belongs to. This allows a body to contact itself. To simplify the
computation, it is possible to use the BCTABLE entry to indicate that a particular body will or will not
contact another body. This is often used to indicate that a body will not contact itself. During the iteration
process, the motion of the node is checked to see whether it has penetrated a surface by determining
whether it has crossed a segment.
Because there can be a large number of nodes and segments, efficient algorithms have been developed
to expedite this process. A bounding box algorithm is used so that it is quickly determined whether a node
is near a segment. If the node falls within the bounding box, more sophisticated techniques are used to
determine the exact status of the node.
During the contact process, it is unlikely that a node exactly contacts the surface. For this reason, a
contact tolerance is associated with each surface.
Figure 12-4 Contact Tolerance
If a node is within the contact tolerance, it is considered to be in contact with the segment. The contact
tolerance is calculated by the program as the smaller of 5% of the smallest element side or 25% of the
smallest (beam or shell) element thickness. It is also possible for you to define the contact tolerance
through the input.
During an increment, if node A moves from to , where is beyond the
contact tolerance, the node is considered to have penetrated. In such a case, either the increment is
divided into subincrements as discussed in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information under the
Mathematical Aspects of Contact section or the increment is reduced in size.
2 x Tole
ra
nce
A
t ( )
A
trial ( )
t At + ( ) A
trial ( )
t At + ( )
Main Index
425
CHAPTER 12
Contact
Figure 12-5 Trial Displacement with Penetration
The size of the contact tolerance has a significant impact on the computational costs and the accuracy of
the solution. If the contact tolerance is too small, detection of contact is difficult, leading to higher costs.
Also many nodes are more likely to be considered penetrating leading to increase in increment splitting,
therefore, increasing the computational costs. If the contact tolerance is too large, nodes are considered
in contact prematurely, resulting in a loss of accuracy. Furthermore, nodes might penetrate the surface
by a large amount.
An effective compromise is to bias the tolerance area so that a smaller distance is on the outside surface
than on the inside surface. This is done by entering a bias factor. The bias factor should have a value
between 0.0 and 1.0. The default in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is 0.9. This results in good accuracy
and reasonable computational costs. In analyses involving frictional contact, a bias (recommended value:
0.95 - 0.99) to the contact core is also found beneficial to facilitate convergence.
In some instances, you might wish to influence the decision regarding the deformable segment a node
contacts (or does not contact). This can be done using the EXCLUDE variable on the BCBODY Bulk
Data entry.
Figure 12-6 Biased Contact Tolerance
A(t)
Atrial (t + At)
(1 - Bias)* tolerance
(1 + Bias)* tolerance
Main Index
Contact Methodology
426
Shell Contact
A node on a shell makes contact when the position of the node plus or minus half the thickness projected
with the normal comes into contact with another segment. In 2-D, this can be shown as:
Figure 12-7 Default Shell Contact
If point x or y falls within the contact tolerance distance of segment S, node A is considered in contact
with the segment S. Here and are the position vectors of a point on the surfaces 1 and 2 on the shell,
A is the position vector of a point (node in a discretized model) on the midsurface of the shell, is the
normal to the midsurface, and is the shell thickness.
As the shell has finite thickness, the node (depending on the direction of motion) can physically contact
either the top surface, bottom surface, or mathematically contact can be based upon the midsurface. You
can control whether detection occurs with either both surfaces, the top surface, the bottom surface, or the
middle surface. In such cases, either two or one segment will be created at the appropriate physical
location. Note that these segments will be dependent, not only on the motion of the shell, but also the
current shell thickness.
are segments associated with shell consisting of node 1 and 2.
x
1
A n t 2 + =
x
2
A n t 2 =
x
x
2
x
to
le
ra
n
c
e
A
S
Shell
Midsurface
t
1
2
x
1
x
2
n
t
S
1
S
2
,
Main Index
427
CHAPTER 12
Contact
Figure 12-8 Selective Shell Contact
Neighbor Relations
When a node is in contact with a rigid surface, it tends to slide from one segment to another. In 2-D, the
segments are always continuous and so are the segment numbers. Hence, a node in contact with segment
n slides to segment or to segment . This simplifies the implementation of contact.
Figure 12-9 Neighbor Relationship (2-D)
In 3-D, the segments are often discontinuous. This can be due to the subdivision of matching surfaces or,
more likely, the CAD definition of the under lying surface geometry.
n
1
2
S1
S2
1
n
2
S1
S2
2
1
n
1
S1
2
Include Both Segments Top Segment Only
Bottom Segments Only Ignore Shell Thickness
n 1 n 1 +
n - 1
n
n + 1
Main Index
Contact Methodology
428
Figure 12-10 Neighbor Relationship (3-D)
Continuous surface geometry is highly advantageous as a node can slide from one segment to the next
with no interference (assuming the corner conditions are satisfied). Discontinuous surface geometry
results in additional operations when a node slides off a patch and cannot find an adjacent segment.
Hence, it is advantageous to use geometry clean-up tools to eliminate small sliver surfaces and make the
surfaces both physically continuous and topologically contiguous.
Dynamic Impact
The Newmark-beta and the Single Step Houbolt procedure have the capability to allow variable time
steps and, when using the user-defined fixed time step procedure, the time step is split by the algorithm
to satisfy the contact conditions.
For most dynamic impact problems, the Single Step Houbolt method is recommended, as this procedure
possesses high-frequency dissipation. This is often necessary to avoid numerical problems by contact-
induced high-frequency oscillations. If the other dynamic operators are used, it is recommended that
numerical damping be used during the analysis.
In dynamic analysis, the requirement of energy conservation is supplemented with the requirement of
momentum conservation. In addition to the constraints placed upon the displacements, additional
constraints are placed on the velocity and acceleration of the nodal points in contact, except for the Single
Step Houbolt method.
When a node contacts a rigid surface, it is given the velocity and acceleration of the rigid surface in the
normal direction. The rigid surfaces are treated as if they have infinite mass, hence, infinite momentum.
Nonmatching
Segments
Continuous Surface Segments Discontinuous Surface Geometry
Main Index
429
CHAPTER 12
Contact
Results Evaluation
The MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear post files t16 and t19 contain the results for both the deformable
bodies and the rigid bodies. In performing a contact analysis, you can obtain three types of results. The
first is the conventional results from the deformable body. This includes the deformation, strains,
stresses, and measures of inelastic behavior such as plastic and creep strains. In addition to reaction
forces at conventional boundary conditions, you can obtain the contact forces and friction forces
imparted on the body by rigid or other deformable bodies. By examining the location of these forces, you
can observe where contact has occurred, and MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear also allows you to select
the contact status.
It is also possible to obtain the resultant force following from contact on the deformable bodies and the
resultant force and moment on the rigid bodies. The moment is taken about the user-defined centroid of
the rigid body. The time history of these resultant forces are of significant issues in many engineering
analysis. Of course, if there is no resultant force on a rigid body, it implies that body is not in contact with
any deformable body.
Finally, if the additional print is requested using PARAM,MARCPRN,1 or 2, the output file reflects
information showing when a node comes into contact, what rigid body/segment is contacted, when
separation occurs, when a node contacts a sharp corner, the displacement in the local coordinate system,
and the contact force in the local coordinate system. For large problems, this can result in a significant
amount of output.
The motion of the rigid bodies can be displayed in Patran as well as the deformable bodies. Rigid bodies
which are modeled using the piecewise linear approach are displayed as line segments for flat patches.
When the rigid surfaces are modeled as analytical surfaces, the visualization appears as
trimmed NURBS.
Tolerance Values
Five tolerances can be set for determination of the contact behavior. Not entering any values here means
that MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear calculates values based on the problem specification.
Relative Sliding Velocity Between Surfaces Below Which Friction Forces Drop
As discussed in Friction Modeling, 438, the equations of friction are smoothed internally in the program
to avoid numerical instabilities. The equations are inequalities whenever two contacting surfaces stick to
each other and equalities whenever the surfaces slide (or slip). Thus, the character of contact constraints
change depending on whether there is sticking or slipping. The smoothing procedure consist of
modifying it in such a way, that there is always slip; the amount is a function of the relative velocity and
a constant R
Vcnst
. The value of this constant must be specified. It actually means, that if we specify a
small value in comparison to the relative velocity, the jump behavior is better approximated, but
numerical instabilities can be expected. A large value means, that we need a large relative velocity before
we get the force at which the slip occurs.
It is suggested to use values between 0.1 and 0.01 times a typical surface velocity.
Main Index
Contact Methodology
430
Distance Below Which a Node is Considered Touching a Surface
In each step, it is checked whether a (new) node is in contact with other surfaces. This is determined by
the distance between the nodes and the surfaces. Since the distance is a calculated number, there are
always roundoff errors involved. Therefore, a contact tolerance is provided such that if the distance
calculated is below this tolerance, a node is considered in contact. A too large value means that a high
number of body nodes are considered to be in contact with the surface and are consequently all moved
to the surface, which can be unrealistic in some applications. A too small value of this number means
that the applied deformation increment is split into a high number of increments, thus increasing the cost
of computation.
The tolerance must be provided by the analyst or can be calculated by MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
In general, the contact tolerance should be a small number compared to the geometrical features of the
configuration being analyzed. The value calculated by MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is determined as
1/20 of the smallest element size for solid elements or 1/4 of the thickness of shell elements. If both shell
and continuum elements are present, the default is based upon the smaller of the two values.
Tolerance on Nodal Reaction Force on Nodal Stress Before Separation Occurs
If a tensile force occurs at a node which is in contact with a surface, the node should separate from the
surface. Rather than using any positive value, a threshold value can be specified. This number should
theoretically be zero. However, because a small positive reaction might be due only to errors in
equilibrium, this threshold value avoids unnecessary separations. A too small value of this force results
in alternating separation and contact between the node and the surface. A too large value, of course,
results in unrealistic contact behavior.
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear calculates this value as the maximum residual force in the structure. The
default for this value, is 10 percent of the maximum reaction force. Consequently, if locally high reaction
forces at a particular point are present, the separation force is large as well. In most cases, however, the
default value is a good measure.
If you indicate that separation is to be based upon stresses, a value of the separation stress is used. The
default value is the maximum residual force at node n divided by the contact area of node n.
Numerical Procedures
Lagrange Multipliers
In performing contact analyses, you are solving a constrained minimization problem where the constraint
is the no penetration constraint. The Lagrange multiplier technique is the most elegant procedure to
apply mathematical constraints to a system. Using this procedure, if the constraints are properly written,
overclosure or penetration does not occur. Unfortunately, Lagrange multipliers lead to numerical
difficulties with the computational procedure as their inclusion results in a nonpositive definite
mathematical system. This requires additional operations to insure an accurate, stable solution which
leads to high computational costs. Another problem with this method is that there is no mass associated
with the Lagrange multiplier degree of freedom. This results in a global mass matrix which cannot be
decomposed. This precludes the used of Lagrange multiplier techniques in explicit dynamic calculations
Main Index
431
CHAPTER 12
Contact
which are often used in crash simulations. The Lagrange multiplier technique has often been
implemented in contact procedures using special interface elements such as the MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear gap element. This facilitates the correct numerical procedure, but puts a restriction on the
amount of relative motion that can occur between bodies. The use of interface elements requires an
apriori knowledge of where contact occurs. This is unachievable in many physical problems such as
crash analysis or manufacturing simulation.
Penalty Methods
The penalty method or its extension, the Augmented Lagrangian method, is an alternative procedure to
numerically implement the contact constraints. Effectively, the penalty procedure constrains the motion
by applying a penalty to the amount of penetration that occurs. The penalty approach can be considered
as analogous to a nonlinear spring between the two bodies. Using the penalty approach, some penetration
occurs with the amount being determined by the penalty constant or function. The choice of the penalty
value can also have a detrimental effect on the numerical stability of the global solution procedure. The
penalty method is relatively easy to implement and has been extensively used in explicit dynamic
analysis although it can result in an overly stiff system for deformable-to-deformable contact since the
contact pressure is assumed to be proportional to the pointwise penetration. The pressure distribution is
generally oscillatory.
Hybrid and Mixed Methods
In the hybrid method, the contact element is derived from a complementary energy principle by
introducing the continuity on the contact surface as a constraint and treating the contact forces as
additional elements. Mixed methods, based on perturbed Lagrange formulation, usually consist of
pressure distribution interpolation which is an order less than the displacement field, have also been used
to alleviate the difficulties associated with the pure Lagrange method.
Direct Constraints
Another method for the solution of contact problems is the direct constraint method. In this procedure,
the motion of the bodies is tracked, and when contact occurs, direct constraints are placed on the motion
using boundary conditions both kinematic constraints (MPC and SPC) on transformed degrees of
freedom and nodal forces. This procedure can be very accurate if the program can predict when contact
occurs. This is the procedure that is implemented in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear through the
BCBODY option. No special interference elements are required in this procedure and complex changing
contact conditions can be simulated since no apriori knowledge of where contact occurs is necessary.
Mathematical Aspects of Contact
Please refer to Marc Volume A, Theory and User Information, section 8 for the complete description.
Automatic Penetration Checking Procedure
To detect contact between bodies whose boundaries are moving towards each other, an automatic
penetration checking procedure is available. This procedure significantly increases accuracy and
stability for models in which boundary nodes are displacing significantly. Typical examples include
Main Index
Contact Methodology
432
metal forming processes (sheet forming and forging), highly deformable elastomeric models (rubber
boots), and snap-fit problems (inserting a key into a lock).
The automatic penetration checking procedure is automatically activated if the adaptive loading
procedure is selected. If the automatic penetration checking procedure is selected for these two options,
a different procedure, as described below, is used instead.
From a computational perspective, the automatic penetration checking procedure detects penetration
each time displacements are updated.
For implicit analysis, this typically happens after a matrix solution which produces a change in the
displacements due to a change in applied loads and internal forces. The procedure detects nodes
traversing a contact boundary due to the change in displacements. If at least one node penetrates a contact
surface, a scale factor is applied to the change in displacements such that the penetrating nodes are moved
back to the contact surface.
The automatic penetration checking procedure can, therefore, be considered to be a type of a line search.
The procedure also looks at the magnitude of the change in displacement of nodes which already are
contacting and not necessarily penetrating. Using stability considerations, the scale factor calculated
above may be further modified. In addition, for nodes on a contact boundary which are not yet contacting,
a similar procedure is followed to enhance stability.
Because the procedure can reduce the change in displacements, it may require more iterations to
complete an increment. It is important to ensure that the maximum allowable number of iterations to
complete an increment is set to a sufficiently large value. When the adaptive loading procedure is used,
or when the fixed time stepping procedure is used with automatic restarting, the increment automatically
restarts if the maximum allowable number of iterations is exceeded. In the case of the adaptive loading
procedure, the time step is modified.
When dynamics or the arc length control method is used, the above procedure is not available. Instead,
penetration is checked for when convergence is achieved, usually after multiple iterations.
Contact Tolerance
A node comes into contact with another body when it enters the contact tolerance zone. This area is
dependent upon the value of ERROR and BIAS entered on the BCPARA Bulk Data entry. When BIAS is
zero (the default is 0.9), the tolerance is equidistant from the actual surface as shown in Figure 12-11(a);
otherwise, the situation shown in Figure 12-11(b) is used. If a node would have moved past line B, then
an additional iteration is required.
Note: The automatic penetration checking procedure is always used with the default time
stepping procedures in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
Main Index
433
CHAPTER 12
Contact
Figure 12-11 Contact Tolerances
Separation
A node on a body separates from another surface when a tensile load is required to keep it on the surface.
The procedure used is either based upon the nodal force or an effective nodal stress. The default
separation force is the maximum residual force (separation based upon nodal force method) or the
maximum stress at reaction nodes times the convergence tolerance (nodal stress method).
Corner Conditions
When a node slides along a surface composed of multiple segments, three conditions can occur based
on the angle that the segments make. This is true for both two-dimensional and three-dimensional
problems. The Figure 12-12 shows the two-dimensional case for simplicity. If the angle between the two
segments is between 180 - | < o < 180 + |, the node smoothly slides between the segments. If the
angle is such that 0 < o < 180 - |, the node sticks in the sharp concave corner. If the angle is such that
o > 180 + |, the node separates. The value of | is 8.625 for two-dimensional problems and 20 for
three-dimensional problems.
Figure 12-12 Corner Conditions
ERROR
ERROR
B
ERROR*(1-BIAS)
ERROR*(1+BIAS)
(a) Equidistant Default (b) Biased
o
Smooth
Sharp Concave
Sharp Convex
Main Index
Contact Methodology
434
Implementation of Constraints
For contact between a deformable body and a rigid surface, the constraint associated with no penetration
is implemented by transforming the degrees of freedom of the contact node and applying a boundary
condition to the normal displacement. This can be considered solving the problem:
where represents the nodes in contact which have a local transformation, and represents the nodes
not in contact and, hence, not transformed. Of the nodes transformed, the displacement in the normal
direction is then constrained such that is equal to the incremental normal displacement of the rigid
body at the contact point.
Figure 12-13 Transformed System (2-D)
As a rigid body can be represented as either a piecewise linear or as an analytical (NURB) surface, two
procedures are used. For piecewise linear representations, the normal is constant until node P comes to
the corner of two segments as shown in Figure 12-14. During the iteration process, one of three
circumstances occur. If the angle is small , the node P slides to the next segment.
In such a case, the normal is updated based upon the new segment. If the angle o is large ( or
) the node separates from the surface if it is a convex corner, or sticks if it is a concave corner.
The value of is important in controlling the computational costs. A larger value of
reduces the computational costs, but might lead to inaccuracies. The default values are 8.625 for 2-D
and 20 for 3-D. These can be reset using the ANG2D or ANG3D fields on the NLSTRAT entry for each
subcase.
K
a
K
a
b
K
ba
K
bb
u
a
u
b )
`

f
a
f
b )
`

=
a
b
ou
a
n
n
t
P
o o
smooth
o o
smooth
< < ( )
o o
smooth
>
o o
smooth
<
o
smooth
o
smooth
Main Index
435
CHAPTER 12
Contact
Figure 12-14 Corner Conditions (2-D)
In 3-D, these corner conditions are more complex. A node (P) on patch A slides freely until it reaches
the intersection between the segments. If it is concave, the node first tries to slide along the line of
intersection before moving to segment B. This is the natural (lower energy state) of motion.
These corner conditions also exist for deformable-to-deformable contact analysis. Because the bodies
are continuously changing in shape, the corner conditions (sharp convex, smooth or sharp concave) are
continuously being re-evaluated.
When a rigid body is represented as an analytical surface, the normal is recalculated at each iteration
based upon the current position. This leads to a more accurate solution, but can be more costly because
of the NURB evaluation.
Figure 12-15 Corner Conditions (3-D)
When a node of a deformable body contacts a deformable body, a multipoint constraint (MPC) is
automatically imposed. Recalling that the exterior edges (2-D) or faces (3-D) of the other deformable
bodies are known, a constraint expression is formed. For 2-D analysis, the number of retained nodes is
three two from the edge and the contacting node itself. For 3-D analysis, the number of retained nodes
is five four from the patch and the contacting node itself. The constraint equation is such that the
contacting node should be able to slide on the contacted segment, subject to the current friction
conditions. This leads to a nonhomogeneous, nonlinear constraint equation. In this way, a contacting
node is forced to be on the contacted segment. This might introduce undesired stress changes, since a
small gap or overlap between the node and the contacted segment will be closed. During initial detection
of contact (increment 0), the stress-free projection option avoids those stress changes for deformable
contact by adapting the coordinates of the contacting nodes such that they are positioned on the contacted
o
o
Convex Corner Concave Corner
P
A
B
P
P
Main Index
Contact Methodology
436
segment. This stress-free projection can be activated using the BCTABLE entry. A similar option exists
for glued contact; however, in this case, overlap will not be removed.
During the iteration procedure, a node can slide from one segment to another, changing the retained nodes
associated with the constraint. A recalculation of the bandwidth is automatically made. Because the
bandwidth can radically change, the bandwidth optimization is also automatically performed.
A node is considered sliding off a contacted segment if is passes the end of the segment over a distance
more than the contact tolerance. As mentioned earlier, the node separates from the contacted body if this
happens at a convex corner. For deformable contact, this tangential tolerance at convex corners can be
enlarged by using the delayed sliding off option activated via the BCTABLE Bulk Data entry.
Separation
After a node comes into contact with a surface, it is possible for it to separate in a subsequent iteration or
increment. Mathematically, a node should separate when the reaction force between the node and surface
becomes tensile or positive. Physically, you could consider that a node should separate when the tensile
force or normal stress exceeds the surface tension. Rather than use an exact mathematical definition, you
can enter the force or stress required to cause separation.
Separation can be based upon either the nodal forces or the nodal stresses. The use of the nodal stress
method is recommended as the influence of element size is eliminated.
In many analysis, contact occurs but the contact forces are small; for example, laying a piece of paper on
a desk. Because of the finite element procedure, this could result in numerical chattering. MSC Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear has some additional contact control parameters that can be used to minimize this
problem. As separation results in additional iterations (which leads to higher costs), the appropriate
choice of parameters can be very beneficial.
When contact occurs, a reaction force associated with the node in contact balances the internal stress of
the elements adjacent to this node. When separation occurs, this reaction force behaves as a residual force
(as the force on a free node should be zero). This requires that the internal stresses in the deformable body
be redistributed. Depending on the magnitude of the force, this might require several iterations.
You should note that in static analysis, if a deformable body is constrained only by other bodies (no
explicit boundary conditions) and the body subsequently separates from all other bodies, it would then
have rigid body motion. For static analysis, this would result in a singular or nonpositive definite system.
This problem can be avoided by appropriate boundary conditions.
Release
A special case of separation is the intentional release of all nodes from a rigid body. This is often used in
manufacturing analysis to simulate the removal of the workpiece from the tools. After the release occurs
in such an analysis, there might be a large redistribution of the loads. It is possible to gradually reduce
the residual force to zero, which improves the stability, and reduces the number of iterations required.
The BCMOVE Bulk Data entry allows the release (separation) of all the nodes in contact with a particular
surface at the beginning of the increment. The rigid body should be moved away using the BCMOVE Bulk
Main Index
437
CHAPTER 12
Contact
Data entry or deactivated using the BCTABLE entry to ensure that the nodes do not inadvertently
recontact the surface they were released from.
Higher Order Elements
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear allows contact with almost all of the available elements, but the use of
certain elements has a consequence on the analysis procedure. Contact analysis can be performed with
all of the structural continuum elements, either lower order or higher order, including those of the
Herrmann (incompressible) formulation, except axisymmetric elements with twist. Friction modeling is
available in all of these elements except the semi-infinite elements. Traditionally, higher order
isoparametric shape functions have interpolation functions which lead to the equivalent nodal forces that
oscillate between the corner and midside nodes. As this has a detrimental effect on both contact detection
and determining contact separation, two procedures have been implemented to eliminate this problem.
1. On the exterior surfaces, the midside nodes are constrained (tied) to the corner nodes
automatically. This effectively results in a linear variation of the displacement along this edge.
Hence, the element does not behave as a full bi-quadratic (2-D) or tri-quadratic element (3-D).
All elements in the interior of the body behave in the conventional higher-order manner. In many
manufacturing and rubber analyses, the lower-order elements behave better than the higher-order
elements because of their ability to represent the large distortion; hence, these lower-order
elements are recommended.
2. (Default for parabolic elements, LINQUAD=1). This is a new method that has the added
advantage of giving an accurate interface pressure distribution.
The constraints imposed on the nodal degrees of freedom are dependent upon the type of element.
1. When a node of a continuum element comes into contact, the translational degrees of freedom
are constrained.
2. When a node of a shell element comes into contact, the translational degrees of freedom are
constrained and no constraint is places on the rotational degrees of freedom. The exception to this
is when a shell contacts a symmetry surface. In this case, the rotation about the element edge is
also constrained.
3-D Beam and Shell Contact
Additionally, beams and shells contact is governed by the rules outlined below.
2-D Beams
All nodes on beams are potential contact nodes. Beam elements can be used in contact in two modes.
1. The two-dimensional beams can come into contact with rigid bodies composed of curves in the
same x-y plane. The normal is based upon the normal of the rigid surface.
Main Index
Contact Methodology
438
2. The two-dimensional beams can come into contact with deformable bodies either of continuum
elements or other beam elements. As the beams are in two dimensions, they do not intersect
one another.
3-D Beams
Three-dimensional beam elements can be used in contact in three modes.
1. The nodes of the beams can come into contact with rigid bodies composed of surfaces. The normal
is based upon the normal of the rigid surface.
2. Nodes of the three-dimensional beams can also come into contact with the faces of
three-dimensional continuum elements or shell elements.
3. The three-dimensional elastic beams can also contact other elastic beams. In this case, we can
consider beams crossing one another. In such cases, the beams are automatically subdivided
such that four beams are created. As the beams slide upon each other, they are adaptively changed
in length.
Figure 12-16 Beam-to-Beam Contact
Shell Elements
All nodes on shell elements are potential contact nodes. As the midside nodes of shell elements are
automatically tied, the high-order shell elements have no benefit. Shell elements can contact either rigid
bodies, continuum elements, or other shell elements. Shell-shell contact involves a more complex
analysis because it is necessary to determining which side of the shell contact occurs.
Friction Modeling
The regularized form of the Coulomb friction model can be written as:
Contact Occurs New Beams Created Adaptive Meshing of Sliding Beam
f
t
2f
n
t
----------- arctan
v
r
RVCNST
-----------------------
\ .
| |
=
Main Index
439
CHAPTER 12
Contact
is a nonlinear relation between the relative sliding velocity and the friction force. Implementation in
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear has been done using a nonlinear spring model. Noting that the behavior
of a nonlinear spring, as shown in Figure 12-17, is given by the equation:
Figure 12-17 Spring Model
in which is the spring stiffness and , , , and are displacements and forces of points 1 and
2, the equivalent in terms of velocities is readily seen to read
Since is a nonlinear function of the relative velocity, the above equation is solved incrementally,
where within each increment a number of iterations may be necessary. For a typical iteration , the
equation to be solved looks like
(12-1)
where and are used to update and by
(12-2)
Notice that and correspond to the beginning of the iteration. For deformable-rigid contact, it
is easy to see that
, (12-3)
since the motion of a rigid body (to which node 2 belongs) is exactly prescribed by you. In a static
analysis, MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear provides no direct information about velocities, so they
have to be calculated from the displacement and time increments. Denoting a time increment by , we
can write
K K
K K
u
1
u
2
F
1
F
2
=
u, F u, F
1 2
K u
1
u
2
F
1
F
2
K K
K K
v
1
v
2
F
1t
F
2t
=
K
i
K
i
K
i
K
i
K
i
ov
1
i
ov
2
i
AF
1t
i
AF
2t
i
=
ov
1
i
ov
2
i
v
1
i
v
2
i
v
1
i
v
1
i 1
ov
1
i
+ =
v
2
i
v
2
i 1
= ov
2
i
+
v
1
i 1
v
2
i 1
ov
2
i
0 =
At
Main Index
Contact Methodology
440
, (12-4)
in which represents the correction of the incremental displacement for iteration like (see
also Equation (12-2)).
(12-5)
Substituting Equation (12-3) and Equation (12-6) into Equation (12-1) yields
(12-6)
For the first iteration of an increment, an improvement of Equation (12-6) can be achieved by taking into
account the velocity at the end of the previous increment. Then Equation (12-3) can be rewritten as
, (12-7)
so that Equation (12-6) can be modified like
(12-8)
For the subsequent iterations,
(12-9)
In Equation (12-9), denotes the relative velocity between the points 1 and 2 at the end of the previous
increment. It must be noted that the additional term in Equation (12-9) is especially important if the
velocity of the rigid body differs much from the relative velocity. This is usually the case in rolling
processes, when the roll has been modeled as a rigid body. For this reason, this improved friction model
is called friction for rolling.
Friction is a complex physical phenomena that involves the characteristics of the surface such as
surface roughness, temperature, normal stress, and relative velocity. The actual physics of friction
continues to be a topic of research. Hence, the numerical modeling of the friction has been simplified to
two idealistic models.
The most popular friction model is the Adhesive Friction or Coulomb Friction model. This model is used
for most applications with the exception of bulk forming such as forging. The Coulomb model is:
where
ov
1
i
ou
1
i
At
--------- =
ou
1
i
Au
1
i 1
i
Au
1
i
Au
1
i 1
= ou
1
i
+
1
At
----- K
i
ou
1
i
AF
1
i
=
v
1
p
ov
1
1
Au
1
1
At
---------- v
1
p
=
1
At
----- K
1
ou
1
1
AF
1
1
K v
r
p
v
2
p
| | =
1
At
----- K
i
ou
1
i
AF
1
i
=
v
r
i
o
f r
o
n
t s
Main Index
441
CHAPTER 12
Contact
is the relative sliding velocity.
The Coulomb model is also often written with respect to forces
where
Quite often in contact problems, neutral lines develop. This means that along a contact surface, the
material flows in one direction in part of the surface and in the opposite direction in another part of the
surface. Such neutral lines are, in general, not known a priori.
For a given normal stress, the friction stress has a step function behavior based upon the value of
or .
Figure 12-18 Coulomb Friction Model
is the normal stress
is the tangential (friction) stress
is the friction coefficient
is the tangential vector in the direction of the relative velocity
is the tangential force
is the normal reaction
o
n
o
f r
t
t
v
r
v
r
-------- =
v
r
f
t
f
n
t s
f
t
f
n
v
r
Au
v
r
f
t
or o
fr
Stick
Slip
Main Index
Contact Methodology
442
This discontinuity in the value of can result in numerical difficulties so a modified Coulomb friction
model is implemented:
Physically, the value of RVCNST is the value of the relative velocity when sliding occurs. The value of
RVCNST is important in determining how closely the mathematic model represents the step function. A
very large value of RVCNST results in a reduced value of the effective friction. A very small value results
in poor convergence. It is recommended that the value of RVCNST be 1% or 10% of a typical relative
sliding velocity, . Because of this smoothing procedure, a node in contact always has some slipping.
Besides the numerical reasons, this ever slipping node model has a physical basis. Oden and Pires
pointed out that for metals, there is an elasto-plastic deformation of asperities at the microscopic level
(termed as cold weld) which leads to a nonlocal and nonlinear frictional contact behavior. The arctan
representation of the friction model is a mathematical idealization of this nonlinear friction behavior.
When the Coulomb model is used with the stress based model, the integration point stresses are first
extrapolated to the nodal points and then transformed so a direct component is normal to the contacted
surface. The tangential stress is then evaluated and a consistent nodal force is calculated.
For shell elements, since a nodal force based Coulomb model is used:
Figure 12-19 Stick-slip Approximation ( )
o
f r
o
f r
o
n

2
t
--- arctan
v
r
RVCNST
-----------------------
\ .
| |
t s
v
r
o
n
0
f
t
f
n
2
t
--- arctan
v
r
RVCNST
-----------------------
\ .
| |
t =
f
t
1 C = 0.01
C = 0.1
C = 1
C = 10
C = 100
-10
=
r
-1
10
f
n
1 C , RVCNST = =
Main Index
443
CHAPTER 12
Contact
This nodal forced based model should not be used if a nonlinear friction coefficient is to be used, as this
nonlinearity is, in general, dependent upon the stress, not the force. This model can also be used for
continuum elements.
The Coulomb friction model can also be utilized as a true stick-slip model. In this procedure, a node
completely sticks to a surface until the tangential force reaches the critical value . Also, to model the
differences in static versus dynamic friction coefficients, an overshoot parameter, , can be used.
The stick-slip model is always based upon the nodal forces. When using the stick-slip procedure, the
program flow is:
Note that this procedure requires additional computations to determine if the stick-slip condition has
converged. It requires that
f
n
o
Initial Contact
Au
t
0 ~
Assume Slipping
Mode
Assume Sticking
Mode
Determine Solution
of Next Iteration
Remain in Slipping Mode if:
f
t
Au
t
0 < - and Au
t
| >
Remain in Sticking Mode if:
f
t
of
n
s
Change to Sticking Mode if:
f
t
Au
t
0 > - and Au
t
| >
or if Au
t
c| ~
Change to Slipping Mode if:
f
t
of
n
>
No Yes
1 e
f
t
f
t
p
---- 1 e + s s
Main Index
Contact Methodology
444
where is the tangential force in the previous iteration.
This additional testing on the convergence of the friction forces is not required when the
smooth/continuous model is used.
The friction model can be represented as shown in Figure 12-20.
Figure 12-20 Stick-Slip Friction Parameters
Coulomb friction is a highly nonlinear phenomena dependent upon both the normal force and relative
velocity. Because the Coulomb friction model is an implicit function of the velocity or displacement
increment, the numerical implementation of friction has two components: a force contribution and a
contribution to the stiffness matrix. The stiffness is calculated based upon:
This later contribution leads to a nonsymmetric system. Because of the additional computational costs
both in terms of memory and CPU costs, the contribution to the stiffness matrix is symmetrized. For the
calculation of the instabilities associated with brake squeal, the nonsymmetric friction contribution to the
stiffness is made.
When the stress based friction model is used, the following steps are taken.
1. Extrapolate the physical stress, equivalent stress, and temperature from the integration points to
the nodes using the conventional element shape functions.
f
t
p
f
n
o
f
n
f
t
2
|
2
c|
Au
t
o = 1.05 (default; can be user-defined)
| = 1 x 10-6 (default; can be user-defined)
c = 1 x 10-6 (fixed; so that c| ~ 0)
e = 5 x 10-2 (default; can be user-defined)
K
i j
cf
t
i
cv
r
j
--------- =
Main Index
445
CHAPTER 12
Contact
2. Calculate the normal stress.
3. Calculate the relative sliding velocity. At the beginning of an increment, the previously calculated
relative sliding velocity is used as the starting point. When a node first comes into contact, it is
assumed that it is first sticking, so the relative sliding velocity is zero.
4. Numerically integrate the friction forces and the stiffness contribution.
For the case of deformable-deformable contact, loads equal in magnitude and opposite in direction are
applied to the body that is contacted. Each of these loads is extrapolated to the closest boundary nodes.
With this procedure, it is guaranteed that all friction forces applied are in self equilibrium.
The Coulomb friction model often does not correlate well with experimental observations when the
normal force/stress becomes large. If the normal stress becomes large, the Coulomb model might predict
that the frictional shear stresses increase to a level that can exceed the flow stress or the failure stress of
the material. As this is not physically possible, the choices are either to have a nonlinear coefficient of
friction or to use the cohesive, shear based friction model.
Figure 12-21 Linear Coulomb Model Versus Observed Behavior
The shear based model states that the frictional stress is a fraction of the equivalent stress in the material:
Again, this model is implemented using an arctangent function to smooth out the step function:
This model is available for all elements using the distributed load approach.
When a node contacts a rigid body, the coefficient of friction associated with the rigid body is used.
When a node contacts a deformable body, the average of the coefficients for the two bodies are used.
Various BCTABLE options can be used if complex situations occur.
o
fr
Linear Coulomb Model

Observed Behavior
o
n
o
f r
m
o
3
------- t s
o
f r
m
o
3
-------
2
t
--- arctan
v
r
RVCNST
-----------------------
\ .
| |
t s
Main Index
Contact Methodology
446
Recalling that friction is a complex physical phenomena, due to variations in surface conditions, lubricant
distribution, and lubricant behavior, relative sliding, temperature, geometry, and so on.
The above two friction models may be extend, if necessary, by means of user subroutine UFRIC. In such
a routine, you provide the friction coefficient or the friction factor as
or
Glue Model
A special type of friction model is the glue option, which imposes that there is no relative tangential
motion. The glue motion is activated through the BCTABLE Bulk Data entry.
A novel application of contact is to join two dissimilar meshes. In such a case, by specifying a very large
separation force and that the glue motion is activated, the constraint equations are automatically written
between the two meshes.
position of the point at which friction is being calculated
normal force at the point at which friction is being calculated
temperature at the point at which friction is being calculated
relative sliding velocity between point at which friction is being calculated and surface
flow stress of the material
x f
n
T v
r
o
y
, , , , ( ) =
m m x f
n
T v
r
o
y
, , , ( ) =
x
f
n
T
v
r
o
y
Main Index
447
CHAPTER 12
Contact
This section describes surface geometry definition, motion definition, and friction description in
automatic two- and three-dimensional contact applications. The basic philosophy behind these
applications is the existence of one or more bodies that might or might not come into contact with one
another, or even contact with themselves during an analysis. As far as the contact is concerned, it is the
surface associated with the body that plays a role.
There is a limit of 999 bodies in an analysis. Bodies may be combined if the 999 body limit is not
exceeded. Some can be deformable, others can be rigid. Deformable surfaces must always be declared
in the input file before rigid surfaces.
Deformable and Rigid Surfaces
A deformable surface is simply defined by the set of elements that constitute the body to which it is
associated. When a node of another body or the same body (in self contact) comes into contact with a
deformable surface, information regarding the contacted surface is obtained. This is based upon the
coordinates of the nodes on the face of the element or the coordinates and an averaged normal if the
BCBODY option is used. This can improve the accuracy of the solution.
A rigid surface does not deform. There are two modes to describe the geometric profile of a rigid surface.
In the first, labelled the PieceWise Linear approach (PWL), the profile is defined by sets of geometrical
data which can be comprised of straight lines, circles and splines, ruled surfaces, surfaces of revolution
and patches, etc. These sets have to be given in a proper sequence around the rigid body they define, even
if it is not necessary that the full enclosure be defined.
In the second method, labelled Analytical, the geometric profile is defined by prescribing 2-D NURB
curves, 3-D NURB surfaces, or exact quadratic descriptions. Using this method, the surface is divided
into line segments or patches The contact condition is based on the true surface geometry. This method
is more accurate for curved surfaces, and might reduce the number of iterations, especially if friction
is present.
In coupled thermal-stress contact, it is possible to have a surface defined strictly by thermal elements
with a rigid body motion applied to it.
Motion of Surfaces
Deformable surfaces can move either because of contact with other surfaces, or because of directly
applied displacement boundary conditions or loads.
To each surface, we associate a point (center of rotation) that can be anywhere in space. A translative
velocity and a rotational velocity around that point define the instantaneous motion of the surface. These
velocities are integrated forward in time to define the motion of the surfaces. It is also possible to directly
prescribe the location of the rigid body. As an alternative, you can prescribe a force or SPCD which is
consider a special type of force to the rigid body.
Main Index
448
The BCBODY model definition option can be used for the input of constant rigid body motions which
do not change with time during the analysis. However, changes in rigid body motion (time dependent
motion) can be simulated either applying the proper motion to the GRID point at the CG of the rigid body
or by the user subroutine MOTION activated through the model definition option UMOTION.
Cautions
In static analysis, it is necessary to artificially connect (for instance, by very low stiffness springs)
deformable bodies that during an analysis might be completely separated from other deformable bodies
and have no kinematic boundary conditions applied. This is to avoid rigid body motion (PARAM,
MRSPRING).
A debug printout parameter (PARAM,MARCPRN) is available in contact analysis, it produces
information on when any node on the boundary comes into contact or separates from any surface. It also
produces information on whether a contact node is fixed to a surface or is free to slide along it. In addition
to the printed contact information, the incremental displacement and the reaction forces for those nodes
in contact with rigid surfaces are printed in a local coordinate system.
There are three implied loops in the portion of the program dealing with contact: the outermost loop is
over the number of surfaces; the next loop is over the number of sets of geometrical data for each surface;
and the innermost loop is over the number of points comprised in each set. In case of deformable surfaces,
the two inner loops reduce to the list of elements.
Control Variables and Option Flags
The variable RVCNST on the Bulk Data BCPARA entry allows the system to self-adaptively search for
sticking zones. RVCNST should be a relative sliding velocity very small compared to the typical sliding
velocities in the model, but not so small that it would be overcome by changes between iterations. It is
suggested you use values between 10-1 and 10-2 times a typical relative surface velocity. MSC Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear default is 1.0.
The variable ERROR on the BCPARA entry determines the tolerance for contact. A too small tolerance
might provoke too many increment splits. A too coarse tolerance produces unrealistic behavior. If left
blank, the code calculates ERROR as the smallest nonzero element dimension divided by 20 or the shell
thickness divided by 4. If there are splines in surface definitions, a value should be entered.
The variable FNTOL (BCPARA entry) is used for the input of a separation force in a contact analysis. If
the contact force of a node, calculated by MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, is greater than the prescribed
separation force (FNTOL), the node is to be separated from the contact surface.
You can control the type of friction in a contact analysis. Either shear friction, Coulomb friction or a
frictionless condition can be assumed in the analysis. The friction behavior is either continuous or
true-stick slip behavior.
The computation of Coulomb friction in a contact problem can be based on either nodal stresses or
nodal forces.
Main Index
449
CHAPTER 12
Contact
During each load increment, separations can occur. You can control the maximum number of nodal
separations allowed in each increment to reduce computational costs. During each load increment, if the
contact of a node (or a group of nodes) is detected, iteration occurs in order to accommodate the contact
condition. Depending on the occurrence of further contact, the load increment recursively split until the
total incremental load is reached.
Time Step Control
The automatic contact procedure is controlled by the TSTEPNL Bulk Data entry for dynamic problems
or the NLPARM entry (actually load steps) for static analyses. This is used to determine the motion of
rigid surfaces and to control the splitting of increments if penetration occurs. Even in a quasi-static
analysis, a time step must be defined by you. Several procedures can be used to enter this data.
Additional control is achieved using the NLAUTO and/or NLSTRAT Bulk Data entries. It is highly
recommended that at least 100 increments be specified for all contact problems.
The NLAUTO and NLSTRAT subcase definition options can be used to define several time
steps, each of the same magnitude.
The NLAUTO and NLSTRAT subcase definition options can also be used to define a time
period which is divided into equal time steps.
The NLAUTO or NLSTRAT subcase options can also be used to define a total time period
which is divided into variable size time steps.
Dynamic Contact - Impact
The automatic contact procedure can also be used in dynamic analyses to model impact problems. This
can be used with the implicit single step Houbolt or Newmark-beta operator and vibration. The
TSTEPNL, NLAUTO, and NLSTRAT Bulk Data entries are used to control the choice. High frequency
vibration or impact where wave propagation is important should use SOL 700.
Two-dimensional Rigid Surfaces
In a two-dimensional problem, the rigid surfaces can be represented by any of or a combination of the
following geometric entities: (1) straight line segments, (2) circular arcs, and (3) spline.
Note that the normal vector of the geometric entities (line segments, circular arc, and the spline) always
points into the rigid-body. The normal vector direction is determined from the direction of the geometric
entity, following a right-handed rule. Care must be taken in entering the coordinates (x, y) data, in a
correct direction, for rigid-surfaces.
Line Segments
When the Line Segment option is chosen, the number NPOINT and the coordinates (x, y) of (NPOINT)
points must be entered for the definition of the rigid surface. MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
Main Index
450
automatically creates a rigid surface consisting of (NPOINT -1) linear segments for the contact problem.
A two-dimensional rigid surface consisted of line segments is shown in Figure 12-22.
This entity supports analytic description/procedure.
Figure 12-22 Two-dimensional Rigid Surface (Line Segment, ITYPE = 1)
Circular Arc
When the Circular Arc option is chosen, one circular segment is created by MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear. There are five different methods available to define a circular arc in two dimensions. Each
method requires four data blocks with the following type of data may be used to describe the arcs:
Starting Point of Arc(SP)
Ending Point of Arc(EP)
Center of Circle(C)
Radius of Circle(R)
Tangent Angles(TA)
Swept Angle(SA)
Number of Subdivisions(NS)
Clearly, not all of this information is required for each method. The table below describes which data is
required. The default number of subdivisions is 10. If the analytical approach is used, the number of
subdivisions does not influence the accuracy, but is only used for visualization purposes.
For methods 1 and 3, a positive radius means the center of the circle is on the surface side. A negative
radius means the center of the circle is on the outside.
Data Block
Method
0 1 2 3 4
1 SP SP SP SP SP
2 EP EP EP EP blank
3 C C C TA1, TA2 C
4 R, NS R, NS R, NS R, NS SA, NS
y
x
Start point
End point
1 2
3
4
5
6 7 8
Rigid body
q
Main Index
451
CHAPTER 12
Contact
For method 2, the first coordinate of the center is taken into account, determining whether the center is
above (>0) or below (<0) the segment defined by the end points.
For planar problems, SP, EP and C are X, Y data.
For axisymmetric problems, SP, EP and C are Z, R data.
For methods 0, 1 and 2, if R is zero, it is calculated as distance from the center to the starting point.
This entity supports analytical description/procedure.
A two-dimensional rigid surface represented by a circular arc is shown in Figure 12-23 and Figure 12-24.
Figure 12-23 Two-dimensional Rigid Surface (Circular Arc, ITYPE = 2, METHOD = 0)
Figure 12-24 Two-dimensional Rigid Surface (Circular Arc)
Spline
When the Spline option is chosen, MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear creates a spline by passing from the
second point through to the second to last point entered. The first and the last points entered are used to
Start point
End point
1
+
Center
Radius
q
Note: For additional circular arc definitions, see body 12-24
SP
C
SA
Method 4 Positive R
+
SP
EP
C
R
SP
EP
C
R
Method 0 Positive R Method 1 Negative R
SP
EP
C
R
X
TA2
TA1
Method 3 Positive R
+
+
+
Main Index
452
define the tangents at the beginning and end of the spline. If a nonanalytical approach is used, then the
spline is internally split into linear segments in such a way that the maximum difference between any of
them and the spline is less than the contact tolerance ERROR. This operation is done before the automatic
tolerance calculation; therefore, a value for ERROR must be entered whenever a spline is used.
Figure 12-25 shows a two-dimensional rigid surface defined by a spline.
Figure 12-25 Two-dimensional Rigid Surface (Spline, ITYPE = 3)
This entity supports analytical description/procedure if only one spline is used in a particular rigid body.
Three-dimensional Rigid Surfaces
In a three-dimensional problem, the rigid surfaces are represented by any of or a combination of the
following three-dimensional surface entities:
The variable ITYPE defines the type of surface entity to be used for a rigid surface. Since most of the
three-dimensional surfaces can be easily and adequately represented by a finite element mesh of 4-node
plate (patch) elements, the option ITYPE = 7 is a very convenient way of representing three-dimensional
rigid surfaces. Both the connectivities and the coordinates of the 4-node patches can be generated using
Patran, or entered through user subroutine DIGEOM.
The three-dimensional surface entities mentioned above, except 4-node patches, can in turn be generated
from three-dimensional geometric entities. Available three-dimensional geometric entities are:
Surface Entity Type Type Identification (ITYPE)
Ruled surface 4
Surface of revolution 5
Bezier surface 6
4-node patch 7
Poly-surface 8
NURB 9
Cylinder 10
Sphere 11
Start point
End point
1 2
3
4
5
6
q
Rigid body
Note: The normal vector q is pointed into the
rigid body.
Main Index
453
CHAPTER 12
Contact
The variable JTYPE defines the type of geometric entities to be used for the generation of
three-dimensional rigid surfaces.
For the (PWL) approach, note that all geometrical data in 3-D space is reduced to 4-node patches. The
four nodes will probably not be on the same plane. The error in the approximation is determined by the
number of subdivisions of the defined surfaces. Note that the normal to a patch is defined by the
right-hand rule, based on the sequence in which the four points are entered.

Ruled Surface
When the Ruled surface option is chosen, a ruled surface is created by MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
based on the input of two surface generators, defined by straight line segment (JTYPE = 1), 3D circular
arc (JTYPE = 2), spline (JTYPE = 3) or Bezier curve (JTYPE = 4). If the surface generator is not a 3D
circular arc, the number NPOINT1 (NPOINT2) and the coordinates (x, y, z) of these NPOINT1
(NPOINT2) points must be entered for the definition of the surface generators. In case the surface
generator is a 3D circular arc, a method (METH) must be selected for the definition of the circular arc.
A 3D circular arc is defined by four points. In addition, the number of subdivisions, NDIV1, along the
first (surface generator) and the NDIV2 along the second (from the first surface generator to second
surface generator) direction must also be entered. For a (PWL) approach, MSC Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear creates (NDIV1) x (NDIV2) 4-node patches automatically to represent the prescribed ruled
surface. For analytical approach, (NDIV1 + 1) x (NDIV2 + 1) points are created and a NURB surface is
general which passes exactly through these points. The accuracy in general is controlled by the number
of points. Figure 12-26 shows a typical ruled surface.
Geometric Entity Type Type Identification (JTYPE)
Straight line segment 1
3-D circular arc 2
Spline 3
Bezier Curve 4
Poly line 5
Note: Patran produces a nurbs description for all 3-D rigid surfaces, even when patches or other
geometrical shapes are specified. If rigid bodies made of patches are desired then the
geometry should be meshed, and the elements specified as the application region.
Main Index
454
Figure 12-26 Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (Ruled Surface, ITYPE = 4)
Surface of Revolution
When the Surface of revolution option is chosen, a surface of revolution is created by MSC Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear based on the input of one surface generator, defined by straight line segment (JTYPE
= 1), 3-D circular arc (JTYPE = 2), spline (JTYPE = 3) or Bezier curve (JTYPE = 4). If the surface
generator is not a 3-D circular arc, the number NPOINT and the coordinates (x, y, z) of these NPOINT
points must be entered for the definition of the surface generator. In case the surface generator is a 3-D
circular arc, a method (METH) must be selected for the definition of the circular arc. A 3-D circular arc
is defined by four points. In addition, the number of subdivisions NDIV1 along the surface generator and
NDIV2 along the second (circumferential) direction must also be entered.
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear then creates (NDIV1 x NDIV2) four-node patches automatically, to
represent the prescribed surface of revolution. The axis of revolution is defined by the coordinates (x, y,
z) of two points in space, and an angle of rotation from the initial position is also needed for the definition
of the surface of revolution. A positive rotation is about the axis formed from point 1 to point 2.
Figure 12-27 shows a typical surface of revolution.
x
y
z
q
Start point
End point
Start point
End point
1st Geometric entity
2nd Geometric entity
1
2
1: first direction
2: second direction
q: normal direction into the rigid body
NDIV2 = 3
NDIV1 = 4
NDIV1 = number of divisions in the first direction
NDIV2 = number of divisions in the second direction
Main Index
455
CHAPTER 12
Contact
Figure 12-27 Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (Surface of Revolution, ITYPE = 5)
Bezier Surface
When the Bezier Surface option is chosen, a Bezier surface is defined by the coordinates (x, y, z) of
NPOINT1 x NPOINT2 control points. NPOINT1 points are entered along the first direction and then
repeated NPOINT2 times to fill through the second direction of the surface. NPOINT1 and NPOINT2
have to be at least equal to 4. Number of subdivisions (NDIV1, NDIV2) entered has to be equal or greater
than NPOINT1 and NPOINT2 for Bezier surface. (NPOINT1-1) x (NPOINT2-1) 4-node patches are
created by MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear for the definition of a Bezier surface. Figure 12-28 shows
a typical Bezier surface. If it can be treated as an analytical surface, an exact conversion to NURBS
is performed.
x
y
z
q
Start point
End point
1
2
Point 2
Angle of
rotation
Point 1
Axis of revolution defined
by the coordinates of
points 1 and 2
Surface generation
(initial position)
1: First direction
2: Second direction
q: Normal direction into the rigid body
Main Index
456
Figure 12-28 Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (Bezier Surface, ITYPE = 6)
Four-node patches
When the Four-Node Patches option is chosen, you enter directly all the 4-node patches that comprise
this surface. They are entered following the same format MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear would use to
specify connectivities and coordinates of a mesh of CQUAD4 elements. In this way, a finite element
preprocessor can be used to create surfaces. Alternatively, this data can be entered via the user subroutine
DIGEOM further permitting you to read by yourself from any data you have access to. Figure 12-29
shows a typical 4-node patch surface. It cannot be used as an analytical surface.
x
y
z
q
2
NDIV2 = 4
NPOINT2 = 4
1
NDIV1 = 4
NPOINT1 = 4
r00
r30
r31
r32
r33
r23
r13
r03
r02
r01
r12
r22
r21
r20
r10
r11
1: First direction
2: Second direction
Main Index
457
CHAPTER 12
Contact
Figure 12-29 Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (4-Node Patch, ITYPE = 7)
Poly-surface
When the Poly-Surface option is chosen, a poly-surface is defined by the coordinates (x, y, z) of
NPOINT1 x NPOINT2 control points. NPOINT1 points are entered along the first direction and then
repeated NPOINT2 times to fill through the second direction of the surface. NPOINT1 and NPOINT2
have to be at least equal to 4 for a poly-surface and there is no need to divide it. A typical poly-surface
is shown in Figure 12-30.
x
y
z
12
7
13
8
Number of patches = 12
Number of nodes = 20
Nodal coordinates can be entered
using user subroutine DIGEOM
q
7
12
1
13
2
8
Rigid body
q
7
12
1
13
2
8
Rigid body
1: First direction
2: Second direction
q: Normal vector (right-hand rule) into the rigid body
Main Index
458
Figure 12-30 Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (Poly Surface, ITYPE = 8)
In a three-dimensional contact problem, as in a two-dimensional situation, the surface generators can
be represented in a variety of ways. It can be treated as an analytical surface. Approximate conversion
to NURBS.
Nonuniform Rational Bspline Surface, NURBS
When the NURBS option is chosen, NURBS are defined by the coordinates (x, y, z) of
NPOINT1 x NPOINT2 control points, NPOINT1 x NPOINT2 homogeneous coordinates and
(NPOINT1+NORDER1) + (NPOINT2+NORDER2) normalized knot vectors. If only the control points
are entered, the interpolation scheme is used such that the surface passes through all of control points.
The homogeneous coordinates and knot vectors are calculated by MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
NPOINTS and NPOINT2 have to be at least equal to 3 for the interpolation scheme. A typical surface
described by NURBS is shown in Figure 12-31.
q
2
NPOINT2 = 5
1
NPOINT1 = 5
55
11
12
13
14
15
21
22
23
24
25
31
32
33
34
35
44
41
42
43
45
51
52
53
54
x
y
z
1: First direction
2: Second direction
Main Index
459
CHAPTER 12
Contact
Figure 12-31 Nonuniform Rational Bspline Surface, NURBS (ITYPE = 9)
Cylinder (Cone) Surface
When the Cylinder (Cone) Surface option is chosen, a cylinder or cone is defined by the coordinates (x,
y, z) of the center, C1, with radius, R1, in top face and the coordinate (x, y, z) of center, C2, with radius,
R2, in bottom face. The normal vector of cylinder is inwards. If a negative value of R1 is entered, the
normal vector is outwards. A typical cylinder is shown in Figure 12-32.
Figure 12-32 Cylinder (Cone) Surface (ITYPE = 10)
+5
+6
+10
+8
+9
+7
+1
+3
+4
+2
Y
Z
X
X
Z
Y
R1
R2
C2
C1
Main Index
460
Sphere Surface
When the Spherical Surface option is chosen, a sphere is defined by the coordinates (x, y, z) of the center,
C1, with radius, R1. The normal vector of sphere is inwards. If a negative value of R1 is entered, the
normal vector is outwards. A typical sphere is shown in Figure 12-33.
Figure 12-33 Sphere Surface (ITYPE = 11)
3-D Circular Arc
When JTYPE = 2 is chosen, a circular arc is created by MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear. There are three
different methods available to define a circular arc in three dimensions. Circular arcs are denoted using
the following type of data:
Starting point of arc(SP)
Ending point of arc(EP)
Enter of circle(C)
Radius of circle(R)
Swept angle(SA)
Swept angle flag(SAF)
Middle point(MP)
Arbitrary point (lying in plane of circle)(AP)
X
Z
Y
R1
C1
Main Index
461
CHAPTER 12
Contact
For Method 1, a positive radius means the center of the circle is on the surface side. A negative radius
means the center of the circle is on the outside.
For Method 2, SAF that is positive means an angle less than 180, a negative value an angle greater
than 180.
For Method 3, the starting point, arbitrary point and center define the plane in which the circular arc lies.
SP, EP, C, MP and AP are X, Y, Z data.
For an arc with 180 degrees, either Method 1 or Method 2 is recommended.
A three-dimensional rigid surface represented by a circular arc is shown in Figure 12-34.
Figure 12-34 Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (Circular Arc)
Data
Block
Method
0 1 2
1 SP SP SP
2 EP MP AP
3 C EP C
4 R SAF SA
SP
EP
+
SP
EP
C
R
Method 0
+
SP
C
SA
Method 2
MP
Method 1
AP
Main Index
462
Spline
When JTYPE = 3 is chosen, the spline passes by all NPOINT declared, and has zero curvature at the ends
(enter at least 4 points).
Bezier curve
When JTYPE = 4 is chosen, a Bezier curve is defined by NPOINT control points (enter at least 4 points).
Poly-line
When JTYPE = 5 is chosen, a poly-line defined by NPOINT control points.
Selective Contact Surfaces
In both the two- and three-dimensional contact problems, contact is always detected between nodes on
the surface of a deformable body and the geometrical profile of another surface. There are two modes of
the order in which a node checks contact with other bodies. The default version is the double-sided
contact procedure. In the single-sided contact procedure, the nodes on a lower numbered body can come
into contact with equally or higher numbered surfaces. For instance, the boundary nodes of body number
1 are checked against the surface profiles of bodies 1, 2, 3, .... The boundary nodes of body number 2,
however, are only checked against surface profiles of bodies 2, 3, ... It is possible, therefore, that due to
surface discretization, a node of body 2 slightly penetrates the surface of body 1.
The double-sided contact option checks possible contact between any two surfaces (surface i is checked
for contact with surface j, and surface j is also checked for contact with surface i, where i, j = 1, 2, 3, ...,
total number of surfaces in the problem).
In addition, the BCTABLE entry is provided to you for the selection of contact surfaces. Through this
option, you can choose, for instance, the surface no. 1 to be in contact with surfaces 3, 5, 6, 7, but not
with surfaces 2 and 4. This option can repeatedly be used during an analysis by specifying different
BCTABLE entries for different subcases.
You can further restrict the potential contact by using the BCHANGE Bulk Data entry.
Specifying Contact Body Entries
Entry Description
BCBODY Defines a flexible or rigid contact body in 2-D or 3-D.
GMNURB Defines a 3-D contact region made up of NURBS using the Marc style.
BSURF Defines a contact body or surface defined by Element IDs.
BCBOX Defines a 3-D contact region -- all elements within the region define a contact body.
Main Index
463
CHAPTER 12
Contact
Defining Contact Bodies in Patran
The Create>Contact>Element Uniform combination on the Loads/Boundary Application form defines
slideline, deformable, and rigid contact bodies. This form is used to define certain data for the MSC
Nastran Input entries. Other data entries are defined under the Analysis Application when setting up a
job for nonlinear static or nonlinear transient dynamic analysis. A contact table is also supported; by
default, all contact bodies initially have the potential to interact with all other contact bodies and
themselves. This default behavior can be modified under the Contact Table form, located on the Solution
Parameters subform in the Analysis Application when creating a Load Step. See Contact Parameters,
467 and Contact Table, 472.
The Application Region form for contact is used to select the contact bodies whether they be deformable
or rigid. Deformable contact bodies are always defined as a list of elements, the boundary of which
defines the contact surface. Rigid bodies are translated as ruled surfaces (2D) or straight line segments
(1D) if a mesh or geometry with an associated mesh is selected. Otherwise, if no mesh is associated
with the selected geometry, the contact definition will be written as geometric NURB surfaces
during translation.
Deformable Body
Defining a deformable contact body requires the following data via the Input Properties subform on the
Loads/Boundary Conditions Application form.
BCPROP Defines a 3-D contact region by element properties. All elements with the specified
properties define a contact body.
BCMATL Defines a 3-D contact region by element material. All elements with the specified
materials define a contact body.
BCHANGE Changes definitions of contact bodies.
Entry Description
Main Index
464
Rigid Body
Defining a rigid contact body requires the following data via the Input Properties subform on the
Loads/Boundary Conditions Application form. The input data form differs for 1-D and 2-D rigid bodies.
One dimensional rigid surfaces are defined as beam elements, or as curves (which may be meshed with
beam elements prior to translation) and used in 2-D problems. The lines or beams must be in the global
X-Y plane. Two dimensional rigid surfaces must be defined as Quad/4 or Tri/3 elements, or as surfaces
(which may be meshed with Quad/4 or Tri/3 elements prior to translation) and are used in 3-D problems.
The elements will be translated as 4-node patches if meshed or as NURB surfaces if not meshed.
Description
Friction
Coefficient (MU)
Coefficient of static friction for this contact body. For contact between
two bodies with different friction coefficients, the average value is used.
Heat Transfer Coefficient
to Environment
Heat transfer coefficient (film) to environment. This is only necessary
for coupled analysis (not available until version 2006).
Environment Sink
Temperature
Environment sink temperature. This is only necessary for
coupled analysis.
Contact Heat Transfer
Coefficient
Contact heat transfer coefficient (film). This is only necessary for
coupled analysis.
Boundary By default a deformable contact body boundary is defined by its
elements (Discrete). However, you can use an Analytic surface to
represent the deformable body. This improves the accuracy for
deformable-deformable contact analysis by describing the outer surface
of a contact body by a spline (2-D) or Coons surface (3-D) description.
Exclusion Region This is an optional input. The Analytic surface of a deformable body can
be described by a spline (2-D) or Coons surface (3-D) and by default the
entire outer surface will be included unless an Exclusion Region is
selected. For instance, you may not want to represent locations of a body
that never come in contact with the SPLINE option. Select either
Geometry entities of the contact body that have element associated to
them, or select individual FEM nodes along the outer surface. Care
should be take when selecting Exclusion Regions that actual outer
surface or edge geometry is selected. If nodes are being selected that
describe a 3-D edge of a solid, the nodes must be in order (it is safer
to select a geometric entity in this case as the nodes could get
reordered incorrectly).
Main Index
465
CHAPTER 12
Contact
Input Description
Flip Contact Side Upon defining each rigid body, MSC.Patran displays normal vectors or
tic marks. These should point inward to the rigid body. In other words,
the side opposite the side with the vectors is the side of contact.
Generally, the vector points away from the body in which it wants to
contact. If it does not point inward, then use the modify option to turn this
toggle ON. The direction of the inward normal will be reversed.
Symmetry Plane This specifies that the surface or body is a symmetry plane. It is OFF
by default.
Null Initial Motion This toggle is enabled only for Velocity and Position type of Motion
Control. If it is ON, the initial velocity, position, and angular
velocity/rotation are set to zero in the CONTACT option regardless of
their settings here (for increment zero).
Motion Control Motion of rigid bodies can be controlled in a number of different ways:
velocity, position (displacement), or forces/moments.
Velocity (vector) For velocity controlled rigid bodies, define the X and Y velocity
components for 2-D problems or X, Y, and Z for 3-D problems.
Angular Velocity
(rad/time)
For velocity controlled rigid bodies, if the rigid body rotates, give its
angular velocity in radians per time (seconds usually) about the center
of rotation (global Z axis for 2-D problems) or axis of rotation (for
3-D problems).
Velocity vs Time Field If a rigid body velocity changes with time, its time definition may be
defined through a non-spatial field, which can then be selected via this
widget. It will be scaled by the vector definition of the velocity as defined
in the Velocity widget. The Angular Velocity will also be scaled by this
time field.
Friction Coefficient (MU) Coefficient of static friction for this contact body. For contact between
two bodies with different friction coefficients the average value is used.
Rotation Reference Point This is a point or node that defines the center of rotation of the rigid body.
If left blank the rotation reference point will default to the origin.
Main Index
466
Slideline
Slideline contact is not supported by SOL 600.
Axis of Rotation For 2D rigid surfaces in a 3-D problem, aside from the rotation reference
point, if you wish to define rotation you must also specify the axis in the
form of a vector.
First Control Node This is for Force or SPCD controlled rigid motion. It is the node to which
the force or SPCD is applied. A separate LBC must be defined for the
force, but the application node must also be specified here. If both force
and moment are specified, they must use different control nodes even if
they are coincident. If only 1 control node is specified the rigid body will
not be allowed to rotate.
Second Control Node This is for Moment controlled rigid motion. It is the node to which the
moment is applied. A separate LBC must be defined for the moment, but
the application node must also be specified here. It also acts as the
rotation reference point. If both force and moment are specified, they
must use different control nodes even if they are coincident.
Input Description
Note: After defining rigid bodies in your model, you can preview the rigid body motion by
selecting Preview Rigid Body Motion...
Main Index
467
CHAPTER 12
Contact
A series of MSC Nastran entries can be used to implement and control the contact behavior in an
analysis. If you have subcases where some have contact and others dont, use the BCONTACT=NONE
and BCONTACT=N options, instead of the default BCONTACT=ALLBODY.
Contact Parameters
This section describes the general parameters available in SOL 600 for detecting contact, controlling
separation, and modeling friction.
Defining Contact Control Parameters in Patran
To define the Contact Control Parameters for an analysis:
2. Click Solution Type... and select Solution Parameters...
3. Select Contact Parameters... to bring up the Contact Control Parameters subform shown below.
Entry Description
BCONTACT Requests contact to be included in the analysis.
BCPARA Defines contact parameters used in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600)
BOUTPUT Request 2-D or 3-D contact output
Note: For all solution sequences other than SOL 600, BOUTPUT request line contact output. For
SOL 600, BOUTPUT request 2-D or 3-D contact output. Only SORT1 output is available for
SOL 600.
Main Index
468
Contact Detection Parameters
4. On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Contact Detection... This form controls
general contact parameters for contact detection.
Deformable-
Deformable Method
In Double-Sided method, for each contact body pair, nodes of both bodies
will be checked for contact. In Single-Sided method, for each contact body
pair, only nodes of the lower-numbered body will be checked for contact.
Results are dependent upon the order in which contact bodies are defined.
Penetration Check This controls contact penetration checking. sometimes referred to as the
increment splitting option. Available options are: Per Increment, Per
Iteration (default), Suppressed (Fixed), Suppressed (Adaptive. Per
Increment means penetration is checked at the end of a load increment. Per
Iteration means that penetration is checked at the end of every iteration
within an increment. If penetration is detected, increments are split.
Suppress is to suppress this feature for Fixed and Adaptive load stepping
types.
Reduce Printout of
Surface Definition
This controls reduction of printout of surface definition.
Main Index
469
CHAPTER 12
Contact
Distance Tolerance Distance below which a node is considered touching a body (error).
Leave the box blank to have MSC Nastran calculate the tolerance.
Bias on Distance Tolerance Contact tolerance BIAS factor. The value should be within the range
of zero to one. Models with shell elements seem to be sensitive to this
parameter. You may need to experiment with this value if you have
shell element models that will not converge.
Suppress Bounding Box Turn ON this button if you want to suppress bounding box checking.
This might eliminate penetration, but slows down the solution.
Check Layers For contact bodies composed of shell elements, this option menu
chooses the layers to be checked. Available options are: Top and
Bottom, Top Only, Bottom Only.
Main Index
470
Separation
5. On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Separation... This form controls general
contact parameters for contact separation.
Ignore Thickness Turn this button ON to ignore shell thickness.
Activate 3D Beam-Beam
Contact
Turn this button ON to activate 3D beam-beam contact.
Quadratic Contact Turn this toggle ON to activate the new quadratic contact algorithm
that gives significantly improved interface pressure distribution
results when modeling contact using higher order elements.
Maximum Separations Maximum number of separations allowed in each increment. Maximum
Separations is entered in the 6th field of the 2nd data block. Default
is 9999.
Retain Value on
NCYCLE
Turn ON this button if you do not want to reset NCYCLE to zero
when separation occurs. This speeds up the solution, but might result
in instabilities. You can not set this and Suppress Bounding
Box simultaneously.
Increment Specifies whether chattering is allowed or not. Increment and Chattering
enters the appropriate flag in the 9th field of the 2nd data block.
Main Index
471
CHAPTER 12
Contact
Friction Parameters
6. On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Friction Parameters...
Chattering Specifies the separation criterion (forces or stresses) and the critical
value at which the separation will take place.
Separation Criterion Specifies in which increment (current or next) the separation is allowed
to occur.
Force Value
Stress Value
Force/Stress Value is placed in the 5th field of the 3rd data block.
Friction Type Available options for friction Type are: None (default), Shear (for metal
forming), Coulomb (for normal contact - default), Shear for Rolling,
Coulomb for Rolling, Stick-Slip.
Note: Unless this pulldown is changed from None, no friction will
be active.
Method For Coulomb type of friction models, there are two methods for
computing friction: Nodal Stress (by default), Nodal Forces.
Relative Sliding Velocity Critical value for sliding velocity below which surfaces will be
simulated as sticking.
Transition Region Slip-to-Stick transition region.
Multiplier to Friction
Coefficient
Friction coefficient multiplier.
Friction Force
Tolerance
Friction Force Tolerance.
Main Index
472
Contact Table
This option is useful for controlling or activating contacting bodies and individual contact pairs. To avoid
unnecessary detection of contact between bodies, you can control which bodies potentially may come
into contact with other bodies. By default Patran writes BCONTACT=ALLBODY which specifies is that
every body detects the possibility of contact relative to all other bodies and itself if it is a flexible body.
When the BCTABLE option is entered (Patran writes this entry only if you change something on the
contact table form), the default of detection for every body is overridden. Instead, you specify the
relationship of detection between bodies for contact. The touching body does not contact itself unless you
request it. Whenever the touched body is a flexible one, by default, the capability of double-sided contact
is applied between the contacting bodies. This can be switched off by selecting single-sided contact or
by setting the searching order in the BCTABLE entry. A positive value of the interference closure
implies that there is an overlap between the bodies; a negative value implies that a gap exists.
The following control variables of contact between bodies can be modified throughout the table: contact
tolerance, separation force, friction coefficient, interference closure and contact heat transfer coefficient
(for coupled thermal-stress-contact analysis starting in version 2006). In addition, you can invoke the
glue option, delayed slide off a deformable body, and stress-free initial contact. The previous value of
those control variables is not overridden unless nonzero values are entered here.
In the glue option, when a node contacts a rigid body, the relative tangential displacement is zero. When
a node contacts a deformable body, all the translational degrees of freedom are tied.
By default, if a node slides off the boundary of a deformable body at a sharp corner by a distance more
than the contact tolerance, contact between the node and the contacted body is lost. By invoking the
delayed sliding off option, the tangential contact tolerance is increased by a factor of 10.
In any static contact analysis, a node contacting a body will be projected onto the contacted segment of
this body. Due to inaccuracies in the finite element model, this might introduce undesired stress changes,
since an overlap or a gap between the node and the contacted segment will be closed. The option for
stress-free initial contact forces a change of the coordinates of a node contacting a deformable body, thus
avoiding the stress changes. In combination with the glue option, a similar effect can be obtained;
however, the overlap or gap will remain.
Specifying a Contact Table Entry
Defining a Contact Table in Patran
To define a Contact Table:
2. Click Subcases... ,select Subcase Parameters..., and click Contact Table.
Entry Description
BCTABLE Defines a contact table used in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600)
Main Index
473
CHAPTER 12
Contact
Main Index
474
.
Note: Patran will only write out the contact table if something on the contact table form is
changed. The default is to write out BCONTACT=ALLBODY which does not require that
the BCTABLE entry be written out
Input Description
Contact Detection Default (by body #) -This is the default where contact is checked in the
order the bodies are written to the input deck. In this scenario, the most
finely meshed bodies should be listed first. There will be contact checks
first for nodes of the first body with respect to the second body and then
for nodes of the second body with respect to the first body. If Single
Sided contact is activated on the Contact Parameters subform, then only
the first check is done.
Automatic -Unlike the default, the contact detection is automatically
determined and is not dependent on the order they are listed but
determined by ordering the bodies starting with those having the
smallest edge length. Then there will be only a check on contact for
nodes of the first body with respect to the second body and not the other
way around.
First ->Second - Blanks the lower triangular section of the table matrix
such that no input can be accepted. Only the contact bodies from the
upper portion are written, which forces the contact check of the first
body with respect to the second body.
Second-> First - Blanks the upper triangular section of the table matrix
such that no input can be accepted. Only the contact bodies from the
lower portion are written. Contact detection is done opposite of First-
>Second.
Double-Sided -Writes both upper and lower portions of the table
matrix. This overrules the Single Sided contact parameter set on the
Contact Parameters subform.
Touch All Places a T to indicate touching status for all deformable-deformable or rigid-
deformable bodies.
Glue All Places a G to indicate glued status for all deformable-deformable or rigid-
deformable bodies.
Deactivate All Blanks the spreadsheet cells.
Body Type Lists the body type for each body; either deformable or rigid.
Main Index
475
CHAPTER 12
Contact
Release This cell can be toggled for each body to Y or N (yes or no). If Y, this indicates
that the particular contact body is to be removed from this subcase. The forces
associated with this body can be removed immediately in the first increment or
gradually over the entire Load Step with the Force Removal switch
described below.
Touching Body
Touched Body
These are informational or convenience list boxes to allow you to see
which bodies an active cell references and to see what settings are active for
Distance Tolerance and other related parameters below. You must click on the
touched/touching bodies to see what values, if any, have been set for the
pair combination.
Distance Tolerance Set the Distance Tolerance for this pair of contact bodies. You must press the
Enter or Return key to accept the data in this data box. A nonspatial field can be
referenced that will write this data in TABLE format, if this parameter varies
with time, temperature, or some other independent variable. This overrides any
other settings for Distance Tolerance.
Separation Force Set the Separation Force for this pair of contact bodies. You must press the
other settings for Separation Force.
Friction Coefficient Set the Friction Coefficient for this pair of contact bodies. You must press the
other settings for Friction Coefficient.
Interference
Closure
Set the Interference Closure for this pair of contact bodies. You must press the
other settings for Interference Closure.
Heat Transfer
Coefficient
Set the Heat Transfer Coefficient for this pair of contact bodies. You must press
the Enter or Return key to accept the data in this data box. A nonspatial field
can be referenced that will write this data in TABLE format, if this parameter
varies with time, temperature, or some other independent variable. This
overrides any other settings for Heat Transfer Coefficient. This is only used in
Coupled analysis.
Input Description
Main Index
476
Movement of Contact Bodies
The motion of deformable bodies is prescribed using the conventional methods of applying
displacements, forces, or distributed loads to the bodies. Symmetry surfaces are treated as a special type
of bodies which have the property of being frictionless and where the nodes are not allowed to separate.
There are three ways to prescribe the motion of rigid surfaces:
Prescribed velocity
Prescribed position
Prescribed load or displacement of (a) control node(s).
Associated with the rigid body is a point labeled the centroid. When the first two methods are chosen,
you define the translational motion of this point, and the angular motion about an axis through this point.
The direction of the axis can be defined for three-dimensional problems. For two-dimensional problems,
it is a line normal to the plane. For complex time-dependent behavior, the MOTION user subroutine can
be used to prescribe the motion as an alternative to the input. The motion during a time increment is
considered to be linear. The position is determined by an explicit, forward integration of the velocities
based upon the current time step. A time increment must always be defined even if a static, rate-
independent analysis is performed.
When load controlled (a more accurate name would be control node rigid bodies) rigid bodies are used,
two additional nodes, called the control nodes, are associated with each rigid body. In 2-D problems, the
first node has two translational degrees of freedom (corresponding to the global x- and y-direction) and
the second node has one rotational degree of freedom (corresponding to the global z-direction). In 3-D
problems, the first node has three translational degrees of freedom (corresponding to global x-, y-, and
z-direction) and the second node has three rotational degrees of freedom (corresponding to the global x-,
y-, and z-direction). In this way, both forces and moments can be applied to a body for the control nodes.
Alternatively, one may prescribe one or more degrees of freedom of the control nodes by using the SPCD
Bulk Data entries. Generally speaking, load-controlled bodies can be considered as rigid bodies with
three (in 2-D) or six (in 3-D) degrees of freedom. The prescribed position and prescribed velocity
Retain
Gaps/Overlaps
This is only applicable for the Glued option. Any initial gap or overlap between
the node and the contacted body will not be removed (otherwise the node is
projected onto the body which is the default). For deformable-deformable
contact only.
Stress-free Initial
Contact
This is only applicable for initial contact in increment zero, where coordinates
of nodes in contact can be adapted such that they cause stress-free initial
contact. This is important if, due to inaccuracies during mesh generation, there
is a small gap/overlap between a node and the contacted element edge/face. For
deformable-deformable contact only.
Delayed Slide Off By default, at sharp corners, a node will slide off a contacted segment as soon
as it passes the corner by a distance greater than the contact error tolerance. This
extends this tangential tolerance. For deformable-deformable contact only.
Input Description
Main Index
477
CHAPTER 12
Contact
methods (see Figure 12-35) have less computational costs than the prescribed load method (see
Figure 12-36), however it is possible to change the loads and constraints on the control node from one
subcase to the next to prescribe more complex motion of the rigid body.
Figure 12-35 Velocity Controlled Rigid Surface
Figure 12-36 Load Controlled Rigid Surface
If the second control node is not specified, the rotation of the body is prescribed to be zero.
Specifying a Contact Movement Entry
This option is used in the Body Approach step which is created by Patran.
Initial Conditions
At the beginning of the analysis, bodies should either be separated from one another or in contact. Bodies
should not penetrate one another at the start of the analysis unless the objective is to perform an
Entry Description
BCMOVE Defines movement of bodies in contact used in MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
1
2
3
1
2
V
e
Centroid
Extra Node
F
x
F
y
M
z
Main Index
478
interference fit calculation. Rigid body profiles are often complex, making it difficult for you to
determine exactly where the first contact is located.
Unlike other MSC Nastran solution sequences, before a SOL 600 analysis begins, some calculations take
place. This is defined as increment zero. During increment zero, if a rigid body has nonzero motion, the
initialization procedure brings it into first contact with a deformable body. No motion or distortion occurs
in the deformable bodies during this process. In a coupled thermal mechanical analysis, no heat transfer
occurs during this process. If more than one rigid body exists in the analysis, each one with a nonzero
initial velocity is moved until it comes into contact. Because increment zero is used to bring the rigid
bodies into contact only, you should not prescribe any loads (distributed or point) or prescribed
displacements initially. For multistage contact analysis (often needed to simulate manufacturing
processes), the BCMOVE Bulk Data entry in conjunction with the BCTABLE Bulk Data entry allow you
to model contact bodies so that they just come into contact with the workpiece. This procedure is called
a Body Approach subcase in Patran.
Main Index
479
CHAPTER 12
Contact
For heat transfer, most of the capabilities in Nastran SOL 153 and 159 are supported by SOL 600 with
the exception of CHBDYP and forced convection, the equivalents of which are not currently available
in Marc. The main advantage of using SOL 600 for heat transfer over SOL 153 or 159 is that thermal
contact is available directly and that radiation view factors may possibly be calculated faster. The user
needs to weight the drawbacks of not having CHBDYP and forced convection. Because of these
alternatives, SOL 600 offers two ways to perform a heat transfer analysis. The direct method uses Marc
to perform all of the calculations and can support thermal contact that varies during the run. The indirect
method is to calculate the thermal contact conditions (if they are needed) at the start of the run and
perform the rest of the calculations using Nastran SOL 153/159. This option is addressed using an option
on the SOL 600 entry TSOLVE=M or TSOLVE=N respectively. A typical SOL 600 Executive Control
statement for heat transfer using the direct method would be:
SOL 600,153 TSOLVE=M
A typical Executive Control statement for heat transfer using the indirect method would be:
SOL 600,153 TSOLVE=N
When using the Thermal Contact capability, either TSOLVE=N should be used or the TSOLVE option
should be left blank (which will support most existing input decks).
SOL 600 heat transfer addresses conduction, free convection, radiation to space, cavity radiation,
thermal contact and latent heat. Steady state or transient heat transfer calculation may be obtained. All
material properties may be temperature dependent, and the material may be isotropic, orthotropic or
anisotropic. For the direct method, Marcs table input is used for all applicable input items. The direct
method requires postprocessing using the Marc t16 file. All standard output forms (op2, xdb, f06 and/or
punch) are available using the indirect method.
The temperature history obtained may then be used in a subsequent thermal stress simulation by using
the MINSTAT and MCHSTAT bulk data options to read the temperatures off the t16 file. When used in
conjunction with the MTHERM bulk data option the time steps will be either subdivided or merged to
satisfy the accuracy and convergence requirements of the nonlinear mechanical analysis.
For the directly solutions, when CTRIA3 or CQUAD4 elements are used, the thermal conduction can be
based upon either two methods which is selected on the PSHELL option. Similar to conventional Nastran,
the thermal behavior may be membrane like only, in which case there is no thermal gradient through the
thickness. To support this, the heat transfer elements are used when appropriate. The elements are:
Element 196 Three-node, Bilinear Heat Transfer Membrane), 904
Element 197 Six-node, Biquadratic Heat Transfer Membrane), 907
Element 198 Four-node, Isoparametric Heat Transfer Element), 911
Element 199 Eight-node, Biquadratic Heat Transfer Membrane, 915
The second method is that the element has a thermal gradient through the thickness, which may be
required for composite simulation or thermal shock type problems. This is activated by specifying a
Main Index
480
nonzero MID2 entry. The MPHEAT options is used to specify, whether the temperature gradient is linear
or quadratic through the total thickness of the shell, or linear or quadratic variation is specified per layer
basis. In the later case if a composite shell has n layers the number of degrees of freedom per grid is n+1
or 2*n+1 for the quadratic case.
The MHEATSHL parameter may also be used to control this behavior.
Additions/changes to a standard Nastran SOL 153 or SOL 159 heat transfer input file are as follows:
Executive Control
Change SOL statement as described above.
Case Control
No changes
Bulk Data
BCBODY, BCTABLE (BCPARA if necessary to change defaults) if there is thermal contact
MPHEAT entry that maps to Marcs HEAT parameter.
NLHEATC - Defines numerical analysis parameters for SOL 600 Heat Transfer Analysis.
MCHSTAT - Option to change state variables for SOL 600.
MINSTAT - Option to define initial state variables for SOL 600.
NLSTRAT - Strategy parameters for SOL 600, including Heat Transfer Analysis
Bulk Data Parameters
PARAM,MARHTPRT (Integer) Control heat transfer output in the Marc .out file
0 = Do not print any output except for summary tables
1 = Print the nodal temperatures
2 = Print all possible nodal heat transfer output
PARAM,MRADUNIT (Integer) Controls the units used in radiation heat transfer for SOL 600
1 = Degrees Celsius
2 = Degrees Kelvin (default if parameter not entered)
3 = Degrees Fahrenheit
Remark: Degrees Rankin are not available
Main Index
481
CHAPTER 12
Contact
Heat Transfer Examples
The following heat transfer examples are located in the tpl1 directory:
PARAM,MHEMIPIX (Integer) Controls the number of pixels used in radiation heat transfer for
SOL 600 using the hemi-cube method. The default, if this parameter is not
entered is 500.
PARAM,MARVFCUT (Real) Controls the fraction of the maximum view factor that is to be used
as a cutoff. View factors calculated below this cutoff are ignored. Default
is 0.0001 if this parameter is not entered (Used in SOL 600 radiation heat
transfer only)
PARAM,MRVFIMPL (Real) Controls the fraction of the maximum view factor that is to be
treated implicitly (contribute to operator matrix). View factor values
smaller than this cutoff are treated explicitly. Default is 0.01 if this
parameter is not entered using this parameter reduces the size of the heat
transfer operator matrix, which reduces the computational costs associated
with decomposition. (Used in SOL 600 radiation heat transfer only)
PARAM,MRSTEADY (Integer) Controls the solution method for SOL 600 steady state heat
transfer
1 Marc STEADY STATE is used with TIME STEP of 1.0 (default if
parameter not entered) The specific heat matrix is not formed.
2 AUTO STEP is used.
Remark: Requires that a sufficiently large time period to be simulated for the
solution to reach steady state.
Conduction mhqbd1, mhqbd1a, mhqbd1c, mhqbd1s, mhqbd2, mhqbd2c, mhqbd2s,
mhbc01, mhbc02, mhtepe
Free Convection mhcbv1, mhcbv1a, mhcbv1b, mhcbv1c, mhcbv1d, mhcbv1e
Radiation to Space mhrad1, mhrad2, mhrad3
Cavity Radiation mhrcv1, mhrcv1a, mhrcv2, mhrhx0, mhrdhx, mhrhx4, mhrc1t
Thermal Contact mhcnoc, mhtc07, mhtc7a
Latent Heat mtlat1, mtlat2
Main Index
References
482
References
1. Oden, J. T. and Pires, E. B. Nonlocal and Nonlinear Friction Laws and Variational Principles for
Contact Problems in Elasticity, J. of Applied Mechanics, V. 50, 1983.
2. Ju, J. W. and Taylor, R. L. A perturbed Lagrangian formulation for the finite element solution of
nonlinear frictional contact problems, J. De Mechanique Theorique et Appliquee, Special issue,
Supplement, 7, 1988.
3. Simo, J. C. and Laursen, T. A. An Augmented Lagranian treatment of contact problems
involving friction, Computers and Structures, 42, 1002.
4. Peric, D. J. and Owen, D. R. J. Computational Model for 3D contact problems with friction based
on the Penalty Method, Int. J. of Meth. Engg., V. 35, 1992.
5. Taylor, R. L., Carpenter, N. J., and Katona, M. G. Lagrange constraints for transient finite
element surface contact, Int. J. Num. Meth. Engg., 32, 1991.
6. Wertheimer, T. B. Numerical Simulation Metal Sheet Forming Processes, VDI BERICHET,
Zurich, Switzerland, 1991
Main Index
MD/MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) Users Guide
Chapter 13: SOL 600 Example Problems
13
SOL 600 Example Problems
Introduction
Engine Gasket Under Bolt Preload
Elastic-Plastic Collapse of a Cylindrical Pipe under External Rigid

Body Loading
Rubber Door Seal - Performance Door Closing
Brake Forming
Panel Buckling
Main Index
Introduction
484
Introduction
The instructions on how to run all the examples discussed in this chapter can be found on the delivery
under Install_dir/doc/pdf_nastran/user/implicit_nonlinear_examples as PDF files in a directory with a
name similar to the example.
Main Index
485
CHAPTER 13
Problem Statement
This problem illustrates the modeling and analysis of an automotive engine block assembly to evaluate
the pressure distribution over the head gasket surface. The simulation highlights special features within
SOL 600 for modeling gasket materials via the direct input of pressure/closure loading and unloading
curves and for applying bolt preloads via prescribed force values or imposed displacements. Contact
capabilities of SOL 600 are also illustrated.
The Structure and its Application
The head gasket in an automotive engine is a critical component that forms a seal between the engine
block and the cylinder head. During each combustion cycle this seal must withstand extreme operating
conditions where pressures inside the cylinder reach 1000 psi and temperatures exceed 2000F. In
addition, the seal must be highly resistant over time to fuel mixtures, combustion gases, oil, and coolant.
Any compromise in the seal at any time over the entire life of the engine will eventually result in failure.
Engine block/cylinder head gaskets use a combination gasket body\O-ring seal. The gasket is designed
as a thin cut or molded panel that combines a structural gasket body with an inset elastomer O-ring. The
gasket body is commonly manufactured using multilayer steel or composite materials and is usually
coated with a high temperature elastomer to promote sealing. The O-ring, generally a highly deformable
rubber like material, sits taller than the gasket body and under compression conforms to the block and
cylinder head surfaces forming a seal.
During manufacturing the gasket is placed between the engine block and cylinder head and then secured
in place by torquing the bolts that connect the block to the head. The applied torque compresses the
gasket between the block and head forming the seal. In creating this type of seal, it is critical to achieve
the correct balance between enough compression and elastomer stress to create a proper seal and too
much stress which may lead to damage and premature failure of the O-ring. Thus, there is particular
Main Index
486
interest in the pressures generated on the face and through the thickness of the gasket during the assembly
process.
SOL 600 Features Demonstrated
This example explores the pressures and gap closure introduced on the head gasket as a result of applying
specified torques on the bolts that connect the engine block to the cylinder head.
The disparity in the material behavior and geometry of the gasket body and O-ring produce a complex
relationship between the pressures generated on the gasket as the gap closes and opens. Values for
pressure vs. gap closure are typically derived experimentally and then used as the basis for a material
model. Accommodating the complexity of the pressure/closure relationship requires special gasket
material modeling features available in SOL 600 with the MATG material entry. The MATG entry
provides for nonlinear properties in the thickness direction for compression, incorporating a nonlinear
elastic range, a yield pressure, followed by a strain hardening slope in the plastic range. The MATG entry
can be referenced for solid elements only and in-plane properties are assumed linear and isotropic. The
experimentally derived displacement/pressure curves which define the loading path are supplied using a
table entry. In addition experimentally derived unloading curves can be supplied on the same MATG
entry. Up to 10 independent unloading curves are available. These features are supported in Patran
through the use of fields for defining loading and unloading curves.
The ability to apply a preload via the connecting bolts is a tailor-made feature for SOL 600. Bolt preloads
are defined using special MBOLT entries, where forces or displacements can be applied to specified
control grids. This feature is fully supported in Patran allowing for easy selection of the control grids and
application of forces or displacements.
All components comprising the engine assembly are modeled as deformable bodies for this analysis. The
Contact Table feature in Patran provides a convenient means for activating gluing and touching
parameters between surfaces.
Model Description
The model consists of the engine block, the cylinder head, two connecting bolts, and the gasket.
Due to symmetry, one half of the block-cylinder head assembly is simulated with approximately
2000 3-D elements.
Geometry and Contact Regions
The three-dimensional model for this analysis includes symmetric sections of four separate structures:
the cylinder head, the engine block, the gasket, and the connecting bolts. A plane of symmetry is
introduced vertically through the two connecting bolts.
The primary structure of interest is the head gasket sandwiched between the contacting surfaces of the
cylinder head and engine block. The gasket measures 89mm across and 1 mm high with cutouts for the
cylinder and connecting bolts. An O-ring concentric to the cylinder is embedded within the gasket body.
The O-ring is 3mm wide and lies 2mm from the inside cylinder boundary.
Main Index
487
CHAPTER 13
The head, block, and bolts are modeled to fully reflect the contact between surfaces of all four structures.
Extending areas of the block and head panels are modeled with appropriate boundary conditions. The
contact surface between the gasket and the cylinder head and block is modeled as a glued surface. There
is an initial gap between the gasket body and the head and block of .0909mm and no gap between the
gasket ring and the head and block. The overall model measures 93mm length, by 355mm depth, by 44
mm height. The diameter of the cylinder is 48mm.
Finite Element and Contact Model
A total of 2138 hex and wedge elements comprise the finite element model.
The contact surface between the gasket and the cylinder head and block are modeled as glued and
defined in a contact table. The surface between the bolts and the block, head, and gasket are modeled
as touching surfaces.
Material
The head gasket body is constructed using a multi-layer steel material and for this example modeled as
an isotropic material, the in-plane properties are Elastic Modulus of 120 MPa and a Shear Modulus of
60 MPa. The gasket material is highly nonlinear in the thickness direction with a yield pressure of 52
MPa and exhibits different loading and unloading behavior. The gasket ring is softer with a yield pressure
of 42 MPa and also exhibits different loading and unloading curves. The loading and unloading curves
for both gasket body and ring are read in from an external file using the Fields capability in Patran.
All other components, including the cylinder head, the block, and the two connecting bolts are modeled
as a standard steel material with a elastic modulus 210000 MPa, and a Poissons Ratio of 0.3.
Loading
The focus of this example is on the pressures introduced on the head gasket as the gap between the
cylinder head and block is closed during bolt preloading. Using the Bolt Preload feature for SOL 600, a
prescribed initial displacement is applied to a cross-section of the connecting bolts. In turn, enforced
displacement entries are generated at the control grids.
Table 13-1 Gasket Properties
Property Gasket Body Gasket Ring
Elastic Modulus (MPa) 120 120
Shear Modulus (MPa) 60 60
Poissons Ratio 0.0 0.0
Yield Pressure (MPa) 52 42
Tensile Modulus (MPa) 72 64
Transverse Shear Modulus (MPa) 35 35
Main Index
488
Solution Procedure and Controls
The analysis is a single step procedure wherein the initial displacement on the bolts is evaluated to
determine the closure and pressure on the gasket body and ring. A default initial load increment of 1%
is used.
Solving the Problem
The gasket example is designed to be constructed and setup using Patran and analyzed using MSC
Nastran SOL 600. The geometry and gasket properties are imported from external files. Results can be
accessed in text form or from inside Patran and processed for viewing the gasket pressures and closure.
Input Files Required
bolt_n_gasket.bdf - MSC Nastran Bulk Data File containing the nodes, elements, and some
element properties.
body_loading.csv - Defines the loading curve of pressure vs. closure for the gasket
body material.
body_unloading.csv - Defines the unloading curve of pressure vs. closure for the gasket
body material.
ring_loading.csv - Defines the loading curve of pressure vs. closure for the gasket ring material.
ring_unloading.csv - Defines the unloading curve of pressure vs. closure for the gasket
ring material.
Recreating the Problem using Patran
Step-by-step instructions for creating and running the analysis on the engine/block/gasket model can be
accessed by linking to the gasket_instructions file below. Once you are done creating the model and
running the SOL 600 analysis, proceed by accessing the results file to generate visual displays of the
simulated gasket pressures and closure.
Click here for Engine Gasket Model Instructions
Highlighted Sections of the MSC Nastran Bulk Data File
The following sections of the MSC.Nastan Bulk Data file highlight the SOL 600 entries generated from
the problem setup described above.
Main Index
489
CHAPTER 13
Output Requests
The MARCOUT entry specifies the individual output quantities requested. If nothing is specified, MSC
Nastran produces a set of default output according to the type of analysis. In this example, N38 is
specifically requested to provide the Nodal Contact Status, E241 to provide Element Gasket Pressures,
and E242 to provide Element Gasket Closure.
Output Requests
Gasket Material
Main Index
490
Gasket Material
The MATG entry defines the gasket material properties. Highlighted in the circle, 1 is the table ID for
the loading path and 2 is the table ID for the unloading path. Additional properties including yield
pressure, tensile modulus, transverse shear modulus, and the initial gap, follow the table IDs.
Main Index
491
CHAPTER 13
Loading & Unloading Curves
Bolt Preload
Main Index
492
Loading & Unloading Curves
The TABLES1 entries define the loading and unloading paths for the gasket body and gasket ring.
Bolt Preload
The two MBOLTUS entries define a set of grids through the cross-section of each bolt and identify a
control grid which will be associated with enforced displacements.
Enforced Displacements
The FORCE and SPCD entries are used to enforce a displacement on the control grids that were specified
in the MBOLTUS entries above.
Inspecting the Results
This example examines the gap closure and pressures generated around the circumference of the gasket
due to an imposed initial displacement on the two connecting bolts.
Results Files
As an alternative to recreating the analysis model and running the analysis, you may access the generated
results file as follows:
Enforced Displacements
Main Index
493
CHAPTER 13
gasket.marc.out - results file that can be opened in a text editor.
gasket.marc.t16 - accessible in Patran from the gasket.db.
Results Plots
The fringe plot of pressure shows an uneven pressure distribution around the circumference of the gasket
ring with larger pressures concentrated around the bolts.
The simulated gap closure
Main Index
Elastic-Plastic Collapse of a Cylindrical Pipe under External Rigid Body Loading
494
Elastic-Plastic Collapse of a Cylindrical Pipe under
External Rigid Body Loading
Problem Statement
A model of a cylindrical pipe is subjected to crushing as rigid bodies above and below the pipe move
inward toward each other. The model is created using 2D shell elements to model the pipe, and rigid
surfaces above and below the pipe. This exercise illustrates several SOL 600 capabilities including large
displacement analysis, contact analysis between rigid and deformable bodies, and plasticity modeled
with an elastic - perfectly plastic model.
This problem examines a section of steel pipe eight inches in diameter and 24 inches long with a wall
thickness of 0.4 inches. Steel pipes of this size are often used in land-based and offshore oil and gas
industries. Individual pipe sections are assembled with threaded connectors to form large pipeline
distribution systems. The pipe sections and their connections must withstand installation and operational
loads. The effects of these loads can be buckling, torque, bending, axial separation, external pressure, and
internal pressure. In addition to environmental loads, surrounding structures undergoing displacement
can introduce contact conditions. Forces from these external structures can also lead to intolerable failure
scenarios.
Pipe design typically looks at all foreseeable failure scenarios and then a design is measured against the
failure mode that is most critical to structural integrity. In most cases that failure mode is bending
combined with axial forces while under external pressure (if submerged) and internal pressure (fluid
flow). However, in this case we examine failure due to external loading from adjacent structures.
In this problem the pipe section is subjected to offset lateral loading from external structures on the top
and bottom. The problem attempts to quantify whether the movement of these external structures cause
Main Index
495
CHAPTER 13
the plastic collapse of the pipe. Initial contact with the external structures is expected to cause elastic
deformation of the steel pipe. Additional incremental movement potentially subjects the structure to
stresses beyond the proportional limit of the material. The yield stress defines the onset of plastic strains
that may initiate the collapse of the structure walls.
This example illustrates several of the capabilities in SOL 600 including large displacement analysis,
contact analysis of a deformable body by rigid body movement, and material plasticity modeled with an
elastic - perfectly plastic model. The resulting deformation data can establish the conditions for
catastrophic collapse of the pipe section and define allowable limits to contact of external structures.
Model Description
The model includes a 3-D representation of the deformable pipe structure and two semi-circular sections
of rigid pipes sections.
The primary structure is a continuous linear section of pipe 24 inches long with a diameter of 8 inches
and a homogeneous wall thickness of 0.4 inches. The pipe surface is void of attachments, holes, bends,
or other discontinuities and the internal volume is empty space. Two external pipe structures are oriented
in a perpendicular direction and lie directly on the top and underneath the primary pipe. The bottom pipe
measures 6 inches in diameter with a length of 10 inches and the top pipe measures 8 inches in diameter
also with a length of 10 inches.
The external pipe structures that lie directly on top and bottom surface of the primary pipe impose no
initial displacement or force, and no conditions are assumed to exist that might cause friction or slippage
at the interface. These external structures move laterally into the pipe section creating a sandwiching
effect. The pipe movement causes deformations on both the upper and lower side of the pipe.
Actual sections of oil and gas pipes can extend past 30 feet. Lengths beyond the 24-inch section modeled
in this problem are assumed be irrelevant in the local collapse of the pipe wall. Each end of the pipe
model is assigned boundary conditions to represent the extension of the pipe in both directions. In
addition, the pipe wall is sufficiently thin so that it is modeled with thick shell elements in this problem.
The finite element mesh for the primary pipe structure contains 18 elements around the circumference
and 18 elements along the length for a total of 324 elements. MSC Nastran CQUAD4 elements are
selected along with the PSHELL entry that accounts for standard membrane, bending and transverse
shear behavior. All shell elements are assigned a thickness of 0.4 inches, designated with 5 layers, and
defined to be the steel material.
In defining the contact model, the primary pipe section is modeled as a deformable body and the two
external pipe structures are modeled as rigid bodies. Elements comprising the deformable pipe structure
are flagged so that contact by a rigid body creates forces that are used to calculate the deformation of the
pipe. The rigid body structures do not deform and their movement is described with the BCBODY
Main Index
496
option. The geometry profile of the rigid surface is defined using 3D NURB surfaces that describe the
true surface geometry and most accurately represent the curved surfaces.
Material
The entire pipe section is made of steel and modeled as an elastic-plastic material using the MAT1 and
MATEP entries for large displacement analysis. The linear elastic behavior model is effective up to a
yield stress of 36000psi. In this range imposed stresses induce linear proportional strains. The stress-
strain relationship is defined using an elastic modulus of 3.0E+6 and a Poisons ratio of 0.3. Beyond the
yield point perfect plasticity causes complete yielding of the material upon any incremental stress.
A static analysis is performed to determine the pipe deformations that result from contacting rigid bodies.
The rigid body movement and material stiffness specified for this problem require that large
displacement effects be included (PARAM LGDISP).
Rigid body movement is spread over multiple load increments to allow for the history-dependent nature
of the material response. Thus the equilibrium state and material state at the end of the first increment
constitutes the beginning state for the second increment. The automatic load increment option
(NLAUTO) is used to control the magnitude of the load increment. The initial time increment is set at
.01 sec. The total load is 2 inches of imposed rigid body lateral movement on the top and bottom of the
pipe occurring over 1 sec.
Within each increment an iterative process obtains an equilibrium state. Iterations are based on the Full
Newton-Raphson method with a desired number of iterations per increment being 3, and a maximum set
at 2500. Convergence for each increment is defined based on relative residual forces of less than 0.1.
Output requests are made for four stress-strain components using the MARCOUT entry. Total strains
tensor, stress tensor, plastic strain tensor, and Cauchy stress tensor are requested to be included in the
t16 file.
Loading and Boundary Conditions
Because only a small section of the pipe is modeled, the ends of the pipe are constrained in all
translations. This boundary condition effectively represents the pipe extending a substantial distance in
both directions in which case no translation movement would occur at this sections boundary.
To model the contact, the top and bottom rigid surfaces are given velocity vectors of 2 in/sec., and
+2 in/sec. respectively in the y-direction (lateral). This causes the upper structure to be pushed onto the
top of the pipe section and the lower structure to be pushed up into the bottom of the pipe section at a rate
of 2 in/sec. for a total time of 1 second.
Main Index
497
CHAPTER 13
Solving the Problem
The pipe crush example is designed to be constructed and setup using Patran and analyzed using MSC
Nastran SOL 600. The geometry is constructed and then property/load assignments are made in Patran.
A MSC.Nastan Bulk Data file (bdf) is exported and then run with MSC Nastran. Results can be accessed
in text form or from inside Patran and processed for viewing the pipe deformations and stresses.
None
Step-by-step instructions for creating and running the analysis on the pipe crush model can be accessed
by linking to the pipe_crush instructions file below. Once you are done creating the model and running
the SOL 600 analysis, proceed by accessing the results file to generate visual displays of the simulated
deformations and stresses.
Click here for Pipe Crush Modeling Instructions
The following sections of the MSC.Nastan Bulk Data file highlight the SOL 600entries generated from
the problem setup described above.
Move 2 in the Y
R=4
R=3
Move 2 in the -Y
Pipe
Rigid Body 2
Rigid Body 1
Main Index
498
Output Requests
This section of the MSC Nastran bdf specifies the type of output requested. The PARAM MARCSLHT
5 entry defines the number of shell layers of output requested. The MARCOUT entry that follows lists
the individual output quantities. If nothing is specified, MSC Nastran produces a set of default output
according to the type of analysis.
Output Requests
Main Index
499
CHAPTER 13
Material Entries
This section of the MSC Nastran bdf describes the material behavior for the pipe. The MAT1 entry
defines the elastic part of the material and the MATEP entry describes the perfectly plastic behavior.
Contact Bodies
The BCBODY entry describes the rigid surface as defined by Nurbs geometry surfaces. The value of
analytical form is 1 (used with all Nurbs rigid geometry). Note the -2 describing the rigid body motion.
Material Entries
Contact Bodies
Main Index
500
Results Files
The .sts file shown below reports on the status of the run. In this problem the run completed without
errors. Using the adaptive load incrementation algorithm the solution was obtained with 27 load
increments. Two increments required 22 and 24 iterations to converge.
Adaptive Load Incrementation
Main Index
501
CHAPTER 13
Adaptive Load Incrementation
The adaptive load incrementation algorithm adjusts the time step size according to the number of
iterations required to achieve convergence on the preceding increment. In this example the 10th
increment required 22 iterations to obtain convergence. The time step between the 10th and 11th
increment was subsequently adjusted downward and convergence on the 11th increment was reduced to
nine iterations. A similar situation arose in the 16th increment.
Results Plots
Figure 13-1 shows the final deformed shape of the pipe section after 1 sec. of loading. Maximum total
strains of 6.0E-2 inches develop in rigid body contact areas. Slightly higher total strains are evident on
the lower pipe section in this region due to the difference in radius of the external rigid body structures.
Plasticity has occurred over most of the model as shown in Figure 13-2. Maximum stresses reaching
4.25E+4 psi occur as expected in the contact region. Also evident from this figure are high stresses
equivalent to those in the contact region occurring at the constrained boundary condition. This is a
consequence of the boundary condition. In a full-length pipe section we would not expect to see a stress
concentrated in this area.
Figure 13-1 Total Strains imposed on the Deformed Shape
Main Index
502
Figure 13-2 Deformed Shape and Stress Distributions
Main Index
503
CHAPTER 13
Problem Statement
This problem illustrates the nonlinear analysis of a trunk door rubber seal. The simulation highlights
several SOL 600 capabilities including hyperelastic material, large displacement, large strain, and
contact between rigid and deformable bodies.
This problem examines the behavior of a rubber seal under a closing trunk door. The rubber seal has an
outer diameter of 1.25 and a wall thickness of 0.125. It is modeled using plane strain elements with
hyperelastic material formulation. While the door is closing, the trunk door comes in contact with the
rubber seal and deforms it. The deformation of the seal needs to be examined to make sure it properly
seals the door when the door is closed.
Model Description
This model consists of a planar representation of the rubber seal and a curve representation of the door.
The rubber seal and door are initially located approximately 0.1 apart.
Main Index
504
Geometry
This three-dimensional problem is idealized as a plane strain problem. The rubber seal geometry is
represented by several surfaces. The trunk door is represented by several curves.
The surfaces representing the seal are meshed with MSC Nastran CQUD4 shell elements. The element
property is defined using the nonlinear hyperelastic plane strain property entry PLPLANE. All the seal
CQUAD4 elements are defined as a single deformable body using the BCBODY and BSURF entries.
The curves representing the trunk door are used to define a rigid contact body using the BCBODY entry.
The NURBS2D option is used to describe the rigid body geometry.
Material
The rubber seal material is defined using the Mooney Rivlin material model. The MSC Nastran
hyperelastic material property entry MATHP is used with two material constant terms: A10=80 and
A01=20.
Nodes along the bottom edge of the seal are fixed. A displacement of (-0.1, -0.7, 0.) is specified on the
rigid body to control the motion of the rigid body.
A nonlinear static analysis is performed to determine the seal deformations that result from contact with
the rigid trunk door. The rigid body movement and material stiffness specified for this problem require
that large displacement effects be included (PARAM,LGDISP,1).
The NLPARM entry is used to specify the nonlinear analysis iteration strategy. 10 uniform time
increments are used to solve this problem. The Full Newton-Raphson method is specified.
Output requests are made for stress and strain using the MARCOUT entry. These results are included in
the t16 output file.
Solving the Problem
The rubber seal problem is designed to be constructed and setup using Patran and analyzed using MSC
Nastran SOL 600. First, the geometry is created in Patran by running a session file. Next the seal
geometry is meshed in Patran to generate shell elements. Then property/loads/BC assignments are made
in Patran. A MSC Nastan Bulk Data file (bdf) is exported and then run with MSC Nastran. Analysis
results can be accessed in text format or viewed from inside Patran.
rubber_seal.ses - Patran session file containing commands to build the rubber seal and trunk door
geometry.
Main Index
505
CHAPTER 13
Step-by-step instructions for creating and running the analysis on the rubber door seal model can be
accessed by linking to the Rubber Door Seal Modeling Instructions file below. Once you are done
creating the model and running the SOL 600 analysis, proceed by accessing the results file to generate
visual displays of the analysis results.
Click here for Rubber Door Seal Modeling Instructions
Main Index
506
Large Displacement
Hyperelastic Material Entries
Contact Definition
Main Index
507
CHAPTER 13
Results Files
The .sts file shown below reports on the status of the run. Using the fixed load incrementation algorithm,
the job was completed in 10 equal time increments
.
Results Plots
The plot below shows the final deformation and strain results.
Main Index
508
Main Index
509
CHAPTER 13
Brake Forming
Problem Statement
This problem illustrates the nonlinear analysis of a flat steel plate being formed into an angled bracket.
A cylindrical punch is used to bend the plate by pushing it into a die, then retracting away. This forming
process is commonly known as brake forming.
This simulation highlights several SOL 600 capabilities including multiple load steps, material plasticity,
large displacement, large strain, and contact between rigid and deformable bodies.
This problem examines the behavior of a flat steel plate undergoing metal forming. The plate is 1.8 wide
and 0.1 thick. The punch has a 2.0 diameter. The plate is modeled using plane strain elements. Since
the plate will be deformed beyond its material yield point, an elastic-plastic material model will be used
to simulate the material yielding behavior. The forming process consists of two steps. In the first step,
the punch pushes the plate into the die, causing it to deform plastically. In the second step, the punch is
retracted away from the plate.
Model Description
This model consists of a planar representation of the plate and curve representations of the punch and die.
Geometry
This three-dimensional problem is idealized as a plane strain problem. The plate is represented by a
surface. The punch is represented by a circular curve. The die is represented by a composite curve.
Main Index
Brake Forming
510
The surface representing the plate is meshed with MSC Nastran CQUAD4 shell elements. The element
property is defined using the PSHELL entry with MID2 set to -1 to specify the plane strain option. All
the plate CQUAD4 elements are defined as a single deformable body using the BCBODY and BSURF
entries.
The circular curve representing the punch is used to define a rigid contact body using the BCBODY entry.
The composite curve representing the die table is used to define a second rigid contact body using the
BCBODY entry. The NURBS2D option is used to describe the geometry for both rigid bodies.
Material
The plate is made of steel and modeled as an elastic-plastic material using the MAT1 and MATEP entries.
The linear elastic behavior model is effective up to a yield stress of 50000 psi. In this linear range the
stress-strain relationship is defined using an elastic modulus of 30E+6 and a poisson ratio of 0.3. The
plastic stress-strain relationship is defined by 7 pairs of stress-strain values using the TABLES1 entry.
The nodes along the centerline of plate are fixed in the lateral direction to prevent the plate from drifting
sideways. A one-G gravitational acceleration is applied to the plate to hold the plate against the die table.
The die table rigid body is held stationary. An enforced vertical displacement of -0.3 is applied to the
control node of the punch rigid body during the first load step. In the second load step, an enforced
vertical displacement of zero is applied to the same control node to return the punch to its initial position.
A nonlinear static analysis is performed to determine the steel plate deformations and stresses that result
from the brake forming process. The rigid body movement and material stiffness specified for this
problem require that large displacement effects be included (PARAM,LGDISP,1).
The adaptive load increment option is used with an initial time size of 0.01. Output requests are made for
stress and strain using the MARCOUT entry. These results are included in the t16 output file.
Solving the Problem
The brake forming problem is designed to be constructed and setup using Patran and analyzed using MSC
Nastran SOL 600. First, an IGES geometry file is imported into Patran. Next the plate geometry is
meshed in Patran to generate shell elements. Then property/loads/BC assignments are made in Patran. A
MSC.Nastan Bulk Data file (bdf) is exported and then run with MSC Nastran. Analysis results can be
accessed in text format or viewed from inside Patran.
brake_forming_s600.igs - IGES file containing plate, punch, and die geometry.
Main Index
511
CHAPTER 13
Step-by-step instructions for creating and running the analysis on the brake forming model can be
accessed by linking to the Brake Forming Modeling Instructions file below. Once you are done creating
the model and running the SOL 600 analysis, proceed by accessing the results file to generate visual
displays of the analysis results.
Click here for Brake Forming Modeling Instructions
Main Index
Brake Forming
512
Defining Subcases for Multiple Load Steps
Large Displacement
Plasticity
Contact
Main Index
513
CHAPTER 13
Results Plots
The plot below shows the analysis results at the end of the forming operation.
Main Index
Panel Buckling
514
Panel Buckling
Problem Statement
This problem illustrates the nonlinear post-buckling analysis of a curved panel. This simulation
highlights several SOL 600 capabilities including large displacement, material plasticity, and contact
between multiple deformable bodies.
Panels constructed from thin sheets reinforced with stiffeners are commonly used in many industries.
In order to keep these panels light, the thin sheet (skin) is often designed to be thin and allowed to
buckle elastically at relatively low levels of compressive loading. Once the skin buckles, the
compressive load distribution changes in the panel, and any additional load is carried mostly by the
stiffeners. The final failure load is reached when the overall panel fails due to a combination of material
yielding and instability.
MSC Nastran SOL 600 provides the capabilities required to simulate this panel post-buckling behavior.
Model Description
The model consists of a stiffened panel approximately 14 by 22. The skin is constructed from
aluminum and has a slight curvature. A longitudinal Z stiffener is attached to the skin by a single row of
rivets. The stiffener has a joggle in it, and a doubler is used to fill the gap between the stiffener and the
skin. Two additional longitudinal doublers are attached to the outside edges of the skin.
This model was originally constructed in metric units and was converted to English units. As a result of
the conversion, some of the dimensions are rounded off.
Main Index
515
CHAPTER 13
The skin, stiffener, and doublers are all modeled as shell elements located at the mid-surface of these
components. The gap between two components is equal to half the thickness of one component plus half
the thickness of another component. These components are allowed to contact each other.
The skin, stiffener, and doublers are modeled using CQUAD4 elements. The element properties are
defined using PSHELL entries.
The rivets are modeled using CBAR elements. The element property is defined using the PBAR entry.
The three doublers are modeled as three deformable contact bodies. The stiffener lower flange is defined
as a deformable contact body. The skin is in contact with several components. Each contact area within
the skin is defined as a deformable contact body.
An RBE2 rigid body element is used to connect all the nodes on one end of the panel to a single node.
This node is used to apply the panel loading.
Material
The skin and doublers are made of aluminum alloy 2024 which is modeled as an elastic-plastic material
using MAT1 and MATEP entries. The stiffener is made of aluminum alloy 7349 and is also modeled as
an elastic-plastic material using MAT1 and MATEP entries. The plastic stress-strain relationships are
defined by pairs of stress-strain values using TABLES1 entries.
All the nodes on one end of the panel are fixed in all six degrees of freedom. At the other end of the panel,
an RBE2 rigid body element connects the nodes to a single node, and an enforced displacement of 0.28
in the longitudinal direction is applied to this node.
The longitudinal edges of the panel are fixed in the lateral directions but are free to slide in the
longitudinal direction.
A nonlinear static analysis is performed to determine the capability of the panel to support a compressive
load. PARAM,LGDISP,1 is specified to activate the large displacement capability.
The NLPARM and NLSTRAT entries are used to specify the nonlinear analysis iteration strategy. 40
fixed time increments are specified for this problem. Output requests are made for stress and strain using
the MARCOUT entry. These results are included in the t16 output file.
Solving the Problem
The panel post-buckling problem is designed to be constructed and setup using Patran and analyzed
using MSC Nastran SOL 600. A Patran database is provided which contains the complete finite element
Main Index
Panel Buckling
516
model. A MSC.Nastan Bulk Data file (bdf) is exported and then run with MSC Nastran. Analysis results
can be accessed in text format or viewed from inside Patran.
stiffened_panel.db - Patran database containing the panel finite element model.
Step-by-step instructions for creating and running the analysis on the panel buckling model can be
accessed by linking to the Panel Buckling Modeling Instructions file below. Once you are done creating
the model and running the SOL 600 analysis, proceed by accessing the results file to generate visual
displays of the analysis results.
Click here for Panel Buckling Modeling Instructions
Main Index
517
CHAPTER 13
Plasticity
Contact
Large Displacement
Main Index
Panel Buckling
518
Results Plots
The plot below shows the final deformation of the panel.
The plot below shows a graph of the total longitudinal reaction force vs. time increments.
Main Index
MSC.Fatigue Quick Start Guide
I ndex
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear SOL 600 Users Guide
A
adaptive load incrementation 68
analysis
eigenvalue 122
free vibration 125
linear 88
nonlinear 88, 90
post-buckling 115
static 114
types 112, 168
defining in MSC.Patran 170
analysis procedures 57, 83, 168
linear and nonlinear 88
static 45, 114
anisotropic materials 272
applying constraints
single degrees-of-freedom 48
arc-length incrementation 70
Arruda-Boyce model 278
AUTO 68
AUTO INCREMENT 70
AUTOSPC 22
axisymmetric elements 414
B
basic load incrementation 68
bifurcation approach 118
body approach 116
subcase parameters 190
boundary conditions 244
nonlinear 111
treatment of 106
brake squeal 150, 151, 153
BRKSQL 150
buckling analysis 85, 117
Bulk Data
entries 19
file 16
Bulk Data Entries
EIGC 23
MDMIOUT 149
MESUPER 149
Buyukozturk criterion 317
C
Case Control Commands 18
CASI 58, 60
Cauchy Stress 210
CBAR 159
CELAS2 159
CHEXA 159
combined hardening 320
composite 102, 157, 163, 217, 264, 313,
315, 344, 349, 350, 370, 371, 373, 411,
485, 509, 510
conditioning number 59
CONROD 159
constant dilatation 406
constitutive material models 265
constraints 48
multi-point 48, 230
single point 48
I
I
Main Index

520
contact 244, 463
automatic penetration checking 431
beams 437
constraints 434
controlling 467
corner conditions 433
deformable 463
detection 424
dynamic impact 428, 449
glue model 446
neighbor relations 427
parameters 467
penetration 468
rigid 464
separation 433, 436
shell 426, 437
tolerance 432
contact bodies 421, 447
deformable surfaces 447
movement 476
rigid surface
rigid surfaces 447, 449
3D 452
circular arc 450
line segment 449
spline 451
slideline
contact table 472
convergence
controls 78, 124
coordinate systems 156
CPENTA 159
CQUAD4 159
creep 107, 115, 136, 363
implicit formulation 367
Crisfield method 75
CTETRA 159
CTRIA3 159
D
damping 135
debugging 197
in MSC.Patran 206
deformable surfaces 447
degrees-of-freedom 158
direct linear transient 168
DMIG 23, 24, 126, 127, 194
domain decomposition 140
ductile metals 354
E
eigenvalue
analysis 122
buckling prediction 117
extraction 119
eigenvector
strain energy 121
elasticity 103
elastomers 273, 356
element strain energy 39
Main Index
521 INDEX
elements
3D solid
axisymmetric 414
bush
damper
gap 409
line 410
mass
membrane 411
overriding MSC.Nastran selections 405
panel 411
plane strain 414
selection 404
shell 411
solid 413
spring
types 402
Executive Control Statements 18
SOL 600 210
existing models 20
experimental data fitting 381
external superelements 149
F
failure models 344
Hill criterion 346
Hoffman criterion 347
maximum strain 345
maximum stress 344
Tsai-Wu criterion 348
files
Bulk Data 16
message 40
print 40
results 40
fixed load incrementation 68
flow rules 322
foam model 281
parameters 292
free vibration analysis 125
friction modeling 438
G
Gent model 280
geometric nonlinearity 53, 93
global element controls 406
glue model, friction 446
GPFORCE 37, 39
grid point force 37, 38, 39
Gurson 313, 354, 355
H
hereditary integral model 308
Hills failure criterion 346
Hills yield function 315
Hoffman failure criterion 347
Houbolt operator 129, 132
hourglassing 404
hyperelastic damage models 354
hyperelastic materials 273
hyperelastic properties
least squares fit 296
parameters 308
hypoelastic materials 273
I
IFP (Input File Processing) Checking 16
incompressible materials 103
inertia relief 145
initial conditions 134, 260
INREL 145, 146
inverse power sweep 122
Main Index

522
isotropic hardening 318
isotropic materials 269
iteration methods 63
Newton-Raphson 63
secant 66
strain correction 65
iterations 55
J
Jamus-Green-Simpson model 277, 298
K
Kachanov factor 358
Kelvin-Voigt model 307
kinematic hardening 320
L
Lagrange multipliers 430
Lagrangian formulation 93
total 95, 275
updated 97, 276
nonlinear elasticity 281
Lancozs 123
LGDISP 100, 111, 322, 338, 496, 504, 510,
515
line elements 410
linear analysis 88
linear elastic materials 268
load increments 54, 84
AUTO 68
AUTO INCREMENT 70
NLAUTO 68
size 68
loads and boundary conditions 242, 244
acceleration 255
displacement 247
distributed loads 256
force 248
inertial loads 254
initial displacement 260
initial velocity
pressure 249
temperature 251
total loads 258
velocity 255
M
material
damping 379
instabilities 107
nonlinearity 53, 102
Main Index
523 INDEX
materials
2d anisotropic
failure 344
2d orthotropic
failure 344
anisotropic 272
composite 370
ductile metals 354
elastomers 274, 356
gasket 373
geological 330
hyperelastic 273, 282
hypoelastic 273
inelastic
isotropic 269
plastic 340
linear elastic 268
metals 327
Mohr-Coulomb 315
nonlinear elastic 273
orthotropic 270
viscoelastic
MATF 199, 351
MATG 377, 486, 490
MATHE 264, 391
MATTVE 109, 310
maximum strain criterion 345
maximum stress criterion 344
membrane elements 411
mesh
severe distortion 106
message files 40
metal plasticity 313
METHOD 185
modal
stresses and reactions 124
modal neutral files (MNF) 149
mode shape 120
modified Drucker-Prager model
matching plane strain response 334
matching triaxial test response 332
Mohr-Coulomb
linear material 316
parabolic material 316
parameters 332
Mooney-Rivlin model 277, 298
MSC.Adams 149
MSC.Marc 23, 126
Mullins effect 357
multi-point constraints (MPCs) 230
explicit 230
RBAR 234
RBE1 235
RBE2 236
RBE3 237
rigid 232
RROD 238
RTRPLT 239
sliding surface 233
N
Narayanaswamy model 109, 309
nastran command 192
natural frequency 120
nearly incompressible materials 106
neighbor relations 427
Neo-Hookean 278
Newmark beta method
solution algorithm 131
Newmark-beta operator 129, 130
Newton-Raphson
full 63
modified 64
NLAUTO 68
Main Index

524
NLSTRAT 60
nodes 158
nonlinear analysis 88, 90
equation solution 55
geometric nonlinearity 53
guidelines 83
material nonlinearity 53
numerical methods 58
normal modes analysis 120
numerical methods 58
direct 58
NURB 422
O
Oak Ridge National Laboratory criterion 317,
366
Ogden model 278
operator
Houbolt 129
Newmark-beta 129
single step Houbolt 129
orthotropic materials 270
output requests 212
form 212
OUTR 225
P
panel elements 411
parallel processing 140, 142
PARAM
NOELOF 39
NOELOP 39
XFLAG 37
penalty
methods 431
penetration 468
perfectly plastic 326
pin flags 417
plane strain elements 414
plasticity 105
post-buckling 115
preconditioners 59
preconditioners, iterative solvers 59
prestressed normal mode 24
print files 40
progressive composite failure 350
R
rate-dependent yield 325
RBE2 159
restarts 144
results
element 216
files 40
MSC.Marc quantities 220
MSC.Nastran quantities 225
nodal 214
postprocessing with MSC.Patran 41
types 220
rigid contact surfaces 447
Riks-Ramm method 75, 76
S
secant method 66
shell
contact 426
elements 411
single step
Houbolt operator 129, 133
singularity ratio 81
SOL 600 166
beam 20
CONTINUE 20
dmap 20
PATH keyword 24
procedure 57
solid elements 413
solution
parameters 175
procedures 61
Main Index
525 INDEX
solution types 166
bifurcation buckling 169
creep 169
linear static 168
nonlinear static 168
nonlinear transient dynamic 169
viscoelastic (time domain) 169
SPC1 247
SPCD 247
static analysis 114
stick-slip model, friction 443
storage methods 60
strain correction method 65
strain energy 36
stress-strain
curves 327
subcases 54, 178
parameters 181
T
t16 file 220
Temperature-Dependent Stress Strain Curves
337
Thermo-Rheologically Simple material 308
TIC 260
time dependent
plasticity-creep
creep material law 363
time step 134
transient dynamic analysis 128
translation parameters 172
Tsai-Wu failure criterion 348
V
viscoelastic material
anisotropic 304
incompressible isotropic 304
isotropic 302
Thermo-Rheologically Simple 308
viscoelasticity 109, 115
viscoplasticity 109, 115, 367
explicit formulation 367
explicit method 110
implicit method 110
von Mises 313, 319
W
work hardening
combined 320
kinematic 320
rules 318
slope 328
X
xdb files 225
Main Index

526
Main Index

MSC Nastran 2012 Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User's Guide

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

MSC Nastran 2012 Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User's Guide

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

MSC Nastran 2012

Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600)

MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600)

How SOL 600 Solves Nonlinear Problems

This Users Guide

The MSC Nastran Bulk Data File

Linear Static Analysis Procedure

Differences Between Linear and Nonlinear Analysis

Adding Nonlinear Effects

Numerical Methods in Solving Equations

Load Increment Size

Guidelines for Analysis Methods

Linear and Nonlinear Analysis

Nonlinear Effects and Formulations

Overview of Analysis Types

Transient Dynamic Analysis

Inertia Relief with Auto-Support

Superelements and Modal Neutral Files

User Subroutine Support

Execution Procedure for MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear from the

Monitoring the Analysis

Debugging the Analysis

SOL 600 Results Quantities

MSC Nastran Results Quantities

Loads and Boundary Conditions

Failure and Damage Models

Experimental Data Fitting

Global Element Controls

Mass Elements, Springs, Dampers, and Connector Elements

Membranes, Panels, and Shells

Beam/Bar and Shell Offsets

Defining Contact Bodies

Selecting and Controlling Contact Behavior

Heat Transfer and Thermal Contact

Linear Coulomb Model

Engine Gasket Under Bolt Preload

Elastic-Plastic Collapse of a Cylindrical Pipe under External Rigid

Rubber Door Seal - Performance Door Closing

Вам также может понравиться